099-1.jpg

current problems

S. MENSHIKOV

__TITLE__ The Economic Cycle:
Postwar Developments
__TEXTFILE_BORN__ 2009-06-04T13:59:52-0700 __TRANSMARKUP__ "Y. Sverdlov"

Progress Publishers Moscow

Translated from the Russian by Leo Lempert

Contents

C. MEHLfflHKOB

8KOHOMH1ECKHK UHKJI.

HOBblE HBJIEHHH

B aKOHOMMECKOM PA3BHTHH

KAHHTAJIH3MA

Ha

First printing 1975

Page

Chapter 1. THE BACKGROUND OF THE SUBJECT ...

7

1.1. The Theory of the Cycle and Crises in Marxist Political Economy......................

7

1.2. A Keen Polemical Problem..............

20

1.3. The Contemporary Cycle and the Future of the Capitalist System.......................

26

Chapter 2. POSTWAR CYCLES .............

33

2.1. United States ...................

37

2.2. Western Europe ..................

44

2.3. Japan.......................

55

Conclusions.......................

59

Chapter 3. STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET ....

63

3.1. Has the World Cycle Vanished? ..........

65

3.2. Money Crises....................

77

3.3. Unevenness and Asynchronism............

95

3.4. The Place of Developing Countries in the World Cycle

109

Chapter 4. CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

114

4.1. Corporations, Competition, Cycle...........

115

4.1.a. Overproduction of Commodity Capital........

117

4.1.b. Overproduction of Productive Capital.......

122

4.I.e. Overproduction of Money Capital..........

131

4.2. The Activity of the State: the Role of Militarisation and Non-Military Activity ...............

137

4.3. [The Role of State Regulation and Its Limits .....

151

4.3.a. Automatic Regulators...............

151

4.3.b. Countercyclical Regulation.............

158

4.3.c. State Planning, Capitalist Style ..........

179

Chapter 5. TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN

REPRODUCTION...................

184

5.1. Old and New Sectors................

189

«IIporpecc», 1975

Translation into English. Progress Publishers 1975

Printed in the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics

10703---974 M 014(01)---75~^^79^^~^^75^^

CONTENTS

5.2. The Investment Process and the Duration of Cycles .

196

5.3. Technological Progress and Private Consumption ....

209

Chapter 6. INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION......

219

6.1. The Class Struggle and Reproduction^^1^^.........

220

6.2. Causes of Present-Day Inflation............

231

6.3. How the State Promotes the Rise of Crises.......

265

Chapter 7. ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC

CYCLES.......................

270

7.1. Theoretical Models of the Cycle...........

272

7.1.a. The Single-Product Model...............

272

7.1.b. The Dynamic Properties of the Single-Product Model

282

7.I.e. Internal Fluctuations of the Cycle Model......

293

7.1.d. The Correlation of Internal Fluctuations and External

Conditions. The Determinate and Stochastic Parts of the

Cycle Mechanism..................

302

7.I.e. Comments on, Other Authors' Models........

313

7.1.L The Behaviour of Cycle Models with the Example of the

USA .......................

317

7.1.g. Two-Sector and Multi-Branch Models........

327

7.2. The Effect of the State Market............

333

7.3. The Influence of Foreign Trade...........

350

7.4. Price-Formation Models ..............

361

7.5. The Effect of Scientific and Technological Progress and Structural Changes.................

370

Conclusion .......................

388

CHAPTER 1

THE BACKGROUND OF THE SUBJECT

1.1. THE THEORY OF THE CYCLE AND CRISES IN MARXIST POLITICAL ECONOMY

The subject of the present monograph is cyclical reproduction under the conditions of the contemporary capitalist economy. Regardless of the modification of the cyclical movement in recent decades, the capitalist economy is still developing in bursts and regularly passes through periods of advance and decline in rates of growth and of drops in the volume of production.

The purpose of the theory of the economic cycle is to explain the mechanism of the regular, periodic crises of general overproduction which occur only in conditions of a developed capitalist economy. The possibility and inevitability of crises under capitalism is the initial postulate in the Marxist theory of the cycle and crises.

Marx perceived the general, abstract possibility of crises of overproduction in the system of the simple private commodity economy. In such an economy every producer works separately from the others but intends his output for sale on the market. By selling the commodities he created, the producer buys other commodities he requires for productive and personal consumption. The purchase-sale act includes two phases: C-M* (sale) and M-C (purchase), which Marx regards as the consecutive metamorphoses of the commodity. In contrast to the direct exchange of products which took place in the traditional, subsistence economy, market

* C denotes commodity and M denotes money.

S. MENSHIKOV

THE BACKGROUND OP THE SUBJECT

exchange is not a single act, and it is capable of stopping the entire process.

The first phase of G-M for one commodity is the second phase in the metamorphosis of another producer's commodity. Similarly, the second phase of M-C is the first phase in the metamorphosis of the other commodity. Consequently, the C-M act can take place only if it coincides with the M-C act of another commodity, in other words, if there is a demand for it. Otherwise, the metamorphosis C-M of the first commodity does not take place and, consequently, the entire subsequent process is halted. Without selling his commodity the producer is unable to buy other commodities. The halt of the transformation of the first commodity stops the metamorphoses of other commodities which appear on the market independently, but are internally interconnected owing to their joint dependence on the market.

``To say that these two independent and antithetical acts have an intrinsic unity, are essentially one," Marx writes, "is the same as to say that this intrinsic oneness expresses itself in an external antithesis. If the interval in time between the two complementary phases of the complete metamorphosis of a commodity become too great, if the split between the sale and the purchase become too pronounced, the intimate connexion between them, their oneness, asserts itself by producing---a crisis.... These modes [of commodity exchange.---S.M-] therefore imply the possibility, and no more than the possibility, of crises. The conversion of this mere possibility into a reality is the result of a long series of relations, that, from our present standpoint of simple circulation, have as yet no existence.''^^1^^

Thus, the abstract possibility of a crisis of overproduction, according to Marx, appears only when developed market relations arise. Necessary requisites are the production of commodities for sale on the market and the external separation of commodity producers. These components, which are already present in the simple commodity economy based on the private property of the commodity producers, are preserved and further developed under capitalism.

Marx strongly criticised the vulgar economists of his time (for example, J.B. Say) who claimed that commodity circulation necessarily creates an equilibrium between purchases and sales because every sale is at the same time a purchase, and vice versa. The illusion of the obligatory nature of such equality stems from the static approach to the problem, an approach inherent in the works of vulgar economists both in those days and later. In contrast, Marx introduced a dynamic approach into the analysis of market relations, demonstrating that stopping the metamorphosis of one commodity at moment t leads not only to an analogous delay for some other commodity at moment t, but alsp (for other commodities) at moments t + 1, t + 2, and so on. It goes without saying that even in this case at every given moment as many commodities will be sold as are bought. However, such an obvious identity represents, according to Marx, a meaningless tautology which is used as a basis for attempts to prove that the seller always finds his buyer on the market. However, it is just as obvious that, at every given moment, as many goods are not sold as are not bought.

Market relations under simple commodity production are partly raised from their low stage as credit develops. A commodity producer, not finding at a given moment a buyer with cash on hand, defers payment, and sells his commodity on credit. He, in turn, buys the goods he needs also on deferred payment terms and thus gains the possibility to continue his production. Consequently, the existence of credit relations promotes market exchange, as it were, lubricates the mechanism of commodity circulation.

At the same time, credit relations lead to a further development of the possibility of a general overproduction crisis. The described mechanism operates smoothly only as long as credit obligations are met, i.e., money payments are made on debts which cannot be reciprocally redeemed. However, as soon as this mechanism is interrupted, there arises the danger of a chain reaction which upsets the functioning of the credit and, consequently, also of the market mechanism as a whole. When the date of payment arrives, the commodity producer is ready to sell his output for the sole purpose of receiving the cash he needs for redeeming his debt. His need may not coincide with the period when his

~^^1^^ K. Marx, Capital, Vol. I, Moscow, 1972, p. 115.

10

S. MENSHIKOV

THE BACKGROUND OF THE SUBJECT

11

buyers accumulate cash. Non-payment by one commodity producer entails non-payment by his creditors to their own creditors. Thus, the credit mechanism, expressing and intensifying the internal social connection between the externally independent producers, increases and extends the possibility of a crisis of overproduction. Moreover, a production and commercial crisis is supplemented by a money crisis. "Such a crisis," Marx wrote, "occurs only where the ever-- lengthening chain of payments, and an artificial system of settling them, has been fully developed.''^^1^^

The conversion of the possibility of general crises of overproduction into a reality is linked, according to Marx, with the development of capitalism. The inevitability of crises under capitalism stems from the basic contradiction of this socio-economic system---the contradiction between the social nature of production and the private capitalist form of appropriation of the results of production. Understanding of this contradiction is exceptionally important for grasping the Marxist theory of the economic cycle.

In contrast to earlier socio-economic systems, which rested on traditional, slowly changing methods of production, capitalism accelerates the development of the productive forces and raises the rates of scientific and technological progress. It is under capitalism that large-scale machinebased production appears for the first time, and the social division of labour rises to a higher level.

The earlier modes of production were based primarily on the individual labour of isolated producers or groups of producers. The application of large masses of labour in one place and for one purpose was more the exception than the rule. The capitalist manufacture and then the factory put an end to the isolation of the individual producers, gathered "under one roof" large masses of people, participants in one production collective. The production process in capitalist enterprises becomes social, above all in the sense of the division and co-operation of labour within enterprises.

Simultaneously, the social division of labour progresses. The former division of the economy into crop growing, animal husbandry and the crafts gives way to an ever more

intricate sectoral structure. As the productive forces progress, new sectors are ever branching out from the existing ones. Sectors and enterprises become increasingly specialised. As these processes develop the general connection and interdependence of various sectors and lines of production is intensified.

Small commodity producers worked primarily for local markets which were only weakly interconnected. Large, specialised capitalist enterprises began to work for a wide national market, breaking up local economic isolation, also making their way increasingly into foreign markets and turning them into genuine world markets. Increasingly larger numbers of people, formerly engaged in their personal husbandry, are drawn into large-scale capitalist production. The mobility of the population increases greatly and national and world labour markets are developed.

All this, in the understanding of Marx and Lenin, constitutes different aspects of the progressing capitalist socialisation of production. Every sector, every enterprise becomes, not formally, but in essence, a part of the one, wider process of social production.

Yet the basis of the capitalist economy, private ownership of the means of production, is fully preserved. By the nature of their production activity, enterprises become social, but they remain privately owned. Every one of them, particularly during the period of pre-monopoly capitalism, operates at its own risk. The internal connection of enterprises increased but their external isolation is preserved and even extended by competition.

Because of the isolation of producers, the process of commodity circulation and, consequently, of commodity production is inevitably upset and interrupted from time to time. If the dependence of the commodity producers on each other is small and the local markets are isolated, these disturbances cannot develop into general economic crises. General overproduction crises become inevitable only after a specific, sufficiently high level of production socialisation has been reached.

``When, during the regime of small, isolated enterprises," Lenin wrote, "work came to a standstill in any one of them, this affected only a few members of society, it did not cause

~^^1^^ K. Marx, Capital, Vol. I, p. 137.

12

S. MENSHIKOV

THE BACKGROUND OP THE SUBJECT

13

any general confusion.... But when work comes to a standstill in a large enterprise, one engaged in a highly specialised branch of industry and therefore working almost for the whole of society and, in its turn, dependent on the whole of society (for the sake of simplicity I take a case where socialisation has reached the culminating point), work is bound to come to a standstill in all the other enterprises of society.''^^1^^

The mechanism of the basic contradiction of capitalism as applied to the cycle is revealed clearly by comparing the Marxist theory of the realisation of the social product and the section of Capital dealing with the mechanism of the formation of average profit. The Marxist theory of realisation reveals the internal mechanism of reproduction in conditions of proportionality inherent in an economy at a high stage of production socialisation. The full realisation of the total social product is possible only if definite intersectoral and national economic proportions are observed. Examining the circulation of capital, Marx divides social production into two departments. He, for the first time, revealed the necessary and sufficient conditions for the full realisation of 'the product in both departments, specifically through mutual exchange. Chapter 7 of this book shows that these conditions, formulated by Marx and later developed by Lenin, with respect to extended reproduction in conditions of technological progress and changing organic composition of capital, also hold true for more intricate schemata (models) of social production which envisage division into a large number of different sectors and take into account the entire complex of their interconnections.

Thus, the proposition concerning the social nature of production becomes, in the given case, a general condition, according to which the production of any enterprise or sector, in every given period of time, can be completely realised only as a result of observing inter-sectoral and national economic proportions of social reproduction taken as a whole.^^2^^

With the full realisation of the social product, the economy is in a state of equilibrium. However, the model of Marx

~^^1^^ V. I. Lenin, Collected Works, Vol. 1, Moscow, 1972, pp. 176-77.

~^^2^^ The balances of inter-sectoral and inter-regional flows ( inputoutput tables), widely used by present-day economists, clearly show the Marxist schema of social reproduction to be correct.

and Lenin is dynamic. The ultimate point of realisation in every given period of time is the creation of the material conditions and funds for resuming and extending production in subsequent periods. If the creation of accumulation funds in every department and every sector of social production were to proceed in accordance with a single, centralised plan, providing for the strict observance of future national economic and inter-sectoral proportions, it would be possible to maintain a dynamic equilibrium. However, under capitalism, decisions^on the allocation of accumulation funds are made in a non-centralised way by every enterprise^ or^ group of enterprises independently of each other. Moreover, the accumulation process is subordinate to the laws for forming the general, average rate of profit.

Investment funds, all other conditions being equal, are channelled first of all into sectors and enterprises where the rate of profit is higher than average. The evening out of the rate of profit takes place gradually, through the inter-- sectoral flow of capital. Moreover, sooner or later correlations inevitably arise between the output of individual enterprises and sectors, which rule out the possibility of the complete realisation of the social product.

Consequently, the very mechanism of the inter-sectoral flow of capital, which reflects the private capitalist nature of the economy's organisation, upsets its proportionality and its equilibrium. "The existing proportion," Marx wrote, "must always be upset through the creation of surplus values

and the growth of the productive forces__Emergence of one

(sector of production) beyond the bounds of the given proportionality ejects from the bounds of this proportionality all sectors, and in unequal proportions.''^^1^^

The difference between the Marxist explanation and the position of authors who attribute to crises the upsetting of proportionality should be emphasised. According to Marx and Lenin, indications of disproportionality are insufficient. It is necessary to demonstrate the causes for the constant upsetting of proportionality under capitalism, to reveal the contradiction inherent in this system between the

~^^1^^ K. Marx, Grundrisse der Kritik der politischen Okonomie, Moscow, 1939, S. 317.

S. MENSHIKOV

•THE BACKGROUND OF THE SUBJECT

internal requirement of proportionality and external disturbances of it. This contradiction is regarded, dialectically, as the basis of the cyclical movement of the capitalist economy. This contradiction, which inevitably grows sharper, is periodically resolved in the form of a crisis of overproduction.

The contradiction between planned balanced organisation of production in individual enterprises and the anarchy of production on the scale of the economy as a whole is a derivative of this former contradiction. However, the capitalist economy is not absolutely chaotic. Within enterprises, work is organised according to a strict plan. This is an organic necessity for the production of surplus value and a requisite for its maximisation. The sharper the competition, the strpnger the desire of the capitalist to properly organise the production process within his enterprise, to extract the maximum from the advanced capital and labour.

The conditions for the production of surplus value in individual enterprises, however, do not coincide with the conditions for its realisation. The latter are determined by the proportions of social production which are imposed on an individual entrepreneur in the form of the laws of the market. Spontaneous market forces constantly compel entrepreneurs to adjust their initial plans. Even the development of the tendency towards capitalist planning and capitalist rationalisation in individual enterprises, in its turn, causes an inevitable increase in the anarchy of social production, if such a tendency runs counter to the concealed proportionality of social production.

With the transition to monopoly capitalism, planning extends to complexes of enterprises combined by monopolies. Attempts are made to plan and regulate capitalist production on a nationwide scale, with the help of the state. Modern forms of such regulation and its consequences are examined in greater detail in Chapter 4. Here we shall merely remark that they do not eliminate the contradictions of the capitalist economy.

One more derivative contradiction is that between labour and capital. The collective nature of labour leads to the formation of an organised working class, united by common interests. It is opposed by capital, as represented by indi-

vidual entrepreneurs, companies and the state. The main sphere of struggle between the working class and the capitalist class is the duration of the working day, working conditions, payment for labour, and so on. The results of this struggle directly affect such major economic indicators as the rate of surplus value, the correlation between the price and value of labour power and the share of the incomes of the working class in the national income.

The movement of these indicators exerts a decisive influence on the course of capitalist reproduction. In contrast to many economists of his time, who saw the cause of the poverty of the masses in "absolute overpopulation", Marx regarded the income of the working class as a function of the process of extended reproduction. "To put it mathematically: the rate of accumulation is the independent, not the dependent, variable; the rate of wages, the dependent, not the independent, variable," Marx wrote.^^1^^ If the volume of production is expanded at sufficient speed, the demand for labour rises and an increasingly large amount of living labour is drawn into production, the size of the relative surplus population is reduced and wages increase.

The price of labour continues to rise only so long as its growth does not hinder capital accumulation, i.e., as long as either the mass or the rate of surplus value grows. The limit for taking on additional labour for big enterprises sets in later than for small ones because the former, even at a lower rate of profit, are able to expand at faster rates.

If, however, the increase of wages begins to have a substantial effect on the amount and rate of profit received by the overwhelming majority of entrepreneurs, the growth rate of production decreases. "...On the other hand," Marx writes, "accumulation slackens in consequence of the rise in the price of labour, because the stimulus of gain is blunted. The rate of accumulation lessens; but with its lessening, the primary cause of that lessening vanishes, i.e., the disproportion between capital and exploitable labour-power. The mechanism of the process of capitalist production removes the very obstacles that it temporarily creates.''^^2^^

~^^1^^ K. Marx, Capital, Vol. I, p. 581.

~^^2^^ Ibid., pp. 580-81.

16

S. MENSHIKOV

THE BACKGROUND OF THE SUBJECT

17

Thus, the contradictory movement of wages and profit is a necessary element of capitalist reproduction. Capital strives to increase the rate of surplus value and to reduce the price of labour. At the same time, the size of wages depends directly on the speed of capital accumulation. A rise in wages expands the market for the output created by capitalist enterprises, eases the conditions for the realisation of surplus value. At the same time, wages grow at the expense of profit and, under specific conditions, this also leads to its decline and to a consequent deterioration of the conditions for capital accumulation. These contradictions are resolved in periodic ebbs and flows of capitalist production.

Examining this question, Marx draws the following conclusion: "The rise of wages, therefore, is confined within limits that not only leave intact the foundations of the capitalistic system, but also secure its reproduction on a progressive scale. The law of capitalistic accumulation, metamorphosed by economists into pretended law of Nature, in reality merely states that the very nature of accumulation excludes every diminution in the degree of exploitation of labour, and every rise in the price of labour, which could seriously imperil the continual reproduction, on an ever enlarging scale, of the capitalistic relation.''^^1^^

To counteract the declining rate of profit, capitalists turn to new, more efficient methods of production and economise on raw materials and wages. Capital also depreciates periodically, owing to obsolescence and the surplus of capital as compared with social needs. On the other hand, the wide distribution of new methods of production raises the organic composition of capital and reduces the rate of profit. Attempts to make up for the decline in the profit rate, by increasing the mass of profit, exacerbates commodity overproduction. Alongside factors which draw labour power into production in proportion to the speed of capital accumulation, forces operate which eject it from production and restrict its flow back and, consequently, create a large relative surplus population, in other words, unemployment.

``These different influences," Marx writes, "may at one time operate predominantly side by side in space^ and at another

succeed each other in time. From time to time the conflict of antagonistic agencies finds vent in crises. The crises are always but momentary and forcible solutions of the existing contradictions, they are violent^ eruptions which for a time restore the disturbed equilibrium.''^^1^^

Consequently, according to Marx, cycles and crises are forms of the movement of capitalist reproduction in which the limit to the A self-growth of the value of capital, the main aim of capitalist production, is periodically eliminated. The main contradiction of capitalism is displayed, in particular, in the conflict between the tendency of capital towards unrestricted expansion and the limited possibilities for the growth of consumption and the effective demand.

Explanation of crises in terms of under-consumption is wrong. The low standard of living and the insufficient consumption of the masses are inherent not only in capitalism, but even, to a greater extent, in the modes of production preceding it, in which, however, crises of general overproduction were impossible. Only under capitalism has systematic extended reproduction as the dominant mode become possible, while the prevalence of simple reproduction as opposed to the self-growth of capital becomes impossible. "Under all the old economic systems," Lenin wrote, " production was every time resumed in the same form and on the same scale as previously; under the capitalist system, however, this resumption in the same form becomes impossible, and unlimited expansion, perpetual progress, becomes the law of production.''^^2^^

The growth of personal consumption proceeds more or less uniformly at an average rate somewhat exceeding that of the population increase. In different countries and in different periods, the rate of this growth differs but the fluctuations themselves are relatively small. If capitalist production was to follow strictly the growth of the demand for consumer goods, its tendency towards unlimited expansion would be too tightly restricted. In reality, the expansion of social production may, within certain bounds, take place independently of the growth of personal consumption--- owing to the swifter and more dynamic increase in the output

x K. Marx, Capital, Vol. Ill, Moscow, 1971, p. 249.

~^^2^^ V. I, Lenin, Collected Works, Vol. 2, Moscow, 1963, p. 164.

2-0593

~^^1^^ K. Marx, Capital, Vol. I, p. 582.

g. MENSBiKOV

THE BACKGROUND OP THE SUBJECT

of means of production. Such relatively independent and swift growth is possible owing to the large-scale replacement of the old means of production by new, the building of new enterprises using the latest technology, the introduction of industrial methods into new spheres of social production.

The independence of the increase in the output of means of production is relative, because, ultimately, they are used for the manufacture of consumer goods. After the specific demand, connected with the periodic replacement of obsolete by new equipment, the building of new enterprises and the spread of industrial methods to new spheres is exhausted or its growth slackens, the output of means of production inevitably declines and returns to a level determined directly by the needs of the production of consumer goods.

The replacement of obsolete means of production by new and the building of new enterprises proceeds unevenly under capitalism. Every new crisis, by forcibly restoring the equilibrium upset previously, opens up possibilities for a new round of extensive capital investment. This occurs only when the rate of profit after the latest crisis returns to the level which makes extensive accumulation of capital possible. A resumption of capital accumulation at an accelerated pace, in its turn, becomes the material basis for the expansion of social production, first of all the output of the means of production and then of consumer goods, too.

In contrast to circulating capital, fixed capital carries over its value in parts throughout the entire period of its use. Consequently, when fixed capital after the most recent crisis is renovated in accordance with the social needs, the process of production, including extended production, may, for a certain time, continue even under a reduced demand for major producer goods. A decrease in investment is linked directly with the drop in the profit rate, with the revealed surplus of accumulated productive capital. A cut in investment sooner or later rebounds on production as a whole, slowing down the growth of demand and leading to another general crisis of overproduction.

During a crisis, fixed capital is under-employed. By the time the crisis is completed, the surplus capacity could be utilised for another growth of production. However, part of the main means of production previously installed has

been worn out and part has become obsolescent, owing to the development of new technology. The crisis intensifies the obsolescence of fixed capital owing to the general decline of commodity prices and dictates the large-scale transition to the use of new means of production.

Marx has discovered in the movement of fixed capital the material basis for the periodic nature of crises,^^1^^ which was formulated precisely in a corresponding law in the second volume of Capital. "As the magnitude of the value and the durability of applied fixed capital develop with the development of the capitalist mode of production," Marx wrote, "the lifetime of industry and of industrial capital lengthens in each particular field of investment to a period of many years, say, of ten years on an average. Whereas the development of fixed capital extends the length of this life on the one hand it is shortened on the other by the continuous revolution in the means of production, which likewise incessantly gains momentum with the development of the capitalist mode of production. This involves a change in the means of production and the necessity of their constant replacement, on account of moral depreciation, long before they expire physically. One may assume that in the essential branches of modern industry this life-cycle now averages ten years. However we are not concerned here with the exact figure. This much is evident: the cycle of interconnected turnovers embracing a number of years, in which capital is held fast by its fixed constituent part, furnishes a material basis for the periodic crises. During this cycle business undergoes successive periods of depression, medium activity, precipitancy, crisis. True, periods in which capital is invested differ greatly and far from coincide in time. But a crisis always forms the starting-point of large new investments. Therefore, from the point of view of society as a whole, more or less, a new material basis for the next turnover cycle,"2 according to Marx, thus arises.

~^^1^^ Clement Juglar, a contemporary of Marx, established statistically the fact that crises recur every eight to ten years, but was unable to give a clear-cut explanation of this and reduced its causes primarily to credit and money factors. G. Juglar, Des crises commerciales et de leur retour perlodique en France, Deuxieme edition, Paris, 1889.

~^^2^^ K. Marx, Capital, Vol. II, Moscow, 1967, pp. 188-89.

2*

s.

THE BACKGROUND OP THE SUBJECT

21

The history of cycles and crises has provided admirable corroboration of Marx's hypothesis about the material basis of the cyclical movement.

Marx demonstrated that crises are a display of the overproduction of capital in general and not only of commodity capital, i.e., of commodities. Overproduction of capital is identical to its overaccumulation. Crises resolve the contradiction between the accumulated capital and the possibilities for its profitable application. This happens in the form of the direct depreciation of capital owing to a general drop of prices and also "through the withdrawal or even the destruction of more or less capital. This would extend partly to the material substance of capital, i.e., a part of the means of production, of fixed and circulating capital, would not operate, not act as capital; some operating establishments would then be Brought to a standstill.''^^1^^

This part of the Marxist theory of the cycle also proved to be prophetic, for, as we shall subsequently see, even a reduction in the size of commodity overproduction does not eliminate the more general attribute of crises---the overaccumulation of capital.

; This brief survey of the Marxist theory of crises and cycles does not claim to be a full exposition. Its purpose is to outline the major components of the cycle mechanism in the Marxist understanding. Different aspects of this theory will be specified and outlined in greater detail when examining the problems of the contemporary cycle.

reproduction began in the Soviet Union in the 1920s. These studies were associated, above all, with the activity of the Institute of the World Economy and World Politics, in particular with the name of Academician Y. S. Varga, who was the founder of the institute and headed it for many years. He published a quarterly analysis of the capitalist economy and made forecasts about the course of the cycle in the principal capitalist countries. These forecasts were of practical significance.

Varga took the works of the classics of Marxism as his foundation and creatively applied their theory. His forecasts of economic activity and the course of the cycle in the 1920s and the 1930s proved, as a rule, to be correct. From observations of the cycle, Varga and his colleagues in the institute made new theoretical generalisations; some of them have become an organic part of the Marxist theory of the cycle.^^1^^

Thus, the deepest and longest economic crisis in the history of capitalism (1929-1933) was predicted theoretically. A number of its specific features were revealed before the crisis became a reality. When the crisis began, Varga was able, on the whole, to predict correctly its course in the main capitalist countries and to show the connection between the crisis of overproduction and the general crisis of capitalism.

In 1932-1933 Varga was among the few who asserted that the crisis had passed its lowest point and a period of recovery had begun. He also predicted correctly the general course of the cycle in the United States up to the beginning of the next crisis in 1937, formulating the well-known theoretical proposition about depressions of a special kind. Varga's assumption that the depression would be drawn-out and the period of recovery short-lived and that the new crisis would not be preceded by the usual cyclical advance, was confirmed in the subsequent period.

In spite of the fact that not all the forecasts of Varga and his associates were correct, the works of the Institute of the

1.2. A KEEN POLEMICAL PROBLEM

;.i The classics of Marxism---Marx, Engels and Lenin---paid great attention to specific analyses of individual crises and cycles. Subsequently, y this facilitated considerably the further development of the scientific history of the cycle and crises by Marxist scientist?.

An extensive concrete application of the Marxist theory of the cycle to analysis of the current course of capitalist

K. Marx, Capital, Vol. Ill, pp. 253-54.

~^^1^^ See Y. S. Varga, Sovremenny kapitalizm i ekonomicheskiye krizlsy (Contemporary Capitalism and Economic Crises), Moscow, 1963,

22

S. MENSHIKOV

THE BACKGROUND OF THE SUBJECT

23

World Economy and World Politics merit a high evaluation. This offered one more confirmation of the accuracy and vitality of Marxist forecasts of economic activity, of their considerably higher level as compared with those of bourgeois economists. Bourgeois forecasting was unable to predict either the crisis of 1929-1933 or the specific character of the subsequent cycle. As for quantitative methods, which at that time began to be employed for the first time in the West in analysing the economic cycle, the results of their practical application were quite modest.

By generalising the experience of the 1920s and the 1930s, Marxists drew important theoretical conclusions about the specific features of cyclical movement in conditions of the first stage of capitalism's general crisis which set in after the Great Octobjer Revolution and the formation of the first socialist state in the world.

One of these conclusions was the proposition about a depression of a special kind. This proposition was put forward for the first time with respect to the crisis of 1929- 1933. A depression of a special kind denotes a new phase of the cycle, which follows an acute, destructive crisis, lasts for a long time and leads not to a new advance but, at best, to a brief recovery in economic activity.

The changeover from the classical four-phase to a new, three-phase cycle was named the deformation of the cycle. The main reason for this deformation was the appearance, in the first stage of the general crisis of capitalism, of a chronic surplus of fixed capital and constant under-employment of productive capacities. This surplus upset the classical movement of fixed capital and retarded the process of cyclical advance.

This gave rise to serious additional difficulties for capitalist reproduction and the scale and depth of economic crises increased significantly. Bourgeois governments began to look for a way out in measures of state regulation, in the arms race, militarisation of the economy and war preparations.

Not only the crisis of 1929-1933 but also those of 1920- 1921 and 1937-1938 were the gravest in the history of capitalism. Prior to the First World War, Britain had no crisis of overproduction which reduced annual output by more

than 10 per cent, while in the United States there were only two such cases. Yet, in 1920-1921 industrial production in the United States dropped (annually) by 24 per cent; in 1929-1933, by 46 per cent and in 1937-1938, by 21 per cent. In 1933, the United States had 12.8 million fully unemployed people (one-fourth of the total labour force), and in 1938 the share was one-fifth (10.4 million people).

It would be incorrect to transfer automatically the specific features of the cyclical movement in the 1920s and the 1930s to the period after the Second World War because, beginning with the second stage of capitalism's general crisis, ushered in by the Second World War, essential changes occurred in the cycle mechanism. Contrary to some forecasts and to the expectations of the ruling circles of capitalist countries themselves, crises of the same scale and depth as in the 1920s and the 1930s did not recur. The postwar restoration of the economy in the majority of developed capitalist countries took a comparatively short time. In the United States, alongside surplus productive capacities in the war industries, an acute shortage of fixed capital in the civilian sectors arose towards the end of the war. The slow renewal of the productive machinery after 1929 led to a substantial obsolescence of installed equipment. As a result of these and other factors, when in 1948-1949 the first postwar crisis began in the United States and then spread to some West European countries in 1951-1952, it was far less acute than in 1920-1921. After the crisis, a new industrial boom started.

This was the basis of the apologetic concept about the smoothing over of the contradictions of the capitalist economy and the possibility of eliminating the cyclical nature of its development which was expounded in the works of a number of Western authors. "The cycle has vanished", they affirmed.

In contrast to them, Marxists were not only able to prove why cyclical reproduction would be preserved, but also to explain the reasons for the changes in the cycle mechanism under the new conditions. They showed that the substantial increase in the role of the bourgeois state in the economy was an important new element. State-monopoly regulation was especially developed during the Second

24

S. MENSHIKOV

THE BACKGROUND OF THE SUBJECT

25

World War but, even after it ended, was preserved at a considerably higher level than before the war.

The Marxists also showed that after the Second World War, as a result of the creation of the world socialist system, the markets for the sale of goods and the spheres for capital investment began relatively to shrink for the principal capitalist countries. This, however, could not lead to an elimination of cyclical development or to a progressive' absolute decrease of production, to a "self-destruction of capitalism" owing to the shortage of markets. The facts have corroborated the accuracy of Lenin's thesis that, under conditions of monopoly capitalism, the economy, on the whole, grows faster than under pre-monopoly capitalism.

The Report of the Central Committee of the CPSU to the 20th Party Congress (1956) gave a realistic analysis of the development of the capitalist economy during the postwar period. It cited data on the increase of outputjin the principal capitalist countries and indicated some of the basic factors of this growth: the increase in military contracts, the massive renovation and expansion of fixed capital, external economic expansion of a number of countries and the capitalist rationalisation of production.

Problems of postwar capitalist reproduction began to be studied actively at the Institute of the World Economy and International Relations (USSR Academy of Sciences) in Moscow in 1956. Considerable attention was paid to the periodisation of the postwar cycles, and the division of crises into cyclical and intermediate. These studies showed the fallacy of the theory about the disappearance of regularity in the advent of crises propounded by some Western authors.

In contrast to most Western economists, Marxists examined the course of reproduction on the scale of the entire capitalist economy, not confining themselves to an isolated analysis of the cycle in separate countries. Such an analysis made it possible to prove theoretically the unity of the world cycle.

The position of Soviet specialists on the question of the periodicity of postwar cycles was expounded in particular in the collective work of the Institute of the World Economy and International Relations Contemporary Cycles and Crises,

published in 1967, and in a number of subsequent works.1 According to this position, the main landmarks in the development of the postwar cycles were: 1948-1949 in the United States and 1951-1952 in Western Europe and Japan; 1957- 1958 in the entire capitalist economy; 1966-1967 in Western Europe; 1967 and 1969-1971 in the United States.

In 1961, the editors of the World Marxist Review journal organised in Prague a discussion dealing with cycles and crises in the capitalist economy in which Marxist economists of socialist and capitalist countries took part. The results of this discussion were published in a number of articles in the World Marxist Review in 1961 and 1962 and then in a separate volume.^^2^^

*&,

During this discussion, an important thesis was put forward, namely, a modification in the mechanism of the contemporary cycle, caused by the sum total of changes in contemporary state-monopoly capitalism and the altered place of imperialism in the present-day world.

Among the main factors constantly affecting the change in the'cycle mechanism are the competition and struggle between capitalism and socialism, disintegration of imperialism's colonial system, growth of monopolisation, enhancement of the economic role of the state, the contemporary scientific and technical revolution and the intensification of the class struggle in developed capitalist countries.

The influence of most of these factors on the cycle is examined in detail in the subsequent chapters.

The new approach has yielded good practical results in forecasting the cycle. Thus, it served as the basis for forecasting the advent of a new phase of cyclical crises in developed capitalist' countries, which did happen in 1966-1967 and 1969-1971. Despite the opinion of some economists, who regarded an economic crisis in the Federal Republic of Germany as unlikely in 1966, the onset of such a crisis

~^^1^^ Sovremenniye tsikly I krizisy (Contemporary Cycles and Crises), edited by A. M. Rumyantsev, S. M. Menshikov and G. B. Ardayev, Moscow, 1967; "The Economy of the USA: An Appraisal of the Situation and the Prospects", Mirovaya 'ekonomika i mezhdunarodniye otnosheniya Nos. 9-10, 1970.

~^^2^^ See (Ed.) A. Rumyantsev, Crisis and Capitalist Cycle. A Symposium, People's Publishing House, New Delhi, 1963.

26

S. MENSHIKOV

THE BACKGROUND OF THE SUBJECT

27

before long was forecast. This forecast similarly came true. Other forecasts also proved correct, namely, about the uncompleted 1967 crisis in the United States, the slowing down of economic growth rates in the USA at the end of the 1960s and the probability of an early recurrence of a cyclical crisis of overproduction.

Of exceptional importance for analysis of the contemporary cycle is the proposition, put forward at the 24th CPSU Congress (1971), about the attempts of capitalism to adapt itself to the new world situation. In an effort to prevent the defeat of its social system, capitalism employs new methods, extends state regulation of the economy, tries to utilise in its own interests the achievements of the scientific and technological revolution and is compelled to agree to a number of reforms and to make concessions to the growing working-class and democratic movement in the capitalist countries.

A realistic analysis of changes in the mechanism of the contemporary cycle meets the practical needs of socialist planning, one of whose elements is a sober, all-round consideration of the development trends in the principal capitalist countries and accurate forecasting of their future development.

1.3. THE CONTEMPORARY CYCLE AND THE FUTURE OF THE CAPITALIST SYSTEM

Periodic crises of overproduction, according to the Marxist-Leninist theory, are a part of the broader question of the future of the capitalist system. The chief cause of such crises---the basic contradiction of capitalism---cannot be eliminated so long as private ownership of the means of production prevails in society. Crises are eliminated only when the social nature of contemporary production is supplemented by an adequate social form for the appropriation of the results of production.

In socialist society, based on the dominance of social ownership of the means of production, planned development, inherent in the very nature of social production, corresponds to the planned organisation of the production process both

in individual enterprises and production complexes and on the scale of the entire economy. Under socialism, the driving force of production is not the growth of capital, but the maximum satisfaction of the needs of society and its members, the all-round harmonious development of man. Centralised guidance of the economy rests on a big arsenal of instruments for planning and regulating social production. Optimal development of the economy has become possible for the first time in history.

The regular recurrence of crises of overproduction demonstrates the limited nature of the capitalist mode of production. Crises cause and further exacerbate the economic, social and political contradictions of capitalism. According to Lenin, cyclical development is a chronic, incurable di'sease of capitalism.

The attitude of the basic classes of capitalist society to crises and cycles is determined by their place in the system of social production and the influence crises exert on the position of these classes.

The attitude of the capitalist class to crises is contradictory. Crises provide a temporary resolving of the contradictions of reproduction and clear the way for further capital accumulation. Hence the attitude prevailed among the bourgeoisie for a long time that crises are not only an inevitable evil, but also useful ``blood-letting''. A crisis hits painfully individual groups of capitalist entrepreneurs and creates temporary difficulties for the capitalist class as a whole. At the same time, the strong monopolist groups, seeking to utilise crises to "keep the working class in check" and to weaken its organisation, hold that without the mass unemployment brought about by crises, the subsequent advance would often be impossible. For the monopolist top group of the bourgeoisie, crises are also a means for the subjugation or the accelerated ruin of the mass of small, non-monopolised enterprises which hinder monopoly domination of the markets.

Prior to the 1930s, the bourgeoisie as a whole did not consider economic crises a direct threat to the capitalist system. Only as a result of the 1929-1933 crisis did the bourgeoisie become aware that crises activate the revolutionary forces and endanger the very existence of capital-

28

S. MENSHIKOV

BACKGROUND OF THE

ism as a social system. This awareness was a consequence not only of the particular depth, scale and duration of this crisis, but also of the fact that capitalism was no longer the absolutely dominant system in the world, as a result of the development of a socialist state. These circumstances altered sharply the attitude of the capitalist class to crises and the cycle and provided an impetus which led to subsequent attempts to apply countercrisis and countercyclical regulation.

The contradictory attitude of the bourgeoisie to crises, however, is also preserved under conditions of highly developed state-monopoly regulation. The capitalist class is not opposed to crises if they do not attain a scale directly menacing the private property system. The bourgeoisie understands instinctively that crises are, as it were, the price they have to pay periodically for preserving the "freedom of private enterprise", that the real antidote to crises can be only centralised planning and, consequently, the elimination of "private enterprise". If crises are reduced to a certain minimum, this, in principle, is sufficient for the capitalist class and its upper ranks. The contemporary capitalist state, far from being in a hurry to prevent crises, if it considers them relatively harmless, often even promotes the onset of crises itself when it assumes that they can help solve, in its favour, a number of pressing problems and conflicts.

Crises thus remain an organic part of the contemporary capitalist system. The question is whether crises that are less acute than in 1929-1933 can lead to a social explosion endangering the existence of the capitalist system. The growth of world socialism, advance of the anti-monopoly movement in capitalist countries, the combination of unemployment with inflation, relatively high economic activity with the advance of the working-class movement---all this demonstrates that changes in the mechanism of the cycle do not promote political stability in the principal capitalist countries. On the contrary, the present-day form of cyclical movement faces the capitalist class with increasingly more difficult problems. This is demonstrated specifically by the sharp aggravation of socio-economic and political contradictions in the capitalist world, caused by the further

sharpening of the economic and monetary crisis throughout 1969-1971 and 1973-75.

The attitude of the capitalist class to crises is directly displayed in the evolution of the views of bourgeois economists. In Marx's day some of them were compelled to make the painful transition from dogmatic notions about the impossibility of market inequality to actual recognition of crises and their periodic recurrence. In contrast to Marx, they offered explanations of cycles and crises that simply pointed out individual partial causes, and no bourgeois economist could rise to recognition of the point that it is capitalism as a socio-economic system that engenders periodic disturbances of reproduction.

The crisis of 1929-1933 coincided in time with a new turn in the bourgeois theory of the cycle. The clearest indication of this turn was the so-called Keynesian revolution. In contrast to his predecessors, who held that full employment of manpower and the means of production is a natural balanced state of the economic system of capitalism, John Maynard Keynes for the first time proclaimed the possibility of a general economic equilibrium under conditions of mass unemployment and under-employment of productive capacity. This was an indirect admission that capitalism is to blame for crises. This admission was not, however, complete. Keynes assumed that crises are engendered by certain specific features of the old, unregulated capitalism and proclaimed the possibility of eliminating them by state regulation, increase of government spending and inflational credit and monetary policy.

The extensive spread of Keynesian views in the period after the Second World War was combined with unusual growth of state-monopoly capitalism. Many bourgeois economists perceived in the change of the mechanism of the contemporary cycle a triumph of the ideas of Keynes. All kinds of concepts of a "welfare state" and "affluent society" were fabricated to picture the forced concessions to the working-class and democratic movement as concern for the harmony of interests of all classes in capitalist society, which is supposedly inherent in the bourgeois state.

Many works of bourgeois economists asserted the possibility of eliminating crises, and the cycle was declared

30

S. MENSHIKOV

THE BACKGROUND OP THE SUBJECT

31

a thing of the past. However, as one capitalist country after another was drawn into the vortex of periodic crises and the bourgeois state with its entire arsenal of countercyclical remedies proved powerless, bourgeois economists began to take a somewhat more sober view.

At a conference in London, held in 1967 and attended primarily by Western non-Marxist economists (from the United States, Japan and West European countries), it was recognised unanimously that the economic cycle in the capitalist countries, far from vanishing, had become, in many respects, more difficult to control than formerly. The conference participants noted the weakest aspects of countercyclical regulation: specifically in the spheres of credit, money and foreign exchange.^^1^^ It is indicative that this conference directly preceded the devaluation of the pound and the dollar crisis in 1967-1968, the steep rise of inflation in the United States, the two longest economic crises in the USA in postwar years and then also the world monetary crisis, which began in 1971 and continues to this day.

The attitude of the working class to crises has always been the same. The working masses have to bear the brunt of a crisis. It dooms them to mass unemployment and to a direct deterioration of their material conditions. Crises often coincide with massive lockouts, pressure by the bourgeoisie on working-class organisations, and at the present time also with deliberate organisation of mass unemployment by the capitalist state.

The most class-conscious workers understand that under the capitalist system it is impossible to eliminate crises and unemployment. However, so long as it exists, progressive organisations of the working people are taking measures to mitigate the most destructive effects of crises on the working class. In practice, this implies a hard daily struggle for the direct economic interests and rights of the working people, against any attempts to ``freeze'' wages under conditions of inflation, the expansion of social insur-

ance, for "genuine democratisation of state regulation, and so on.

The mitigation of crises as compared with the 1920s and the 1930s has not weakened this struggle of the working people. The present-day cycle is combined with inflation, and the latter engenders the tendency towards an absolute decline of the standard of living, even in periods of relatively high economic activity, if the pressure of the working class slackens. Consequently, a close study of the specific features of the contemporary cycle and changes of its mechanism teaches workers' organisations the need to constantly increase and extend the offensive on the positions of monopoly capital.

In present-day conditions, the principal capitalist countries have a developed machinery of state regulation and, in some of them, of drawing up state programmes for the economy. As long as the capitalist class is in power, this machinery can neither be sufficiently developed nor consistently utilised for mitigating crises. Moreover, in a number of cases it is utilised for directly opposite ends---to ``provoke'' crisis drops in production, to curtail ``excessive'' increases of personal consumption, and so on.

At the same time it is clear that the creation of this machinery reflects the objectively mature social need for centralised guidance of the economy, and its activity, according to Lenin, is the ``skeleton'', the prototype of socialist planning. This is just as true as the proposition that statemonopoly capitalism as a whole, to use Lenin's words, creates "the complete material preparation" and is the ``threshold'' of socialism.

Consequently, the point is not to destroy this machine, but to put forward a democratic and socialist alternative to the existing trends and methods of state regulation which serve the interests of the monopolies. An important element of the struggle for such an alternative is awareness of the fact that the abolition of the cycle and crises is technically possible, if the necessary social transformations are made. Contemporary economic science and the science of management are at a level when to ensure optimal economic growth is a real possibility (which can be realised, naturally, only under specific socio-economic conditions).

~^^1^^ See M. Bronfenbrenner, (Ed.), Is the Business Cycle Obsolete?, New York-London, 1970; S. Menshikov, "Has the Capitalist Cycle Become Obsolete?", Mirovaya ekonomika i mezhdunarodniye otnosheniya. No. 9, 1967.

S. MENSHlKOV

The world capitalist cycle exerts a considerable impact on the economy of developing countries, the majority of which have taken the path of independent development. Periodically recurring crises, engendered by the economy of the major capitalist states, are a constant reminder to the newly-free countries of the dangers of their economic ties with the developed part of the capitalist world. The means for warding off this threat are deep socio-economic and political reforms in these countries, an increase of state economic regulation and also their combined action in stabilising international commodity markets, in eliminating the most onerous, neocolonialist interrelations with imperialist states.

In concluding this chapter, let us note that the theory of the cycle helps elaborate a realistic view of the development trends of 7the capitalist economy, warning the scholar both against overestimation and underestimation of its capabilities in the economic competition between the two

systems.

Questions of the methodology of forecasting the capitalist economy are expounded in other works. Here, it is sufficient to stress that proper account of its cyclical movement demands attention not only to difficulties, contradictions and crises which develop in the capitalist economy but also to the cyclical upswings of production, the possibilities of bursts forward by some sectors or countries and to the use of reserve productive capacities.

CHAPTER 2

POSTWAR CYCLES

Let us begin this chapter by examining the course of reproduction in capitalist countries after the Second World War, to be more exact, in the period between 1945 and 1972 or a little more than a quarter of a century.

History shows that independent movement of the economic cycle is almost exclusively confined to countries with developed capitalist relations and a developed industry, including the industrial production of machinery and equipment.^^1^^ Therefore we shall start with a description of the contemporary cycle in several leading capitalist countries: the United States, Britain, the Federal Republic of Germany, France and Japan. These countries account for about 70 per cent of the industrial output of all capitalist states. In this chapter we shall examine the cycle in each of these countries separately, and in Chapter 3 we shall endeavour to combine these fragments into one picture.

One of the most complex and debatable problems in the theory of the cycle is the choice of quantitative .criteria enabling the researcher to single out separate phases of the economic cycle. The approach of the National Bureau of Economic Research (the United States) has gained wide

~^^1^^ In the 19th and early 20th centuries the economy of European countries and the United States became cyclical in the following sequence: first Britain, then Germany, the United States, France and, lastly, Russia and Japan. See L. A. Mendelson, Teoriya i istoriya tsiklov i krizisov (The Theory and History of Cycles and Crises), Vols. I-III, Moscow, 1959-1964.

3-0593

34

S. MENSHIKOV

POSTWAR CYCLES

35

currency in Western literature. This methodology of analysing the cycle, elaborated under the guidance of Wesley G. Mitchell, Arthur F. Burns and Geoffrey H. Moore^^1^^, is marked by distinctly pronounced pragmatism and empiricism. In fact, it examines only two phases of the economic cycle: "expansion and contraction". The methods for singling out these phases, elaborated by the Bureau ( definition of the so-called turning points of the cycle) and finding the points of the maximum intensity of each phase, respectively the ``peak'' and the ``trough'', are based on a joint examination of more than 100 different "cyclical indicators", that is, the study of a large number of statistical time series. However, the Bureau does not single out any one or several indicators as the most important determinants. As a result, the concept of the cycle, in spite of the many concrete examples examined by the Bureau, remains on the whole somewhat indefinite.

The Marxist theory of the economic cycle distinguishes four main phases of the cycle: crisis, depression, recovery and advance. As a rule, decisive quantitative criteria which make it possible to single out the special phases of the economic cycle employed by Marxist scientists are usually indicators of the volume of production, i.e., the physical volume of the net (or gross) national product and the physical volume of industrial output. These indicators make it possible to observe directly the changing movement of material production and also the more aggregate indicator of the " production of goods and services".^^2^^ The behaviour of the overwhelming majority of other cyclical indicators depends ultimately on the movement of the production of material goods (or goods and services). Moreover, the social product is best studied in the forms which lead us to maximum understanding of its dynamics. Therefore, we analyse the volume of the social product taken for the minimum possible unit of time, for example, the quarterly movement of the national product and the monthly movement of indus-

trial output (excluding the influence of seasonal fluctuations).

The phase of the crisis is usually defined as an absolute reduction of one or both main cyclical indicators---the social product and industrial production---which continues for not less than six months. The depression is the period of post-crisis stagnation, when production hovers between the lowest point of the crisis decline and approximately half the distance from this point to the maximum advance reached in the given pre-crisis period. During the phase of recovery, output rises to the maximal point of the preceding advance; in the phase of advance it rises, moreover, surpassing the previous maximum. In any phase, there may be brief halts of the movement prevailing in the given phase.

It is expedient to give these definitions in greater detail, taking into consideration the specific nature of contemporary cycles. In many cases, these cycles begin or end with a prolonged period of stagnation, during which there can be a brief decline in output. In the present work, we shall regard such periods as a crisis phase when: 1) the growth of production stops for more than six months; 2) and during this time there is a brief decline in output caused by reasons typical of a crisis; 3) other important symptoms of a crisis are in evidence, such as an increase in unemployment, decrease in capital investment and fall of profit.

The use of these quantitative criteria must always be preceded by a thorough qualitative analysis. At times, for example, it is difficult to separate the operation of factors of the economic cycle from accompanying external influences, e.g., military and political. But, wherever possible, it is expedient to make a special examination of cases when fluctuations in production are caused chiefly by the internal forces of the cyclical mechanism. A simple quantitative criterion consists in the following: the movement of production, characteristic of the given cyclical phase, should be determined by the corresponding movement of private demand, that is, of personal consumption, private investment and net exports, provided this movement is not predetermined by direct administrative measures of the government (for example, rationing of consumption, bans or restrictions on civilian production, and so on). Fluctua-

3*

~^^1^^ See, for example, Geoffrey H. Moore, Julius Shishkin, Indicators of Business Expansions and Contractions, New York, 1967.

~^^2^^ Here we shall refrain from discussing theoretically and methodologically the concepts of productive and non-productive labour, the productive and non-productive spheres as this would lead us far afield.

36

S. MENSHIKOV 1 POSTWAR CYCLES

37

tions of production, resulting exclusively or chiefly from changes in government demand or such direct administrative measures, should be examined only as factors which supplement the cyclical movement, but do not determine it.

In our subsequent exposition, we shall single out crises which were accompanied either by a considerable drop in the volume or by prolonged (for several years) halts of the increase of private investment in fixed capital. Since the movement of fixed capital forms the main material basis of the economic cycle, we shall call such crises cyclical, as distinct from other (intermediate) crises, during which there is a reduction of investment in commodity stocks, but the reduction of investment in fixed productive capital is not substantial and long-lasting or is completely absent.

The subsequent analysis of the economic cycle in a number of countries is partly based on results of cycle simulation, with the help of econometric models. A description of such models and some mathematical methods for analysing the cycle are given in Chapter 7. Here it is sufficient to note that econometric methods make it possible to analyse, in detail, changes of the social demand and its components, in each case quantitatively distributing these changes according to the factors which determine them. To the best of our knowledge, such a method of analysis has so far not been employed widely in analysing postwar economic cycles.

Our analysis is based on the official statistical publications of the respective countries, of the United Nations and certain other international organisations. These statistics have serious shortcomings. The main one (for studying the history of the cycle) is the subsequent systematic revision and ``renovation'' of previously published time series. Such adjustment almost always results in smoothing over the cyclical fluctuations and, at times, completely changes the picture of a certain cycle. The stable shift, resulting from such adjustments, does not require special explanation. Nevertheless, we consistently use official statistics, because this ensures definite advantages owing to both their accessibility and also the opportunity of checking the accuracy of all the calculations presented.

2.1. UNITED STATES

Regular publication of postwar quarterly statistics of the national product of the United States in constant prices (1958) starts with 1947. The earlier period (1945-1946) can be judged only on the basis of annual data of the national product and monthly figures of industrial output. Table 2-1 shows all the periods of the postwar economic development of the United States which come under our quantitative definition of a crisis.

Table 2-1

Economic Crises in the USA. 1945-1971l

National product^^2^^

Industrial production

Maximum

Minimum

Decrease per cent

Maximum

Minimum

Decrease per cent

4th quarter of 1948

4th quarter of 1949

5.2

July 1948

October 1949

10.0

2nd quarter of 1953

2nd quarter of 1954

4.1

July 1953

March 1954

10.2

1st quarter of 1957

1st quarter of 1958

4.7

February 1957

April 1958

14.5

2nd guarter of 1960

1st quarter of 1961

3.0

January 1960

January 1961

7.0

4th quarter of 1966

1st quarter of 1967

0.3

October 1966

May 1967

2.5

3rd quarter of 1969

4th quarter of 1970

3.0

August 1969

November 1970

7.5

1 Calculated according to National Income and Product Accounts of the United States. 1929-1965; Survey of Current Business, July 1970; Industrial Production. 1959. Revision, Washington, 1960.

~^^2^^ The net national product without indirect taxes or the national income according to US statistics deflated by the GNP price deflator.

The sharpest drop in output occurred immediately after the end of the Second World War. Some authors place this decrease among the usual economic crises. However, the causes and manifestations of the decline between 1944 and 1947 differed fundamentally from ordinary periodic crises.

38

S. MENSHIKOY

POSTWAR CYCLES

The decline was caused chiefly by the precipitous drop in the scale of government military purchases from $ 87,400 million in 1944 to $ 9,100 million in 1947 or by 89.6 per cent.1 In 1943-1944 these purchases amounted to 41.6 per cent of the GNP and in 1946-1947 only to 5.4 per cent. During the Second World War US industry was regeared to war production, civilian output was restricted because of the absence of sufficient raw material and equipment, and there were also direct government restrictions on the production of many consumer goods and equipment for civilian industries. Moreover, the size of private investment was limited by the higher wartime profit taxes paid to the Federal Treasury. In 1945-1947 the economy was gradually released from the wartime restrictions and switched over mainly to the production of civilian goods.

This transition (reconversion) was not a painless process. As military contracts were cut, resources for civilian production were released, but the volume of military production dropped faster than civilian output rose. The massive demobilisation from the armed forces sent up the number of unemployed. However, the difficulties in the economy were not caused by the absence of a wide market. The demand for personal consumer goods and investment goods rose systematically, at a considerable rate. The economy did not manage to keep pace with this rising demand.

These considerations point to the unusual nature of the decrease in output in 1943-1947. It had no direct bearing on the development of the economic cycle in the United States. As for the movement of civilian production in 1946 and 1947, it can be characterised sooner as a period of recovery and advance.

All other postwar contractions of output in the United States^^1^^ were caused, to a greater or lesser degree, by the curtailment of the total demand for civilian goods. The average duration of these crises was about one year and except for the crisis of 1966-1967 (which should be specially examined) they differed little from each other by the scale of decline in production.

The 1948-1949 crisis was linked, in the first place, with a substantial decrease in private investment. Deducting depreciation, it dropped from the third quarter of 1948 to the fourth quarter of 1949 by $ 19,300 million or 46 per cent. Personal consumption continued to rise, although at a slower pace. On the whole, the factors which determined the drop in investment proved considerably stronger than the factors which made for the increase in personal consumption. The total shortage of demand in the private sector for maintaining production at the level reached in 1948 was 3.4 per cent of the national product in 1949, i.e., was only slightly smaller than in 1929. But in 1949, for the first time after the end of the Second World War, government purchases increased substantially, particularly for military purposes (2.6 per cent of the national income). This compensated for approximately three-quarters of the decrease in the social demand, owing to which, the 1948-1949 crisis was considerably weakened.^^1^^

The potential force of this crisis, thus, was considerably greater than some authors assumed. This shows that there were serious grounds for the forecasts, made at the end of the war, concerning a big postwar economic crisis threatening the United States.

The situation in 1953-1954 was entirely different. The Korean war ended in mid-1953. A partial regearing of the US economy was under way. Between the fourth quarter of 1953 and the second quarter of 1954 government purchases dropped by $ 10,800 million or 10 per cent. This aggravated the crisis. The decrease in production, however, began in the third quarter of 1953, i.e., before government purchases were cut, while private investment declined even earlier, from the first quarter of 1953. Net investment dropped from the fourth quarter of 1952 to the fourth quarter of 1953 by $ 12,100 million or 33 per cent. From the second quarter of 1953 and up to the first quarter of 1954 there was no increase in personal consumption but any decrease was insignificant.

~^^1^^ Calculations have been made with models of the economic cycle. For thej methodology of the calculations see sections 7.1.d and T.l.f.

~^^1^^ Economic Report of the President of the United States. 1972, Washington, 1972, p. 195.

40

S. MENSHIKOV

POSTWAR CYCLES

41

Thus, the 1953-1954 crisis was mainly caused by a decrease of government demand in the private sector. The total lag of demand was much smaller than in 1948-1949. However, even after the operation of internal factors was nearly exhausted, the crisis was prolonged and deepened by the drop in government demand.

The 1957-1958 crisis proceeded at an almost unchanged level of government purchases. Its features were thus determined almost exclusively by the development of cyclical tendencies in the private sector. Just as in the preceding crisis, it started with a fall in private investment. The precrisis maximum of net investment was already reached in the fourth quarter of 1955, and it continued to decline up to the second quarter of 1958, i.e., for two and a half years, amounting to $ 25,200 million or 59.2 per cent. The increase in personal consumption was halted for only half a year (from the third quarter of 1957 up to the second quarter of 1958) but the decrease in the sales of consumer durables had already begun in 1956.

The lag of total demand in 1958-1959 was noticeably bigger than in 1953-1954 but significantly smaller than in 1948-1949. Owing, however, to the comparative stability of government demand in this period, the actual 1958-1959 crisis was much stronger than in the two preceding ones.

The 1960-1961 crisis was shorter and less acute than the earlier ones. Net investment dropped from the first quarter of 1960 to the first quarter of 1961 by $ 17,200 million or 45,4 per cent. The increase in personal consumption was halted from the second quarter of 1960 up to the first quarter of 1961. The potential force of this crisis was only a little weaker than in the 1958-1959 crisis. However, its real force was dampened by the new wave of increased government (chiefly military) purchases. Their growth began in the third quarter of 1959 and by the first quarter of 1961 had reached $ 9,600 million.

Factors associated with the smaller demand for investment goods also formed the basis of the 1966-1967 crisis. Net investment reached its maximum in the fourth quarter of 1966 and in the second quarter of 1967 declined by $ 17,800 million or 34 per cent. However, the increase in personal consumption was halted only in the first quarter.

The overall shortage of demand in the private sector in 1967, as compared with 1966, amounted to 1.9 per cent of the national income. Were the effect of external factors to be neutral, the crisis could have been of the same force as in 1957-1958. However, it developed in a period of rapid escalation of military spending in view of US intervention in Vietnam. In 1966, government purchases rose by | 8,700 million and in 1967 by $ 13,400 million, respectively 1.7 and 2.5 per cent of the national income. The rise in government spending more than made up for the fall in private demand and the development of the crisis was halted very swiftly.

In contrast to this situation, the 1969-1971 crisis developed under a systematic reduction of government purchases (chiefly owing to a cut in military spending). In 1969, they were reduced by $ 2,100 million, in 1970 by $ 6,200 million and in 1971 by $ 100 million.^^1^^ Thus, the external] conditions promoted the crisis rather than retarded it.

The main driving force of the crisis was the drop in investment. Net capital investment decreased by $ 13,900 million or 27 per cent between the third quarter of 1969 and the fourth quarter of 1970. The increase in personal consumption slowed down but did not stop completely. As compared with the preceding crises, the relative reduction of demand in the private sector was small. The cut-back in investment was moderate and took place as the crisis developed, but did not precede it. So, the 1969-1971 crisis can be regarded, on the whole, as a peculiar intertwining of a more or less simultaneous decrease of private and government demand.

We thus see that, in spite of the similar mechanism of the development of the postwar crises in the United States, there were very many different features, linked in particular with external conditions.

Let us now examine these crises by various criteria to determine whether they were cyclical or intermediate. We single out private investment in productive fixed capital, including investment made from the depreciation fund. The

~^^1^^ Economic Report of the President of the United States, Washington, 1972, p. 197.

42

S. MENSHIKOV

POSTWAR CYCLES

43

movement of this indicator for industry, transport and trade shows that private investment in productive capital was cut during all the postwar crises. Nevertheless we can point to the following specific features of their movement:

a) the longest and deepest drop in investment was registered in the crises of 1948-1949 and 1957-1958;

b) after the 1957-1958 and 1966-1967 crises there were long periods (of several years) of stagnation in investment; moreover, in the latter case, the stagnation continued up to the 1969-1971 crisis;

c) the periods of evident investment booms were 1946- 1947, 1955-1956 and 1964-1966.

Consequently, the crises of 1948-1949, 1957-1958 and 1966-1967 may be regarded as turning points in the movement of investment in fixed productive capital, while the crises of 1953-1954, 1960-1961 and 1969-1971 maybe regarded as crises in which the change in the movement of fixed capital was less sharp. According to our criteria, we shall name the first group of crises cyclical and the second group intermediate.

This division is controversial to a certain extent, especially as regards the 1966-1967 and 1969-1971 crises. The first of these was followed by a long period of stagnation in investment but there was no sharp drop either in the former or in the latter. The prolonged stagnation of capital investment, apparently, performed a role similar to a sharp but briefer drop, inasmuch as in 1972 intensive growth of investment was resumed.

The correctness of such periodisation of the postwar cyclical crises in the United States is confirmed by the data in Table 2-2, which show that cyclical crises possess a strikingly pronounced regularity. They recurred in the last quarter of a century every 8-10 years, which conforms to the earlier periodicity.^^1^^

The regularity of the recurrence of the more frequent (intermediate) crises is not so distinctly pronounced and there are definite exceptions. The seeming periodicity of

~^^1^^ Nine years passed between the crises of 1920-1921 and 1929- 1933; eight years between the crises of 1929-1933 and 1937-1938 and eleven years between the 1937-1938 and 1948-1949 crises.

Table 2-2

Growth of Production in the USA during Periods between Crises

National product

Total

Average

Precrisis Maximum

Duration

Precrisis Maximum

growth, per

annual growth,

cent

per cent

3rd quarter 1947

1 . 5 years

4th quarter 1948

7.9

5.9

4th quarter 1948

4.5 yeers

2nd quarter 1953

21.8

4.5

2nd quarter 1953

3.75 years

1st quarter 1957

8.4

2.2

1st quarter 1957

3.25 years

2nd quarter 1960

7.0

2.1

2nd quarter 1960

6.5 years

4th quarter 1966

35.9

4.9

4th quarter 1966

2.75 years

3rd quarter 1969

9.9

3.8

4th quarter 1948

8.25 years

1st quarter 1957

32.1

3.5

1st quarter 1957

9.75 years

4th quarter 1966

45.5

3.9

three-four years is at times interrupted by longer intervals when there are no crises (for example, the six-year period between the 1960-1961 and the 1966-1967 crises). Such an irregularity has also occurred in earlier decades.^^1^^

From the viewpoint of a cyclical analysis of the period dividing the postwar crises, if we examine them together, we find that they differ qualitatively.~^^2^^

The increase of production in 1947-1948, 1953-1957 and 1960-1965 was based chiefly on the growth of investment in fixed capital. In contrast to this, the advances in 1950-1953, 1957-1960, 1965-1966 and 1966-1969 were largely of a military-inflationary character. Each of the advances of the first type was completed either by a sharp drop in capital investment or a long stagnation, or both. This offers additional arguments in favour of the periodisation of the cyclical crises in the United States in the postwar years offered in this book.

~^^1^^ Between the 1920-1921 and 1924 crises there were four years; between 1924 and 1927 three years; between 1927 and 1929-1933 two years but between 1929-1933 and 1937-1938 eight years.

2 See Table 2-3.

44

S. MENSHIKOV

POSTWAR CYCLES

45

Table 2-3

mum reached in May 1949 up to September 1950, i.e., for almost a year and a half. This prolonged stagnation, as it were, completed the first stage in the postwar economic restoration of Britain.

Increase of Production in the United

States Owing to the Growth of Government Purchases

and Investment

Increase, Ratio (to increase million dollars ot national product)

Period

1

Govern-

Increase

Increase

National product

ment -6 purchases

investment

in government purchases

investment

3rd quarter 1947- 4th quarter 1948

20,800

10,000

11.2

0.48

0.54

4th quarter 1948- 2nd quarter 1953

62,500

49,200

-5.4

0.79

---0.09

2nd quarter 1953- 1st quarter 1957

29,400

-10,900

1.2

---0.37

0.04

1st quarter 1957- 4th quarter 1966

145,400

32,500

14.6

0.22

0.10

4th quarter 1966- 3rd quarter 1969

54,400

18,600

-0.6

0.34

---0.01

Table 2-4

Economic Crises in Britain from 1945 to 1971

National product

Industrial production

De-

De-

Maximum

Minimum

crease, per

Maximum

Minimum

crease, per

cent

cent

...

...

May 1949

August 1949

4.2

. . .

. . .

...

February

June 1952

9.0

1951

2 nd quarter

1 st quarter

5.2

November

May 1958

6.0

1957 1958 1955

2nd quarter

1 st quarter

0.2

July 1961

January

3.1

1961 1962 1962

3rd quarter

1 st quarter

0.9

September

January

5.1

1962 1963 1962 1963

3 rd quarter

1 st quarter

0.7

March 1966

November

3.5

1966 1967 1966

4th quarter

2nd quarter

1.7

March 1970

March 1971

3.5

1970 1971

2.2. WESTERN EUROPE

We intend to examine the postwar cycles in three West European countries: Britain, France and the Federal Republic of Germany. Notwithstanding their geographical proximity and close mutual economic ties, the development of the cycle in each country is marked by highly pronounced specific features.

In the last quarter of a century Britain underwent seven economic crises which did not differ noticeably from each other in acuteness, although they were of different duration.

The shortest of them was in mid-1949 and it was caused directly by the sharp deterioration in foreign trade. The decline of production in the country continued for not more than one quarter and we might not have mentioned it, were it not for the subsequent comparatively long depression. Industrial production remained below the pre-crisis maxi-

The 1951-1952 crisis also continued for almost a year and a half and was accompanied by the biggest drop in production in the entire postwar period. The major reasons for this crisis, just as for the preceding one, were the new export difficulties. However, in contrast to the former, it developed under the strong impact of the Korean war. Government purchases, chiefly military, rose from & 4,102 million (in constant prices of 1963) in 1950 to £ 4,860 million in 1952 or by 18 per cent in two years.^^1^^ The increase in government purchases created an additional market for British industry, but at the same time complicated its position in foreign markets, reducing the supplies of civilian goods for export.

~^^1^^ OECD. National Accounts Statistics. 1950-1969, Paris, 1970.

46

S. MBNSHIKOV

POSTWAR CYCLES

47

Ultimately, this exacerbated the crisis. The growth of investment in fixed capital came to a complete halt in 1951-1952--- for the first time after the Second World War. Personal consumption decreased in absolute terms---it declined 2 per cent from 1950 to 1952.^^1^^

The 1955-1958 crisis was of the longest duration (2.5 years). The decrease in production was not sharp, it unfolded slowly and the crisis, as a whole, resembled rather a prolonged stagnation as, by the way, did a number of other postwar crises in Britain. Investment in fixed capital did not decline, but in 1957-1958 its growth was again halted. The direct cause of the crisis was the serious balance-of-payment troubles. Notwithstanding all the credit and taxation measures, the Government did not succeed for a long time in equalising the balance of payments. This was the first time the ``stop-go'' policy was applied, to which the British Government frequently resorted in the subsequent period.

The decline in production in the second half of 1961 and early 1962 continued for about a half a year. The crisis was comparatively minor. After a brief recovery (eight months), industrial production again began to decline in the autumn of 1962 and reached its lowest point in January 1963. In both cases, the crisis was accompanied by a drop of investment in fixed capital---it declined respectively by 3.5 and 11.6 per cent. In view of the small interval between these recessions, they may be regarded as one crisis which proceeded in two rounds. This assertion is also supported by the fact that investment in fixed capital, after the 1961-1962 recession, did not return to the pre-crisis maximum and its drop in 1962-1963 began from a lower level. The total decrease from the third quarter of 1961 up to the first quarter of 1963 was 13 per cent, and the total duration of the `` combined'' crisis of 1961-1963 reached a year and a half.

The 1966-1967 crisis, which lasted for eight months, gave way to prolonged stagnation. This time, the chief direct reason was the new sharp flare-up of the balance-of-payment crisis and the resumption of the ``stop-go'' policy by the Government. These measures resulted first (in 1966) in

a reduction of personal consumption and in 1967 led to a decrease of capital investment and a general halt in the growth of the national product.

The 1966-1967 crisis was preceded by a small pause in the growth of investment in fixed capital: from the first to the third quarter of 1965 it declined 1.7 per cent. Then, however, the growth of investment was resumed, in spite of the drop in industrial production. This continued even after the new brief halt in 1967 (from the second to the fourth quarter of 1967 it decreased 2.8 per cent). The maximum level of capital investment was reached only at the end of 1968, i.e., after the decrease and stagnation of production had been already left behind. This was followed by a drop of investment in fixed capital by 9.5 per cent during 2.5 years--- from the fourth quarter of 1968 to the first quarter of 1971. The investment decline continued in spite of the resumed growth of production in 1968-1970.

Production reached the maximum in March 1970, after which another economic crisis began. The specific feature of the 1970-1971 crisis consisted particularly in that it set in after a prolonged drop in investment.

Now let us try to divide the postwar British crises into those caused chiefly by difficulties in foreign trade, the balance of payments and by governmental restrictions and into crises directly linked with the periodic halt of the renewal of fixed productive capital.

It is not easy to make such a differentiation because of the constant dependence of the British cycle on international trade conditions. Another difficulty is caused by the small (as compared with the United States) range of cyclical investment fluctuations.

Despite these limitations we can single out three periods when stagnation or a decrease of investment was prolonged: 1950-1952, 1961-1963 and 1968-1971. That is why the crises of 1951-1952, 1961-1963 and 1970-1972 may be regarded, from the point of view of the specific conditions of the British economy, as cyclical and the crises of 1949-1950, 1955- 1958 and 1966-1967 as intermediate, i.e., connected primarily with foreign trade and monetary difficulties. The halt of investment during these crises was in the nature of a brief pause. In Section 3.2 we shall show that this division plays

~^^1^^ National Accounts of OECD Countries. 1958-1960, OECD, Paris. 1962.

48

S. MENSHIKOV

POSTWAR CYCLES

49

Table 2-5 shows that the average growth rate in each of the ten-year cycles was approximately the same, whereas the brief (four-year) inter-crisis intervals are marked by a successive alternation of a somewhat swifter development with a slower rate. Moreover, this succession is not caused by fluctuation in the rate of investment. Between 1951 and 1957 investment grew by 41 per cent (or 5.9 per cent annually on the average); in 1957-1961, by 30.6 per cent (6.9 per cent on the average); in 1961-1965, by 20.1 per cent (4.7 per cent) and in 1965-1968, by 19.7 per cent (6.2 per cent). Thus, the increase in capital investment is quite even, developing soon after the completion of the most recent cyclical crisis. After a certain time, the advance caused by the growth of investment runs up against foreign trade and monetary difficulties; the growth of investment then proceeds in conditions when government restrictions operate, slowing down the general growth of production. In the period of swifter advance, the balance-of-payment crisis is exacerbated and the consequent slowing down of production growth rates is resolved by a comparatively weak economic crisis, which more often resembles a period of stagnation.

In France six economic crises can be singled out in the postwar period.

Table 2-6

Economic Crises in France from 1945-19711

Industrial production

an essential part in analysis of the international economic

cycle.

In contrast to the United States, there was a definite regularity in the recurrence of economic crises, every 4-5 years, in postwar Britain. At the same time, there is also a distinctly displayed periodicity of the cycle of 9-10 years, linked above all with the movement of capital investment. A similar periodicity, as shown earlier in Section 2.1, is also observed in the United States.

Table 2-5

Growth of Production in Britain in Periods between Crises

National product

Industrial production

/

Av

Ave-

Maximum

Maximum

Total rowth, per cent

rage annual ;rowth, per cent

Maximum

Maximum

Total

TOWth,

per j cent

rage annual

TOWth,

per cent

February

November

20.0

11.2

1951 1955

(4.5 years)

4th quar-

3rd quar-

13.9

2.0

November

July 1961

10.8

1.9

ter 1955 (6

ter 1962 75 years)

1955

(5.5

years)

1st quarter 1962 (4

3rd quarter 1966 • 5 years)

17.0

3.6

July 1961 (4.5

March 1966 years)

17.5

3.7

3rd quarter 1966

(4

4th quarter 1970 .5

9.9

2.3

March 1966 (4 y

March 1970 ears)

11.4

2.7

years)

February

July 1961

32.9

2.7

* * •

1951

(10.5 years)

1st quarter 1962

(

4th quarter 1970 8.5 years)

25.8

2.7

July 196 (93

. March 1970 fears)

32.3

3.2

Maximum

Minimum

Decrease, per cent

June 1949

February 1950

20.0

January 1952

August 1953

15.8

February 1958

February 1959

5.0

April 1964

January 1965

5.4

August 1966

July 1967

1.7

April 1970

June 1970

3.2

l In France official quarterly statistics of the national product are so far not published regularly. That is why our data are confined to industrial production.

4-0593

50

S. MENSHIKOV

POSTWAR CYCLES

51

The 1949-1950 crisis was brief (a little more than six months) but sufficiently acute. Although, by this time, France had already regained the absolute prewar level of production, the process of postwar recovery was painful. The most acute problem was that of inflation, particularly at the end of the 194Us. Periodically, this caused a sudden decrease of sales in the home and particularly foreign market, where the higher price of French goods dictated periodic devaluations of the franc. The 194y-1950 crisis reflected chiefly these difficulties because investment in fixed capital, dictated by the needs of uncompleted economic recovery, continued to grow.

The 1952-1953 crisis was of longer duration (1.5 years), though less deep. At that time, the process of postwar economic recovery was already completed. Investment in fixed capital declined in 1952 by '6.7 per cent as compared with the maximum in 1951; moreover, this maximum was exceeded only in 1954. The crisis covered the period of the Korean war, which only indirectly influenced the general economic situation, and the final period of the colonial war France was waging in Indochina. The drop in production was somewhat cushioned by the high level of military orders.

The 1958-1959 crisis lasted a little over a year. Its main direct causes were the exacerbation of the problem of sales in the home market and new foreign trade and balanceof-payment difficulties. On the home market, the main troubles were linked with the sale of consumer goods, on the foreign market with the relatively high cost of French goods, which compelled the government to resort to devaluation twice in 1958. The 1958-1959 crisis coincided with the ending of the colonial war in Algeria. The ending of the war led to a decrease in military spending. Total government purchases declined by a total of 4.4 per cent in 1958 and 1959 as compared with 1957. During this time the government took measures to restrict the growth of wages, and taxes were increased. All this promoted the development of the 1958-1959 crisis. ~

The 1964-1965 crisis was of shorter duration (about nine months) but the decline in production was no smaller than in the preceding crisis. This time, the direct cause was

government regulation, above all the adoption of the economic ``stabilisation'' programme. In conditions of a sudden intensification of inflation, the government, not wishing another currency crisis, took measures to restrict private capital investment and personal consumption (chiefly of durable goods). Total investment (including governmental) continued, however, to rise.

In subsequent years, the government resorted several times more to stabilisation measures. In 1966-1967 and 1970 there were briefM periods of decline in production or stagnation.

In analysing the postwar cycle in France, we can single out only one crisis (1952-1953) which is connected with a strikingly pronounced and sufficiently prolonged decrease of investment in fixed capital. The other crises were either caused by specific features of internal development (1949- 1950) or to a great extent were linked with the general deflationary measures of government regulation of the economy. Therefore, they can hardly be placed among phenomena engendered primarily by cyclical processes. They can rightly be called intermediate crises.

Several stages of economic growth and waves of increases of investment in fixed capital corresponding to them can be singled out in the postwar period. The first wave was closely linked with postwar restoration and was completed in the 1952-1953 cyclical crisis. The second wave, in 1954-1958, was engendered by the intensive efforts to reconstruct industry aimed at raising its competitiveness in foreign markets. This new advance in investment was facilitated first by a certain drop in military spending (connected with the end of the colonial war in Indochina). In 1955, government purchases were smaller than in 1953 by 9.3 per cent. In 1956-1957, however, the escalation of the war in Algeria (in 1957 government purchases rose by 19.5 per cent as compared with 1955) slowed down the investment growth.

The third upward wave of capital investment (1959-1963) was connected with the adaptation of French industry to the new conditions of foreign markets which arose as a result of implementing the provisions of the Common Market treaty. This process was, for a time, interrupted in 1963-11)64,

52

S. MENSHIKOV

POSTWAR CYCLES

in view of the ``stabilisation'' programme, but was then resumed with fresh^force. The important^stimulus to the growth of investment in this period was the creation of a number of new and also the modernisation of some old industries with a definite export orientation. The growth of investment for this purpose also continued after the 1965, 1967 and 1970 crises. We should bear in mind the substantial share of the government in the total volume of investment in fixed capital. The comparatively even growth of government investment and its substantial share create a general picture of continuous rise in the total sum of capital investments after the 1952-1953 crisis.

These distinctions merely confirm the conclusion drawn earlier about the intermediate nature of the 1958-1959 and 1963-1964 crises. The time between the respective maximums reached in June 1949, January 1952, February 1958, April 1964, and August 1966 and April 1970 was respectively 2.5, 6, 6, 1.5 and 4 years. The growth rate of production in each of these periods was approximately the same.

\ln the Federal Republic of Germany there were six periods of crisis, stagnation and decline of production in postwar years. For the most part these economic crises, particularly up to the mid-1960s, resembled a period of stagnation. In conditions when production in the FRG as a whole rose notably faster than in Britain and the United States and, up to the 1950s, also than in France, the regular recurrence of periods of stagnation was tantamount to a periodic crisis decline in production in countries with a comparatively slower or average rates of growth.

The swift development of the economy of the FRG up to the mid-1960s is explained by a number of reasons. We shall mention only two of them, which are of the greatest importance for the question we examine.

1) Prior to the formation of the Federal Republic of Germany and the carrying out of a monetary reform in 1949, economic breakdown prevailed on its territory, which was under the administration of the occupation authorities of the United States, Britain and France. Production was a mere fraction of the prewar level, there was practically no export of manufactured goods, the credit-currency and financial

mechanism functioned intermittently. Normal cyclical development was resumed only in 1949-1950.

Table 2-7

Economic Crises in the FRG in 1945-1971

National product

Industrial production

Maximum

Minimum

Decrease, per cent

Maximum

Minimum

Decrease, per cent

2nd quarter 1951

4th quarter 1952

increase

April 1951

December 1952

0.0

2nd quarter 1957

2nd quarter 1958

increase

May 1957

May 1958

2.4

1st quarter 1961

3rd quarter 1961

1.3

March 1961

December 1961

1.9

4th quarter 1962

1st quarter 1963

0.6

September 1962

May 1963

2.6

2nd quarter 1966

1st quarter 1967J

2.7

June 1966

April 1967

7.3

May 1970

December 1971

8.5

2) Notwithstanding defeat in the war and the postwar breakdown, by 1949-1950 West German industry had a comparatively new productive apparatus. Its average age was not great, because most of it was installed either shortly before the war or in wartime. Neither Britain nor France, nor the majority of other West European countries had at that time such favourable conditions for economic growth. West German industry, not loaded up by military contracts, was in the best competitive position in Western Europe and could swiftly expand industrial output without significant hindrances. Notwithstanding these (and other) favourable conditions, periods of industrial stagnation in the FRG were-already sufficiently prolonged in the 1950s. The 1951- 1952*stagnation lasted for 15 months and in 1957-1958, for about a year. Actually, these stagnations were a combination of a decrease in production of some industries with

S. MENSHIKOV

POSTWAR CYCLES

55

continued growth in others. While the 1951-1952 crisis was caused chiefly by difficulties on the foreign market, in 1957-1958 investment in heavy industry was cut substantially, above all in steel, coal and shipbuilding. The general rise of investment halted. In 1957 it increased only by 0.6 per cent as compared with 1956. The stagnations of 1961-1962 and 1962-1963 in the FRG coincide almost precisely with the crises in Britain.

The 1961-1962 stagnation continued for a little over a year and after an 8-month interval was repeated in a shorter version. The general stagnation of production reflected the periodic sharp drops of output in a number of industries. The total volume of capital investment continued, however, to rise. A general decline of production for a year and a quarter occurred in 1966-19J37, for the first time in the postwar period. This crisis encompassed most sectors of the economy, including those which weathered well the earlier recessions (for example, the automobile industry), and the drop in output was quite substantial. The crisis was caused chiefly by internal factors, above all by the big decline in capital investment. Gross investment in fixed capital in 1967 was 8.4 per cent lower than in 1966 and in 1968 remained below the maximum 1966 level. The decrease of investment in production buildings and installations reached 10.1 per cent and in equipment, 9 per cent.

The 1970-1971 crisis arose on the grounds of difficulties in marketing the output of a number of industries and was further complicated by the general unfavourable situation in foreign trade. The stagnation lasted for about two years; moreover, during this period there were brief but quite sharp declines in industrial production.

To sum up, the 1966-1967 and the 1957-1958 crises can be regarded as cyclical and the crises of 1951-1952, 1961-1963 and 1971-1972 can be classified as intermediate.

Consequently, in the FRG, we see most distinctly the average duration (8-8.5 years) of the periodicity of crises connected with a decrease in capital investment and the briefer (4.5-5.5 years) regularity of other economic crises and stagnations. In contrast to Britain, the comparatively regular onset of intermediate crises is not connected with balance-of-payment crises.

2.3. JAPAN

Immediately after the Second World War, Japan, just as West Germany, went through a period of serious derangement of the economic mechanism and of economic chaos. The end of this period dates only from 1950-1951, when comparatively normal conditions of reproduction were

restored.

In contrast to West Germany, Japan at that time had no new or more or less developed productive apparatus, because a considerable part of the productive capacities of its industry went out of commission.

^The first economic crisis of 1953-1954 lasted only about half a year, but was marked by a substantial contraction of both industrial production and the national product. In Japanese literature, this crisis is usually associated with the interruption of the particularly favourable economic situation which arose for Japan during the Korean war, when Japanese industry served the American armed forces which invaded Korea.

Table 2-8

Economic Crises'in Japan in 1945-1971

National product

Industrial production

^

2 c

Maximum

Minimum

So

S "

o---

Maximum

Minimum

S"

Sv

4th quarter 1953

2nd quarter 1954

8.0

March 1953

August 1953

6.2

3rd quarter 1957

1st quarter 1958

0.7

May 1957

June 1958

9.1

4th quarter 1961

4th quarter 1962

0.9

January 1962

January 1963

3.3

3rd quarter 1964

1st quarter 1965

1.9

September 1964

October 1965

2.5

3rd quarter 1970

4th quarter 1970

1.0

July 1970

May 1971

5.9

No less important, however, is the fact that during this period Japan had a sharp drop of investment in fixed capital. Net investment decreased from 2,200,000 million yen (in

S. MENSHIKOV

POSTWAR CYCLES

57

constant 1965 prices) in the first quarter of 1954 to 900,000 million yen in the last quarter of the same year, in other words, a drop of 54.7 per cent. This was the biggest slump in private investment in Japan during the entire postwar period.

The 1957-1958 crisis was of longer duration (it continued for about a year). Industrial output decreased sharply, but the decrease of the national product was insignificant and the general movement of the gross social product sooner resembled stagnation. As in preceding crises, personal consumption continued to grow and the main trend was again felt in foreign trade and capital investment. The worsened situation in foreign trade preceded and promoted the crisis. External economic difficulties mounted particularly in the second quarter of 1957, i.e., prior to the absolute decrease in production. In the second quarter of 1957 net investment began to decline and dropped by 29.6 per cent in the first quarter of 1958.

An analysis of the situation in 1957-1958, with the help of a one-sector dynamic model of the Japanese economy, shows that, in 1958, in the internal private sector (except government purchases and the foreign market) there was a small decrease of demand (by 0.1 per cent of the national income), which was explained by factors determining the demand for investment (a deficit amounting to 1.7 per cent of the national income), not fully compensated by the continued rise of personal consumption. It would seem that under these conditions, there should have been a general decrease of the national product in 1958, but when the crisis had already begun, the foreign trade balance improved and government purchases started to rise. Instead of a general lag of demand behind supply, an opposite situation arose.

The 1962-1963 crisis continued for about a year, but the drop in industrial output was small. As for the rest, it hardly differed from the 1957-1958 crisis.^^1^^

Its depth, however, was smaller. There was no general lag of demand on the part of the private sector in 1962.

An analysis of the factors which determine the change of demand for investment shows that there was a halt of their growth rather than a significant reduction.

The 1964-1965 crisis, which continued for about a year, resembled a prolonged stagnation. This time, the foreign trade situation was favourable. The boom in this sphere helped to localise the 1964-1965 crisis: industries and factories working chiefly for the foreign market prospered, while sectors oriented mainly on the home market were in a state of crisis. The decrease of net investment continued from the first quarter of 1964 to the first quarter of 1965 and amounted to 14 per cent.

On the whole, the reduction'of demand for investment in 1965 was compensated for by a rise in the demand for consumer goods. This predetermined the stagnating state of the economy. Some growth of the national product in 1965, as compared with the preceding year, was fully explained by the swift expansion of exports.

The 1970-1971 crisis initially developed independently of a direct connection with external conditions, which up to mid-1971 remained favourable. The stagnation in industrial output during this period was a result of a decrease of investment in fixed capital. Since^August 1971, however, the decisive factor in the further development of the crisis was difficulties in Japan's trade with the United States. The new stagnation in the country's economic development (also called the "Nixon shock") continued up to the end of 1971.

Comparing the cyclical characteristics of the postwar crises in Japan, we find that all of them were connected to some degree with a decrease of net investment in fixed capital and that this drop became smaller from crisis to crisis (54.7 per cent in 1953-1954; 29.6 per cent in 1957- 1958; 26 per cent in 1962-1963 and 14 per cent in 1964-1965). The duration of the period between the start of the next drop in investment and the time their preceding maximum was reached displayed only a weak tendency to decline from crisis to crisis.

An essential difference is revealed only when we compare the duration and intensity of the periods of growth in capital investment---between the points when the preceding maximum was reached and the new maximum.

~^^1^^ The crisis was preceded by a certain deterioration in foreign trade. After the fourth quarter of 1961 an improvement in this sphere was registered. Net investment dropped by 26 per cent from the fourth quarter of 1961 to the fourth quarter of 1962.

58

S. MENSHIKOV

POSTWAR CYCLES

59

The comparatively prolonged and intensive booms in 1959- 1961 and 1966-1970 stand out along with the comparatively brief periods of slow growth of investment in 1956-1957

and 1962-1964.

On the whole, investment booms coincide with periods of accelerated increase of the national product and periods of investment sluggishness, with comparatively slower growth of the national product. Usually, little attention is paid to these mid-term fluctuations, because the general rate of growth of the national product is sufficiently high in comparison with other countries.

If we examine periods of investment sluggishness as a form, specific for Japan, of the gradual adaptation of the economy to the overaccumulation of fixed capital (which play a similar role as periods of prolonged stagnation of investment in countries with slower economic growth rates), we can classify the 1953-1954, 1962-1963 and 1970-1971 crises as cyclical and the 1957-1958 and 1964-1965 crises as intermediate. The regularity of short fluctuations in Japan is indefinite (from two to six years), while the periodicity of the cyclical crisis (9 years) meets approximately expectations based on the theoretical considerations outlined

previously.

Let us now examine the role of external conditions ( government purchases and net exports) in Japan's postwar cycle. A change in the total magnitude of this indicator systematically^^1^^ reveals a countercyclical trend. This means that, as a rule, external conditions helped to cushion the crises. The exception was the sudden deterioration of foreign trade conditions in 1971, resulting from the sharp exacerbation of the international monetary crisis.

Changes of government purchases and net exports (in their sum total) were as follows:

first quarter of 1954-fourth quarter of 1961---growth by 10.7 per cent;

fourth quarter of 1961-third quarter of 1970---growth by

118.3 per cent.

In the first cycle (1953-1961), external conditions^"did not play an important stimulating role in the advance of production, while in the second cycle (1962-1970) their significance (alongside the investment boom) was primary.

For all these distinctions, both cycles have similar characteristics: the growth of the national product by 88.5 and 94.3 per cent respectively; an increase of investment by 187.2 and 111.1 per cent and of personal consumption by 82.2 and 79.7 per cent. The relative growth of investment •was much smaller in the second cycle: the general basis for the advance in the second cycle was the immense foreign economic expansion, alongside the reconstruction of industry and the building of new sectors. In contrast to this, the" first cycle rested chiefly on the development of the home market, which, to a considerable degree, was connected with the completion of postwar restoration and reconstruction. The 1953-1961 cycle "thus prepared favourable conditions for the subsequent foreign trade expansion.

CONCLUSIONS

An analysis of postwar reproduction in five principal capitalist countries (the United States, Britain, France, the FRG and Japan) shows:

1. In all these countries, without exception, economic development shows a distinctly pronounced cyclical movement with a more or less regular succession of periods of growth in production with periods of decline and stagnation. *^2. In all countries, except France, there is a well-- established periodicity of the cyclical crises, linked chiefly with the movement of investment in fixed capital. In the United States the interval between cyclical crises was 8-9 years, in Britain 9-10 years, in the Federal Republic of Germany 9 years and in Japan 9 years. In France, the last distinctly pronounced cyclical crisis dates back to 1952-1953. The absence of crises and/or stagnation of investment in that country (except, naturally, for brief pauses) in the subsequent period is apparently explained by the high proportion of steadily increasing government capital investment, combined with a more rigid system of long-term state planning of the economy.

3. In all countries, without'exception, there^were^also shorter crisis phenomena, which we call intermediate crises.

60 Hfe^^1^^-.''

S. MBNSHIKOV

A precise regularity in the recurrence of such crises was noted, however, only in Britain (4-5 years) and the FRG (4.5-5 years). In the United States, France and Japan the intermediate crises, as a rule, were not of a regular nature. Their origin was linked either with foreign trade difficulties and a drop in government purchases, or was deliberately caused by measures of state regulation. In some cases, they were the consequence of brief hitches in marketing the produced outputs.

4. The duration of postwar economic crises fluctuates, as a rule, from half a year to a year and a half. If we also consider periods of crisis stagnation, in some cases their duration may exceed two years (Britain, 1955-1958; the United States, 1969-1971). The duration of postwar crises corresponds approximately to what had been observed in the history of capitalist cycles prior to the Second World War. In the past, however, there were longer crises, for example, in 1929-1932 when the drop in production lasted for about three years, and if we also consider the subsequent fluctuations around the low level of production, about four years.

5. In the postwar crises the maximum drop of the monthly index of industrial production did not exceed 20 per cent and, as a rule, was less than 5-10 per cent. The drop in production, generally speaking, was smaller than in, the crises of the 1920s and the 1930s and somewhat smaller than in the crises prior to the 1920s.

The possibilities of a direct comparison with the earlier economic crises, over a long period, are quite limited, because of the lack of monthly statistics of industrial production in the preceding period.

That is why annual data have to be used for'such comparisons.

Table 2-9 shows "that, after the Second World War, crises in the United States, as a rule, were somewhat stronger than in the last quarter of the 19th century. In Britain, after the Second World War, in contrast to the preceding period, crises most often caused a halt in the growth or a very small reduction in theTannual volume of industrial output. The crises in France,-the'FRG and]Japan,*as]a7rule, led only to a sharp slowing down of the growth of annual production

Table 2-9

Changes in Industrial Production during Postwar and Earlier Crises (per cent, annual data)^^1^^

USA

Britain

France

FRG

Japan

1825-26(---8.9)

1836---37(---4.9)

1845---47(---3.2)

1857---58(-6.6)

1866---67(---1.6)

1867---70(---5.9)

1872---75(---5.6)

1877---79(---9.6)

1872---74(---6.2)

1883---85(---3.2)

1883-86(-8.2)

1879-80{---4.2)

1892---94(---14.2)

1891---93(---6.8)

1891---92(---3.4)

1903---04(---1.6)

1899---1901(---2.7)

1900---01(---4.5)

1900---01 (+0.3)

1900---02(---7.8)

1906-08(---16.7)

1907---08(---5.2)

1907---08(0.0)

1906---08(---6.5)

1907---08(---7.0)

1913---14(---8.2)

1913---14(---6.5)

1913---14(---4.5)

1920---21(---22.7)

1920---21 (---47. 4)

1920---21(---11.3)

1919---21(---24.0)

1929---32(---46.2)

1929---32(---16.5)

1930---32(---31.6)

1929---32(---46.7)

1929---31 (---8.4)

1937---38(---21.6)

1937-38(-6.5)

1937---38(---7.3)

1937---38(+1.2)

1948-49(---7.0)

1949-50(+0.9)

1953---54(---7.0)

1951---52(---2.6)

1952---53(+ 1.0)

1951---52(+6.0)

1953---54(+8.0)

1957---58(---6.9)

1957---58(---1.2)

1958---59(+1.3)

1957-58(+2.8)

1957-58(0.0)

1960---61 (+0.9)

1960---61(0.0)

1964---65(+1.8)

1962---63(+3.1)

1961---62(+8.4)

1966---67(+1.2)

1966---67(0.0)

1966---67(+3.4)

1966---67(-1.7)

1964-65(+3.4)

1969---71 (---4.1)

1970---71(0.8)

1970---71 (+5. 3)

1970---71(+1.6)

1970---71(+4.9)

l Sources: L. A. Mendelson, op. cit., Vol. II, Statistical Appendix; Vol. Ill, Statistical TaWes; League of Nations. Monthly Bulletin of Statistics, Geneva, No, 1, 1939; UN. Monthly bulletin oj Statistics, New York, January 1956, 1960; OECD. Historical Statistics. 1959-1969, Paris, 1971; Economic Report of the President of the United States, Washington, 1973, p. 232; Ekonomicheshoye polozheniye kapitalisticheshikh i razvivayushchihhsya sir an (The Economic Situation of Capitalist and Developing Countries), Moscow, 1972.

62

S. MENSIIIKOV

in the 1950s and the 1960s. In all cases the decrease in output in the postwar crises was much smaller than in^the 1920s and the 1930s.

Thus, the picture of the movement of the economic cycle in developed capitalist countries, examined separately, underwent noticeable changes in recent decades. Before turning to the causes of these changes it is expedient also to take into account international manifestations of cyclical phenomena.

CHAPTER 3

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

The cyclical nature of the development of the capitalist economy is displayed not only in the wave-like movement of production in individual countries. Since approximately the mid-19th century, i.e., after the cyclical movement arose in the leading industrially developed capitalist countries, economic crises began to spread more or less simultaneously throughout the entire capitalist world. World cycles arose and world economic crises appeared.

The merger of economic cycles in individual countries into one world cycle is a result of the intertwining of their economies, their economic drawing together. The process of the economic drawing together of countries under capitalism takes a form which, at the root, is contradictory to the nature of the productive forces on an international scale. World economic crises are one of manifestations of these contradictions.

The oldest (and to this day the most important) channel for the mutual spread of the economic cycle is international trade. It is not by chance that Marx described the economic crises of his time as veritable storms of the world market. In our days, alongside trade storms, destructive monetary hurricanes also break out on the world market.

As the share of finished goods (in particular, equipment) increases in trade among developed capitalist countries and different methods are used in the marketing of these goods (as compared with raw materials and other commodities), not only the movement of world commodity markets is of paramount importance for the development of the world

64

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

cycle, but also the movement of the flows of goods between these countries.

The export of^capital began to play a tremendous jrole^at the end of the 19th and early 20th centuries. Being, at first, primarily a movement from the principal capitalist^ countries to the colonies and semi-colonies, the export of capital later on, particularly beginning with the 1950s and the 1960s, took the form chiefly of the flow, intertwining and integration of the capital of industrially developed capitalist countries.

International monopolies, which control hundreds Aof enterprises in different capitalist countries, have become widespread. Making plans of production and sale for enterprises in country ``x'', the headquarters of an international concern located in country ``y'', takes into account the economic situation and prospects of change, not only in country ``x'' but also in other countries. Moreover, the financial situation of a subsidiary in country ``x'' may prove to be an essential factor influencing the operations of the concern in countries ``y'', ``z'', and so on. This channel of international communication, which has a direct bearing on the transmission of cyclical fluctuations from country to country, has developed only in recent decades and corresponds to capital exports known as "direct investments".^^1^^ Another form, "portfolio investments",^^2^^ long ago created a more flexible channel: the international shifting of long-term money capital through the stock exchange and the placing of securities by international bank consortiums. Such shifts linked together the movement of share prices on stock exchanges of individual countries, changes in the investment climate of some countries instantly affecting the climate in others.

Lastly, of considerable importance are the systematic migrations of short-term money capital. The stimuli for such migration, besides international-political reasons which we do not examine, can be: 1) the difference in the interest paid on deposits in banks and on short-term liquid securi-

ties in different countries; 2) speculative considerations linked with fluctuations of currency exchange rates, expectation of serious changes in monetary policy, movement of the price of gold, and so on.

The shifting of short-term money capital can reach a colossal scale. The movement of so-called hot money creates international monetary difficulties, encourages sharp flareups of balance-of-payment crises and, through them, influences the course of the economic cycle.

Other international contacts, too, are of definite significance in forming the world economic cycle, for example, the export and import of technology and migration of manpower.^^1^^

In the present chapter we shall consider the distinctive features of the postwar international cyclical movement. This analysis will be based mainly on the movement of the index of world industrial production, the volume of international trade, the physical volume of exports of individual countries and also a study of the comparative movement of share prices on stock exchanges. An attempt will be made to combine the cyclical movement in individual countries into a general picture of the world cycle. The interconnection of the cyclical movement with international monetary problems will be specially examined.

3.1. HAS THE WORLD CYCLE VANISHED?

There are several statistical indicators which characterise the movement of production in all capitalist countries. An indicator of total national product is available only in annual terms and cannot be fruitfully utilised for cyclical analysis. An index of industrial production of capitalist countries taken together and according to groups is available both on an annual and quarterly scale. As for monthly data, they have been calculated only for recent years. In the present work we utilise chiefly the quarterly indices of industrial production.

~^^1^^ See E. Pletnev, Mezhdunarodnaya migratslya rabochei sily v kapitalisticheskoi sisteme] mirovogo khozyaistva (International Migration of Manpower in the Capitalist World Economic System), Moscow 1962.

~^^1^^ Direct investments usually imply those which give the investor the right to control the respective enterprise.

~^^2^^ These usually are investments in foreign securities (shares and bonds), which do not give the owner the right of control.

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

B7

To trace the combined movement of the economy of the principal capitalist countries it is best to take the general index of industrial production in developed capitalist countries. Such an index has been published by the UN statistical service since 1962. For the preceding period, there is only a general index which includes both industrially

Table 3-1

Periods of Stagnation and Decline in Industrial

Production of Industrially Developed Capitalist Countries

(quarterly data)

cyclical movement in Britain, the Federal Republic of Germany, France and their neighbours.^^1^^

Assertions have been made in the literature that an analysis of Lhe movement of production as a whole can add little to an analysis of its components.^^2^^ It is difficult to agree with this statement. The movement of production in every country is graphically depicted by a curve, which shows fluctuations around some average annual trend. These fluctuations in different countries may, in some cases, coincide and in others diverge (in terms of the phase of the cycle). When the phases coincide, the general curve repeats fluctuations in individual countries but introduces changes in their amplitude; moreover, the magnitude of these changes depends on the respective weights in total production. With a divergence of the phases, the general curve may reveal entirely specific dynamics, again depending on the weights of its components.

It is clear that, in all cases, the general curve of production reflects cyclical fluctuations in a smoothed form (in other words, with a smaller amplitude) as compared with the national curve, which has the biggest amplitude of fluctuations. Let us turn, for example, to Table 3-1. The general movement of industrial production is mainly influenced by the cycle in the United States, especially in the period prior to the end of the 1950s (when their share in the total output of these countries reached 45-50 per cent). The drop in total production occurred even when in Western Europe as a whole (less than 30 per cent of the total output) growth was continuing. However, the relative reduction of output here was less than in the United States, because, in these countries, either growth continued or the decline was smaller. The less acute crisis of 1960-1961 in the

All industrially developed countries

Western Europe

Maximum

Minimum

Decline, per

cent

Maximum

Minimum

Decline, per

cent

3rd quarter of 1948

3rd quarter of 1949

2.5

Continuation of growth

1st quarter of 1951

2nd quarter of 1952

2.0

1st quarter of 1951

3rd quarter of 1951

1.1

2nd quarter of 1953

1st quarter of 1954

0.5

Continuation of growth

1st quarter of 1957

2nd quarter of 1958

3.9

1st quarter of 1957

3rd quarter of 1958

0.4

Sharp slowing down of growth

1st quarter ol 1966

4th quarter o! 1966

2.5

2nd quarter of 1970

1st quarter of 1971

1.3

Sharp slowii 1970

ig down of growth 1971 1

~^^1^^ Data on industrial production used subsequently are taken from the UN. Monthly Bulletin of Statistics, New York, July 1952-56; August 1958-66; November 1970. The indices have different bases: 1948,1953, 1958 and 1963. We have made the respective recalculations. The indices are not adjusted for seasonal fluctuations. In cases where doubts arose concerning the validity of the conclusions, we compared the semi-annual indices, which smooth over seasonal fluctuations, or used a moving average for four quarters.

~^^2^^ See 0. Morgenstern, International Financial Transactions and Business Cycles, Princeton, 1959, pp. 32-33.

5*

developed capitalist countries and developing countries. We also made use of the index of industrial production in Western Europe for a generalised characteristic of the

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

United States only slowed down the growth of total production.

A different situation arose when the source of the crisis originated in Western Europe. Thus, the 1962-1963 crisis scarcely influenced the movement of total production. The 1966-1967 crisis, which arose in Britain and the FRG, was sufficiently strong but it was not ``supported'' in some other countries of Western Europe, while in the United States, the crisis was interrupted by the escalation of military spending. The result was only a sharp deceleration of rates of growth, but not a halt in the general growth of production. Only in one case (1951-1952) did the all-European crisis bring about a reduction of the total industrial output of capitalist countries.

On the whole, the existence should be noted of fluctuation in the movement of total production of capitalist countries mainly caused by either crises in the United States (1948- 1949, 1953-1954) or in Western Europe (1951-1952, 1966- 1967) or in different regions of the capitalist world simultaneously (1957-1958, 1969-1971). Very roughly, we may consider the last two economic crises (1957-1958 and 1969- 1971) as world crises. We shall examine this question again later.

Now let us see how fluctuations of production have influenced the movement of international trade.

As was to be expected, the movement of international trade depends closely on changes in the volume of output. We can single out two periods of an absolute decrease in trade: 1951-1952 and 1957-1958 and three periods of stagnation: 1949, 1967 and 1970-1971. In contrast to the movement of total production, all cases of decrease or stagnation in international trade coincide with analogous phenomena in the overall foreign trade of West European countries. This is natural if we bear in mind that the share of these countries combined in international trade is more than twice as high as that of the USA.

The decrease of trade in 1957-1958 and 1970-1971 coincided with world economic crises (according to our preliminary classification). The decline of trade in 1950-1952 reflected both the economic crisis in Western Europe and also the prolonged crisis on the world raw-material market (which

Table 3-2

Periods of Stagnation and Decline in the Physical Volume of the International Trade of Capitalist Countries in 1947-19G7

All capitalist countries

Western Europe

Maximum

Minimum

Decline, per cent

Maximum

Minimum

Decline, per cent

1st quarter of 1949

3rd quarter of 1949

0.0

4th quarter of 1948

3rd quarter of 1949

0.0

1st quarter of 1951

4th quarter of 1952

3.0

4th quarter of 1950

4th quarter of 1952

3.6

1st quarter of 1957

3rd quarter of 1958

3.0

1st quarter of 1957

2nd quarter of 1958

2.6

1st quarter of 1967

3rd quarter of 1967

0.0

1st quarter of 1967

3rd quarter of 1967

0.0

continued for almost two years). At the beginning of the Korean war (1950-1951), the United States steeply increased imports of raw materials for replenishing its strategic stockpiles. In 1951, these purchases were suddenly stopped, which greatly upset the world market. Thus, the crisis of international trade in 1951-1952 was determined by both cyclical factors and instability engendered by the militarisation of the economy.

Economic crises in individual countries lead first of all to a decline of their imports because, with a decrease in production, all other conditions being equal, the demand for imported raw and other materials and equipment and to a certain extent for' consumer goods drops. "All other conditions being equal" in this case means an approximate equality of prices of imported and national goods of the same quality or substitute goods of comparable quality. If imported goods are relatively more expensive, the demand for them drops sharply, if they are relatively cheap, the demand for them decreases little or not at all. Moreover, in our days.

70

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

71

special protectionist measures against imports, especially in countries where imported goods are relatively cheap, have become the usual practice.

Let us examine the movement of the physical volume of imports of the principal capitalist countries,^^1^^ in the last quarter of the century, comparing it with the earlier data on the decline in production (see Chapter 2).

United States. In the 1948-1949 crisis the reduction of imports began in the second quarter of 1948 and continued up to the third quarter of 1949. In point of time the decrease of imports preceded the drop in production by one quarter. Thus, the imports already began to drop in the final stage of the advance (when production growth only slowed down sharply but had not yet stopped). Imports declined by 6.7 per cent, i.e., slightly more than the national product and a little less than industrial production.

The next curtailment of US imports occurred in the period between the first quarter of 1951 and the second quarter of 1952---a decline of 7.5 per cent. The reason for this contraction, as pointed out earlier, was the sudden stopping of the special purchases of strategic raw materials by the US Government. The decrease in imports was not connected with cyclical processes in the United States, because production continued to rise during this time.

When the 1953-1954 crisis began, American imports hardly exceeded the maximum reached in the first quarter of 1951. The new drop in imports (from the second quarter of 1953 to the fourth quarter of 1954) was more substantial than the preceding one---11.8 per cent. It was larger than the decline of industrial production (it should be noted that it began simultaneously with the internal economic crisis, but continued for a half a year longer). The highest precrisis point of imports was exceeded only in the fourth quarter of 1955---2.5 years after the crisis began.

Generally speaking, the entire period of 1951-1955 was marked by stagnation or decline of US imports. This created unfavourable conditions for the economic development of

countries whose production depended directly on exports to the United States.

In contrast to this situation, the comparatively stronger 1957-1958 crisis led only to a certain deceleration of the growth of imports. By that time, the West European industrial countries had already recovered from the consequences of the Second World War and consolidated their competitive positions in international trade. Some of them---- primarily the FRG---became active suppliers of finished goods to the United States. West European and, later on, Japanese industrial goods, which are relatively cheaper than American, were not greatly affected by the protectionist measures usually employed by the US Administration during crises. For this reason, the US 1957-1958 crisis did not exert a direct unfavourable impact on the economy of most West European countries. On the contrary, the growth of competitive imports of finished goods from Western Europe to the USA only intensified the American economic crisis during those years.

The 1960-1961 crisis again brought about a decline of imports, by 7.7 per cent from the second quarter of 1960 to the first quarter of 1961. The curtailment of imports was approximately of the same size as the drop in industrial production, but considerably exceeded the decrease of the national product. It would seem that the influence of foreign competition, displayed in the 1957-1958 crisis, had exhausted itself. However, that was merely a temporary return to the old mechanism of the dependence of imports on production. Subsequently, up to 1969, imports to the United States grew steadily, with the rate slowing down only slightly during the 1966-1967 crisis.

In the 1969-1971 crisis, the drop in imports was much smaller than in the'crisesof 1948-1949, 1953-1954 and 1960- 1961. Between the second quarter of 1969 and the third quarter of 1970, imports fell only 3.5 per cent. Subsequently, regardless of the depressed state of the economy, imports stopped declining and, moreover, even rose swiftly, exceeding (by 6.7 per cent) the precrisis maximum in the second and third quarters of 1971. Yet production in the United States at that time was still lower than before the crisis began. This compelled the US Government to resort, in the

~^^1^^ The sources for 1947-1959 data are: UN. Monthly Bulletin of Statistics, July 1949-1960; for 1959-1969, OECD. Main Economic Indicators. Historical Statistics. 1959-1969, Paris, 1970.

72

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

73

summer of 1971, to emergency measures of a protectionist nature (see Section 3.2).

The mechanism of the link between production and imports thus gradually changed in the United States. The general tendency consisted in lessening the impact of US crises on the economies of other industrially developed countries via foreign trade.

There is a strong desire of the US Administration, which acts in the interests of American business, to even out the competitive conditions facing its corporations. Such efforts, if they were successful, could ultimately restore the old mechanism of the influence of production on imports. It would hardly be realistic, however, to expect complete success for such attempts.

Britain. The first period of the postwar stagnation of imports dates back to the end of 1947-the beginning of 1949. Throughout 1948 imports were below those of the third quarter of 1947; the maximum 1947 level was topped only in the third quarter of 1949. This decline of imports was not directly connected with the movement of production in Britain: during this time output continued to rise. At the lowest point, the decline of imports amounted to 6.7 per cent. The shrinking of imports is apparently explained primarily by Britain's acute currency difficulties in that period, the abolition of the convertibility of the pound and government restrictions on imports.

The second contraction of imports followed closely on the first. Starting in the fourth quarter of 1949, it reached its lowest point in the fourth quarter of 1950. Again, the drop (5.9 per cent) was not directly caused by a decline in production, which had already ended in August 1949. A direct connection can be traced with the consequences of the devaluation of the pound in September 1949, which raised considerably the price of goods imported into Britain.

The third shrinkage in imports, in contrast to the preceding ones, came as a direct result of the economic crisis. Between the third quarter of 1951 and the third quarter of 1952, imports declined by 22.4 per cent. This was the biggest drop of British imports in postwar years. It exceeded considerably the decrease in production because, alongside the spontaneous forces of the crisis, special import restrictions

introduced by the Government were in operation. Stagnation of imports continued for a long time---up to the beginning of 1955.

The protracted 1955-1958 crisis caused a fourth reduction of imports, a little more than half a year after the preceding one was completed. The relative scale of the decrease corresponded to the drop in industrial production.

During the 1961-1962 economic crisis, the shrinkage oj imports was small (3 per cent)---from the first quarter of 1961 to the first quarter of 1963. The 1966-1967 crisis was preceded by stagnation of imports, which began in the second quarter of 1964 under the impact of government restrictions. In 1966, imports dropped by 4.3 per cent. The stagnation and decrease lasted for 2.5 years.

On the whole, in Britain we can trace an obvious and scarcely changing mechanism of the dependence of imports on production. Economic crises have invariably been accompanied by a curtailment of imports, followed by a prolonged period of stagnation. Alongside the directly cyclical forces, the decrease of imports was usually caused by special restrictive measures by the British Government. In the first postwar years, import crises, not being directly connected with internal economic crises, were mainly caused by flareups of monetary crises.

Federal Republic of Germany. The first decrease of imports here coincided with the economic crisis of 1951-1952. Imports declined by 7.1 per cent between the first and the fourth quarters of 1951. This drop was larger than the small decrease in production, but less prolonged. In 1952, the growth of imports was resumed, although stagnation in production continued.

The 1957-1958 crisis hardly affected imports which continued to rise quite swiftly. A similar situation also arose during the 1961-1963 crisis, when only a slowing down in the growth rate of imports was registered.

The second postwar decrease of imports occurred during the 1966-1967 crisis. The precrisis maximum was reached in the fourth quarter of 1965 and the lowest point in the first quarter of 1967. Up to the third quarter of the same year, however, imports were in a depressed state. They dropped by 7.7 per cent, i.e., to the same extent as indu-

74

S. MENSHIKOV

strial production, but the swift growth of imports was resumed almost immediately after the crisis ended and, just as during the 1951-1952 crisis, there was no prolonged stagnation.

On the whole, FRG imports were subjected to cyclical fluctuations to a lesser extent than, say, imports of the United States and especially Britain. This is partly explained by the absence of currency difficulties and governmental import restrictions. The comparative competitiveness of West German goods remained sufficiently high all this time, but the relative shortage of some goods on the home market up to the 1966-1967 crisis determined the continued growth of imports.

Japan. The first postwar reduction of imports was caused by the 1953-1954 crisis. The highest point was in the third quarter of 1953 and the lowest in the fourth quarter of 1954. Imports dropped by as much as 23.1 per cent, in other words, to a greater extent than production.

The second decline of imports coincided with the 1957- 1958 crisis. The precrisis maximum was registered in the second quarter of 1957 and the biggest drop was in the second quarter of 1958. Again the contraction was quite big, 30 per cent, exceeding three times the decrease in industrial output. The precrisis maximum was surpassed only in the third quarter of 1959, 2.5 years later.

The third decline in imports began in the third quarter of 1961 and continued up to the fourth quarter of 1962, in other words, mainly coincided with the 1961-1962 crisis. This time the drop in imports was more moderate, 9.9 per cent, which, however, was three times greater than the decline in industrial production.

The 1964-1965 crisis resulted only in stagnation of imports (a maximum decline of 1.8 per cent) which in duration (starting at the beginning of 1964 and up to the end of 1965) was longer than the crisis stagnation of production. In 1970- 1971, imports stagnated for more than a year and the decline reached 4.7 per cent.

On the whole, the mechanism of the dependence of Japanese imports on internal cyclical movements was strikingly pronounced, particularly up to the 1964-1965 crisis. Since that crisis, however, imports have fluctuated less.

Table 3-3

Decrease in Physical Volume of Exports in 1947-1971 (quarterly data)

USA

Britain

FRG

Japan

Maximum

Minimum

Decrease, per

cent

Maximum

Minimum

Decrease,1 per cent

Maximum

Minimum

Decrease, per cent

Maximum

Minimum

Decrease, per cent

2nd

3rd

27.8

quarter

quarter

of 1947

of 1948

2nd

3rd

22.3

1st

3rd

8.3

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

of 1949

of 1950

of 1949

of 1949

2nd

4th

9.7

2nd

1st

9.2

3rd

1st

5.3

1st

4th

9.0

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

of 1951

of 1952

of 1951

of 1953

of 1951

of 1952

of 1952

of 1952

3rd

3rd

14.5

quarter

quarter

of 1953

of 1954

4th

1st

24.2

4th

4th

2nd

1st

0.0

3rd

4th

8.5

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

ol 1956

of 1959

of 1956

of 1958

of 1957

of 1958

of 1957

of 1958

2nd

1st

2.9

1st

1st

3.2

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

of 1962

of 1963

of 1961

of 1962

3rd

3rd

1.9

1st

1st

0.0

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

of 1963

of 1964

of 1962

of 1963

4th

2nd

5.4

quarter

quarter

of 1965

of 1966

1st

4th

17.5

4th

4th

1.9

quarter

quarter

quarter

quarter

of 1967

of 1967

of 1966

of 1967

76

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

77

Thus, the biggest influence of the internal cycle through the ``production-import'' mechanism was observed in the United States (up to the mid-1950s) and in Britain ( throughout the postwar period). In Japan in the 1950s, in spite of the very powerful operation of this mechanism, the effect was comparatively weak owing to the small share of this country in international trade. In the FRG, the ``production-import'' mechanism was comparatively weak; nevertheless in 1951-1952 and in 1966-1967 it influenced international trade considerably.

Let us supplement our analysis by examining the cyclical tendencies in the exports of the principal capitalist countries (see Table 3-3).

Up to the beginning of the 1960s, every 2-3 years there was a sharp decline of exports in the United States, which, every time, had an unfavourable effect on American production. An exact coincidence of these crises with economic crises in the United States, was, however, more often the exception than the rule (1953-1954 and 1956-1959). The drop of exports in 1947-1948 preceded the 1948-1949 crisis and, possibly, facilitated its development.

The fall of US exports is connected with economic crises in other countries, although it is also possible to name some quite important exceptions. Thus, in 1947-1948, as the economy of West European and other countries was restored, there was a gradual decline in their need for emergency purchases of US raw materials and food, which had helped to send up American exports in 1945-1947 and had intensified the dollar shortage experienced by importers of US goods.

In 1956, exports of oil and coal from the USA grew unusually, owing to the fuel crisis in Western Europe as a result of the closing of the Suez Canal. In 1957-1959, as the consequences of the Anglo-Franco-Israeli intervention were eliminated, the need for US deliveries of fuel declined and exports returned to their usual level. This curtailment coincided with the 1957-1958 crisis. The lower imports in 1953-1954, also, were not caused by cyclical phenomena in other countries.

The closest connection with the cycle in Western Europe can be traced in 1951-1952 and 1962-1963. During these

years, however, the US economy was at the phase of advance or recovery and the declining exports did not exert an important influence.

In contrast to the United States, all periods of export decline in Britain, the FRG and Japan were during economic crises in the United States or Western Europe. FRG exports are sensitive to West European crises, and those of Japan and Britain, to crises in the United States or Western Europe. However, British exports react more sharply and frequently than the Japanese.

On the whole, if we examine only foreign trade, we arrive at the following conclusions about the distinctive features of the international ``transfer'' of economic cycles in the last quarter of a century:

1. The economic cycle in the United States, as a rule, depends least of all on cycles in other capitalist countries. The influence of the West European and Japanese cycles on the American was insignificant;^^1^^

2. Up to the beginning of the 1960s, cycles in the United States exerted a considerable influence on cycles in Western Europe and Japan;

3. Notwithstanding the definite influence of American cycles, local cyclical movement, as a rule, prevailed in Western Europe and Japan; the mutual influence of cycles of West European countries was, perhaps, more considerable than the impact of American cycles;

4. Britain was subjected to strong influence from both American cycles and cycles in other countries.

3.2. MONEY CRISES

On August 15, 1971, the President of the United States announced the complete discontinuation of the exchange of dollars for gold. In December 1971, the dollar was devalued in relation to other currencies by 12 per cent on the average. In February 1973, the dollar was again devalued by another 10 per cent. The big rise in the rates of the currencies of

~^^1^^ The relatively greater influence of production fluctuations in a large country is demonstrated in econometric models in Chapter 7.

r

Table 3-4

Stock-Exchange Crises in the Principal

Capitalist Countries in 1947-1971 '

FRG

Japan

drop in

drop in

drop in

share

share

share

min.

price index,

max.

min.

price index,

max.

min.

price index,

per

per

per

cent

cent

rent

May

1949

24.0

November

May

May

February

Novem-

1952

11.7

1952 1953

17.4

1953

ber

1954

49.1

February

April

February

February

December

1956

14.3

1955 1957

48.2

1957 1957

19.0

July

1958

32.5

August

August

1960 1961

27.2

October

December

October

1961

11.2

1961 1962

41.7

June 1964

39.0

February 1962

March 1967

51.3

USA

Britain

Prance

max.

min.

drop In share price index, per cent

max.

min.

drop in share price index, per cent

max.

February 1947

February 1948

9.8

May 1947

February 1948

21.6

June 1948

June 1949

17.fi

January 1949

October 1949

19.0

October 1948

March 1953

September 1953

10.0

October 1951

June 1952

25.9

February 1952

August 1956

February 1957

8.8

June 1955

November 1956

26.2

April 1955

July 1957

January 1958

18.0

July 1957

February 1958

20.0

August 1957

December 1959

October 1960

10.3

December 1959

April 1960

7.4

December 1961

June 1962

23.3

April 1961

June 1962

24.7

April 1961

September 1964

July 1965

15.3

April 1962

80

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

81

Continuation

USA

Britain

France

max.

min.

drop in share price index, per cent

max.

min.

drop in share price index, per cent

max.

January 1966

October 1966

17.6

June 1966

December 1966

18.9

December 1964

December 1968

June 1970

29.5

June 1969

June 1970

32.5

December 1970

--------

FRG

Japan

---

drop in

drop in

drop in

share

share

share

mill.

price index

max.

min.

price index,

max.

min.

price index ,

per

per

per

cent

cent

cent

July

April

July

1967

26.1

1964 1966

34.2

June

November

December

April

December

1970

13.5

1969 1970

23.3

1970 1970

18.5

~^^1^^ All data come from UN. Monthly Bulletin of Statistics, New York, July

other countries occurred as a result of the pressing demand of the United States.

Let us recall that almost a quarter of a century earlier, in September 1949, the British Government devalued the pound by 30 per cent. This was followed by the devaluation of the currencies of most capitalist countries, including France and the Federal Republic of Germany. The pound and other currencies were also devalued under US: pressure.

August 1971 and September 1949 in a way symbolise the deep changes in the relationship of forces among the principal capitalist countries on the international monetary and' financial arena. These dates are also symbolic in one more respect. Both monetary crises relate to periods of big cyclical; upheavals. What is the link between monetary crises and: the economic cycle and economic crises?

The Marxist theory places monetary-financial crises in the category of money crises and differentiates between two types. One is caused directly by crises of overproduction, i.e., is a direct reflection of the economic crisis in the moneycredit sphere, represents one of its forms and at the same time is a component part of the development of the economic crisis. Crises of the other type arise independently.

1948-1960, 1970-197 1; OECV. Historical Statistics. 195S-19UU. Paris, 1971.

Not being directly connected with the cause of the economic cycle, such monetary crises are determined mainly by specific contradictions accumulated in the money-credi sphere.^^1^^

Money crises can develop in the form of stock-exchange, credit and monetary (currency) crises. In the course of cyclical economic crises, individual types of money crises are often combined.

Let us first examine the postwar stock-exchange crises. A general summary is given in Table 3-4 and Fig. 3-1. The table singles out only drops in share prices which lasted for more than 6 months.^^2^^

Stock-exchange crises usually precede a crisis decline of production or accompany its initial stage. On the basis of this premise, it is possible to single out the following stockexchange crises directly linked with postwar economic cri-

~^^1^^ Karl Marx, Capital, Vol. I, p. 137. The history of money crises is the subject of the following works: I. A. Trakhtenberg, Denezhniye krizisy (Monetary Crises), Moscow, 1963.

~^^2^^ The comparative depth and duration of these crises is examined in Section 4.1.

82

S. MENSHIKOV

ses: in the United States---1948-1949, 1953, 1957-1958, 1959- 1960, 1966 and 1968-1970; in firitein---1949, 1951-1952, 1955-1956, 1957-1958, 1961-1962, 1964-1965; in France- 1949, 1951-1952, 1957-1958, 1962-1964; in the FRG-~ 1952-1953, 1955-1957, 1961-1962, 1964-1966, 1969-1970; in Japan---1953-1954, 1957, 1962-1967, 1970. As we see, most of the postwar stock-exchange crises belong to this category.

Among the stock-exchange crises not directly connected with economic crises in the respective countries we can place the following: in the United States---1947-1948, 1956-1957, 1961-1962; in Britain---1947-1948, 1959-1960, 1966, 1969- 1970; in Frarcce-1955-1956, 1961, 1964-1967, 1970; in the FRG---1960-1961; in Japan there were no such crises. A study of these crises makes, it clear that some of them, not being directly a reflection of economic crises in their own countries, were closely linked with stock-exchange crises in other countries, i.e., could have been caused by the influence of crises in other countries. This applies to a large extent to Britain (1959-1960, 1966, 1969-1970), France (1961 and 1970), the FRG (1960-1961). The stock-exchange crisis in 1947-1948 in the United States and Britain was not connected with economic crises. The 1955-1956 and 1964-1967 crises in France and, to some degree, the prolonged stockexchange crises of 1964-1967 in the FRG and in 1962-1967 in Japan were caused not only by economic crises, but most probably reflected the fundamental change in the conditions of the long-term money markets in these countries, i.e., possessed many traits of a money crisis of the second type. In the United States, the 1961-1962 crisis was not directly linked with its ``own'' internal crisis. It coincided with an abrupt turn of events on the stock exchanges of other countries, but it is hardly probable that the external influence on Wall Street was decisive at that time. That is why we also place it among crises of the second type.

Fig. 3-1 clearly shows the international nature of postwar stock-exchange crises.^^1^^ The 1949, 1957-1958, 1962-1963 and

~^^1^^ The synchronism of stock-exchange fluctuations is examined in Section 3.3.

099-2.jpg

\ - Britain \

France.

099-3.jpg

1948 , 1950 , 1952 1954 1956 1958 1960 1962 , 1964 1966 1968 1970

1947 1949^ 1951 ' 1953 ' 1955 ' 1957 ' 1959 ' 1961 ' 1963 ' 1965 ' 1967

1969

Fig. 3-1. Period of Rise and Decline in Share Prices on the Stock Exchanges of the Principal Capitalist Countries (1947-1971)

84

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

1970-1971 crises were of a common nature in all the examined capitalist countries. The 1949 crisis encompassed all countries with an actively functioning capital market (i.e., except the FRG and Japan). In the 1957-1958 crisis, the FRG did not participate formally but the stock-exchange recession there occurred somewhat earlier. In the 1949 and 1970-1971 crises, the ``initiative'' obviously belonged to Wall Street, where the drop in share prices somewhat exceeded the stock-exchange storms in other countries. In 1962-1963, the crisis started in Britain and then spread to the United States, the FRG, France and Japan. In 1957-1958 share prices dropped almost simultaneously in four countries. International stock-exchange crises of a more limited character were linked with phenomena of two types:

1) the influence of so;ne American crises on the money markets of other countries (predominantly Britain, at times Japan and the FRG); these were the crises in 1947-1948, 1953-1954, 1960-1961 and 1966-1967;

2) simultaneous crises of West European stock exchanges which did not spread to the United States and Japan; these were the 1952-1953, 1955-1956 and 1965-1966 crises.

Let us now go over to a description of the monetary crises of the postwar period. Different meanings are invested in the term "monetary crisis". At times, a monetary crisis is understood as a) the general state of capitalist currencies after 1930-1931, associated with the full collapse of the gold standard; b) the state of the monetary system after the Second World War and up to the end of the 1950s, when currencies of most capitalist countries were not freely convertible; c) as applied to an individual country---a balanceof-payment deficit over many years, which causes a serious weakening of the international position of its currency. (At one historical stage or another this may apply to the American dollar, the British pound or the French franc.) Subsequently, we shall deal with all three meanings, but in this chapter, the term "monetary crisis" is used in a narrower sense.

We shall regard as a feature of a monetary crisis in the narrower sense, a sharp upset of the balance-of-payment equilibrium sufficient to cause a dangerous drop in the foreign exchange resources of a country and which leads

to the official depreciation (devaluation) of its currency or the discontinuation of its free exchange for gold or for other currencies.

Just as the other types of money crises, monetary crises can be either directly linked with the economic cycle or arise owing to the relatively independent development of contradictions in the sphere of international payments. The direct link with the economic cycle is displayed above all in the influence of the cycle on the balance of foreign trade. All other conditions heing equal, a change of commodity imports by a capitalist country is directly connected with changes in the volume of national industrial production. In contrast to this, the commodity exports of a given country, ignoring other factors, change under the influence of fluctuations in the volume of the national production of other countries.

Imports rise swiftly in the phase of cyclical advance. If the growth of exports for some reasons lags behind, the equilibrium of the foreign trade balance is upset and thereby an economic basis is created for the rise of a monetary crisis. Such a crisis can either be a signal of an oncoming economic crisis or one of its first signs. The probability of a monetary crisis setting in during the phase of cyclical advance is the greater, the lower the competitiveness of the given country on foreign markets, the slower the growth rates of its exports, the smaller its gold and exchange reserves and the worse its balance of payments on non-trade operations.^^1^^

Monetary crises also arise outside a connection with a disequilibrium in the trade balance. Its direct cause could be the flight of capital from the given country, solely under the influence of relations arising in the money sphere. An economic crisis in a country, however, may promote the flight of capital and, consequently, a monetary crisis. In this case, the monetary crisis is more likely to coincide with the final than the initial stage of the economic crisis.

There is a strong feedback from a monetary crisis to the economic cycle. On the one hand, to reduce a monetary crisis, governments of capitalist countries take measures to restrict internal consumption and internal capital invest-

~^^1^^ See econometric models of external economic ties in Chapter 7.

86

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

87

ments^^1^^. Such measures may directly halt the cyclical advance and give rise to an economic crisis in the country. On the other hand, government measures may be of a more aggressive nature vis-a-vis other countries: the organisation of currency and ordinary dumping, the introduction of superprotectionist trade-political and monetary measures against foreign goods.

While in the first case the general economic crisis arises in a country subjected to a monetary crisis, in the second case there is increasing danger of carrying over the economic and monetary crisis to other countries. Among steps of this type, for example, were the so-called emergency measures of the US Administration in August 1971.

Table 3-5 shows the main external manifestations of the postwar monetary crises in capitalist countries.

The monetary crisis 'Of 1947-1948 in Britain and France was brought about by a sharp deterioration of their foreign exchange and economic positions, as a result of the Second World War, while the devaluation of the West German mark was a component part of the monetary reform which put an end to the economic dislocation in the Western occupation zones of Germany.

In contrast to this, the mass devaluation of capitalist currencies in September 1949 was caused directly by the economic crisis in the United States and the consequent deterioration of the foreign trade positions of other countries. The 1957-1958 devaluations in France are explained by specific reasons rooted in the general conditions of the country's economic development, but their coincidence with the world economic crisis can hardly be regarded as purely accidental.

'jThe devaluation of the pound in 1967 came as a belated reaction to the economic crisis in Britain in 1965-1966. This devaluation assumed an international character. It was followed by the partial discontinuation of the free exchange of dollars for gold. The devaluation of the franc in 1969 holds a somewhat special position, and it is not directly linked with the economic cycle.

JThe dollar crisis in May-December 1971 was not only a result of the drawn-out structural disequilibrium of the

~^^1^^ See also Section 6.3.

Table 3-5

Devaluation and Non-Convertibility of Capitalist Currencies

(data and percentage of devaluation

in relation to the dollar or of the dollar

in relation to other currencies)^^1^^

USA

Britain

France

FRG

January

1948-54.5

June 1947---in-

October

June

convertibility September 1949---30.5

1948-21.9 September 1949-4.9

1948---25.0 September 1949---20.7

October

1957---16.7

December

1958---14.9

March 1968---- partial discontinua-

November 1967---14.3

August 1969-12.9

tion of exchan-

ge for gold

August 1971---- complete discontinuation of exchange

for gold

December

June-November

1971---12.0

1972-10.0

February

1973---10.0

i Revaluations of currencies are not shown. The most important revaluations were of the West German mark (in 1961, 1969, 1971 and 1973) and of the Japanese yen (in December 1971).

US balance of payments but, moreover, was linked directly with the prolonged economic crisis and stagnation of 1969- 1971.

fThe most acute external manifestations of monetary crises conceal deeper processes in reproduction and also in the credit-money sphere. These processes cause balance-of-

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

payment deficits which are inevitably accompanied by a shrinkage in the gold and foreign exchange reserves of the respective countries. Table 3-6 shows that periods of balanceof-payment deficit are much more frequent than devaluations and other open displays of a monetary crisis. Between 1959 and 1971 the United States was three times subjected to periods of a sharp drop in its gold and exchange reserves,^^1^^ but only in the third case did it end in devaluation. In the first case, the US Government introduced restrictions on the export of long-term capital; in the second case, it stopped the exchange of dollars, held by foreign private persons and companies, for gold. The long delay of devaluation was possible only because the United States had a big gold stock, which was shrinking only gradually. Only when this stock dropped from $23,000 million (1957) to $10,000 million (l£»70) did the American authorities decide to devalue the dollar in order to stop the outflow of gold.

During the same period. Britain had five balance-of-- payment crises. Having no large gold and exchange reserves, and to prevent devaluation, the British authorities resorted several times to special measures designed to restrict internal consumption and imports. Britain repeatedly received big loans from other countries and from the International Monetary Fund; nonetheless she had to devalue the pound twice.

France was twice subjected to the blows of a monetary crisis. In the first case, it was comparatively mild but the second blow led to a reduction of the foreign exchange reserves accumulated over a number of years by more than 40 per cent and forced the government to devalue the franc.

Between 1959 and 1971, Japan was harassed by monetary difficulties four times, but in no case were they particularly acute. Most of the time, the Japanese authorities relied on foreign exchange restrictions, because the gold and exchange reserves of Japan were comparatively small up to the end of the 1960s.

In the Federal Republic of Germany, a balance-of-- paynaent crisis arose twice. The West German authorities did not resort to foreign exchange restrictions, because the Bundesbank had substantial gold and exchange reserves.

Periods of balance-of-payment crises seldom arise simultaneously in the principal capitalist countries. If one country has a deficit, some other countries must at the same time have a favourable balance, because the sum total of all the balances of payments of all countries participating in international settlements is always equal to zero. This is not the only point, however. It was already noted in the last century that balance-of-payment crises gradually spread from country to country and set in one after another.

USA

Britain

France

FRG

Japan

1959 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72

Fig. 3-2. Periods of a Sharp Decrease in the Gold and Exchange Reserves of the Principal Capitalist Countries in 1959-1971.

Fig. 3-2 illustrates this regularity in the 1960s and the early 1970s. The first ``jolt'' in this series of balance-- ofpayment crises was felt in the mid-1960s in the United States and then spread to Britain, France and Japan. At the end of 1963 a fresh wave of the crisis arose in Japan, moving then to the FBG and Britain. The next wave, in 1966, began in the FRG and then also hit Japan, Britain, France and the United States. The balance-of-payment crisis of the United States in 1970-1971 was so strong and prolonged that for a certain time most other countries were in a ``favourable'' monetary position. Such a situation proved to be fraught with fresh sharp outbursts of the trade and monetary war.

~^^1^^ The onflow of gold from the USA continued almost unabated from 1957 to 1970. Here we refer only to periods when it rose steeply.

90

S. MENSHIKOV

To what extent are balance-of-payment crises engendered by a disequilibrium of trade balances? By comparing the data of Tables 3-6 and 3-7 we can arrive at the following conclusions:

1) In the United States, the monetary crises of 1967-1968 and 1970-1971 were, to a large extent, caused by the deterioration of the trade balance. In contrast, the 1960-1961 crisis had no "foreign-trade basis", while the deterioration of the trade balance in 1961-1962 and 1964-1966 was not felt in the monetary sphere.

2) In Britain, the exacerbation of foreign trade problems played a definite role in the development of the monetary crises of 1964 and 1966-1967. In most cases, however, a reduction of the gold and exchange reserves had other reasons.

3) In France, in both instances the monetary crises were connected with a deterioration of the trade balance. The prolonged disequilibrium in foreign trade in 1961-1964 did not cause a monetary crisis, because of the measures taken by the government in 1963-1964 to restrict consumption and internal investment.

4) In the Federal Republic of Germany and Japan balanceof-payment crises were associated almost exclusively with difficulties in foreign trade.

5) In France, the FRG and Japan all periods of deterioration in the trade balance coincide with the final phase of the advance preceding an economic crisis.

Thus, the balance-of-payment crises during this period were largely a manifestation of the economic cycle. In the United States and Britain, this connection in the 1960s is traced only in individual cases. Usually, however, periods of a deterioration in the balance of trade occurred most often at the early stages of postcrisis recovery.

Table 3-8 presents data on periods when short-term interest rates were lowered. Their movement exerts a considerable influence on the balance of payments. As long as the rates are high, they attract short-term capital to a given country and ease the consequences of the disequilibrium of the trade balance in the monetary sphere. A reduction of the rate in the period of economic crisis, on the other hand, promotes an outflow of short-term capital from the

Table 3-6

Periods of Decline in the Gold and Foreign Exchange Reserves of the Principal Capitalist Countries (the decline in per cent is given in brackets)

USA

Britain

France

FRG

Japan

May 1960---

December 1960---

March 1961---

April 1961

February 1961

July 1961

January 1962

(27.0)

(10.3)

(24.1)

(17.9)

November 1961---

October 1963---

September 1962

October 1964

(21.5)

(10.2)

May 1964---

February 1964---

February-

January 1965

May 1966

October 1966

(16.7)

(17.1)

(8.2)

November 1967--- June 1968

February 1966--- December 1967

July 1966- March 1967

(12.6)

(26.2)

(4.4)

September 1968--- May 1969

November 1967--- July 1969

May 1967--- May 1968

(11.0)

(41.5)

(8.1)

March 1970---

May 1972---

September 1971

October 1972

(30.0)

(25.9)

Table 3-7

Periods of the Deterioration of the Trade Balance of Principal Capitalist Countries in 1959-1971^^1^^ (quarterly data)

USA

Britain

France

FRG

Japan

February 1959--- March 1960

February 1960--- April 1961

(B-55.1)

(B-86.3)

January 1961---

January 1963---

March 1961---

•• January 1961---

March 1962---

April 1962

March 1964

February 1964

January 1962

January 1964

(A-41.6)

(B-55.3)

(C-255.1)

(A-65.7)

(B-84.1)

April 1964---

March 1965---

April 1963---

January 1966---

March 1966

January 1967

March 1965

April 1967

(A-52.0)

(B-95.6)

(C-102.3)

(C-603.1)

February 1967---

April 1966---

January 1968---

April 1968---

January 1968

April 1967

April 1969

January 1970

(A-80.5)

(B-91.6)

(B-84.8)

(A-47.6)

February 1970---

February 1971---

March 1972

March 1972

(C-350.0)

(B-569.0)

~^^1^^ (Given in brackets are the following values: A---decrease of the favourable trade balance, per cent; B---increase of the unfavourable trade balance, per cent; C---change in the size of the balance (per cent of the initial value) during the conversion of a favourable into an unfavourable trade balance.

Table 3-8

Periods of Reduction of Short-Term Interest Rate in the Principal Capitalist Countries in 1947-1971 (reduction in per cent of the initial level---quarterly data)^^1^^

USA

Britain

France

FRG

Japan

2nd quarter of

3rd quarter of 1948-

2nd quarter of 1949-

1949-3rd quarter

2nd quarter of 1950

1st quarter of 1950

of 1949 (8.6)

(28.6)

(7.1)

2nd quarter of

3rd quarter of 1952-3rd

2nd quarter of 1953-

3rd quarter of 1952-

1953-2nd quarter

quarter of 1954 (35.7)

4th quarter of 1954

2nd quarter of 1953

of 1954 (63.7)

(25.0)

(7.7)

3rd quarter of 1956-2nd

3rd quarter of

3rd quarter of 1954-4th

quarter of 1957 (22.8)

1956-3rd quarter

quarter of 1956 (13.6)

of 1959 (56.3)

3rd quarter of 1957

4th quarter of 1957-lst

3rd quarter of 1959-

1st quarter of 1958-2nd

-2nd quarter of

quarter of 1959 (51.2)

2nd quarter of 1959

quarter of 1959 (11.2)

1958 (69.8)

(20.0)

4th quarter of

2nd quarter of 1960-4th

3rd quarter of 1960-

3rd quarter of

1959-4th quarter

quarter of 1960 (23.4)

4th quarter of 1961

1960-lst quarter

of 1960 (52.4)

(14.0)

of 1961 (46.4)

3rd quarter of 1961-3rd

2nd quarter of

4th quarter of 1962-2ud

quarter of 1963 (43.8)

1963-4th quarter

quarter of 1963 (24.6)

of 1963 (42.6)

4th quarter of 1964-3rd

1st quarter of 1964-

3rd quarter of 1964-4th

quarter of 1965 (17.2)

3rd quarter of 1965

quarter of 1965 (48.4)

(22.5)

3rd quarter ol

3rd quarter of 1966-2nd

4th quarter of 1966-

2nd quarter of

3rd quarter of 1968-2nd

1966-2nd quarter

quarter of 1967 (21.8)

2nd quarter of 1967

1966-4th quarter

quarter of 1969 (13.6)

of 1967 (37.1)

(24.5)

of 1967 (69.9)

4th quarter of

2nd quarter of 1969-3rd

2nd quarter of

3rd quarter of 1970-3rd

1970-lst quarter

quarter of 1971 (30.8)

1970-2nd quarter

quarter of 1971 (26.5)

of 1971 (34.8)

of 1971 (51.2)

i For the USA and Britain interest short-term private bills.

Treasury bills; for France, the FRG and Japan, the discount rate and rate on

94

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

95

S. MENSHIKOV

coantry and quite often results in a crisis of its balance of payments.

The movement of short-term interest rates is closely linked with the general course of the economic cycle. In the phase of crisis the rates are as a rule reduced. At times, rates begin to be reduced even prior to the crisis. At times (under the influence of government restrictions on credit), they rise at the beginning of the crisis but then drop. A comparison of Table 3-8 with the dates of economic crises fully confirms the existence of this regularity in the postwar period.

Figure 3-3 partly repeats Figure 3-2 but with one addition. Besides periods of a decrease in gold and exchange resources, it also shows periods of a reduction of short-term interest rates. At least in certain countries and individual cases, the connection 'between the movement of interest rates and foreign exchange reserves is quite clear. This applies above all to the United States (1959-1960, 1970- 1971), Britain (1960-1961, 1962-1963, 1966) and the FRG (1960-1961, 1963-1964). In these cases, the lowering of the interest rates on short-term loans facilitated the rise or exacerbation of balance-of-payment crises, although it was not always the sole cause. This regularity, however, was not displayed at all in France and Japan, where foreign trade remained the only economic basis of monetary crises.

This difference is explained apparently by the special role which the United States, Britain and the FRG played as the main spheres attracting short-term loan capital. Having accumulated, by the beginning of the 1960s, large dollar holdings, the FRG also began to depend greatly on the international migration of capital. The gradual accumulation of dollars in France and particularly in Japan in 1970-1971 could place them in a similar position in future.

In many cases, a cut in short-term interest rates is of a strikingly pronounced international character, being swiftly transmitted from one country to another. Such periods mainly coincide with the main economic crises in the principal capitalist countries.

Summing up this section, let us note the main distinctive features of the correlation of the economic cycle in the sphere of production with cyclical processes in the creditmoney sphere in the postwar period;

1) money (credit, stock-exchange and monetary) crises are closely linked with economic crises, either preceding the latter or being an important factor in their initial stages or of their consequences:

2) money crises acquire an international nature rather swiftly, promoting the rise or exacerbation of economic crises in other countries.

In this section we atstracted ourselves from the connection between money crises and inflationary processes. This question is examined in Section 6.3.

USA

V V \

Britain

V-,VO-V--V \

France

\ \ \ \

FRG

\x Y---.N

X \

Japan

\ v-v

-^ \

3.3. UNEVENNESS AND ASYNCHRONISM

The question of asynchronism of the world cycle in th? postwar period is among the most complex from both a theoretical and an empirical point of view.

First, the problem of measuring the degree of synchronism of the present-day cycle and comparing it with the corresponding data about earlier cycles has not been solved.

Second, in view of the growing integration of the economies of developed capitalist countries, a need arises for a precise explanation of the causes for the growth of asynchronism, when in evidence.

Fig. 3-3. A Comparison of Periods of Decrease in the Gold and Exchange Reserves (broken line) with Periods of a Cut in Short-Term Interest Rates (solid line)

90

S. MENSHIKOV

One view in the literature is that asynchronism of the cycle is caused by the weakening of economic crises in individual countries. In our opinion, this thesis is somewhat one-sided.

Let us examine these aspects of the problem consecutively.

In Chapter 2, we presented an initial periodisation of the economic cycle in five principal capitalist countries, on the basis of the movement of production. In sections 3.1 and 3.2 we demonstrated the operation of the mechanism of the international transfer of crises through foreign trade channels and described the mechanism of the interconnection between stock-exchange, credit and monetary crises. Now all this material has to serve as a basis for solving the problem of measuring the degree of synchronism and asynchronism of the world cycle.

In a monograph on international financial fluctuations, Oscar Morgenstern, the well-known economist and statistician^^1^^, made an attempt to measure two such periods: 1879- 1914 and 1919-1938. Morgenstern borrows the periodisation of economic crises from the studies of the National Bureau of Economic Research which, as we showed in Chapter 2, do not differentiate between cyclical and intermediate crises. Although Morgenstern's calculations do not take these differences into account either, we can utilise them as a certain initial base for comparing the postwar and prewar periods.

Table 3-9 shows the duration of coinciding periods of advance and crises (upturns and downturns in Morgenstern's terminology). An analysis made of the data in the table at once reveals a number of interesting and, at first glance, unexpected facts. If we take four countries, for which a direct comparison with earlier periods is possible (the United States and three West European countries), it turns out that the relative magnitude of some of the coinciding phases (used as a measure of the synchronism of the world cycle) does not decrease as compared with the interwar

~^^1^^ 0. Morgenstern, International Financial Transactions and Business Cycles, Princeton, 1959. A considerable part of the material had been collected by the author prior to 1938 when he emigrated from Austria to the USA.

Table 3-9

Degree of Synchronism of Periods of Growth and Decrease of Production in the Postwar and Earlier Periods^^1^^

Period and countries

Number of coinciding months of

Total duration of period, months

Number of months when phases coincided, per cent of total duration

Advance

Crisis

Total

Advance

Crisis

Total

USA, Western Europe and Japan (1953-1970)

65 3 68 216

30.1

1.4

31.5

USA and Western Europe

1879-1914 1919-1932 1951-1970

131

28 82

93 28 3

224 56 85

419 157 240

31.3 17.8 34.2

22.2 17.8 1.3

53.5 35.6 35.4

Western Europe

1879-1914 1919-1932 1951-1970

199 HO

118

149 31 11

348 71 129

419 157 240

47.5 25.5 49.2

35.6 19.7 4.6

83.1 45.2 53.8

i Prewar periodisation is given according to the National Bureau of Economic Research and Development (see O. MorKenstern, op. cit., p. 45); for the postwar years we give our periodisation of advances and declines in industrial production (see Chapter 2). The difference in methodology of calculation makes the comparisons somewhat unprecise.

S. MENSHIKOV

period, although in both cases it was considerably smaller than prior to the First World War. If we confine ourselves only to West European countries, the degree of synchronism of the cycle even increased in the postwar period as compared with the interwar period, although it is stilJ considerably weaker than prior to the First World War.

These initial results prove to be completely natural if we delve deeper into the data about the relative synchronism of advances and recessions taken not in toto, tut separately. In the postwar period, the overwhelming part of the overall measure of synchronism fell on coinciding advances. In earlier periods, the share of coinciding crises was considerably larger.

Data about five capitalist countries (the United States, three West European countries and Japan) show that the overall indicator of synchronism of the world cycle is only slightly smaller than for four of the enumerated countries (except Japan). Unfortunately, we did not have at our disposal corresponding data for earlier periods.

Analogous comparisons have been made for two main indicators which characterise the cycle in the credit-money sphere (see Table 3-10). As can be seen, synchronism of the fluctuations of share prices in the postwar period was smaller than between the two world wars, when it rose in comparison with the earlier period. In contrast, synchronism in fluctuations of short-term interest rates rose in comparison with the interwar period, although it was smaller than prior to the First World War. Again, the degree of synchronism of upturns was essentially greater than that of downturns.

The general conclusion is that it is necessary to differentiate between synchronism of the cycle and synchronism of crises in different countries. If we measure the degree of synchronism by the above-mentioned methods, we find that synchronism of the world cycle has not become essentially smaller than in the interwar period, although it declined in comparison with the period prior to the First World War, while synchronism of crises has been essentially reduced in comparison with the period prior to the Second World War. This is a difference in principle, because it is the crisis that is the decisive, constituent phase of a cycle. Of no less importance, however, is the difference between

Table

Degree of Synchronism in the Movement of Credit-Money Indicators in the Postwar and Earlier Periods^^1^^

Indicator, country and period .

Vumber of coinciding $ months of

Total uration of

Relative duration of coinciding phases, per cent

Ad-

pances

Crises

Total

Period

Advances

Crises

Total

I. Share prices

USA, Western Eu-

rope and Japan

1953-1970

39 1 40 216

18.1

0.4

8.5

USA and Western

Europe

1898-1913 1925-1932 1952-1970

47 13 58

25 31 6

72 44 64

188 96 228

25.0 13.5

25.4

13.3 32.3

2.7

38.3 45.8 28.1

Western Europe

1898-1913 1925-1932 1952-1970

55 13 69

38 38 27

93 51 96

188 96 228

29.3 13.5 30.3

20.2 39.6 11.8

49.5 53.1 42.1

II. Short-term in-

terest rates

USA, Western Europe and Japan

42

---

42 240

17.5

---

17.5

USA and Western

Europe

1878-1913 1925-1938 1951-1970

134 10 81

73 42 9

207 52 90

426 151 240

31.5 6.6 33.8

17.1 27.8 3.7

48.6 34.4 37.5

Western Europe

1878-1913 1925-1938 1951-1970

173 10 118

85 50 11

258 60 129

426 151 240

40.6 6.6 36.

20.0 33.1 6.2

60.6 39.7 42.5

i Data related to prewar period are cited by O.Morgenstern, op. cit.,pp. 99, 533

7*

100

S. MENSHIKOV

cyclical and intermediate crises, because only the first represent a cycle, i.e., serve as the completion of one economic cycle and the beginning of another. Approaching this qualitative side of the problem of synchronism, we must somewhat ease the formal criteria of synchronism employed until now. Apparently, any channels of the international transfer of crises must be operating with a certain lag. For this reason we cannot expect a monthly coincidence of cyclical crises in all the examined countries. If, according to convention, we allow that the lag connected with the transfer of a crisis from country to country is equal to about one year, and a year should also be taken as a unit, we obtain the following results presented in Table 3-11.

These data show thatx in the period prior to the First World War, there was a very precise synchronism of cyclical crises. There is one clear case of asynchronism (1899- 1900 and 1902-1904) and one more case hidden by the overall duration of the crisis (1872-1879---asynchronism between the United States and Britain).

In the interwar period, there was only one case of complete coincidence of a cyclical crisis, in 1929-1933. In two other cases (1920-1921 and 1937-1938), the coincidence did not extend to Germany and Japan, in which there were no crises because of the special conditions of economic development that arose in those countries. Thus, the synchronism of cycles was preserved, although it was more limited than prior to the First World War.

In the postwar period, full synchronism of cyclical crises was practically absent. In contrast to the interwar period, a world crisis of a special type becomes typical when cyclical crises in some countries coincide with intermediate crises in others. In this category are the crises of 1948-1949 (with some exceptions), 1957-1958 and 1966-1967.

In earlier works, * we offered an interpretation of postwar world crises as international crisis ranges combining cy-

~^^1^^ See Sovremenniye tsikly i krizisy (Contemporary Cycles and Crises), edited by A. M. Rumyantsev, S. M. Menshikov and G. B. Ardayev, Moscow, 1967; S. Menshikov, Ekonomika kapitalisma i yeyo protivorechiya na sovremennom etape (The Economy of Capitalism and Its Contradictions at the Present Stage), Moscow, 1966.

Table 3-11

Cyclical and Intermediate Crises in Postwar and Earlier Periods in Principal

Capitalist Countries^^1^^

Years

USA

Britain

France

FBG2

Japan

Prior to the First World War

1872-1879

cyclical

cyclical

1882-1886

cyclical

cyclical

cyclical

cyclical

1887-1888

intermediate

no crises

no crises

no crises

1890-1894

cyclical

cyclical

cyclical

cyclical

1895-1897

intermediate

no crises

no crises

no crises

1899-1900

intermediate

cyclical

cyclical

cyclical

1902-1904

cyclical

intermediate

intermediate

intermediate

1907-1908

cyclical

cyclical

cyclical

cyclical

Between the First and Second World Wars

1920-1921

cyclical

cyclical

cyclical

no crises

1923-1924

intermediate

intermediate

intermediate

intermediate

1926-1927

intermediate

intermediate

intermediate

intermediate

1929-1933

cyclical

cyclical

cyclical

cyclical

cyclical

1937-1938

cyclical

cyclical

cyclical

no crises

no crises

After the Second World War

1948-1949

cyclical

intermediate

intermediate

no crises

no crises

1951-1952

no crises

cyclical

cyclical

intermediate

no crises

1953-1954

intermediate

no crises

no crises

no crises

cyclical

1957-1958

cyclical

intermediate

intermediate

cyclical

intermediate

1960-1961

intermediate

no crises

no crises

no crises

no crises

1962-1963

no crises

cyclical

cyclical

intermediate

cyclical

1966-1967

cyclical

intermediate

intermediate

cyclical

intermediate

1969-1971

intermediate

no crises

no crises

intermediate

cyclical

1 Evaluations for prewar period---L. A. Mendelson, op. cit., Vols. II-III; for postwar period see Chapter 2.

2 All of Germany for prewar periods.

102

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE "WORLD MARKET

103

clical crises, which differ in time, on the basis of the essential common features of the conditions which gave rise to them. As such time ranges we proposed 1948-1953, 1957-1962 and now we can also add 1966-1971. We still hold the view that, in conditions of asynchronism of the world cycle, it is necessary to consider world crises not only as phenomena more or less coinciding in time in different countries, but mainly as comparatively long time ranges during which the contradictions of reproduction are exacerbated and the instability of the capitalist economy as a whole increases sharply.

The concept of international cyclical and crisis ranges tallies with the category of world crises of a special type which, not being fully cyclical in nature, nevertheless initiate the next international cyclical crisis period.

Table 3-12 shows tha't every international crisis period opens with big monetary upheavals. Monetary crises accompany the development of the world crisis throughout its

interwar period, but only after the Second World War did the asynchronism of cyclical crises become a stable phenomenon.

One of the most immediate causes of asynchronism of national cycles were the world wars themselves, after the end of which a fundamentally different economic situation arose in different regions and countries of the capitalist world. These differences were especially significant after the Second World War. While in the United States, the first postwar cyclical crisis is related to 1948-1949, in Britain and France it matured only in 1951-1952, in Japan in 1953-1954 and in the FRG in 1957-1958. Even in the absence of any essential obstacles, much time would be required to even out and synchronise these cycles along the channels of the international transfer of cyclical fluctuations.

The restoration of synchronism, however, was also hindered by basic factors of a structural nature. First, in contrast to the conditions which prevailed prior to the First World War and even before the 1929-1933 crisis, the postwar period was marked by the absence of such major factors for synchronising cycles as the mechanism of the gold standard in international trade, which knew no quantitative restrictions and prohibitive import duties. The tendency towards the relative separation of national markets and credit-financial systems continued to exist, notwithstanding the intensive development of the trend towards economic integration between countries. Up to the end of the 1960s, integration of capitalist countries was displayed chiefly in the creation of competing economic trade blocs.

Second, the economic role of the state rose sharply along with its influence on objective economic conditions taking shape in every country. Cyclical waves spreading from some capitalist countries quite often encountered strong resistance or the modifying influence of government purchases, credit and fiscal policy, an influence which wittingly or unwittingly prevented the spread of international cyclical fluctuations (and was also, in some cases, aimed directly at neutralising the impact of external crises). The capitalist state is naturally not omnipotent in this respect. Nevertheless, its actions are sufficient to weaken considerably the

Table 3-12

Postwar International Economic, Stock-Exchange, Credit and Monetary Crises^^1^^

Years

USA

Britain

France

FRG

Japan

1948-1949

ECSe

EMSe

ECMSe

M

c

1951-1952

EGSe

ECSe

ESe

c

1953-1954

ECSe

ECSe

1957-1958

ECMSe

ECMSe

ECMSe

ECSe

ECSe

1960-1961

EGMSe

CMSe

CSe

CSe

M

1962-1963

M

ECMSe

ECSe

ECMSe

EMSe

1966-1967

ECSeM

ECMSe

ECMSe

ECMSe

ECSe

1969-1971

ECMSe

CSe

CSe

ECSe

ECSe

I

I I

i f I

i Symbols: E---economic crisis; G---credit crisis; M---monetary crisis; Se---stock-exchange crisis.

duration. Thus, international cyclical crisis ranges are also periods of the exacerbation of monetary crises.

What is the cause of the lower synchronism of world economic crises? This process was already initiated in the

104

S. MENSHIKOV

tendency towards synchronisation of the economic cycle within the bounds of the entire capitalist world.

Third, the different conditions, formed in the postwar period with the help of the enhanced political-economic separation and specific features of government policy, created the foundation for maintaining stably differing average economic growth rates in individual countries. The average annual increase of production in Britain, in any of the postwar cycles, is lower than in any other principal capitalist country, while in Japan it was higher. In the United States, the rate was consistently below average and in France and the FRG it was at the average level.

Among the chief factors which determined the growth rate of total demand in these countries are, specifically, the movement of the rate of surplus value, the rate of savings, the correlation between the increase in consumption and incomes, the growth rate of government purchases and transfer payments. The correlation of these factors usually changes slowly. A quite important derivative factor is the competitiveness of countries in international trade. Table 3-13 shows that from the point of view of the dynamics of export prices, the FRG and Japan were in the most favourable position and Britain, France and the United States in the least favourable. The tendencies in changing export prices reflect the specific structural features of the economy and are more or less stable. It should be borne in mind that in the base year (1959), the prices of Japanese exports were relatively lower than in other countries.

Thus, the greater unevenness of economic development of capitalist countries in the postwar period has been a factor which increased the asynchronism between national cycles. Of course, this factor was decisive only in combination with others, in particular, the increase in the economic role of the state and the tendency towards political-- economic separation of individual capitalist countries.

Let us now turn to the last of the questions mentioned above. What are the consequences of asynchronism as regards the course of the cycle in individual countries? It would seem that asynchronism of crises, generally speaking, should lead to a mutual decrease in their severity. This is not always the case, however. The specific factors

Table 3-13

The Movement of Export Prices of the Principal Capitalist Countries (1959=100)

1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971

USA

100 101 101 100 100 101 104 107 110 111 115 121 126

Japan

100 103 100 97 96 95 94 94 97 97 101 107 110

FRG

100 101 102 102 102 102 105 106 105 103 105 103 104

France

100 104 103 104 105 109 110 114 113 112 120 133 138

Britain

100 102 102 104 106 108 112 116 117 126 130 139 147 106

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

107

which favoured the weakening of the 1957-1958 crisis in a number of West European countries, as we have seen, facilitated its intensification in the United States. The consolidation of differences in growth rates of individual countries creates long-term structural disproportions in those whose competitiveness drops particularly rapidly. Asynchronism creates the worst complications in the monetary sphere, causing especial difficulties in international settlements.

Thus, asynchronism of the cycle is one of the causes which facilitated the shifting of the centre of the economic instability of the capitalist system into the monetary sphere (we shall return to this feature of the postwar cycle during the subsequent exposition).

Let us examine some distinctive features of the cyclical mechanism which arise owing to the activity of what are known as multinational monopoly corporations. This term designates international monopoly complexes whose subsidiaries are located in different countries, while general management is effected from one national centre. As a result of the intensified mutual export of capital between industrially developed capitalist countries, such monopolies account for a substantial part of the output of these countries and trade between them.^^1^^

It is beyond doubt that the asynchronism of the world cycle has facilitated the development of multinational monopolies. Just as the multisectoral structure of modern corporations creates special advantages and additional guarantees following from the diversification of capital, i.e., its investment in different sectors in which a crisis does not arise, as a rule, simultaneously, a multinational structure of monopolies is linked likewise with the investment of capital in different countries, in which the cyclical

situation is not always identical. When a multinational monopoly follows such practices it merely, so to say, "skims the cream" of the asynchronism of the cycle but does not exert an essential influence on it.

In the past, regional subsidiaries of multinational monopolies enjoyed considerable autonomy of action in relation to the headquarters. They proceeded in their activities chiefly on the basis of the economic situation in the given country and the given region. If in some territorial group of enterprises a crisis arose, the local subsidiary of such a multinational corporation would simply reduce production and investment, making up for it by an expansion of sales and investment in another region.

The further development of multinational monopolies made them more centralised and they began to apply a single strategy of capital investment, production and marketing. Moreover, the flow of capital from country to country is determined not so much by the current cyclical situation in every region, as by the long-term tendencies in the development of monopolies as a whole.

One frequent situation is when multinational monopolies, in face of a crisis in a given region, reduce production and investment in it to greater extent than dictated by local circumstances. In the case of national monopolies, they are guided chiefly by conditions on the home market, because investment beyond its bounds involves certain difficulties of initial development. The situation is different, however, as regards multinational monopolies, for which such barriers practically do not exist. If profitability of investment in a given territorial unit is less stable than in others of the same corporation, investment is almost invariably reduced in the former and increased in the latter. Such corporations may reduce production and investment even before the crisis phase arrives in the given country. This may accelerate the onset of the crisis. Moreover, the regulating measures of the respective government, exerting an influence on decisions of national monopolies, may be absolutely ineffective as regards multinational giants. The organisations of the working class in capitalist countries have repeatedly emphasised the colossal dangers for the development of the national economy, production

~^^1^^ In 1970, for example, consolidated sales of international subsidiaries of American multinational corporations amounted to $ 88,000 million, in other words, were 2.1 times higher than the exports of goods from the United States. Moreover, the commodity flows within multinational corporations in the same year accounted for 21 per cent of US exports of goods and 15 per cent of the imports of the goods to the USA (Survey of Current Business, December 1972, p. 21: January 1973, p. 24).

108

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

109

and employment which arise on this basis. The glaring contradiction between the mechanism of profit maximisation in international corporations and the national interests of individual countries is more than obvious.

Such actions of multinational corporations increase the asynchronism of the world cycle, causing a premature curtailment of production and investment in individual countries with a simultaneous expansion in others.

Dissatisfaction with the actions of multinational monopolies is particularly strong in West European countries and is directed against American corporations which try to ``colonise'' this region. However, US corporations also often act contrary to the national interests of their own country. A striking case in point is the participation of US automobile corporations in the boom of low-power and compact size cars iir Western Europe, which directly harms the development of the American automobile industry and undermines the trade balance of the United States.

Another case of the activity of the multinational monopolies, which accelerated the flare-up of the monetary crisis, is their active participation in the flight from the dollar. Under the 1934 Act, American physical and juridical persons were not allowed to keep monetary gold. However, for multinational corporations with headquarters in New York, Chicago, Los Angeles, or other American cities, participation in transactions with gold and foreign exchange were, of course, neither impossible nor difficult. The flight from the dollar, initiated by multinational companies, accelerated and exacerbated the crisis of the dollar. The influx of dollars into Western Europe and Japan encouraged inflation there and, through the mechanism of currency revaluation, furnished an additional impulse for economic deterioration in these countries, i.e., for the transmission of the influence of the economic crisis in the USA.

On the other hand, we can also cite instances when the activities of multinational monopolies facilitate an increase in the synchronism of the cycle. If a crisis breaks out at a moment when such a corporation has not yet completed its capital investment programme connected with longterm modernisation promising a considerable rise in the

efficiency of production, the growth of the corporate profits in other regions, still not affected by the crisis, is utilised for continuing such programmes, notwithstanding the curtailment of production and the decrease of profits in the country where the crisis set in. In this instance, the crisis is weakened in the country where it has already begun and the economic situation deteriorates (owing to a drop of investment) in other countries from which profits are extracted. Apparently, developing countries, where a higher rate of profit may conceal a lower capital -output ratio, are first in line to suffer from such crises.

The influence of multinational monopolies on the world cycle is thus quite contradictory. In our opinion, it has, so far, more often than not facilitated the development of asynchronism of the cycle and greater monetary instability.

3.4. THE PLACE OF DEVELOPING COUNTRIES IN THE WORLD CYCLE

The world economic cycle cannot but affect those developing countries which are in the orbit of the capitalist system. Their role in the economy of world capitalism, if we judge by formal features, is comparatively small.

The share of this group of countries in total industrial output of the capitalist world, which amounted to 13 per cent prior to the Second World War, remained at the same level in 1958 and was 14 per cent in 1971. The proportion of these countries in world exports was 25 per cent in 1938, 22 per cent in 1965 and 19 per cent in 1971. Consequently, the role of developing countries as producers of industrial output in the last three decades has hardly increased, while their role as suppliers of commodities to the world market even declined.

These figures reflect the continued economic lag of the countries inhabited by the overwhelming part of the population in the capitalist world; they speak of unfavourable material conditions in which millions of people live in the former colonial periphery of imperialism.

110

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OP THE WORLD MARKET

111

Tremendous qualitative shifts, however, have taken place in this part of the world as well.

Until recently, the majority of the less developed countries were part of one colonial empire or another. They had no independent statehood and in economic terms were, so to say, provinces of imperialist powers and, in effect, had neither customs barriers nor any other real means for protecting their economies. Under these conditions, an economic crisis arising in the metropolitan countries hit particularly hard the relatively weak industry of the colonies. The spread of the world crisis to the colonial and semicolonial spheres, in turn, rebounded on the metropolitan countries.

The disintegration of colonial empires has changed this mechanism. Many independent states, which have arisen on the ruins of these empires, possess definite means for defending their industry. Foreign trade and the local money and foreign exchange market have been placed under state control. The share of the public sector in industry has increased. To accelerate economic development, build up industry and renovate the pattern of the economy, mediumterm and long-term planning has begun to be applied in these countries. The possibilities of economic co-operation with socialist countries have been extended and some of the newly-free states have made economic and social progress. Young national states have begun to set up trade and economic unions for obtaining more advantageous terms of trade with the developed capitalist world. As a result, the former colonial periphery has ceased to be a defenceless victim of cyclical upheavals.

However, the majority of the less developed countries, remaining within the system of the capitalist world economy, must take into consideration the influence of the world cycle on their economies.

A. Maddison, a British economist, in his book Economic Progress and Policy in Developing Countries writes that "since 1950" g many of these countries, such as "Argentina Ceylon, Ghana, India, Malaya and the Philippines have had recessions of an amplitude well beyond that experienced in the developed world since the 1930s. All of these were big enough to have a major damaging effect on the confidence

of 'investors, and^to bring big reductions in real income to most people in the economy.''^^1^^

The biggest recessions, in Maddison's opinion, were linked with the drop of raw material prices early in the 1950s, sharp fluctuations of the situation on the world markets for rubber, tin, cocoa beans, and so on.

Table 3-14

Decrease of the Gross National Product in Developing Countries (1950-1965)2

Countries

Number of recessions

Average decrease, per cent

Argentina

3

5.8

Ceylon

1

5.3

Ghana

3

3.3

India

1

4.3

Malaya

1

6.3

Philippines

1

3.5

Turkey

2

5.3

2 Ibid., p. 104. Annual data.

The main source of cyclical instability was the foreign trade of developing countries. Every crisis of overproduction in the industrially developed capitalist world, every drop of world prices for raw materials and food, caused a sharp decline of exports from developing countries. Most difficult was the position of the suppliers of agricultural and mineral raw materials, countrieslfwith a strikingly pronounced dependence on one crop or industrial raw material sold on the world market. In no better position were the exportoriented branches of their manufacturing industry.

Table 3-15 shows that fluctuations in the value of exports of developing countries were considerable. They greatly exceeded the respective recessions in developed capitalist countries. In the latter, the maximum decrease of exports was only 15.8 per cent and the average was 7 per cent, while

~^^1^^ A. Maddison, Economic Progress and Policy in Developing Countries, New York, 1970, p. 103.

112

S. MENSHIKOV

STORMS OF THE WORLD MARKET

in developing countries the maximum drop was 60.4 per cent and the average 28 per cent. The average number of years when exports lagged behind the maximum attained in the preceding period was only 2.8 years in developed capitalist countries, and 9.5 years in developing states. Thus, the most vulnerable spot in the economy of developing countries is their dependence on exports. What tells here is the one-sided economic orientation that has taken shape under colonial rule. At the same time, industrialisation programmes, the implementation of which is connected with the import of equipment, requires stable exports as a source of foreign exchange for the purchase of capital goods. Therefore, any decrease in the value of exports of developing countries affects capital investment unfavourably and, consequently, ^the economic growth rate.

Table 3-15

Table 3-16

Comparative Growth Rates of Industrial Production in Developed Capitalist and Developing Countries (per cent of preceding year)

Developing countries

Developed countries

Growth rates for both groups of countries

1964

10.0

8.0

8.0

1965

7.3

6.5

6.5

1966

5.9

7.0

7.0

1967

4.8

2.4

2.4

1968

8.4

6.3

7.1

1969

9.9

7.4

8.0

1970

8.3

2.0

2.7

1971

7.1

1.3

1.3

Movement of Exports of Developing Countries (1950-1967)1

Number of years

Country

when exports were below the highest level reached during

Maximum drop of exports, per cent

the given period

Argentina

13

49.5

Brazil

16

31.0

Ceylon

14

21.0

Chile

9

28.5

Colombia

13

33.8

Ghana

14

24.2

India

15

32.2

Malaya

16

52.7

Mexico

7

17.4

Pakistan

16

60.4

Peru

6

12.2

Philippines

7

19.0

Thailand

10

22.9

Turkey

10

37.6

Table 3-16 shows that the annual growth rate of industrial output in developing countries mainly reproduces, of course with certain deviations, the cyclical fluctuations of the rate in industrially developed capitalist countries.

Consequently, the new pattern of the developing world is exerting a certain influence on the mechanism of the international spread of the cyclical waves and attests to the extension of the world cycle to these countries. It may be said with confidence that this is a serious factor slowing down the economic progress of developing countries, because it reduces the growth rate of the main scarce component of economic resources of these countries---the production potential of modern industry.

i A. Maddison, op. cit., p. 107. The'calculation is made on the basis of the value of exports in US dollars.

8-0593

I

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

H5

CHAPTER 4

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

We have already noticed in the preceding chapters that the Second World War and its aftermath exerted a very great influence on the cycle, particularly in the first fiveten years. Towards the close of the 1950s, however, when the consequences of the war had already been eliminated, it became clear that many changes in the mechanism of the economic cycle are connected with more deep-rooted and constantly operating factors. Among them we can mention such external factors affecting reproduction in developed capitalist countries, as the changing interrelation between the capitalist and the socialist systems, the new paths of economic development in newly-free countries and the changing interrelations between the former metropolitan countries and their former colonies.

No less, if not more, important are the deep internal structural changes in the economy of the industrially developed capitalist countries themselves. We refer to changes of a threefold nature:

1) changes in the organisational structure of the contemporary capitalist economy, first of all the growing role of private monopolies and the state;

2) changes in the technological structure, linked with the contemporary scientific and technological revolution and how it is manifested in the economy of capitalist countries;

3) changes in the interrelation ofj the socio-class forces, a qualitatively new stage in the development of the con-

flict between the highly organised working class and private monopoly capital, which relies on the support of the state.

An analysis of the influence of each of these factors on the course of the economic cycle is the subject of this and the next two chapters.

One more aspect is also of interest. The 1929-1933 crisis was undoubtedly an extraordinary phenomenon in the economic history of capitalism. In scale, it greatly surpassed not only the subsequent crises but also all the preceding ones. Therefore, analysing the changes in the picture of contemporary economic crises, we shall try to ascertain simultaneously the causes for the unusual increase in the amplitude of the capitalist cycle in the 1920s and the 1930s.

This is all the more important because we are interested, of course, in the prospects of the further development of the capitalist economy. Is a new intensification of the amplitude of crises of overproduction possible? What are the factors which intensify economic and specifically cyclical instability in present-day conditions? An analysis should bring us closer to a correct answer to these questions.

4.1. CORPORATIONS, COMPETITION, CYCLE

The degree of monopolisation of the economy of developed capitalist countries has risen considerably in recent decades. The chief results, in so far as the mechanism of capitalist reproduction is concerned, can be formulated as follows:

a) The share of large private monopolies rose in all key capitalist industries. While early in the 20th century, monopolies coexisted with a more or less substantial number of non-monopolised enterprises---outsiders---now the latter, as a rule, have been ousted from key sectors. The predominant spheres of non-monopolised business today are either secondary sectors and regions or auxiliary, specialised spheres of production (at times in a distressed condition) which, for example, supply large corporations with components, complete the manufacture of individualised finished goods from semi-manufactures bought from gigantic companies or, lastly, bring the final product of the monopolised

8*

US

S. MENSHIKOV

sector to the consumer (for example, repair and service stations, and so on).

b) Formerly, the bulwark of monopolised production consisted almost exclusively of heavy industry. At present most of the leading branches of the light and food industry, transport, communications, wholesale and retail trade and the service sphere have been subjected to monopolisation.

c) The degree of concentration and monopolisation of banking has risen considerably. From the sphere of investment and commercial banking, monopolies have extended their influence to other types of credit and insurance operations---life and property insurance, savings, specialised credit institutions, investment trusts, and stock-exchange operations. A further merger and intertwining of industrial and commercial monopolies with banks has occurred; both became organic elements of united and powerful financial oligarchic groups.

d) The scale and structure of the industrial monopolies themselves have changed. The size of monopoly associations has grown substantially. A big multisectoral corporation which unites tens, at times hundreds of industrial enterprises with similar or diverse production specialisation has become their typical modern form. The work of numerous enterprises is subordinated to a common plan within the given corporation. The extensive use of electronic computers and econometric methods has made it possible to improve substantially the collection and processing of information and the forecasting of market tendencies. Within the bounds of sectoral and financial oligarchic groups, the plans of individual corporations, their marketing behaviour, and so on are co-ordinated. In a word, monopolist planning, of which Lenin spoke more than once, has risen notably.^^1^^

Consequently, the overwhelming part of the contemporary reproduction process in developed capitalist countries takes place within the bounds of the monopolised sector or under its decisive influence. How does this affect cyclical processes?

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

1 ] 7

4.1.a. Overproduction of Commodity Capital

Formerly a typical capitalist enterprise, as a rule, worked for an unknown market. Today the information businessmen have about the market has been greatly extended. Corporations utilise vast statistical information about markets of interest to them and about the economic situation in general. They receive this information from their own services, other firms and banks, from private research organisations and government institutions. In many cases, corporations have their own network of marketing organisations which supply operational information about the progress of sales. It has become possible to forecast the course of economic activity, the development of individual sectors and markets for brief and longer periods. This is facilitated by the extension of long-term inter-corporation contracts which guarantee, in advance, the sale of a definite part of the output of monopolies.

All these tendencies developed chiefly in the 1950s and the 1960s. Of course, even in the 1920s and the 1930s the information about the market at the disposal of the monopolies was greater than in the 19th and early 20th centuries. It can in no way be compared, however, with the present situation, and the forecasting of marketing in the modern understanding of the term hardly existed before the Second World War.

According to estimates by American economists, about half of the output of the manufacturing industry in the United States in the interwar period and more than half in the postwar years is production on order. Since work on contract does not require the maintenance of large inventories, the share of these industries in the finished goods inventories does not exceed 15-25 per cent, and in total stocks, 5-10 per cent. This applies specifically to a substantial ~part of the engineering, metal-working and the iron steel industries, to a number of other branches of heavy industry and some branches of the light industry.^^1^^

~^^1^^ See, for example, M. Abramovitz, Inventories and Business Cycles, NBER, New York, 1950, p. 242; Th. M. Stanback, Postwar Cycles in Manufacturers' Inventories, NBER, 1962, p. 63; V. Zarnowits, "The Timing of Manufacturers' Orders During Business Cycles" (in Business] Cycle Indicators, ed. G. H. Moore, 1961, NBER, Princeton, Vol. I, p. 426).

~^^1^^ V. I. Lenin, Collected Works, Vol. 6, p. 54; Vol. 25, p. 443.

118

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

119

Inadequate information about the market gives rise, systematically, to a gap between the production of commodities and their sales. If production lags behind sales within [ an entire sector, an enterprise loses part of the market to [ its competitors; if production outstrips sales, part of the > output remains unsold. To avoid lagging behind, enter- t prises keep stocks of raw and other materials and stocks of partly finished products.^^1^^ However, if sales lag behind, such stocks become a burden. The money spent setting up stocks is an investment of a special type. During years of advance, it is a voluntary investment; during crisis years, it is a forced investment involving big losses.

Economic crises, let us recall, are crises of overproduction. The primary form is the overproduction of commodity capital, i.e., of commodities. This is expressed in surplus stocks of commodities, which fincl no market. The bigger the stocks, the greater the scale of overproduction of commodities, the larger the losses of entrepreneurs and the stronger their desire to get rid of the surplus stocks. The simplest way is to reduce the volume of production. To restore the balance between production and sales, production has to be curtailed.

Marx differentiated between two types of commodity overproduction: hidden and open.^^2^^ Open overproduction has been described earlier; this is overproduction displayed, for example, in a drop of prices, decrease of current production, and so on. Hidden overproduction arises in the phase of advance, when the volume of production already exceeds the final realisation, but this has not yet become known to the producers and the wholesalers and the former continue to increase the scale of production. This only exacerbates the problem of commodity overproduction. When symptoms of sales difficulties, at long last, reach the sphere of production, the crisis sets in, which is often in the nature of a panicky curtailment of production, the lowering of prices, and so on.

The changes described earlier introduce essential adjustments into this mechanism. Now the signal of the onset of overproduction is received much faster. Corporations working on orders know the approximate size of sales in advance. Corporations working for the market make use of numerous forecasts. Hidden overproduction, of course, remains inevitable. Its size is, however, sharply reduced. In an attempt to avoid obvious overproduction, corporations reduce in advance the output of goods which do not find sufficient markets. Making use of the latest instruments of planning and control of material and technical supply, corporations limit inventories of raw and other materials to a minimum, preferring so-called planning on wheels. If surplus stocks nevertheless arise, corporations, in contrast to small enterprises, are able to ``weather'' the crisis without resorting to the panicky dumping of surpluses. When a change of the production programme is connected with more substantial costs than the keeping of inventories, corporations, in a number of cases, prefer to continue current production at the former rate but reduce the earlier planned duration of the production cycle (for example, in the automobile industry).

One of the statistical indicators of the size of commodity overproduction is the reduction of inventories of producer goods, measured in the form of a percentage to the average size in the preceding cycle. This indicator for the US manufacturing industry was as follows in the years of the prewar and postwar economic crises.^^1^^

1920-1921 ... 16 per cent 1929-1932 ... 17 " 1937-1938 ... 19 "

1948-1949 ... 8 per cent 1953-1954 ... 8 " 1957-1958 ... 3 "

In postwar years, US industrial companies gradually cut the gap between the point of the turn in economic activity and the corresponding turn in the accumulations of inventories. A cut of investment in inventories of raw and other materials was started six months prior to the beginning of 1948-1949 crisis, two months prior to the 1953-1954 crisis and;23*months prior to the 1957-1958 crisis. In 1948-1949

~^^1^^ We ignore here other reasons for keeping stocks of goods: for speculative purposes, in anticipation of a strike, to save costs during price inflations, and so on.

~^^2^^ K. Marx, Capital, Vol. II, pp. 77-78.

~^^1^^ Th. Stanback, op. cit., p. 15.

120

S. MBNSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

121

and 1953-1954, the reduction of investment in inventories of finished goods occurred only after the beginning of the crisis (three months and one month later respectively) while in 1957-1958 this was done 14 months in advance.^^1^^

All this could not prevent the subsequent drop in production owing to the decline of demand, i.e., did not eliminate the economic crises. The latter does not arise because surplus commodity stocks have been accumulated. The existence of such surpluses simply exacerbates the crises, makes them more sudden and increases their impact. A reduction of the scale of commodity overproduction, on the contrary, makes crises less acute.

Notwithstanding the development of the tendency towards planning by monopolies, commodity overproduction cannot be fully eliminated. Foreseeing a shrinking of the market, corporations begin to reduce their investment in inventories even before the onset of the crisis. This leads merely to a slowing down in the growth of inventories, but an absolute reduction, i.e., adverse investment in inventories, occurs only in the period after the beginning of the crisis.

In three postwar crises in the USA (1948-1949, 1953-1954, 1957-1958) the absolute reduction of total inventories in the manufacturing industry began respectively only four, two and two months after production began to decline, while the reduction of inventories of finished goods started seven, eight and six months later. The gap between the beginning of the reduction of investment in inventories and in the inventories themselves was respectively 10, 4 and 16 months.^^2^^ Thus, in spite of the development of forecasting, the delay in adapting production to demand in the 1940s and the 1950s remained considerable. True, these data relate to all industries. The speed of adaptation by the big corporations was apparently at that time, already above the average.

The average lag of the turn of investment in inventories from the turn in the economic cycle^^3^^ amounted to 0.2 months in the interwar period, while after the war, they outstripped

by an average of 0.5 months. The turns in the movement of inventories themselves lagged by 8.6 months on the average before the war and by 3.8 months after it. The gap between turns in investment and in inventories themselves was 8.8 months prior to the war and 4.3 months after it.1 In 1960-1961 and 1969-1971 the decrease of investment in inventories in industry and trade began almost simultaneously with the decline of production. A cut of inventories in 1960-1961 occurred nine months later, and in 1969- 1971 almost two years after the crises began.^^2^^ Consequently, in the 1950s there was a shift towards an earlier identification of turning points in economic activity and more operational adaptation of production to the market.

The cut in output by corporations is one of the chief means of protecting the system of monopoly prices.^^3^^ Although this practice reduces the general scale of commodity overproduction, it painfully affects above all the nonmonopolised sector. The corporations impose their rhythm on small and middle-sized production. Non-monopolised enterprises do not simply repeat this cyclical rhythm but are compelled to do so in unfavourable conditions.

Since the reduction of inventories affects, first of all, stocks of raw and other materials, the crisis begins for the supplying enterprises sooner than for the corporations which produce finished goods. Enterprises which service the sold output of corporations and bring it to the final consumer are also the first to fee^^1^^ tha shrinkage of market demand. Owing to their contracts with the corporations, however, they are compelled to accept goods from them even after the crisis has begun. Thus, an unproportionally large share of the cost of overproduction of commodities is borne by the non-monopolised sector.

At times, the opinion is voiced that it is the small enterprises that are now the chief source of commodity overproduction, because they continue to increase output disregarding the crisis. However, such practices are of a forced

~^^1^^ Th. Stanback, op. cit., pp. 101-02.

~^^2^^ Calculated according to National Income and Product Accounts of the United States. 1929-1965, pp. 4-5; Survey of Current Business, July 1972, p. 16.

~^^3^^ This question is expounded in detail in Section 6.2.

~^^1^^ Th. Stanback, op. cit., p. 102.

~^^2^^ Ibid., pp. 101-02.

~^^3^^ Here the cycle is given the'way it is understood by the US NBER.

122

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

123

nature, because small entrepreneurs are trying to make up for the reduction of the profit rate by an increase in turnover. In some countries, for example, in Japan, during crisis years, forcible measures are taken (with the help of the government) to limit the output of goods^by the nonmonopolised enterprises.

It goes without saying that it is not these enterprises that determine the general state of the economy. The bulk of commodities is produced by corporations. The large size of their enterprises and co-operation and specialisation between them facilitates mass and large-batch production. Any mistake in evaluating market prospects is likely to cause a much more serious disturbance of the equilibrium between production and the market than the miscalculations of small firms. This actually occurred recently seriously aggravating the 1973-75 crisis'

In the first decades of the development of monopoly associations, the growth of mass production considerably outstripped the possibility of foreseeing and taking into account turns in economic activity. In these conditions, an increase in the scale of commodity overproduction, characteristic of the 1920s and 1930s, was inevitable. In subsequent decades, as we have seen, a different situation arose. However, the "inventory cycle" under conditions of capitalist economy cannot disappear completely; it is brought into being by the periodically recurring overproduction of commodity capital.^^1^^

4.1.b. Overproduction of Productive Capital

Overproduction of commodity capital is only one of the forms of overproduction. Other forms of capital are no less, if not "more, important in this cyclical movement--- the overproduction of productive and money capital.

In the 1920s and the 1930s, the activity of monopolies in investment, production and marketing was of a spontaneous nature. In 1915-1940 the movement of capital investment in new buildings and equipment of large companies

~^^1^^ Extensive data on this question is presented in the book by R. Mock, Information, Expectations and Inventory Fluctuations, NBER, New York-London, 1967.

of the US manufacturing industry (with assets of more than $ 10 million) differed little or not at all from the same indicator for all enterprises of this sector. Investment by big corporations in the first year of the 1929-1933 crisis decreased somewhat more slowly, but this was the only exception.^^1^^

In postwar years, the movement of capital investment was more even. Notwithstanding the decrease (at times considerable), even in crisis years the investment of big sums in fixed capital of the productive and non-productive spheres was continued systematically. This change is partly linked with scientific and technological shifts. (See Section 5.2.) But it is also determined by changes in the structure of monopoly capital.

First, the financial position of corporations has been substantially consolidated. On the whole, in postwar years, the share of net profit used for the payment of dividends has somewhat declined and the share of profits spent for investment or accumulation of reserves increased. The rates of depreciation allotments for fixed capital have grown everywhere. On the whole, the importance of internal sources of investment finance increased. The access of corporations to external sources of finance, as a rule, became easier. Thus, in Japan, up to 60-70 per cent of the investment in fixed capital of industry during years of advance came from external credit sources. In the United States, this share is much smaller (30-40 per cent). Owing to the close coalescence and intertwining of the banking and industrial monopolies, the latter, as a rule, can, at any time, even during crises, use the credit resources of banks and insurance companies.

Consequently, the continuation of comparatively big capital investment in crisis years has become more of a financial possibility for large corporations. It should be noted that of the three sources of finance (undistributed profit, depreciation fund, and borrowed resources), only the first exerts a distinctly pronounced cyclical influence on investment, because^the magnitude of undistributed profit sharply declines during crises.

~^^1^^ See M. Haystay, "The Cyclical Behaviour of Investment" (in Regularization of Business Investment, Princeton, 1954, pp. 23-24).

124

S. MENSHIKOV

Depreciation funds depend little on crises, because they are counted at fixed rates on the capital, which declines absolutely only very rarely. Thus, from 1889 and up to the present, there have been only three cases in the United States of a decrease in the absolute magnitude of the depreciation fund of fixed capital. These were the 1920-1921 and 1929-1933 crises and the postwar regearing of the economy in 1946. In all other years this indicator, counted in constant prices for the economy as a whole, has steadily increased, but growth rates have been subjected to considerable fluctuations.

As for borrowed resources, here, too, opposite tendencies operate. On the one hand, during a crisis there is an abundance of free credit resources and the interest rate on loans is low. On the other, at the beginning of the crisis the ratio between an industrial enterprise's own and borrowed resources deteriorates notably, because the preceding advance demanded much more intensive use of credit sources. Therefore, notwithstanding the abundance of credit, corporations turn to it only rarely during crises, moreover, as a rule, not for investment financing.^^1^^

Thus, depreciation allowances remain the basis for maintaining capital investment in crisis years.

Table 4-1 shows that the growth in the share of depreciation and the reduction of the share of external (other) sources of investment financing in fixed capital occurred throughout the postwar period, while the share of internal savings did not essentially change. In Britain and the FRG, the share of the depreciation fund was at first very high, owing to the low supply of money capital, then decreased and stabilised at the level of about 40 per cent of gross investment. In Japan it has been stable throughout the postwar period. In contrast to Britain and the United States, however, where financing from internal sources reached 70-80 per cent, in Japan and the FRG it was much smaller (45-55 'per cent) and external sources were of the same significance as internal.

~^^1^^ In 1969-1970 some large US corporations began to use even shortterm credits for this purpose, but the bankruptcy and reorganisation of Penn-Central, a big railway company linked with such operations, prompted many firms early in the 1970s to restrict such practices considerably, so as to avoid a subsequent financial crisis.

Table 4-1

Sources of Financing Gross Investment in Fixed Capital in the Postwar Period (per cent of total)^^1^^

Hear

USA

Britain

FRG

Japan

A

B

c

Year

A

B

G

Year

A

B

c

Year

A

B

G

1953

48.3

17.2

34.5

1951

58.3

44.5

-2.8

1951

59.6

5.0

45.4

1953

35.6

17.1

47.3

1957

53.3

16.0

30.7

1957

50.2

33.8

16.0

1956

36.9

8.5

54.6

1957

35.4

18.8

45.8

1960

57.2

15.6

27.2

1961

44.7

28.3

27.0

1966

57.3

21.0

21.7

1965

42.8

30.7

26.5

19b'6

42.8

4.3

52.3

1964

37.4

12.4

50.2

i Data for years of pre-crisis maximum. Source: OECD. National Accounts Statistics. 1950-1968; 1953-lOeg. Symbols: A---depreciation; B---savings of corporations; C---other sources.

126

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

127 Table 4-2

Investment in Fixed Capital, Depreciation and Corporation Savings

in '000 million of national

in Postwar Crises. (Absolute growth (+) or decrease (---) currency in current prices)^^1^^

USA

BRITAIN

Year

A

B

C

D

E

Year

A

B

G

D

E

1953-54

+ 1.9

+ 2.5

-0.6

+0.5

---1. 1

1951-52

+217

+ 103

+ 114

-65

+ 179

1957-58

-2.5

+ 2.6

-5.1

-2.2

-2.9

1957-58

+ 111

+ 100

+ 11

-10

+ 21

1960-62

-0.2

+2.4

-2.6

-0.0

-2.6

1961-62

+ 112

+ 132

-20

-255

+235

1966-67

+3.6

+5.7

-2.1

-2.7

+0.6

1965-66

+404

+240

+ 164

-565

+729

FRG

JAPAN

Year

A

B

C

D

E

Year

A

B

G

D

E

1951-52 1956-57

+3.25 + 1.66

+0.1., + 1.84

+ 3.15 -0.18

+ 1.45 -0.30

+ 1.65 -0.48

1954-55 1957-58

+7 -5

+90 +85

-83 -90

-78 -112

-5 + 22

1966-67

-11.5

+2.82

-14.33

-0.51

-13.82

1964-65

+363

+476

-113

-208

+95

i Source: The same as In Table; 4-1; A-Gross Investment in Fixed Capital;

s

Notwithstanding these differences, in all these countries there was much in common in the movement of gross investment and its main components during postwar crises. A reduction of net investment is typical of postwar crises. Alongside this, in every case, depreciation funds continued to rise, owing to which gross investment either continued to increase or decreased at a much slower rate. It can be seen from the preceding exposition, that the comparatively high share of depreciation allotments was an important factor in maintaining gross investment in postwar crises (see Table 4-2).

The instability of internal savings of corporations is one of the chief reasons for a reduction of net investment during crises. In the United States and the FRG, an additional cause was the curtailment of external sources, i.e., the development of a tendency towards refraining from using the capital market during a reduction of business activity. In Britain and Japan, credit, however, and subsidies for financing capital investment continued to rise even during crises, which undoubtedly helped to maintain the general level of both net and gross investment.

Investment in fixed capital from depreciation allotments (see Section 5.2) is mainly connected with the renovation of worn-out or obsolete equipment. Net investment is used chiefly for expanding existing capacities. Consequently,,_«*

B---Depreciation; C---Net Investment; D---Corporation Savings; E---Other Sources.

in postwar crises the typical picture was a reduction of investment in the expansion of capacities (so-called extensive investment) with a continued growth of investment in renovation and modernisation of equipment (so-called intensive investment).

In contrast, during years of economic advance, the emphasis in investment projects is laid not so much on modernisation and renovation (although they, of course, continue to grow) as on the massive purchase of equipment available on the market for the swift expansion of capacities. Most of this equipment is not of the latest type, but during a boom it is profitable to utilise equipment remaining from earlier cycles. During crises, companies especially look for new types of equipment which yield a profit even in a relatively unfavourable economic situation.

This cyclical regularity, of course, also existed previously, but during crisis years, investment in new equipment nevertheless remained small. Its growth in postwar years is linked with the stronger financial position of monopolies, accelerated technological progress (see Section 5.2) and, lastly, organisational changes in the investment process as such.

These changes consist, first, in the constant spread of

long-term planning of investment by corporations. In con-

jLtrast to the contemplated volume of production which

128

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

129

the management of a corporation most often links with current sales, investment in fixed capital is based increasingly on long-term forecasts of sales. Up to the end of the 1940s, planning of investment in corporations for a period for more than one or two years was infrequent, but now the situation has changed radically. Long-term investment plans have become typical, they are oriented towards obtaining a high stable monopoly profit rate (on the average for a number of years). Without long-range forecasting of marketing and investment possibilities, long-term planning of profit is, of course, simply inconceivable. Long-term planning of investment makes it easier to choose the best time for issuing bonds and shares, for obtaining credit, concluding favourable contracts for the delivery of equipment, the building of ^production installations, and so on.

Long-term planning of investment is naturally combined with the current adjustment of actual capital allocations for investment. Consequently, the implementation of investment programmes depends to a definite extent, as before, on the economic situation, but this dependence is considerably weaker than under the former management practices of corporations.

Second, monopolised corporations, in contrast to individual, non-monopolised companies, tend to implement investment programmes more evenly within the bounds of the economic cycle. Small companies, as a rule, manage to carry out one or only a few investment projects within a cycle.

During the period of recovery, such companies undertake to carry out these programmes almost simultaneously, which promotes an investment boom. The concentration of capital investment in comparatively brief time periods increases the amplitude of the economic cycle---both in the phase of the cyclical advance and during the crisis.

In giant concerns which encompass tens, at times hundreds of enterprises, there is a substantial number of different capital investment programmes and their consecutive implementation makes the course of the investment process more even. Having ample access to credit resources, corporations can count on external financing of their projects

throughout the cycle. Many corporations have their own construction facilities and are also interested in employing them more evenly.

These phenomena, taken together, can facilitate a certain evening out of capital investment in the course of the cycle and, consequently, a reduction of the amplitude of cyclical fluctuations. At the same time, the dominance of the monopolies in the economy leads to a more intensive over accumulation of productive capital, owing to which, a special cyclical rhythm of investment, inherent in the monopolistic sector, arises. This specific rhythm is gradually imposed by the monopolies on the entire contemporary capitalist economy.

Corporations, operating in the same sector, are, as a rule, constantly competing among themselves. The features distinguishing this competition from free competition of non-monopolised firms consist in that its participants--- corporations, which are few in number and almost completely dominate key industries---strive to preserve high monopoly prices to avoid price reductions. The consequences of this form of competition for technological progress are examined in Section 5.2.

Regardless of these consequences, monopolistic arid oligopolistic competition lays a special imprint on the process of capital investment in corporations. Each of them plans its investment in such a way that at every given moment, even in the phase of advance, it should have reserve productive capacities which are needed when a competitor proves to be unable to increase his share in the market. Such is the logic of monopolistic competition.

The cost of the planned reserve capacities is included in the calculation of production costs and is paid for, in effect, by the consumer, in the form of higher prices for the corporation's goods. In periods of an upswing, individual corporations actually manage to make full use of their capacities, but only at the expense of bigger tinder-- employment of the capacities of their competitors. However, in any phase of the contemporary cycle, as a rule, there is general under-employment of productive capacity. It is not always easy to discern this fact.

The point is, that the data on the employment of capacities published in capitalist countries are based on estima-

9---0593

130

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

131

tes of so-called optimal loading. Uptimal does not mean the technically possible (absolute) maximum of production but that degree of capacity utilisation under which the smallest unit production costs are achieved. This optimum level depends not only on the efficiency of the different parts of the operating machinery but also to a considerable extent on the movement of prices and wages at different levels of loading of the equipment. (These calculations are based quite often on a certain normative level of unemployment.) In other words, from the point of view of a corporation, the optimum can be some degree of underemployment of both productive and labour resources.

As pointed out earlier, corporations try operatively to adapt production to sales, eliminating surplus inventories. All other conditions being equal, they strive to produce for the market not more than is required for maintaining prices and also for increasing them. This means that, alongside the planned reserves of productive capital, as a rule, there also exists a substantial forced under-employment of capacities, which is at its highest during crises, but also quite often remains considerable for a long time after they have ended.

It goes without saying that it is more difficult to get rid of surplus productive capital than of excessive inventories. Moreover, a decrease of inventories most often has to signify an increase in the under-employment of productive capacity. The sale of surplus installed equipment, particularly in periods of slack business, is quite difficult. If the equipment is physically worn out, it is sold for scrap. As for obsolescent equipment, it is usually possible to get rid of it without special difficulty if it is nearly fully depreciated. This operation, however, is almost always linked with the replacement of old equipment by new, with a production potential not smaller and often bigger than the old. For these reasons, after the completion of a crisis, corporations always have a large reserve capacity, which enables them easily to extend the scale of production in the phase of recovery and at the initial stages of the cyclical advance, without resorting to massive purchases of new equipment.

Hence comes the prolonged period of stagnation in investment^ characteristic of contemporary capitalist reproduction,

Table 4-3

The Loading of Productive Capacities in Different

Phases of the Economic Cycle in the US Manufacturing Industry

(per cent of capacities)^^1^^

Total output

Advanced products

Primary products

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

92.7

82.7

89.8

82.1

98.1

83.8

(1948)

(1949)

(1948)

(1949)

(1948)

(1949)

95.5

84.1

96.1

84.7

94.3

82.9

(1953)

(1954)

(1953)

(1954)

(1953)

(1954)

90.0

75.1

87.7

75.0

93.7

75.2

(1955)

(1958)

(1955)

(1958)

(1955)

(1958)

81.4

77.6

80.7

77.3

82.7

78.2

(1959)

(1961)

(1959)

(1961)

(1959)

(1961)

91.9

74.5

91.8

72.2

92.1

85.7

(1966)

(1971)

(1966)

(1971)

(1966)

(1967)

88.5

78.8

(1969)

(1971)

1 Economic Report of the President of the United States, Washington, 1972, p. 238.

which is analysed in Chapter 2. A similar relative or even absolute stagnation in the course of the investment process lasts for a considerable part of each cycle. This regularity is seen most distinctly in countries where growth rates are not high. In countries with a growth rate above the average the same regularity is expressed in the periodic prolonged deceleration of investment growth rates (for example, in Japan---see Section 2.3).

4.1.c. Overproduction of Money Capital

The growth of monopolisation does not eliminate the overproduction of money capital either. A detailed analysis of the long-term structural changes in the credit-money sphere goes beyond the bounds of our study, and. we shall

9*

132

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE. REGULATION

133

merely note those which are linked most closely with the contemporary cyclical mechanism:

a) consolidation of the position of commercial banks in a number of countries, owing to government insurance of deposits;

b) division into commercial and investment banks in a number of countries;

c) a considerable increase in the share of insurance companies in the total resources of the credit system, particularly, in the long-term money market;

d) government restriction of stock-exchange speculation, in particular, regulation of the maximum transactions made on credit;

e) monopolisation of stock-exchange turnover by the leading credit and financial institutions;

f) a decrease in the share of corporate capital which passes systematically through the stock-exchange;

g) reduction in the number of failures of big companies.

These and other changes have helped to raise the stability of the credit system as a whole, to reduce the panic reactions in the cycle and, at the same time, to facilitate a smoother transition from the phase of advance to the phase of crisis.

At the same time, money crises, far from being eliminated, in a certain sense have become one of the most painful manifestations of the instability of the contemporary capitalist economy (see Chapters 3 and 6). One of the causes of this development is systematic overaccumulation of money capital.

The growth of sources of internal finance has led to the formation of considerable free reserves of money capital in corporations, most of which is placed in short-term liquidities or deposited in commercial banks. These financial reserves of the monopolies themselves are supplemented by the reserves of external financing formed as a result of the credits opened to corporations in commercial banks, the colossal resources of insurance companies, and so on. The possibilities of the credit system are also systematically extended as a result of the active attraction of the savings of the population through the system of savings banks,

insurance and investment companies, loan and savings associations.

During the phase of advance, these resources are used chiefly by the corporations which are closely linked with the banks and can afford to pay the high interest rates characteristic of these periods. In this phase, too, however, the resources of money capital are not fully utilised.

Table 4-4

Share of Liquid Resources in Assets of US Commercial Banks (per cent of total assets)^^1^^

Year

Cash

Cash and government securities

1920

27.4

55.1

1929

14.4

36.4

1937

26.4

65.2

1948

22.8

72.2

1957

19.2

54.5

1969

16.9

39.9

1 Historical Statistics of the United States, Washington, 1961, p. 631; Statistical Abstract of the United States, 1971, p. 435.

Table 4-4 shows that even in periods of boom and a general credit strain, the share of liquid resources in assets of commercial banks remains high, j

During years of crisis, the demand for credit drops sharply and the size of overaccumulated money capital rises substantially, in spite of the drop in the money incomes of large and, especially, small companies. Owing to this, the fluctuations of the loan interest rates remain considerable. The amplitude of these fluctuations after the Second World War has not changed significantly as compared with earlier economic cycles (see Table 4-5).

Let us make a similar comparison of fluctuations of the share prices of industrial companies on stock exchanges. The results of this comparison are given in Table 4-6.

Except for the 1929-1933 crisis, the drop in share prices in postwar crises was no less than in the earlier stock-ex-

134

S. MENSHIKOV

Table 4-5

Amplitude of Fluctuations of Short-Term Interest Rates in Postwar and Earlier Cycles^^1^^

United States

Britain

France

FRG2

Japan

Period

A

B

c

A

B

c

A

B

c

A

B

c

A

B

c

D

91 9

n 8

90 4

6 R

0 4

fi 4

5 9

0 fi

4 4

7 9

1 9

6 0

E

9.6

0.2

9.4

6.4

0.2

6.2

7.6

0.8

6.8

8.8

2.8

6.0

...

...

• * •

F

7.8

0.4

7.4

7.8

0.5

7.3

8.0

2.2

5.8

9.2

2.4

6.8

10.2

6.3

3.9

1 Sources: For prewar cycles---O. Morgenstern, op. cit., pp. 78-79; for postwar cycles---International Financial 'Statistics, Washington, for various years; OECD. Historical Statistics. 19S9-1969, Paris, 1971.

2 All of Germany for prewar"periods. Symbols: A---maximum rate; B---- minimum rate; C---difference between them, D- 1876-1914; E - 1925-1938; F - 1947-1971.

change crises. Thus, monopolisation of the stock exchange did not abolish its instability. The direct ``feedback'' of stock-exchange crises on reproduction has become weaker, however, owing to the consolidation of the financial position of corporations, a drop in the number of their failures and the ``organised'' way in which they are controlled, with the participation of banks and government agencies.

The specific features of money capital overaccumulation in the postwar period have exerted a considerable influence on the nature of cyclical fluctuations in individual sectors of the economy.

We have already pointed out that, even in periods of advance, corporations have free access to credit resources, paying a high interest rate. In contrast to this, the nonmonopolised sector, which finds it hard to pay such high interest, is deprived of such access, although it is the small and medium companies that have most need of outside resources. This is one of the reasons why the growth of capital investment in* corporations proceeds longer than in s nail companies.

A specific situation has risen in housing construction. In the last quarter of a century, at least in the United

Table 4-6

Relative Drop in Share Prices in Postwar and Earlier Stock-Exchange Crises (per cent of pre-crisis maximum, average monthly data)^^1^^

USA

BRITAIN

FRANCE

FRG2

JAPAN

1 1873

21.8

1873

2.1

1873

27.5

1880

7.8

1875

7.6

1881

8.4

1878

11.2

1880

11.9

1884

18.7

1880

7.0

1890

18.5

1882

7.1

1890

15.6

1893

25.7

1887

8.0

1899

7.2

1890

7.7

1900

14.8

1901

6.8

1907

8.1

1907

6.1

1907

11.5

1907

34.6

1912

2.6

1912

4.8

1912

6.2

1921

9.4

1929

87.4

1929

52.4

1929

59.6

1929

67.9

1937

39.9

1937

24.7

1948-49

17.5

1949

19.0

1948-49

24.0

1952-53

17.4

1953-54

49.1

1957-58

18.0

1951-52

25.9

1955-56

14.3

1955-57

48.2

1957 19

1961-62

23.3

1957-58

32.5

1957-58

32.5

1961-62

41.7

1962-67

51.3

1966

17.6

1962-64

39.0

1962-64

39.0

1964-66

34.2

1968-70

28.5

1970

13.5

1970

13.5

1969-70

23.3

1970

18.5

1 Sources: O. Morgenstern, op. sit., pp. 552-53; UN, Monthly Bulletin of Statistics; League of Nations, Monthly Bulletin of Statistics; Historical Statistics of the United States. " All ot Germany prior to the Second World War.

Fig. 4-1. Comparative Movement of Investment in Housing Construction and Other Spheres of the US Economy (in '000 million dollars, 1958 prices)

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

137

States, the cycle of investment in housing construction has been, as a rule, in an opposite phase to the cycle of production investment. Both the demand for houses and their supply (construction) has been largely dependent on the relatively high cost of mortgage credit. During the cyclical advance, the interest on this type of credit rises, which adversely affects the demand for housing. At the same time, the interest on long-term credits to leading industrial corporations is even higher, which makes it unprofitable for the banks to credit housing construction during such periods. In contrast, in crisis years, mortgage credit is relatively cheap, while industrial credit is even cheaper; consequently the surplus resources of the credit sphere flow into housing construction.

The opposite movement of the curves of investment in housing construction and other investment in fixed capital is illustrated by Figure 4-1. In the interwar years, these curves, as a rule, coincided. In conditions of the 1929- 1933 crisis, the steep drop in personal incomes and, consequently, the demand for housing was the decisive factor, relegating credit factors to second place. In the postwar period, the opposite movement of investment in housing construction and other capital investment has contributed to a more even distribution of total investment within the bounds of the economic cycle.

4.2. THE ACTIVITY OF THE STATE : THE ROLE OF MILITARISATION AND NON-MILITARY ACTIVITY

The substantial rise in the economic role played by the capitalist state and its reasons have been widely examined in economic literature. This phenomenon is based, as Lenin proved, on the process of the development of monopoly capitalism into state-monopoly capitalism, the ever greater coalescence of the monopolies and the state into a single economic and political force.

The enhanced economic role of the bourgeois state is a result of the development of capitalist relations of production and their further adaptation to the productive forces of contemporary society. The state is now exerting an all-

I. IIMTERWAR YEARS (l920-1940)

199-1.jpg

38 I 40

21 23 25~ 27"29"31~33" 35~ 37 39 ff. POSTWAR YEARS (1946-1971)

80 T

50 +

_ (0

.9 3 ~ 20 +

8 0

10 +

I---h-

2 64

___

6

h 6

6 8

-4- 70

1946

48 47 49

50 52

54 1 56

58 60 53

57 59 61 63 65 67~~69 71

The broken and dotted lines denote private investment in fixed capital (including housing construction) and the solid line, housing construction. Sources: Economic Report of the President of the U.S., Washington, 1972, p. 196; John W. Kendrick, Productivity Trends in the United States, NBER, New York, 1961; Historical Statistics of the United States, Washington, 1961, pp. 379, 381.

138

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

139

round influence on the capitalist economy, on the process of reproduction and its intrinsic cyclical movement.

Three aspects of the problem of state influence on cyclical reproduction will be examined: 1) changes stemming from the expansion of the sphere of the state's economic activity; 2) the spontaneous impact of state activity on the cycle; 3) changes linked with the deliberate policy of the government in the reproduction sphere.

The increase in the role of the state's economic activity can be demonstrated by such indicators as the share of government expenditure and revenue in the social product and the national income; the share of the government in gross and net capital investment; the share of state-owned enterprises in total output; employment in government institutions and enterprises in relation to the total number of employed, and so on. Subsequently we shall use all these indicators. Let us examine, first of all, data on the share of the government expenditure in the gross national product.

Table 4-7

of Government Expenditure in" GNP (in current prices, per cent)^^1^^

We presented in Table 4-7 the years when the direct influence of world wars or their immediate consequences were not felt. During the world wars, the share of government spending was much higher, but we shall not examine these periods, because the main subject of our analysis is the influence of the state on cyclical reproduction in `` normal'', peaceful conditions.

The table shows that an essential change has taken place in the United States and West European countries. Prior to the First World War, the share of government expenditure in the gross national product was comparatively small; as a rule, it was less than 10 per cent. In the 1920s, after a return to peacetime conditions, this figure rose somewhat.

In the 1930s, under the influence of the New Deal economic policy applied by the Roosevelt Administration, the share of government spending rose noticeably. When the fascists came to power in Germany, the share of government spending increased steeply. In Britain and France, this proportion increased at a somewhat slower pace.

After the Second World War, both in the United States and in Western Europe, the share of government expenditure rose gradually, but very considerably; moreover, towards the end of this period, in three West European countries it reached 37-39 per cent and in the United States 32 per cent.

Japan is the exception to the general rule. There the traditionally important role of the state in the economy rather decreased with the transition from the feudal to the capitalist system at the end of the 19th century. Prior to the Second World War, in the interwar and postwar periods, the share of government spending in the GNP remained practically unchanged, fluctuating around 20 per cent.

Thus, the faster growth of government spending has had a profound impact on the production process. It should be emphasised, however, that only to a small extent is this growth linked with conscious attempts actively to influence cyclical processes. To illustrate this point, let us examine the present-day structure of government spending in the principal capitalist countries (see Table 4-8).

Military purchases by central governments are at times employed for regulating economic activity but, as a rule,

1913

19292 f

1937

1950S

1957 1968

United States

9.8

10.3

16.9

22.2

27.1

31.9

Britain

7.7

14.5

15.3

33.3

31.3

39.1

France

• • •

...

...

28.3

34.4

38.1

FRG

30.2'

31.3

36.6

Japan

22.5

18.7

23. 1? J

22.1 J

21.1

20.7

1 OECD. National Accounts. 1950-1988; Historical Statistics of the United States; B. R. Mitchell, Abstract of British Historical Statistics, Cambridge, 1962; Hundred-Year Statistics of the Japanese Economy, The Bank of Japan, Tokyo, 1966.

2 Japan---1930.

3 Japan- 1952.

We included in the government expenditure everywhere government investment in fixed capital, which in statistics is usually given separately.

Table 4-8

Structure of Government Expenditure in Principal Capitalist Countries (per cent of GNP, in current prices)^^1^^

19502 1957 1968

A

B

c

D

E

A

B

C

D

A

B

c

D

E5

Current expendi-

ture of the cent-

ral government^^3^^

11.4

24.8

. • •

10.1

14.6

21.3

18.2

11.5

6.8

14.3

24.3

19.2

11.6

6.0

Current expenditu-

re of local^^3^^ go-

vernments

8.5

4.5

t r

18.2

9.6

6.5

13.9

17.2

8.2

14.5

9.0

15.3

21.0

8.5

Total

19.9

24.3

26.8

28.3

14.5

24.2

27.8

32.1

28.7

15.0

28.8

33.3

34.5

32.6

14.5

Current purchases

of goods and ser-

vices

12.0

16.0

12.9

14.3

10.7

17.9

16.7

14.7

12.6

9.1

21.0

18.1

12.7

15.7

8.4

Government capital

investment

2.3

4.0

1.5

1.9

7.6

2.9

3.5

2.3

2.6

7.3

3.1

5.8

3.6

4.0

7.0

Military purchases

4.9

6.1

5.8

4.5

9.9

6.6

6.4

2.5

• * *

9.2

5.5

3.8

3.1

Civilian purchases

of the central

government

1.4

5.2

• • *

0.0

2.4

4.5

4.6

1.0

4.1

2.0

5.5

7.2

1.1

3.4

Transfer payments

to private per-

sons

4.9

5.2

11.3

12.3

2.5

4.3

5.1

13.5

13.0

3.3

6.1

8.6

16.8

14.1

4.3

1 Source: OECD. National Accounts. 1950-1968; A--- USA; B---Britain; G---France; D---FRG; E---Japan.

2 Japan---1952.

3 Excluding government capital investment.

4 1958.

5 1967.

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

141

their movement and origin are not linked directly with regulating the economic cycle. The growth of militarism furnishes the basis for maintaining a high proportion of military purchases in the GNP of a number of leading capitalist countries. In the total current government expenditure of the United States it amounted to 32 per cent in 1968; in Britain it was 16.5 per cent; in France, 11 per cent and in the Federal Republic of Germany, 9.5 per cent.

In some countries (for example, in the United States, France and Japan) part of the non-military expenditure of the central governments originated because of the need for deliberate regulation of reproduction. However, this is only a comparatively small part, which in the United States, for example, amounts to only 7 per cent of total government expenditure. In other countries, not less than 20 per cent of total state expenditure follows from the tasks of regulating the economy.

Although the origin of the bulk of the expenditure of the modern bourgeois state is not directly connected with cycle regulation, it has, of course, a considerable impact on reproduction in general and on cyclical development in particular. From this angle, let us examine different types of government spending.^^1^^

Government spending may exert an unequal influence on the scale of the market demand for productive capacities. Let us assume that, at the given moment, in the capitalist economy, there are excess productive capacities (this assumption,' as we have seen, reflects the real situation in the postwar capitalist economy, in any case over more or less prolonged periods). Let us take into consideration the fact that an increase of government spending may take place in three economically different ways, as follows:

1) the purchase of goods by the government and its establishments;

2) payment of salaries to civil servants;

3) pensions, allowances and other forms of transfer payments to private persons.

~^^1^^ For a time we shall leave out of consideration both the problem of covering the expenditure by taxes and its influence on reproduction in the dynamic aspect. Subsequently we shall examine these points.

142

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

143

If the government increases by a certain sum the purchase of goods (whether means of production, consumer goods or means of destruction), the direct result will be a respective increase in the final demand. With the availability of free production resources (abstracting ourselves from their conformity to the structure of government purchases and the existence of stocks of the respective goods), the increase in demand will result directly in a corresponding growth of production. To increase production, enterprises which sell their output to the government will have to expand their purchases of producer goods and hire additional labour. This, in turn, will require an increase of output in other industries and then send up purchases of consumer goods owing to a growth in the wage fund. Since in parallel with the growth of the wage fund and output, the profits increase, part of the increment in the latter can be utilised for financing additional capital investment. Thus, the general expansion of demand caused by the growth of government purchases exceeds the increase of these purchases. In Chapter 7 we give econometric models illustrating this result, known as the multiplier effect. In calculating the actual magnitude of multipliers, it is necessary to bear in mind that they require a certain time to come into full effect. Conventionally assuming that under the conditions discussed above not less than one year will be needed for a full completion of the multiplier effect and the final growth of the social product caused by the increase in government purchases, we can calculate that, for each unit of increase in government purchases, there is usually about 2.5-3 units of the total increment in the final social product.1 Subsequently, we shall proceed from the empirically established 2.5-3 as the value of the full multiplier effect of government purchases in the principal capitalist countries. Of interest also is the structure of the increment in the social product. Of the three units of the increment, one goes for the growth of deliveries to the government; approximately 0.5 for the rise of investment in fixed capital and inventories and 1.5 units for the increase in personal

consumption. (The increase in the production of the intermediate product---raw materials, fuel and so on---is not included here, because the value of the multiplier applies only to the final product.) Our calculations show that the increase in the intermediate product (without excluding double counting) amounts to approximately another 2.5-3 units. Thus, the full multiplier of gross output can be about 5-6 units.

The effect of increasing the salaries of civil servants is not identical to that of the growth in government purchases. The growth of the salary fund leads directly to an increase in the personal incomes of the population. A certain part of this increment (usually about 60-70 per cent) is spent within one year, for the purchase of consumer goods, while the rest is saved. Thus, the result of increasing the salary fund to civil servants is a somewhat smaller growth of the expenditure for personal consumption. Of course, this initial additional expenditure causes secondary, tertiary and so on, increases of output in the respective industries.

The general result is usually an expansion of the social product. The multiplier of such growth is equal to approximately 2 of which 1.5 units go for the rise in personal consumption and 0.5 units for the increase in investment. In this case, there is no increase of deliveries of goods to the government, owing to which the general effect of the expansion in government spending is smaller than for an increase in government purchases.

If the government makes bigger transfer payments, there is, as a rule, an expansion of incomes of the population in the lower income brackets. In this case, the biggest part of the increase in income is spent for personal consumption and only a comparatively small part is saved. Consequently, the mechanism of increase in the social product is about the same as in the preceding case, but the total effect is somewhat greater: it amounts to approximately 2.7 units (if we assume that 90 per cent of the increment in transfer payments go for an increase in personal consumption).

So far we have not considered the problems of the conformity of surplus production and labour resources to the structure of the additional demand caused by an increase in government spending, yet the biggest part of the sur-

~^^1^^ More detailed data on the results of calculating multipliers for the United States are given in Chapter 7.

144

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION. THE STATE, REGULATION

145

plus production potential, as we assumed earlier, is in enterprises which produce both capital goods and consumer goods. Consequently, an increase in government purchases will not run up against a shortage of resources if it is done gradually and the government buys consumer goods or means of production.

However, this condition does not, as a rule, hold good in the case of military purchases. Military purchases are infrequently increased in bursts, and money demand exceeds the bounds of the available industrial resources of the entire economy. Moreover, other problems also arise owing to the specific features of military production. There are also reserve capacities in the war industry, but they can only be utilised (without a corresponding regearing) for the manufacture of old types of armaments. In the past, more than 80 per cent of military purchases consisted of items whose manufacture could be organised with comparative ease in factories producing civilian goods. At the beginning of the Second World War, about half of the military purchases consisted of specialised types of equipment, most of which could still be manufactured at ordinary factories with a certain regearing. At present, not less than 90 per cent of military contracts are for specialised materiel manufactured at enterprises built specially for this purpose.^^1^^

If a government increases the purchases of materiel, the manufacture of which has already been organised and reserve capacities are available, the effect of the multiplier is similar to the growth of purchases of goods for peaceful purposes. If, however, new types of arms are ordered (and under conditions of the constant revolution in weaponry this is more often the rule than the exception), the problem of production resources becomes sufficiently acute from the very beginning and, consequently, the effect of the multiplier per unit of time decreases.

Let us examine the influence of government spending on the movement of productive capacities. Only direct state

investment in the productive sphere can result in a direct growth of productive capacities. Table 4-8 shows that government capital investment in 1968 amounted to from 3 to 7 per cent of the GNP in five principal capitalist countries. As a rule, the biggest part goes for an increase of fixed capital in the non-productive sphere, housing construction and the infrastructure---the building of highways, communication facilities, and so on. Excluding the building of military installations, this investment performs a useful social function and, if not directly, at least indirectly, promotes the growth of the production potential.^^1^^

When a government increases the fund of salaries to civil servants, the productive potential can increase if the labour of these employees is utilised in the sphere of housing construction, education, public health, other spheres of the infrastructure, and so on.

\

The increase in transfer payments is largely connected with the preservation, maintenance and development of labour resources and consequently, to a large extent, is also connected with an increase in society's production potential.

Let us now examine the category of military purchases and military spending in general (pay to servicemen, military construction). The growth of military purchases causes (at least indirectly) a growth of the productive capacities of the war industries. These capacities naturally, after a corresponding reconstruction, could also be utilised for the output of civilian goods. This argument is usually advanced by apologists for the war business; thus, they try to prove that military expenditure is of a ``productive'' and consequently "socially useful" nature. Such arguments, however, are fallacious at the root. The point is that only the free capacities of the war industry could be utilised for civilian needs, and they arise only through a reduction of the respective military expenditure. The fact that these capacities were utilised originally for military purchases,

~^^1^^ See The Economic Impact of the Cold War. Sources and Readings, ed. by J. L. Clayton, New York-Chicago, 1970, p. 98.

~^^1^^ In this case, we refer to the productive potential in the broad sense, including not only strictly fixed capital of the productive sphere, but also so-called investment in "human capital", i.e., in the reproduction of skilled manpower.

10-0593

146

S. MKNSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

147

far from bolstering up, merely weakens the argument of the defenders of militarism. There is no need to create at first capacities for war production, which, in principle, could be utilised for civilian production. The selfsame resources, moreover, with greater efficiency, could be used directly for building capacities in civilian production.

As for the physical form of military purchases, as a rule, the goods bought cannot be utilised either for the personal consumption of the population or as producer goods. Consequently, on being produced and sold to the government they drop out from the reproduction process.^^1^^

In postwar years, a substantial part of the state resources is also spent for research. The influence of this expenditure on the production potential depends on how it is distributed between military and non-military research. Numerous works have shown that the growth in research of a military nature, far from leading to directly useful results in the sense of producing goods for civilian designation, actually diverts financial resources and the highly scarce scientific personnel from the sphere of civilian research. The predominance of military research in the United States and Britain has serious adverse consequences for the competitiveness of many industries of these countries on the world market. While government-financed military space studies in the 1950s and the 1960s rose swiftly, research linked directly with an expansion of the production potential stagnated or increased very slowly.^^2^^

In the postwar period, the economies of the United States and Britain, where the share of military spending was relatively large, grew least of all. In contrast, countries which carried a smaller burden of armaments (Japan, the FRG) developed at a pace exceeding the average. The development of France's economy was accelerated in the 1960s and 1970s when the share of her military spending in the social product declined as compared with the 1950s.

From all this, the following preliminary conclusions may be drawn:

1) The increase of government spending in all cases facilitates a still bigger growth of the social demand, moreover, the size of the multiplier effect depends on the type of expenditure.

2) The rise in government spending for civilian purposes either does not prevent a growth of the production potential or (directly or indirectly) promotes it.

3) An increase in military spending causes a growth of the war industry potential but, as a rule, restricts the rise in the potential of civilian production.

In the earlier exposition we proceeded from the assumption of the existence of free productive resources in capitalist countries. There is special meaning to this assumption when we examine countries in which the share of government expenditure in the GNP is sufficiently high. We have seen that in most of the principal capitalist countries, this share rose in the 1930s and continued to mount in the 1950s and the 1960s. Since this was a transitional period from comparatively undeveloped to the strongly developed contemporary state-monopoly capitalism, it is worth while to examine how the comparative influence of government spending changed during this time.

Let us now resume examination of how the mechanism of the multiplier of government spending operates. If there are surplus capacities, the functioning of this mechanism depends chiefly on the distinctive features of the economy's structure, specifically on the technological dependence between the sectors and the incremental coefficients of personal consumption in relation to incomes. Subsequently, we shall examine some of these dependences and demonstrate that, as time goes on, they usually change slowly and that the influence of the overall change on the cyclical nature of the economy's movement as a whole is comparatively small. Structural shifts in personal consumption can exert a strong influence, but in the given case, we deal only with the incremental coefficients of the dependences of consumption on incomes (see Chapters 5 and 7).

Let us assume (as confirmed by empirical studies) that the size of the multiplier changes little from one period to

10*

~^^1^^ The export of arms is only a seeming exception. In this case, only the exporting country is the winner, while the problem is shifted to the sphere of international reproduction.

~^^2^^ See S. Melman, Our Depleted Society, New York, 1965; Robert A. Solow, "Gearing Military R & D to Economic Growth", Harvard Business Review, November-December 1962, pp. 49-60.

148

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE. REGULATION

149

another. Accepting this assumption, we can easily verify how the relative influence of government spending changes with the growth of its share in the final product. The absolute increment of the final product with an increase per unit of government spending remains unchanged, but the relative increase of the product, caused by a rise of government spending by one per cent, is the greater, the higher the share of the latter in the final product.^^1^^

Let us assume that there is a maximum average annual growth rate of the final product for a given country, determined by the growth rates of labour resources and labour productivity. Every excessive relative increase of government spending will lead social demand beyond the bounds of the economy's production possibilities. What, however, is the limit beyond which the growth of government spending should be regarded as excessive? As demonstrated in Section 7.4, this boundary is regulated by the ratio

is reached when their share in the final product reaches 33-40 per cent. In the United States, where the share of purchases in government spending is considerably higher than in West European countries (see Table 4-8), this limit, apparently, is closer to 33 per cent, while in West European countries, to 40 per cent.

Getting back to Table 4-7, we notice that, both in the United States and Western Europe, the faster growth of government spending played a gradually increasing role in stimulating economic growth. At the same time, it is clear that, towards the end of the 1960s, the possibilities of faster growth of government spending proved to be limited, because in all these countries, except Japan, the proportion of this expenditure entered the range of the critical values.

In Section 7.4 we shall present a more detailed econometric analysis of the factors of the growth in social demand in the postwar US economy. The general conclusion of this analysis is that, with an average growth rate of 3.7 per cent in the United States, about one-third (1.25 per cent) can be explained by the faster rise in government spending. In postwar years, the expansion in government spending has played a considerable part in maintaining economic growth rates in the principal capitalist countries, except Japan, where the chief source was the priority expansion of exports. The inflationary consequences of this influence are examined in Section 6.2.

One of the objections to this concept is the view that it does not take into consideration the parallel rise in taxes. It is claimed that, if taxes rise as swiftly as government spending, their combined influence on the expansion of the social demand amounts ultimately to zero. This objection, however, is based on a false notion of the mechanism of taxation and its place in the reproduction process. Subsequently (Section 4.3) we shall examine the specific features of the taxation structure of different countries, in connection with its impact on the cycle. Here let us merely touch on the question of the difference between the influence of government expenditure and taxes on reproduction.

The main forms of taxes are collected either from income (income tax, profit tax) or from the quantity or value of

gM '

where g---the share of government expenditure in GNP, M---the multiplier (incremental coefficient of the full effect) of government expenditure. The growth rate of government spending can exceed the maximum average economic growth rate only within the bounds determined by the given ratios.

If the share of government expenditure in the social product is smaller than the reciprocal of the multiplier, the rate of increase in government spending, as a rule, can outstrip the average economic growth rates; moreover, it

will be the greater, the more g lags behind -^ . When it

approaches -TJ- or even exceeds it, the further faster rise

in government spending, in fact, loses its stimulating effect. Assuming that the multipliers of government expenditure in the principal capitalist countries fluctuate within the range of 2.5-3, we arrive at the conclusion that the critical point for the faster growth of this spending, as noted above,

~^^1^^ This point is examined in detail in Section 7.4.

150

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

151

commodity production (indirect taxes). Consequently, even if tax rates remain unchanged, the tax receipts of a government automatically rise if incomes and production grow (or are reduced in the opposite case).

Let us assume that a government increased its purchases, owing to which there is a growth in the social product in accordance with the multiplier effect. This results in an expansion of the volume of sales and incomes. Even if tax rates are unchanged, the influx of taxes into the treasury rises. If tax rates are sufficiently high, the growth in government revenue may be sufficient to fully cover its expenditure.

What is the total result of this interaction? A growth in tax receipts naturally reduces the size of the increase in incomes caused by the multiplier effect of greater government purchases, and, consequently, reduces the size of the multiplier. It is demonstrated in Section 7.4 that the maximum influence of the rise in taxes can annul the derivative increase^of incomes. In this case, the increment of the social product will be exactly equal to the growth of the government demand. Thus, even in the marginal case, an increase in government purchases involves a growth of the social product.

This is possible, however, only within a certain value range of the incremental coefficients of consumption and accumulation. In most cases, however, a full balancing of the state" budget can also be achieved with an increase in net incomes, i.e., by expanding both government purchases and the other components of social demand.

Calculations made with the help of dynamic models of the national economy show that the change of tax rates in the postwar period, on the small scale in which it occurred, did not have an essential influence on general growth rates of the economy ``and' did not remove the considerable dependence of thel economy of the United States and West European countries on the expansion of government spending.

The general conclusion is that the enhancement of the economic role of the state is exerting a telling influence on the process of capitalist reproduction, independent of any special measures for regulating the cycle.

4.3. THE ROLE OF STATE REGULATION AND ITS LIMITS

The contemporary capitalist state is exerting a certain regulating influence on cyclical reproduction. This impact can be divided into three main trends: automatic regulators, short-term countercyclical policy and the drawing up of longterm economic programmes.

4.3.a. Automatic Regulators

Automatic regulators are those instruments linked with the economic activity of the state which, although they can also be utilised for conscious attempts to regulate the cycle, at the same time influence the cycle independently of the actions of government policy. The introduction of a system of automatic regulators (or "built-in stabilisers") was not, in most cases, associated with conscious attempts to regulate the cycle.

Indeed, various forms of taxation, unemployment compensation payments and the system of maintaining prices of agricultural produce are among the most widespread regulators at present. Taxes, of course, have no cyclical origin; unemployment relief, in the form of insurance or other compensation payments, has been introduced as a result of the class struggle and reforms on a wider plane. Only the system of maintaining agricultural prices is designed as a direct countercrisis measure but it, too, was sooner connected with phenomena of a long-range structural nature and, in effect, goes beyond the bounds of short-term cyclical regulation.

The regulating effect of unemployment compensation payments is directly connected with cyclical reproduction: with an increase in the number of unemployed, the sum of compensation they receive grows. True, unemployment insurance covers only a part of the earnings of factory and office workers, the sum received is much smaller than wages and there is a time limit for receiving compensatio (from 6 to 18 months). Notwithstanding these limitations, unemployment compensation payments help to maintain

152

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

153

personal incomes during a crisis and cushion their fall. From the point of view of the ruling classes, the countercyclical function of unemployment compensation is, of course, assigned a secondary role. It is mainly designed to allay the dissatisfaction of the working people and to prevent the class struggle from reaching an excessive pitch. Unemployment compensation payments were brought into being by the grave economic crisis in the 1930s but became widespread only after the Second World War.

The main part of automatic regulators consists of various taxes. Their countercyclical effect is displayed in that, with a decrease in production and incomes, the sum of taxes is automatically reduced. If the tax is of a progressive nature, i.e., if the rates rise faster than the size of the taxed income, the decline of tax receipts during crises is bigger than the drop in incomes.

Let us assume that, as a result of a crisis, the incomes of workers which amounted to 100 money units, decreased to 80 units. If the tax on wages was 15 per cent, the net incomes of the workers (after the payment of taxes) dropped from 85 to 68 units. The relative reduction of the gross and the net income is the same (by 20 per cent) but the absolute decrease is not the same---the gross income by 20 units and the net income by 17 units.

In capitalist countries, taxes paid by the working people make up a considerable part of government revenue. The tax rates on corporate profits are considerably higher, although this tax comprises merely a small part of government revenue. Let us assume that the profit which amounted to 100 units decreased as a result of the crisis to 80 units. The profit tax usually amounts to about 50 per cent. Then net profit decreases from 50 to 40 units. The absolute reduction of gross profit by 20 units is twice as high as the reduction of net profit.

These examples show that, all other conditions being equal, the countercyclical action of the tax regulator is the greater, the higher the tax rate on the given type of income. However, the general influence of every stabiliser also depends on the amplitude of fluctuations of the respective type of income in the cycle.

Let us denote the dependence of the change in the tax on the change of income by the formula:

AT^^1^^

a = -

where B---income and T---the tax on this income; and introduce a coefficient which characterises the relative amplitude of the fluctuations of income in the formula:

where Y---national income, A---change in the absolute magnitude of the given indicator. Coefficient a is almost always less than unity, i.e., the tax changes by a smaller absolute amount than the respective income. As a rule, the amplitude of fluctuations of profit in the cycle is bigger, while fluctuations of working incomes are smaller than those of the national income.

The general operation of tax regulators can be denoted by the following formula:

AT

AT A£ A£ ' AY '

The operation of these regulators is the greater, the higher the tax rate and the bigger the relative amplitude of fluctuations of the respective type of income. Marginal coefficient p can either be bigger than the share of the given type of income (for example, for profit) or smaller (for example, for personal incomes). For indirect taxes, the general change (relative to GNP) corresponds approximately to their weight in it.

Since both the tax rate on profit and the amplitude of its fluctuations are relatively high, this tax is exerting quite a considerable countercyclical influence on reproduction.

Statistical studies of the operation of automatic regulators in postwar crises in the USA demonstrate that, in 1948-1949, their general countercyclical change was 39.4 per cent in relation to the reduction of GNP; in 1953-1954, 66.5 per cent; in 1957-1958, 56.2 per cent; in 1960-1961,

154

S. MENSHIKOV

122.2 per cent.^^1^^ The biggest share in this cushioning mechanism is played by a reduction of the profit tax; it accounts, respectively, for 65.1, 54.5, 52.9 and 47.1 per cent of the overall result of the operation of regulators. When the relative role of the profit tax is reduced, the importance of income tax rises. The increase in unemployment compensation payments comprised respectively 27.0, 21.2, 16.1 and 20.6 per cent of the general result of the operation of regulators.

Let us note that the total effect of the operation of automatic regulators may in some cases exceed • the decrease in GNP (which could be observed, for example, during the 1960-1961 crisis). This merely indicates that, if there were no such stabilisers, the crisis drop in production would have been more than double the actual drop.

Tax regulators naturally exerted a countercyclical effect in prewar years, too, but, as pointed out earlier, this impact is the greater, the bigger the share of taxes in the national income. Prior to the Second World War, tax rates were comparatively low and the role of tax regulators was scarcely noticeable. Thus, in the 1929-1932 crisis in the USA, the total reduction of taxes amounted only to 7.5 per cent of the decrease in GNP and, in the 1937-1938 crisis, to 2.9 per cent. In 1929, the corporate profits tax amounted to only 13.7 per cent of GNP.^^2^^

The data of Table 4-9 indicate that the share of the corporate profit tax in the total sum of government revenue, in most capitalist countries, is gradually decreasing, while the share of personal income tax is rising. The relative growth of the profit tax is biggest of all in the United States and Japan and considerably smaller in West European countries, where an important part (alongside the income tax) is played by indirect taxes.

The important role of indirect taxes in West European countries is also seen from data in Table 4-10. Taxation of corporate profits is highest in the United States and the Federal Republic of Germany, it is relatively smaller in

~^^1^^ See W. Lewis, Jr., Federal Fiscal Policy in the Post-War Recessions, Brookings Institution, Washington, 1962, p. 30.

~^^2^^ Calculated according to National Income and Product. Accounts of the United States. 1929-65, Washington, 1966,

Table 4-9

Structure of State Revenue in Principal Capitalist Countries (per cent of total)^^1^^

USA

Britain

France

FRG

Japan

1950 1957 1968 1950 1957 1968 1950 1957 1968 1950 1957 1968 1952 1957 1968

A

39.2

48.6

54.0

34.9

35.4

41.9

39.8

41.9

51.1

43.7

42.7

50.8

28.6

27.2

35.8

B

25.9

18.3

15.6

18.6

13.8

6.9

5.8

6.7

4.9

9.1

9.0

6.1

17.9

18.2

19.3

O

34.7

33.0

30.4

48.8

46.2

41.9

46.8

49.1

42.1

42.7

40.7

36.9

42.9

45.5

36.2

l Source: OECD. National Accounts Statistics. 1950-1969, Paris, 1970. The data are taken from sereral tables. The total combines revenue of central and local governments. "•*! A---Personal income tax; B---Corporate profit tax; G---Indirect taxes.

Table 4-10

Level of Taxation in Principal Capitalist Countries (per cent of respective indicator)^^1^^

USA

BRITAIN

FRANCE

FRG

JAPAN

1950 1957 1968 1950 1957 1968 1950 1957 1968 1950 1957 1968 1952 1957 1968

A

11.6

15.6

19.8

13.9

13.3

18.8

15.6

16.6

21.8

16.4

18.0

21.7

8.3

7.1

10.1

B

47.2

44.4

47.0

...

29.0

29.7

28.9

34.5

27.8

48.9

45.7

52.0

55.6

36.4

35.7

C

8.3

8.5

9.1

15.8

13.6

15.6

15.4

16.8

15.9

13.5

14.5

13.7

9.5

9.0

7.5

i Same source as in Table 4-9.

A---Income tax, par cent of personal income; B---Corporate profit tax, per cent of profit; C---Indirect taxes, per cent of gross product.

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

157

Japan, France and Britain. Mention should also be made of the fact that the rates of the profit tax and indirect taxes are approximately constant. Alongside this, in postwar years there has been a general rise of income tax rates. This is explained by the growth of nominal money incomes and the introduction of special social insurance taxes.

Thus, the general tendency is a gradual lowering of the regulating role of the profit tax and a rise in the importance of the income tax.

Tax and other automatic regulators play a countercyclical role not only because they cushion the drop of net incomes during crises. In the phases of recovery and advance they exert a restraining influence. Thus, according to calculations of W. Lewis, the operation of automatic regulators resulted, in the United States, in a decrease of the growth of GNP in the phase of recovery after 1948-1949 by 33.9 per cent; after 1953-1954 by 30.4 per cent and after 1957-1958 by 31.2 per cent and after 1960-1961 by 26.1 per cent.^^1^^ Thus, the functioning of automatic regulators tended to restrain the upward phases of the economic cycle.

So far, we have examined the operation of automatic regulators, abstracting ourselves from the movement of government expenditure and also from changes in government revenue and expenditure connected with the consciously employed measures for countercyclical regulation.

In contrast to taxes, the predominant part of government expenditure is not linked directly with current production and incomes and does not react automatically to a change in them (the only exception is such an expenditure as unemployment compensation payments, but their share in total government spending is small). Under ordinary conditions, government expenditure rises more or less evenly: its increase is marked by certain stable rates inherent in the given country for a certain period of time.

Since, however, taxes react automatically to the cyclical movement of reproduction, the balance of government revenue and expenditure, as a rule, becomes unfavourable

~^^1^^ W. Lewis, Jr., op. cit., p. 30.

158

S. MENSHIKOV

I

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

159

in periods of crises and favourable during periods of advances.^^1^^

This law exerts a definite countercyclical effect on the economy. During crises, the influence of a growth in government demand is intensified by the decline in tax receipts, and, during advances, is weakened by their increase. Thereby, the state budget acts as a double-acting pump, which helps to provide additional demand during crises and curtails effective demand during advances.

The countercyclical effect of the national budget on the economy rises as its share in the national income increases. Prior to the First World War it was, as a rule, exceedingly small; in the interwar period, it increased but still remained not large while, after the Second World War, it became one of the major factors modifying the operation of economic crises.

Thus, a substantial part of state influence on the cycle is by no means linked with attempts at a conscious regulation of the economy and is a result of the spontaneous countercyclical impact of the budget.

All this also shows that automatic regulators are capable of easing a crisis, but cannot prevent it. If a crisis is sufficiently acute and prolonged, automatic regulators by themselves can hardly change its nature to any significant degree.

4.3.b. Countercyclical Regulation

The first attempts at conscious government regulation of cycles date back to the 1930s. (Up to that time, government policy was brought into action only sporadically during crises.) The transition to a system of countercrisis regulation in the United States in the 1930s was the first important action of this kind, taken consciously by the government, although its actual influence on the crisis in the 1930s was small.

Only after the Second World War did countercyclical regulation come into constant operation. The impact of the acute crisis in the 1930s and the apprehension of^the ruling circles that crises on such a scale^may recur, led to the adoption of special legislation in a number of countries (the USA and Britain), which officially proclaimed the attainment and the maintenance of full employment as an aim of government policy. Since then, various concepts of a "welfare state" have also gained currency. The further exposition in this and subsequent chapters will clearly show what is really concealed behind the "welfare state''.

The conscious countercyclical regulation developed during this period was mainly various methods of fiscal ( budget) and credit policy.

Countercyclical measures of fiscal policy are^most frequently limited to a change in the following elements of the budget: government purchases, salaries of civil servants, state capital investment, transfer payments, tax rates and also the rules and rates of depreciation of fixed capital used in calculating taxed income.

An increase of government spending during crises is, of course, quite an effective means for stimulating demand, if we bear in mind that it is during this period that the economy has ``surplus'' productive resources and particularly needs to utilise them.

The effect of a change in government expenditure under conditions of a crisis was examined in Section 4.2. The multipliers of different types of government spending differ from each other, but all of them are sufficiently large to exert a noticeable influence on social demand.

As a rule, multipliers of government spending not linked with the purchase of commodities are smaller than multipliers of government purchases, but this is true only as regards the movement of the social product taken as a whole. The increase in personal consumption caused, for example, by a growth in transfer payments, is not smaller than as a result of larger government purchases by a similar amount. However, in the case of transfers, there is no increase in deliveries to the government, owing to which the general growth of the product and also of investment is smaller

~^^1^^ If a country has a prolonged average excess of state revenue over expenditure or, on the contrary, a chronic budget deficit, this law is displayed in a reduction of the favourable balance or an increase in the deficit during crises and in the opposite direction during advances.

160

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

1G1

than in the other case. Thus, a growth of transfer payments is a more direct and operational method of maintaining personal incomes, while a rise in government purchases, in addition to this, results in a bigger expansion of production.

A change of tax rates also involves a corresponding change in social demand. For example, a reduction of the personal income tax rate, all other conditions being equal, increases the size of the income remaining at the disposal of the taxpayers and, consequently, available for their personal consumption. Together with the secondary effect, this exerts a multiplier influence on personal consumption and, to no smaller extent, on capital investment. A reduction of profit tax rates, all other conditions being equal, causes a multiplier effect displayed chiefly in the sphere of investment.

At times, a change in income tax rates is achieved indirectly, for example, by increasing or reducing the taxexempt minimum or a change in the procedure for tax payment.

A similar role is played by a change in the rules which regulate the procedure and rate of depreciation allowances on fixed capital. With an increase in the allowed rate of depreciation, a bigger share of current profit can be credited in the financial accounts to the depreciation allotments of a company. Consequently, the rate of taxed profit is reduced and this, in turn, helps to extend capital investment.

A change in the rates of indirect taxes often exerts a direct influence on the prices of the respective goods. If coefficients which characterise the marginal change of demand in relation to a change of price (or the price elasticity of demand) are sufficiently high, such a change in the rates of indirect taxes may exert a noticeable influence on consumer demand. That is why countercyclical changes most often refer to rates of taxes on the sales of automobiles, petrol and other consumer goods with a high elasticity of demand.

The countercyclical methods of credit policy include: change in the discount rate; change in the rate of the required reserves of commercial banks; the issue (or redemption)

of government short-term treasury bills; quantitative restrictions on credit; change in the terms of consumer, mortgage and stock-exchange credit.

During a crisis, state banks usually seek to ease credit terms by reducing the discount rate, i.e., the rate at which commercial banks can obtain credit in the central bank. This should enable commercial banks to reduce the interest rate on their own loans. Of course, a reduction of the discount rate, as a rule, reflects a surplus of the supply of loan capital over demand for it. If, however, a crisis causes a sharp increase in the demand for cash in order to redeem former debts, the result may be a rise in the interest rate and, consequently, an exacerbation of the crisis. It is this sequence of events that marked many crises in the 19th century and some crises early in the 20th century.^^1^^

Another means of easing credit is a reduction of the rate of the required reserves of commercial banks. The required minimum of reserves is set by the government or the central bank and represents the ratio of the deposits which must be kept in the central bank by member banks of the Reserve System to the sum of deposits of the given commercial bank. A reduction of the rates of required reserves, in effect, signifies an expansion of the possibilities of using the resources of commercial banks for granting loans.

A similar aim is achieved if a central bank undertakes a mass redemption of short-term treasury bills on the "open market". Banks are the big holders of these bills. By selling them to the central bank they, thus, reduce the crediting of the government and increase the sum of their reserves, which enables them to expand credit to private companies. At times all these three types of credit regulation are employed simultaneously.

A change in the terms of consumer credit is designed to regulate sales of consumer goods, chiefly durables; of mortgage credit, to regulate the sale of homes and of housing construction; of stock-exchange credit, to regulate opera-

~^^1^^ A structural countercrisis reform in the United States, caused by the mass failure of banks in the 1930s, was the introduction of a system of state insurance of deposits. This system to a certain extent protects the banks from a massive run of depositors during a crisis.

11-0593

162

S. MBNSHIKOV

tions on the stock and commodity exchanges. In countries where credit restrictions are applied (for example, in Japan) regulation during a crisis involves an increase of the maximum credit to individual banks or a temporary lifting of these restrictions.

The full multipliers of credit regulation are, as a rule, smaller than multipliers of fiscal measures and their influence on the movement of the product is usually not so rapid. The advantage of credit instruments is that they can be brought into action at once and do not require the prolonged administrative and legislative procedures with which most fiscal measures are linked. >- Having listed the different forms of countercrisis regulation, let us now see how they are employed and what their real efficacy is. Literature is already available which sums up the results of studies in this sphere. It should be noted that, on the whole, there is a quite widespread sceptical attitude towards the results of countercrisis regulation, even among non-Marxist economists whom it is difficult to suspect of antipathy towards the idea of reducing the amplitude of the economic cycle.

We are able, making use of results of calculations with models, to assess the comparative influence of changes in government purchases during postwar and interwar cycles in the United States and on postwar cycles in Japan. Figure 4-1-A has three curves, one of which reflects the effective demand in the private sector determined by the conditions in every interwar year. When the curve is above the zero axis, there is a growth of demand in the economy, which causes an expansion of production. If the curve descends below the zero axis, the volume of production (naturally, all other conditions being equal) must decline. Such a state, characteristic of crises, was observed in the United States in the interwar years of 1924, 1927, 1930-1932 and 1938 (1921 was not studied by the given model).^^1^^ The second curve shows the net change of social demand caused by a change in government purchases. The third curve characterises their total effect on production.

~^^1^^ For an explanation of the method of calculating the indicators see Section 7.2.

199-2.jpg 199-3.jpg

, 1923 , 1925 , 1927 , 1929 , 1931 , 1933 , 1935 , 1937 , 1939 , 1941 , 1922 ' 1924 ' 1926 ' 1928 ' 1930 ' 1932 ' 1934 ' 1936 ' 1938 ' 1940 '

Fig. 4-l-A. Influence of the Government Purchases 071 the Course ol the Cycle in the USA in

1922-1941 (1---net relative change in aggregate demand, brought about by cyclical causes; 2---same.

brought about by government purchases; 3---total net relative change in aggregate demand)

164

S. MENSHIKOV

By comparing the first and the second curves we see that the effect of government purchases was, in all cases without exception, countercyclical, i.e., it lessened the drop in production when private demand decreased and restrained its growth in periods of advance. Such an effect of government purchases on the cycle was not a result of premeditated actions by the government because, prior to 1933, the US Administration did not apply a consistent countercyclical policy. After 1932, when the first countercyclical measures were used during the New Deal period, the behaviour of the curve of government purchases changed little in comparison with the earlier period.

Although the movement t of government purchases was usually countercyclical in nature, the scale of changes in demand caused by this movement was considerably smaller than the amplitude of the cyclical movement of private demand. That is why, as is seen from the third curve, the overall influence of government purchases on the cycle was comparatively small. If during 1924 and 1927, the countercyclical effect of government purchases was obvious, during the 1929-1933 crisis it was hardly felt. Only the easing of the 1937-1938 crisis was noticeable. In 1932, when the drop in the demand of the private sector began to grow smaller, the effect of government purchases helped to aggravate the crisis.

In postwar cycles (see Figure 4-1-B), the trend of change of government purchases was largely, but not in all cases, countercyclical. In 1948, 1953 and 1955, government purchases promoted the growth of the economy (which was already in the phase of advance), while in 1958 and 1970 they facilitated a decline of production, although the economy was in the phase of crisis.

The amplitude of fluctuations of the effect extended by government purchases in the postwar period was not smaller than the amplitude of cyclical fluctuations of demand in the private sector. Owing to this, the movement of government purchases, which was quite unstable, essentially altered the picture of cyclical movement.

Except the 1950-1952 period, when big ups and downs of the curves reflected the specific conditions of the Korean war, we can note the following cyclical movement of the

, 1948 , 1950 , 1952 , 1954 , 1956 , 1958 , 1960 , 1962 , 1964 , 1966 , 1968 , 1970 1947 ' 1949 ' 1951 ' 1953 ' 1955 ' 1957 ' 1959 ' 1961 ' 1963 ' 1965 ' 1967 ' 1969 ' 1971

199-4.jpg

(3)-

``S/

-(3)

/•';'«. 4-1-B. Influence of Gnvonuiient Purchases on the Course of the Cycle in the USA in 1947-1970 (curves 1-3 represent same variables as in Fig. 4-1-A)

166

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE. REGULATION

private sector (the first curve): a strong crisis in 1949; less deep but more prolonged crisis of 1957-1958 and of 1960- 1962; a crisis of average force in 1967. Under the impact of the movement of government purchases, this picture changed as follows: a comparatively weak crisis in 1949; the crises of 1954 and 1970, which did not coincide with the cyclical crises in the private sector; a decrease in the duration of the 1958 crisis; an essential weakening of the 1961 and 1967 crises.

Thus, the movement of government purchases in the United States in the postwar period, in some cases helped to reduce the depth and duration of crises but, in other cases, on the contrary, promoted the rise and/or the deepening of crises. In both latter cases, the crises were caused by a steep rise and then drop in military spending.

Figure 4-1-C represents the movement of the same curves in Japan in 1955-1968. The trend of changes in the effect of government purchases was, as a rule, countercyclical. The scale of these changes drew close to the amplitude of fluctuations of demand in the private sector and the general dynamics of the cycle underwent changes, but not such substantial ones as in the United States: 1) the scope of the 1958 and 1965 crises was lessened (in both cases the change of demand in the private sector dropped to the zero axis, but the growth of government demand led overall demand out of the "danger zone"); 2) the weak crisis which emerged towards 1962 was staved off until 1963.

On the whole, as we see, changes in government purchases exerted, in postwar years, an essential influence on the course of the cycle.

A definite impact was also made by taxation policy measures. Between 1945 and 1958 there were 25 changes in the rates of various taxes in the United States; more than half of them (14) were of a countercyclical character and the rest (11) were of a procyclical nature. In earlier periods, the ratio was in favour of procyclical measures.

Such general indicators, however, require serious reservations. The countercyclical tax measures in 1945-1958 involved only the raising of tax rates during the period of advances. There was not a single case in which they were reduced during crises, but, in several instances,

taxes were raised during crises and lowered during advances.

In the 1960s, the taxation policy of the US government changed little. The most essential measures for stimulating growth (lowering of the personal income tax and the corporate profits tax, and increase in the actual depreciation rate) were taken in 1962-1964, when the US economy was in phases of recovery and advance.

Thus, although taxation policy also exerted a certain influence on the cycle, in most cases, it was not utilised as an active countercrisis measure.

Let us now turn to the facts.

The 1948-1949 crisis. The government did not foresee the advent of the crisis. Official admission that the economy was undergoing a recession was made only in July 1949, in other words, at the moment when the phase of crisis was already over in the main. No special countercrisis measures were taken. Moreover, this question was not even discussed. The current tax regulation measures were not linked with the crisis. In April 1948, half a year before the crisis began, taxes were somewhat reduced more for political than economic considerations. In January 1949, when the crisis was already at its height, President Truman called for an increase in taxes. Congress refused to sanction Ibis proposal (again for internal political considerations). In 1949, military purchases were increased but the reason was above all an exacerbation of the international situation, caused by the imnerialist powers (the Berlin crisis and the organisation of NATO).

The 1953-1954 crisis. Again, the crisis was not expected by the government. Shortly before it started, a reduction of military spending was undertaken, which proved to be more substantial than the Administration expected. Simultaneously, taxes were cut which, by the way, did not, prevent the onset of the crisis. The purpose of the government measures was to stimulate partial reconversion in the economy and not to combat a possible crisis. The crisis began in mid-1953 but this was officially admitted only in January 1954. Discussion of countercrisis measures by the Administration started in March-April 1954, when the crisis was already completed in the main. In May it was decided

168

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

169

1055 678

9 1960 12345678

i i i i i i i i

1955 6789 1960 123456789

i i i i

IA(T)+IA(U)

199-5.jpg

AT(c)

*r«

AT(c]-0,6AT(w;

199-6.jpg

AT

IA(T)+IA(U)-AT

IA(T)+!A(U)

199-7.jpg

Fig. 4-1-C. Comparative Sliifts of the Equilibrium in the Postwar Cyclical Model of Japan (per cent of the national income of the preceding year). For explanation of symbols see section 7.1.f. Curves 2T,uT; AG and 2 correspond to curves 1,2 and 3 of Fig. 4-1-A

to accelerate the purchases contemplated for the 1954-1955 fiscal year. These measures were implemented in the second half of 1954 and the heginning of 1955 when there was no longer any need to stimulate the economy.

The 1957-1958 crisis. Although at the end of 1956 the regular phase of advance was slowed down, Secretary of the Treasury G. Humphrey in January 1957 called for a reduction of federal spendings. In the second half of 1957,

170

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

171

they were actually somewhat reduced, which tended to exacerbate the crisis in its initial stage. The crisis began in mid-1957, but the Administration got down to discussing measures to combat it only in January 1958. A decision was made in March to carry out some measures of secondary importance, but their effect could be felt only in 1959.

The 1960-1961 crisis. Developments roughly followed the 1957-58 path.

The crisis of 1966-1967. We pointed out in Section 2.1 that this crisis was weakened and interrupted by the escalation of the war in Indo-China, which began in' 1965. The government practically did not react to the crisis. In the autumn of 1966, when the crisis was only starting, the government abolished the tax 'credit for the investment of capital in new technology, which contributed to a decrease in capital investment. Realising that this was a mistake, the Administration restored this credit in the spring of 1967 but by that time, the crisis had come to an end.

The crisis of 1969-1971. In an effort to lessen the scale of inflation, the government did everything to slow down economic activity. In 1969, military expenditure was cut and taxes raised. The crisis, starting in the summer of 1969, developed sluggishly. In 1970 the rise in unemployment continued and inflation was intensified. Early in 1971 the Administration decided to switch over to partial stimulation of economic activity, chiefly with the help of credit policy measures but, by that time, capital investment had begun to decline and government measures did not yield the expected effect. At the same time they, to a certain extent, facilitated the onset of an acute monetary crisis. In conditions of growing unemployment and the continued rise of prices, the Administration did not take any real measures to liven up economic activity. Taxation measures, to which the government resorted in mid-1971, and the devaluation of the dollar at the end of the same year could exert an influence only in 1972, when the crisis was already nearly over.

Having analysed the role of the fiscal policy of the US government in 1948-1961, W. Lewis, an American economist, arrived at the following conclusion: "Considering their timing and generally modest proportions, it seems doubtful

that the discretionary counterrecession actions can bo assigned much importance in limiting the duration or severity of the postwar recessions.''^^1^^ Apparently, this conclusion may also be applied to the countercrisis policy of 1962-1975.

Howard Pack, an American econometrician, writes: "During periods of low economic activity, the primary countercyclical policy used has been built-in flexibility accompanied by sporadic and somewhat ineffective use of discretionary policy.''^^2^^

Outside the United States, the most frequently used method of countercyclical regulation in the postwar period was the credit policy. In the United States, credit instruments were also employed but they played a lesser role as compared with measures of fiscal policy.

'-•<

Let us examine the turning points in the movement of the discount rate and their location in various phases of the cyclical movement of the economy. Moreover, only such periods are examined which are either during a crisis decline in production or border directly on it (see Table 4-11).

The data in the table show that a cut in the discount rate was made in these countries repeatedly: its purpose was to cheapen credit during crises. However,

first, a cut in the discount rate, as a rule, is made in the middle or final stage of a crisis; cases when a central bank already resorts to this measure at the beginning of a crisis are rare: 1960 in the USA, 1967 in Britain and 1970-1971 in France and the FRG;

second, as a rule, the discount rate is raised on the eve of a crisis; there was only one instance throughout the postwar period when the discount rate was cut before a crisis (1970 in the FRG).

It follows from all this that'the role of a discretionary countercyclical policy of a capitalist state as a means of preventing or cushioning crises is most often small. Therefore, warning should be served against attempts to overestimate the offi-

~^^1^^ W. Lewis, Jr., Federal Fiscal Policy in lite Postwar Recession,^^1^^;, Brookings Institution, Washington, 1962, p. 22.

~^^2^^ Howard Pack, "Formula Flexibility: A Quantitative Appraisal", in Studies in Economic Stabilization, Washington, 1968, p. 5.

Table 4-11

Movement of Discount Rates of Principal Capitalist

Countries during Postwar Economic Crises^^1^^

UNITED STATES

BRITAIN

FRANCE

1 2 1 2 1

3rd quarter

before

4th quarter 1951

mid-crisis

2nd quarter

1948

crisis

1st quarter 1952

1950

increase

increase

cut

1st quarter

before

1st quarter 1955

before crisis

4th quarter

1953

crisis

increase

1951

increase

increase

1st, 2nd

end of crisis

2nd quarter 1956

beginning

3rd quarter

quarters

increase

of crisis

1953*

1954*

t

cut

cut

3rd quarter

beginning

3rd quarter 1957

mid-crisis

3rd quarter

1957

of crisis

increase

1957

increase

increase

4th quarter

middle and

1st, 2nd, 3rd,

final and

4 th quarter

1957; 1st, 2nd

end of crisis

4th quarters

most acute

1958;lst, 2nd

quarters 1958

1958*

stage of

quarters 1959

cut

cut

crisis

cut

1st, 4th quarters

after crisis

3rd quarter 1961 increase

beginning of crisis

4th quarter 1963

1958

increase

increase

2nd, 3rd

beginning

4th quarter

different

2nd quarter

quarters

of crisis

1961; 1st, 2nd

stages of

1965

1960*

quarters 1962;

crisis

cut

cut

1st quarter 1963

cut

2nd quarter

end of crisis

3rd quarter 1966

before crisis

1st, 2nd, 4th

1967*

increase

quarters 1969

cut

increase

3rd ,4th quar-

2nd quarter

end of crisis

1st, 2nd quar-

beginning

ters 1970*;

1969, increase

ters 1967*, cut

of crisis

1st quarter

1971, cut

4th quarter

end of crisis

4th quarter 1967

end of crisis

1970; 1st

increase

quarter 1971*

cut

FRG

JAPAN

2 1 2 1 2

after crisis

4th quarter 1950 increase

before crisis

2nd quarter 1951

be fore crisis

increase

before crisis

1st, 2nd, 3rd quarters 1952 cut

completing stages of crisis

2nd and 3rd quarters 1958 cut

end of crisis

end of crisis

3rd, 4th quarters 1955; 1st

before crisis

3rd quarter 1961

before crisis

and 2nd quarters 1956

increase

increase

before crisis

1st, 3rd quarters 1957*; 1st, 2nd quarters 1958 cut

different stages of crisis

4th quarter 1962; 1st, 2nd quarters 1963 cut

end of crisis

final stage of crisis

1st, 2nd quarters 1961* cut

beginning of crisis

1st, 2nd quarters 1965*

mid -crisis

cut

before crisis

3rd quarter 1965 increase, 2nd quarter 1966

before crisis and beginning of

3rd quarter 1969 increase

before crisis

increase

crisis

after crisis

1st, 2nd quarters 1967* cut

final part of crisis

4th quarter 1970; 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th quarters 1971, cut

different stages ol crisis

before crisis

1st quarter 1970

before crisis

J increase

different stages of crisis

1st, 3rd quarters 1970* cut

before crisis

1st, 2nd, 4th quarters 1971* cut

different stages of crisis

1 Based on International Financial Statistics for the respective years; Historical rate; 2---phase of cycles. The "period of crisis" denotes the period of decline in * A change of the discount rate intended to be countercrisis.

Statistics. 1959-1969. 1---quarter, production (see Chapter 1).

year and trend of change in the discount

174

S. MENSHIKOV

I

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

175

cacy of a countercrisis policy and its possible influence on the course of the economic cycle.

The efficacy of a countercyclical policy is small, chiefly because of the very nature and the intrinsic contradictions of contemporary state-monopoly capitalism.

Measures of a countercrisis policy employed by the government are limited in their very nature. Indeed, the most effective means for combating a crisis could be an increase in government orders for output of industries threatened by overproduction or in which surplus productive, capacities are revealed. In some cases, the government buys up the surplus production but this, as a rule, can be applied only to individual sectors (for example, to agriculture).

The capitalist state cannot act as a guarantor for the sale of goods for the overwhelming majority of enterprises. It can increase purchases of certain goods which it consumes (armaments, buildings and installations, and so on), but this is only an indirect and not a direct method of ``boosting'' demand in other industries.

In a number of cases, the government places under its control enterprises and sectors which are in dire straits, but such measures belong rather to long-term structural changes than to countercyclical regulation.

One potent means for increasing consumer demand could be a reduction of tax rates (particularly for taxpayers in the lower income brackets) and the rates of indirect taxes. During periods of crises, however, the capitalist state resorts unwillingly to measures which could bring about a redistribution of the national income in favour of the working classes.

As a rule, the state prefers to stimulate business activity, directly or indirectly, by reducing taxes on profits or cutting the cost of credit. These means can be effective only if the general economic situation favours a growth of investment. Under conditions of a crisis, depression and even recovery, they cannot lead to a corresponding growth of investment. The real result of such measures is first of all a redistribution of the national income in favour of the capitalist class.

All this, of course, does not imply a belittling of the potentialities of fiscal and credit regulation during crises

but at the same time neither must they be overestimated, because they were applied in a period when crises were not very serious. Let us assume that conditions for a more acute economic crisis arise in the capitalist economy. Can these countercyclical measures serve as a sufficient antidote against such a crisis?

Let us examine the periods in which countercrisis measures are effected. This aspect of the problem has been studied sufficiently well with the help of econometric models. Earlier (see Section 4.2), for the sake of simplicity, we assumed that the multiplier process, set into motion by governmental fiscal and credit measures, becomes effective at once. In reality, the multiplier action is extended over time and far from equal for different measures of countercrisis regulation (see Table 4-12).

The table shows that the absolute values of the multipliers and their behaviour over time depend in essence on the structure of each model. At the same time, it is possible to single out some common features inherent in all these models and which, apparently, to some degree reflect tho real ties in the US economy.

1) Measures of credit policy possess the strongest, longlasting action; next (in terms of maximum value of the multipliers) come government purchases, indirect taxes and personal income tax. Changes in the profit tax rate yield the least effect.

2) The speed at which the economy reacts is highest for indirect taxes. Next come (in receding sequence) government purchases and the personal income tax. The action of credit measures is slowest of all (at least in the USA).

;3) Even through measures of a countercrisis policy, which act most swiftly, maximum effect is not attained before three-nine months have elapsed after the respective measure has been fully applied.

To the lag in the operation of the respective measures of economic policy should be added the so-called administrative lag, i.e., the period between the moment the government receives signals about the approach of the crisis and the time when the respective measures are fully implemented. We have seen that, usually, signals of a crisis are heeded only after a considerable delay. Even if there are

176

S. MBNSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

17

Table 4-12

Distribution of the Multipliers of Fiscal and Credit Policy

in the USA---Increment of the Gross National Product Caused

by a Unit of Growth of Changed Variables^^1^^

Some economists have made experiments in constructing models which automatically regulate governmental economic policyf*in accordance^with their forecasts.^^1^^ The general conclusion of these "authors is as follows: timely countercrisis regulation brings about a^considerable decrease in the size and duration of the decline in production, moreover, the best result is achieved when government measures are systematically adjusted.

In principle, of course, it is technically possible to create a model which automatically leads the economy onto an optimal trajectory without substantial cyclical fluctuations. Specifically, the methods of operations research could be widely employed for this purpose. Nonetheless, a mechanical application of automatic control systems at the macroeconomic level under capitalist conditions is always doomed to failure. Even if we assume that the problem of lag and efficacy of countercrisis measures were to be solved by itself, there would remain the more important problem, that of the socio-economic feasibility of such regulation in conditions of state-monopoly capitalism.

Optimal countercrisis regulation is hindered not only by the economic but also by the political contradictions inherent in contemporary capitalism.

These are, first, the contradictions within the ruling class. The capitalist class as a whole, in particular, the monopoly bourgeoisie, is by no means united in its attitude towards economic policy and individual countercrisis measures. What is felt is the rivalry between political parties and the competitive struggle between financial oligarchic groups, between the monopolies and other strata of the bourgeoisie. Owing to this, many countercrisis measures, far from being carried out in time, are not implemented at all.

Second, there are the contradictions between the capitalist class and the working people. As noted earlier, from the viewpoint of the capitalists, crises perform a ``useful'' function, because they make it possible to exert greater pressure on the working class. Only people working on hire are really interested in the complete elimination of crises,

\v Quarters

Variables \\ changed \.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Government

purchases

A

1.98

2.35

2.13

2.03

1.94

1.91

1.95

2.03

B

1.95

2.67

2.68

2.51

2.18

1.85

1.70

1.68

C

1.35

1.64

2.02

2.20

2.29

2.41

2.52

2.68

D

0.88

1.5d

1.89

2.04

2.04

1.99

1.92

1.84

E

1.42

1.67

1.77

1.73

1.61

1.48

1.35

1.17

Personal income

tax

A

1.19

1.58

1.36

1.35

1.32

1.32

1.40

1.51

B

1.02

1.87

1.91

1.82

1.57

1.28

1.16

1.13

C*

1.57

2.55

3.36

3.90

4.25

4.58

4.89

5.14

D

0.43

0.78

1.00

1.15

1.25

1.31

1.37

1.41

E

0.59

0.99

1.06

0.99

0.90

0.82

0.69

0.45

F

0.44

0.85

1.26

1.42

1.57

1.69

1.77

1.84

Profit tax

A

0.11

0.15

0.19

0.23

0.30

0.34

0.38

0.43

Indirect taxes

A

1.80

1.99

1.46

1.59

1.75

1.54

1.52

1.65

Discount rate

A**

0.00

0.00

0.36

3.32

4.35

4.65

4.77

4.66

Required mini-

mum reserve

B

0.08

0.24

0.16

1.40

2.38

2.64

2.52

2.04

C

1.05

1.97

2.76

3.41

3.82

4.37

4.83

5.25

1 Sources: Michael K. Evans, Macroeconomic Activity, New York, 1969, pp. 567-74. Reports on the dynamic properties of the respective models. Symbols: A---Wharton model, nrst variant; B---same model, second variant; C---same model, 1971 variant; D---model of the Office ot Business Economics, US Department of Commerce; E---Michigan model; P---model of the Federal Reserve Board and the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. The change In the variables amounts to $1,000 million, except for a reduction of the tax rate by 1 per cent (* in the notation) and a cut in the discount rate by 1 per cent (** in the notation).

developed means for observing economic activity, including a system of "leading indicators" and short-term forecasting econometric models which are now already capable in most cases of offering some idea of the probable turn in economic activity six months in advance, capitalist governments rarely resort to regulation on the basis of such forecasts, waiting until the crisis actually makes itself felt.

~^^1^^ A number of such models is described in Chapter 7. 12---0593

178

S. MBNSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

179

because it is a matter that concerns their standard of living, which is seriously harmed by any crisis, even those called ``small'' (see Section 6.1). The pressure of struggle by the working people is compelling the state to adopt countercrisis measures but even in the case of comparatively ``small'' crises, if these steps do not seriously threaten the positions of the capitalist class, the bourgeois state employs them with a delay and unwillingly.

Third, contradictions exist between capitalist countries. Gountercrisis regulation measures in one country may be foiled or may prove ineffective because of opposite measures applied at the same time in other countries. The desire of countries to surmount their, difficulties at the expense of other states is intensified during crises. It was noted in Chapter 3 what harm to the ``unity'' of the imperialist camp was caused by the "emergency measures" of the US Administration in 1971. The trade and currency wars between countries promote the flare-up of monetary crises which, on the rebound, strike at the national economy of countries.

Fourth and last, countercrisis regulation measures are intrinsically contradictory. Owing to their limited and one-sided nature, these measures, leading to an improvement in some spheres of the economy, often cause a deterioration in others. This point can be most graphically illustrated by the contradiction between the consequences of countercrisis measures for a country's national economy and its balance of payments. Thus, stimulating measures of fiscal policy bring about a rise in the aggregate demand of the country, but at the same time result in an increase of imports. If these measures exert no stimulating effect on exports (and usually they do not), the result is a deterioration in the balance of trade and of payments.

This is proved, as seen from Table 4-13, by models of different American econometricians. Some econometric considerations concerning this adverse effect are given in Chapter 7.

Credit policy measures exert an additional adverse effect on the balance of payments. A cut in the discount rate, used in an effort to stimulate business activity, often causes an outflow of short-term loan capital from the given

country. If this flight is massive, a sharp monetary crisis becomes inevitable. The paradox is that a government, in combating an economic crisis, might bring on a monetary crisis.

Striking examples are the dollar crisis in 1971 and the pound crisis in 1967.

Table 4-13

Change of US Balance of Trade Owing to a Unit Increment of Variables^^1^^

Quarters Variables changed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Govern-

ment pur-

chases

B

---0.07

-0.11

---0.13

---0.14

---0.15

---0.14

---0.14

-0.15

C

---0.05

---0.09

-0.11

---0.13

---0.20

---0.23

---0.25

---0.27

D

---0.06

---0.13

-0.17

---0.19

---0.20

---0.20

---0.20

---0.21

E

---0.07

---0.17

-0.17

---0.18

---0.20

---0.21

---0.20

---0.18

Required

bank

reserve

C

---0.11

-0.20

---0.28

---0.34

---0.58

---0.67

---0.76

-0.87

i See lootnote to Table 4-12.

A reverse situation also frequently occurs. In an attempt to get out of a monetary crisis or to prevent it, a government resorts to measures which might bring on an economic crisis.

4.3.c. State Planning, Capitalist Style

The drawing up of state medium- and long-term programmes, including some kind of a "central plan" for the economy as a whole, lias been introduced in a number of developed capitalist countries in recent years. It is not our purpose to examine the causes for the rise, mechanism and consequences of such economic planning in capitalist states. This aspect of the matter has been expounded in detail in a number of other works. We shall merely discuss some aspects of it which are directly linked with the problem of the economy's cyclical movement.

12*

180

S. MBNSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

181

Let us note, first of all, that in far from all countries have such programmes and plans become something more than a declaration of the long-range intentions of the given government or system of institutions. Only in France, the Netherlands and Japan has planning turned into a regular activity of the government. Moreover, it is not a matter of sporadic regulation measures, but of systematic regulation based on long-term plans.

Pointing to the causes for the failure of such planning attempts, some scientists do not take into account the real movement of the economic cycle. Yet it is possible to demonstrate that one of the main reasons for the failure of medium- and long-term programmes in a number of countries has always been periodic economic or monetary upheavals.

A case in point is the long-term plan for the development of the British economy adopted in 1964 for 1965-1970. This plan was formulated with the participation of leading British econometricians, specifically, R. Stone, and was based on original (from the scientific viewpoint) intersectoral planning models.

This plan, however, remained a mere blueprint. Shortly after its approval, Britain faced one of her acutest economic crises after the Second World War. In 1966-1967 industrial production and the national product declined. Fearing a currency crisis, the British government first encouraged the onset of the economic crisis: thus, early in 1966, it took measures to restrict credit and internal consumption. At the beginning of 1967, as though having second thoughts, it twice sharply reduced the cost of credit in an effort to step up business activity. The reduction of the interest rate triggered off the maturing monetary crisis. At the end of 1967, the pound was devalued and the cost of credit rose sharply. This economic and monetary hurricane ``scuttled'' the longterm plan formulated according to all the rules of econometric science.

Another case is offered by the unsuccessful attempts to introduce economic programmes in the United States. After the investment boom in the mid-1960s was exhausted and the economy, notwithstanding the steep rise of military spending, entered a phase of swiftly mounting inflation, the ruling circles were faced with the need to revise the method

of state regulation of the economy. In 1970, for the first time in the history of the USA, the government put forward a medium-term programme for the development of the economy (for 1970-1976). This programme was of too general a nature and was far not only from the medium-term plans of France and Japan, elaborated in detail in sectoral and other aspects, but also from the less detailed programmes of Britain and the Netherlands. Nevertheless the medium-term programme of the United States was the first step in the development of state-monopoly planning of the economy.

However, this programme was not realistic either. Thus, it called for the acceleration of the average annual C NP growth to more than 4 per cent, as compared with the actual rate of 3.7 per cent in the postwar period. However, far from outlining any concrete measures to stimulate accelerated growth, on the contrary, it envisaged a sharp slowing down in the increase of the total sum of purchases by the federal government and local governments and a refusal to make stimulating changes in tax rates.

According to this medium-term programme, such a policy had to lead gradually to a reduction and then to an elimination of the budget deficit. This, in turn, was to curb inflation.

The medium-term programme could not be implemented and reality buried it long before the period envisaged in the programme expired. In the summer of 1971, in an attempt to escape an exacerbation of the dollar crisis, the government resorted to emergency measures, including the introduction of state control over prices and wages. The drawn-out depression of 1971 and the rise of unemployment compelled the Administration in January 1972 to announce a steep rise in federal purchases of goods and services. Simultaneously, it became known that the federal deficit would amount to $ 38,000 million in 1971-1972 and to $ 24,000 million in the 1972-1973 fiscal years.

Thus, the implementation of the medium-term plan of the US government was foiled by the economic crisis of 1969-1971, the subsequent depression and the acute crisis of the dollar in 1971.

There are no grounds forj_ speaking about an essential influence of economic planning by the capitalist state on the cycle in most of these countries. Therefore let us examine the

182

S. MENSHIKOV

CORPORATION, THE STATE, REGULATION

183

experience only of the countries where economic programmes are applied systematically.

The real effect of such planning on the course of reproduction can be reduced to the following lines:

1) long-term co-ordination of the activity of state-owned enterprises and institutions;

2) long-term planning of state capital investment;

3) a system of measures for subsidising and supporting certain sectors;

4) co-ordination of production plans of the-monopolies in conformity with the general economic long-term forecast.

In some developed capitalist countries, the share of state enterprises in industrial production reaches 10-20 per cent. State enterprises, in contrast to private, can utilise budget subsidies more freely. As a result, they are more stable as regards crisis upheavals. If we add to this that the activity of state enterprises is co-ordinated in the long-term plan, it becomes clear that the movement of their production is marked by considerably greater stability as compared with private capitalist enterprises.

Of no less significance is the long-term co-ordination of the activity of government institutions in the sphere of fiscal and credit policy and purchases. Since decisions made by different institutions in this sphere always have longterm consequences, their co-ordination, taking into account only the immediate effect, cannot be adequate.

Long-term planning of state capital investment imparts a degree of stability to the movement of general capital investment and this, as we have seen, is the most mobile and active element of the cycle. In France the share of government investment in the total was 10 per cent in 1950 and 14.3 per cent in 1968; in Japan, 37.3 in 1952 and 18.5 in 1968.* The bigger the share of the government in total capital investment, the greater the countercyclical effect of long-term planning of government investment.

National plans of countries usually provide special measures for subsidising and supporting those sectors, for which development is regarded as particularly important from the point of view of the interests of the entire economy (or for

political and strategic considerations). In France, the biggest efforts of this kind have been made in reorganising the iron and steel industry and in reinforcing the export trend of the automobile industry. In Japan, all sectors which have good export prospects have received priority subsidies, credit, tax privileges and customs protection from foreign competition.

The adoption of long-term plans in France and Japan is preceded by a discussion of the main projections for the key industries with representatives of the biggest companies. Thus, something like a co-ordinated sectoral plan of production sanctioned by the government is elaborated. This plan, being dovetailed with plans of other sectors through a system of inter-sectoral models, then serves as the basis for formulating long-term investment plans of individual monopolies.

On the whole, long-term planning helps to reduce the sweep of crises and to increase the intensity of advances, but calculations on systematic state support bring production closer to the level corresponding to the maximum employment of productive capacities. The result is a constant pressure on resources, a rise of prices and the periodic necessity of taking measures to restrict growth and even reduce production. The practice of ``provoking'' crises by the capitalist state will be examined in greater detail in Section 6.3.

Growth of production in conditions of long-term planning remains largely a spontaneous and explosive process. Confident of the support of the state, monopolies, deriving maximum benefit from the organised boom, seek to `` overfulfil'' the plan. As a result, the industrial boom systematically escapes control, facing the country with the threat of a crisis and evoking deflationary measures by the government.

Thus, there is a deep contradiction between the cyclical nature of capitalist reproduction and the system of measures involved in state planning of the economy. On the one hand, cyclical upheavals foil the implementation of longterm plans, on the other, the spontaneous consequences of these programmes necessitate periodic deflationary measures by the state and lead to monetary crises.

~^^1^^ OECD. National Accounts. 1950-1969, Paris, 1970.

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

185

CHAPTER 5

with the increase in labour resources, the indicator of the growth rate of labour productivity determines the maximum possible economic growth rate. To what extent this rate is achieved depends in particular on the movement of aggregate demand, which is not directly determined by the rise in labour productivity.

Scientific and technological progress became particularly rapid in the 1940s. One of the indicators of this is the wide establishment of research and development laboratories within monopoly concerns. In the 19th century, mainly private persons, individual inventors and scientists were engaged in the "industry of inventions and discoveries". Even in the 1930s, scientific laboratories in large industrial corporations were rather the exception than the rule.

In 1921, US industrial companies spent $75 million of their own resources for R&D; in 1931, $260 million; in 1940, $450 million; in 1953, $2,400 million; in 1961, $5,100 million and in 1969, $9,800 million. In 1920 US industrial companies had 307 scientific laboratories; in 1960, more than 5,400; 384 big companies employing each more than 5,000 people accounted for 85 per cent of the total R&D spending by private industrial firms.^^1^^ Early in our century (1906), only 22 per cent of the total number of patents issued in the United States were registered by corporations rather than by private persons; in 1946 they accounted for 50 per cent and in 1967 for 60 per cent. Similar phenomena are also observed in the other principal capitalist countries, primarily in the 1950s and the 1960s.

Leading corporations, of course, are far from always pioneers of technological progress. Monopolies, as Lenin emphasised, are characterised by a tendency towards technical stagnation and decay. Under conditions of contemporary capitalism, there is voluminous evidence that this tendency is continuing. Here are some examples. Of the 25 most important new products and technological processes developed by Du Pont de Nemours in the USA, 15 were based on research and development originally conducted by small companies or individual inventors. Many important discoveries,

~^^1^^ R. R. Nelson, M. Peck, E. D. Kalachek, Technology, Economic Growth and Public Policy, Blockings Institution, Washington, 1967, pp. 46-48,

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

The mid-20th century was marked by a considerable acceleration of the pace of scientific and technological progress. This acceleration and the consequent structural changes in the economy have come to be known as the scientific and technological revolution.

If applied to reproduction under capitalism the contemporary scientific and technological revolution implies at least:

1) a significant rise in the average growth rate of labour productivity, above all in sectors of material production but also in the economy as a whole;

2) an increase in ties between research and development (R & D) and production, above all within the framework of large monopoly concerns;

3) a noticeable rise in the role of the state in financing and organising R&D work.

Between 1889 and 1914, output per man-hour in the private economy of the USA increased annually by 1.6 per cent on the average; iiT1910-1945 it rose 2 per cent and in 1947- 1965 by 3.2 per cent.^^1^^

The average annual increase of labour productivity in the manufacturing industry in 1959-1969 was 2.9 per cent in the USA, 9 per cent in Japan, 4.9 per cent in the FRG, 1.6 per cent in Britain and 5.7 per cent in France.^^2^^ Together

~^^1^^ E. Mansfield, The Economics of Technological Change, New York, 1968, pp. 36-37.

~^^2^^ Calculated after National Income and Product Accounts of the United States. 1929-1965, Washington, 1966; OECD. Historical Statistics. 1959-1969.

186

S. MENSHIKOV

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

187

jet engines, for example, were first put into production not by companies which had stable, strong positions on the market, but by companies which penetrated these markets only thanks to the introduction of their inventions.

The authors of a book about the organisation of technological progress in the USA note: "Outside defense and space related R&D, however, and possibly some segments of the civil electronics and chemical industries, the bulk of corporate R&D is modest design improvement work not reaching very far---the type of work that results in yearly changes in automobile design, gradual improvements in refrigerators and vacuum cleaners, and steady improvements in the automaticity, speed and capacity of machine tools, rather than radically new products and processes.''^^1^^

There have also been cases of delays in technological innovation. Thus, in 1928, General Motors already had a patent for power steering. But it was introduced into production only in 1951, after Chrysler, a rival of General Motors, began to put out automobiles with power steering.2 F^Calculations show that in postwar years the average duration of the period from the moment an innovation appears in a technologically feasible form to its introduction into mass or large batch production was 14 years, of which on the average 9 years were required for the so-called incubation period, i.e., for bringing the invention to the stage of commercial development, which, in its turn, took about 5 years. The size of this lag in introducing technological discoveries was smaller in postwar years than in earlier periods. Thus, between 1920 and 1944 similar stages took up, on the average, 24 years (16 and 8 years respectively) while in 1885-1919 the lag was 37 years (30 and 7 years). Consequently, the pace of introduction rose but was still not high enough. It is interesting that in cases when R&D was financed by the government the "incubation period" was half of that when corporations spent their own resources.^^3^^

Notwithstanding the existing tendency towards technical stagnation, the counter-tendency, to accelerate technological

progress in large corporations, has also been considerably intensified. The main reason for this is the change in the nature and exacerbation of the competitive struggle between monopoly associations. The prevailing type of monopoly control over the market, in conditions of the contemporary capitalist economy, is the so-called oligopolistic type, under which not one but several rival monopoly corporations dominate each sector.^^1^^ In contrast to this, at earlier stages in the development of monopoly capitalism different types prevailed, for example, a combination of dominance by one monopoly with a certain number of outsiders.

The old type of monopoly control was marked by a combination of a system of high prices in periods of good economic activity with an open price war during periods when it deteriorated. Oligopolistic type of control, on the contrary, is distinguished by the unity of the rival monopolies in maintaining high prices. The main emphasis in the struggle is shifted now to reducing costs of production, the introduction of new goods, their constant modification and improvement and rise in quality or attractiveness for the consumer. Under such methods of monopoly competition, the availability of their own scientific and technological centres and the spending of large sums for R & D are a great necessity for the large corporations, a life-and-death issue in the competitive struggle.

Under these conditions, since the fusion of science and production becomes a widespread if not a general phenomenon, the possibility of prolonged monopolisation of technological novelties by one monopoly is curtailed considerably. With the existing term of operation of exclusive patent rights (according to patent legislation in the USA, 17 years), the real novelty and commercial profitability of discoveries is rarely preserved now for more than 5-6 years. For this reason, the so-called diffusion of technological novelties has been greatly accelerated.

This pattern can also be traced in the development of individual capitalist countries. Greater intensity and scale of international exchansg of patents and scientific and tech-

~^^1^^ R. R. Nelson, M. Peck, E. D. Kalachek, op. cit., p. 54.

~^^2^^ E. Mansfield, op. cit., pp. 103-04.

3 Ibid., p. 102.

~^^1^^ See Y. Khmelnitskaya, Ocherki sovremennoi m.onopolii (Essays on the Modern Monopoly), Moscow, 1971.

188

S. MENSHIKOV

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

189

5.1. OLD AND NEW SECTORS

Technological progress is increasing the capitalist economy's intrinsic unevenness. With the appearance of new means of production, demand for them grows at a faster pace, while demand for old instruments and objects of labour lags behind and at times simply falls.

Studies of input-output tables make it possible to reveal the long-term shifts in the positions of different sectors caused by technological changes. One of the ways of studying this is to compare the volume of gross output required for producing a given volume of the final product with the technical consumption rates characteristic of different periods.

Calculations of this type for the United States show that, throughout 1939-1961, there was a systematic decrease in unit consumption of such materials as ferrous and non-ferrous metals, agricultural raw materials, leather, and products of the timbering and woodworking industry. The relative reduction of demand affected many branches of the extractive industry, primarily coal, the mining of non-ferrous and iron ores and the oil industry. The relative need for maintenance construction jobs, for freight carriage ( particularly rail) and transport equipment dropped substantially.

In contrast, there was a sharp increase in the unit consumption of electric power, oil and natural gas, chemical raw materials, building materials and rubber goods. The demand for electrical and other production equipment, motors and turbines, tools and communication facilities grew at priority rates.^^1^^

``^Another method of analysing the influence of technological shifts is to simulate the actual development of the economy under variable and constant technological coefficients with the help of inter-sectoral dynamic models (see Chapter 7). Such simulation of the development of the American economy in the postwar period (1949-1965) shows that the change of technological coefficients hardly changes the overall economic growth rale but seriously affects the develop-

nical information has become a source of accelerating technological progress within the entire group of developed capitalist countries. The most striking example of the acceleration of technological progress by introducing foreign discoveries is that of Japan in the 1950s and the 1960s.

A considerable role in stimulating R & D has been played by government financing. In the United States, resources allotted by the government for financing such work in the industrial companies, beginning with the Second World War, increased much faster than resources allotted for these purposes by companies themselves. In 1940 the government accounted for 21.1 per cent of these expenses; in 1953, 53 per cent; in 1961, 65 per cent and in 1969, 54 per cent.^^1^^ In the 1960s, the government contributed 78 per cent of the finance for R& D work in France, 61 per cent in Britain and 36 per cent in Japan.^^2^^

The considerable increase in government financing of science and technology was connected to a large degree with military purposes (especially in the United States and Britain and partly in France). Direct competition in science, technology and education between the socialist and capitalist countries, above all in space but also in other spheres, has become a major factor in the increase of these expenses since the end of the 1950s. Lastly, a factor of considerable importance (chiefly in France and Japan) is government financing of R & D which is of paramount significance for consolidating the competitiveness of the industry of these countries on foreign markets.

gf

£|The bulk of the resources assigned by the state for these purposes is used for financing work conducted in large corporations and concerns.

The result of technological progress in the economy is specifically the introduction of new or improvement of the instruments of production and technological processes, materials and consumer goods. In this chapter we shall mainly examine the influence on the economic cycle of these results of scientific and technological progress.

~^^1^^ R. R. Nelson, M. Peck, E. D. Kalachek, op. cit., p. 46; Statistical Abstract of the United States, 1971, p. 509.

~^^2^^ OECD. Science, Economics, Growth and Government Policy, Paris, 1963,

~^^1^^ See A. P. Carter, Structural Change in the American Economy, Cambridge, Mass., 1970, pp. 35-39.

190

S. MENSHIKOV

TECHNOtOOTCAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

191

ment rates of individual sectors. These shifts have caused, during this period, a slower development of agriculture, the extractive industry, construction, the printing, publishing, shoe and leather industries and transport. Growth rates have increased in the pulp and paper, chemical, oil-refining and rubber industries, engineering, except transport equipment, metalworking and the tool-making industry, electric power, trade and the services.^^1^^

Forecast calculations of the same character for the 1970s show a relative reduction in the United States in the demand for grains, iron ore, paper and cardboard, steel, metallic packaging, metal stampings, agricultural machinery, means of communication and a relative increase in the demand for oil and gas, textiles, the output of the woodworking industry, industrial chemicals, plastics, copper, aluminium, motors and turbines, computers and photographic equipment. As we see, the correlation between growth rates in some sectors can change: a lag can give way to acceleration, and vice versa.

An important distinction of these structural shifts is that a decrease in the demand for some types of producer goods is compensated for, as a rule, by an increase in the demand for others. The ratio between the magnitude of the final and intermediate product on the scale of the entire economy and its individual sectors changes rather slowly.

Sectors which, in recent decades, have been expanding at an accelerated pace are often called new, while sectors which develop more slowly are designated as old. These names are largely true. As a rule, the faster growing sectors have appeared later than the slower growing and, drawing on the advantages of technological progress, they are actively competing with the old. Chemical raw material is ousting natural, oil and gas are replacing coal, motor and air transport are pushing back the railways, and so on.

This also tells on the mechanism of the contemporary cycle. Old sectors are hardest hit by crises which for them often turn into a chronic crisis of a structural nature. Some

new sectors weather crises more easily and in certain cases even display prolonged immunity against them.

Table 5-1 shows the difference in behaviour, say, between the extractive industry and the electric power industry of

Table 5-1

Changes in Annual Production during Postwar Crises in the USA (per cent)^^1^^

Industry

1948-1949

1957-1958

1969-1970

All industries

-5.4

-7.0

-3.8

Extractive

-11.3

-8.6

-2.6

Electric power and gas

+6.4

+4.5

+7.5

Manufacturing

-5.5

-7.5

-5.1

of which

Consumer Goods

---0.6

---0.6

---0.7

Motorcars

---0.8

---17.6

-14.9

Textile and Apparel

-4.6

-3.1

---5.4

Furniture

---7.5

-7.6

---2.5

Food and tobacco

+1.0

+2.8

+2.3

Equipment

-12.5

---14.7

---10.8

Engineering

-11.3

---14.8

-10.5

Transport machinery

+0.4

---15.9

-23.2

Instruments

---10.9

-6.0

---6.2

Materials

---7.7

---9.0

---5.0

Primary metal

---15.8

---22.0

-11.3

Fabricated metal

-9.6

-8.5

---5.5

Building materials

-9.3

-7.3

---4.3

Paper

0.0

-0.8

---1.5

Chemical, Oil Refining and

Rubber

-2.8

0.0

---0.2

1 Source: calculated after Economic Report oj the President of the United States, Washington, 1973, pp. 232-34.

the United States during crises. In 1948-1949 and in 1957- 1958 the extractive industry was hit harder by the crises than was industry as a whole. In 1969-1970 it entered the crisis with a certain delay. The production of electric power and gas continued to rise during crises, in the first two cases somewhat more slowly and in 1969-1970 at the previous

~^^1^^ Problemy postroyeniya i ispolzovaniya narodnokhozyaistvennykh modelei. Modelirovaniye ekonomiki SSHA (Problems of the Construction and Application of Macroeconomic Models. Models of the US Economy), ed. S.M. Menshikov, Novosibirsk, 1971, p. 103.

192

S. MENSHIKOV

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

193

fast rate. This result reflects a general swift increase in the electric power intensity of contemporary production, the growing electrification of industrya and households, i.e., reveals, in a concentrated way, the general influence of technological progress on different sectors.

The production of materials is most often subject to more serious crisis difficulties than industry as a whole, because entrepreneurs are trying to reduce their stocks to a greater extent than production. Data in Table 5-1 show that this hits first of all at primary metal, fabricated metal and different types of building materials. However, the general difficulties of industries which produce materials little affect the output of the chemical and paper industries. The growing need for chemical 'raw materials, synthetic and packaging materials maintains production in these industries at a high level, even during crises.

In contrast, marketing difficulties encountered by the iron and steel industry are often of a prolonged character. The first period of such prolonged difficulties in the United States in postwar years relates to the 1950s. The peak in steel production was reached in 1955---two years before the economic crisis began. It was not exceeded for 8 years, up to 1963. The same recurred in the late 1960s. On reaching a new high in 1966, i.e., before the 1966-1967 crisis began, steel production exceeded it slightly only three years later, in 1969, after which it once more declined up to 1972. Alongside a relative reduction of the demand for steel on the home market, forces of ``foreign'' competition also operated here---particularly of the younger and technically more advanced Japanese industry.

In countries where the iron and steel industry arose comparatively long ago, it is generally a lagging sector. In France, Britain, and the FRG, the steel industry is harassed by great difficulties even during the weaker general economic crises and it is among the industries which initiate crisis drops in production.

We shall not dwell here on the movement of production of consumer goods and equipment, because these questions are examined in greater detail in Sections 4.2 and 5.3.

These differences make for quite a variegated picture of the process of contemporary crises. There are always quite

large sectors where the crisis only makes itself felt to a small extent or not at all. This is partly explained by the uneven movement of the demand for their output owing to technical shifts, and partly there is also the secondary effect. Considering themselves to be in a more favourable position, during a crisis new industries continue to accumulate competitive advantages, which are inaccessible for the older sectors.

R & D expenditure is also distributed very unevenly between old and new industries. Among the research-intensive industries are the aerospace, electrical and communication equipment (i.e., first of all the radio electronic branch), the chemical industry and other engineering sectors, including the automobile industry and some branches of transport engineering and the manufacture of precision instruments.

Research-intensive industries in the United States absorb more than 80 per cent of the entire R&D expenditure. The leading place held by the aerospace and radio electronic industries in the postwar years is partly explained by government financing of research and the growth of military contracts, but the "research intensity" of an industry is not always linked with militarisation. Thus, prior to the Second World War when the military expenditure of the United States was small, the research-intensive industries accounted, in 1927, for 63 per cent of the scientific and technical personnel engaged in the economy (in 1940, 53 per cent)^^1^^. In Britain, these industries claimed 91 per cent of the R&D expenditure in 1959 and in Japan, 72 per cent.^^2^^

In the postwar period, the share of the research expenditure in total money receipts increased greatly in all sectors, but it rose at priority rates in the research-intensive branches. In 1961, the share of these expenses in the sales of the aerospace industry amounted to 24.2 per cent as against 11.9 per cent in 1951; in the tool-making industry, to 7.3 as compared with 3.0 per cent. In the electronic and electrical equipment industries, the share of the research expenditure climbed from 0.5 per cent in 1927 to 1.1 per cent in 1937, 3.6 per cent in 1951 and 10.4 per cent in 1961; in the chemi-

~^^1^^ R. R. Nelson, M. Peck, E. D. Kalachek, op. cit., pp. 49-50.

~^^2^^ Ibid., p. 63,

13-0593

194

S. MENSHIKOV

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

195

cal industry the respective figures were 0.4, 1.1; 1.5 and 4.6 per cent.

The research intensity of old industries measured by the same indicator in the United States was 0.8 per cent in the primary metal industry in 1961; 0.6 per cent in the textiles and apparel industry; 1.8 per cent in the building materials industry and 1.3 per cent in the fabricated metal industry.^^1^^

The bulk of the research expenditure goes for the development of new and the improvement of existing types of goods. A postwar poll of American companies has shown that 47 per cent of them regarded the development of new products as the chief purpose of their research; 40 per cent, the improvement of existing goods and only 13 per cent, an improvement in the technology of production. In 1962, the aerospace industry spent 80.5 per cent of the money allotted for R&D on products of its own manufacture, the chemical industry 70.5 per cent, electrical equipment and radio electronic industries 60.3 per cent. At the same time, in the tool-- making industry only 31.6 per cent was used for these purposes and in the fabricated metal industry 27.7 per cent.^^2^^

Thus, the research-intensive industries spent a comparatively larger share of the money allotted for R&D; in some of them, moreover, the bulk went for improving their own output. In the radio electronic, chemical and aerospace industries the overwhelming part of the money went for the development of new products.

Improvement of existing goods differs essentially from the development of new ones. The purpose of the former is to maintain the demand of the given company and to gain advantages over competitors which produce similar goods. The results of these improvements, as a rule, are a change in the position of the competing companies on the market but this is not always accompanied by an expansion of the market's capacity. Only various substantial improvements which border on the development of a new product or new properties of the old product are capable of engendering additional demand.

It is the expansion of the market capacity for the output of the given industry that is the purpose of developing new products. To the extent to which new products do not simply replace old ones in satisfying a certain demand, but engender new demand, this purpose is achieved on the scale of the entire economy. To the extent to which new products merely replace old ones, this aim is attained within the bounds of the branch which manufactures the new products.

Numerous studies have shown that demand for a new product originally grows slowly; then, as the consumer learns its properties, rises at a mounting pace. As output draws near to the initial saturation level of the market, the increase in demand is slowed down and in future is determined by an increase in the volume of market demand.^^1^^ It is the period of the swift increase in demand for the new product which is relatively independent of the general economic situation that is most important for the company manufacturing the new product. If new products appear quite often in the given industry, the volume of its output has a tendency not only to outstrip the general growth as compared with other sectors but also to increase in a way less dependent on cyclical fluctuations.

It is these properties that exist in industries with a high research intensity because the systematic introduction into manufacture of new products demands a high absolute and relative R&D expenditure.

The comparative independence of the research-intensive industries from cyclical fluctuations, as stated earlier, is a secondary effect of the uneven nature of technological progress. This phenomenon also indirectly influences contemporary economic crises in other ways. When all or most major sectors of the economy are simultaneously in dire straits, the depth of the crisis increases owing to the adverse effect on the reciprocal payment relations of companies and on the entire credit-money superstructure, including the stock exchange. If, on the other hand, there are important industries which are outside the crisis, or are little influenced by it, this means that there are definite outlets for a more or less profitable investment of capital and, consequently,

~^^1^^ E. Mansfield, The Economics of Technological Changes, p. 56.

~^^2^^ Ibid., pp. 59-60.

~^^1^^ See Chapter 7.

13*

19C

S. MENSHIKOV

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

197

there are no additional adverse consequences in the creditmoney sphere caused by the general panic.

In summing up, it may be said that, owing to the unevenness of scientific and technological progress in the contemporary capitalist economy, the picture of the course of economic crises becomes more variegated. There are industries, the demand for whose output either drops little or not at all during a crisis.

Research-intensive industries often continue to grow, thanks to the introduction of new products. The existence of such islands in the crisis ocean exerts a certain additional countercrisis effect on the credit-money sphere.

will replace the old equipment even if it physically can still be used and is not fully depreciated. Such is the practice which, in the principal capitalist countries, regulates restorative investment.

The volume of net investment is largely determined by the need to expand fixed capital in view of the prospects of a growth in production. The fixed capital needed for ensuring the expected future volume of production is determined by this volume and also by the capital intensity of the goods, i.e., the unit cost of fixed capital. The increase in production can also partly be ensured, however, by the existing fixed capital, if it is not fully employed. Consequently, the investment needed for expanding fixed capital is equal to the need for fixed assets, deducting those already in existence.

ft+t = kXj+i---Kt,

where It+i---net investment for period t -f- i;

k---capital intensity of output; Xt+i---expected volume of output in period t -\- i; Kt---available fixed capital at the beginning of the planned period.

This formula indicates the general volume of investment required. The real magnitude of investment, however, is distributed over time, taking into account the limited possibilities of obtaining equipment and financing investment. In conditions of the contemporary capitalist economy, the latter circumstance often proves to be the most significant.

As for the possibilities of financing net investment, it should be said that they are limited, first of all, by the availability of a company's own resources, i.e., the size and the movement of net profit and also the credit resources to which it has access. The role of regulating factor is played by the profit rate of the current, past and contemplated future investment. The management of a corporation allots resources only for such investment projects which can yield a profit rate bigger than the set minimum. In the course of the economic cycle, such a minimal rate may change, depending on the current profit rate.

5.2. THE INVESTMENT PROCESS AND THE DURATION OF CYCLES

The movement of fixed capital is one of the principal determining elements of the economic cycle. The amplitude and duration of cyclical fluctuations largely depend on the specific features of the movement of fixed capital. One of the main manifestations of this movement is a change in the volume of capital investment. It is necessary to differentiate between two component parts of investment in fixed capital: restorative investment, which results in the replacement of physically worn out or obsolescent elements of fixed capital (equipment and buildings) and net investment which leads to the expansion of existing productive capacity.

The volume of restorative investment, to the extent to which it replaces physically worn out equipment with new, in normal conditions depends on the existing fixed capital and the rate of its retirement. To the degree to which restorative investment replaces obsolescent capital, its volume is dictated by the comparative profitability of the new and the old equipment taking into account the latter's residual value. If the operation of new types of equipment promises to reduce general average unit production costs to below variable costs^^1^^ in using old equipment, a company

~^^1^^ Variable production costs are current production inputs which directly depend on the volume of output, i.e., chiefly payment of

wages and purchase of materials. Average costs, alongside variable, include constant costs which do not depend on the volume of output, i.e., chiefly depreciation and overhead expenses.

198

S. MENSHIKOV

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

Consequently, it is possible to single out the following principal factors which affect the investment mechanism:

1. The rate of retirement and the average duration of the physical service of fixed capital.

2. The intensity of technological progress in the industries which produce equipment and the average duration of the economically profitable service of fixed capital.

3. The capital intensity of output.

4. The profitability of investment projects.

What influence is exerted on these factors by the contemporary scientific and technological revolution? Let us begin with the question of capital intensity.

Among the most important displays of the scientific and technological revolution is the tendency towards reducing the capital intensity of goods, a tendency caused by a radical improvement in the instruments of production. This tendency was manifested first of all in US industry: it can be traced since the beginning of the 1920s, when it replaced the earlier predominant long-term tendency towards higher capital intensity.

A reduction of capital intensity is an indisputable fact in the economies of a number of developed capitalist countries during certain periods of their history. In the United States, this tendency existed not only in 1919-1939, when the economic conditions were particularly unfavourable for investment, but also during the postwar years, when the investment climate changed for the better. Present-day studies, in which input-output data are used, show, for example, that the capital intensity of a comparable structure of the final product decreased from 1.881 in 1939 to 1.756 in 1947 and to 1.493 in 1958.l If we compare the movement of capital intensity in the actual structure of the final product of the corresponding year, it turns out that the capital intensity increased from 1.668 in 1939 to 1.723 in 1947 and then declined to 1.493 in 1958.^^2^^

These data show how cautiously one should approach a generalisation of these tendencies. The selected years are

not fully comparable because they reflect different phases of the cycle: 1939 was a post-crisis year; 1947 was a year of advance and 1958, a year of crisis. Other studies, which, it is true, do not utilise the input-output method, show a certain increase of capital intensity in the US economy, particularly, in the 1960s.

The general data conceal considerable differences between industries. Thus, in 1939-1947 out of 38 industries there was a decrease in 16; in 1947-1958, in 25 and during the entire period between 1939 and 1958 in 22. Among sectors with an increasing capital intensity were agriculture (which was undergoing rapid industrialisation), the food industry (which later than others engaged in intensive modernisation), chemical, petrochemical, aerospace and some other sectors, which were in the van of the technological progress of US industry. The main reason for the decrease of the general index of capital intensity in the US economy during this period was its substantial drop in industries where it noticeably exceeded the average level for the entire economy---in the coal and oil extracting industries, in the building materials industry, transport and communications, the electric power industry and the production of gas.

Similar forecast calculations for 1958-1975 show that, of the 98 examined sectors, capital intensity was declining in 49 and rising in such sectors with a high capital intensity as the mining of iron ore, coal and oil, the building materials industry, oil pipeline transportation, electric power industry and the production of gas and services of motor transport^^1^^. A general sharp decrease of capital intensity in these sectors, characteristic of the earlier period, is now apparently over.

Studies for other countries show a general rise of capital intensity in the postwar period, particularly in France, the FRG and Japan.

Consequently, the movement of this indicator under conditions of contemporary capitalism is by no means uniform. Similarly uneven is the effect of scientific and technologi-

~^^1^^ A. P. Carter, op. cit., p. 151. In these calculations capitalintensity coefficients were used on the basis of the final demand in 1958.

~^^2^^ Ibid.

~^^1^^ See W. H. Fisher and C. IT. Chilton, Financial Report on An Ex Ante Capital Matrix for the US. 1970-1975, Baltello Memorial Institute, Columbus, 1971, pp. 183-233.

200

S. MENSHIKOV

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

201

cal progress on the movement of capital intensity. Let us denote capital intensity as follows:

,_KL ft~~T'T'

where k---capital intensity of output; KIL---capital per worker;'

LlX---labour intensity of output, i.e., the magnitude which is the inverse of labour productivity.

It is clear that, with a given labour productivity, a change in capital intensity is fully determined by the change in capital per worker. Technological progress may lead either to a rise or to a decrease in capital per worker. Initially, the mass introduction of new technology (intensive industrialisation or automation of sectors), the need to erect new buildings to house new equipment, the growing sophistication and cost of equipment---all this accelerates the growth of capital per worker. Nevertheless, in some cases (although far from always), this growth can be slowed down or temporarily halted by more rational and economical use of equipment, efficient organisation of the production process, more compact installation of equipment, better relationship between the active part of fixed capital (equipment) and its passive part (buildings), a saving as a result of increasing the scale of production, and so on.

Capital intensity decreases only if labour productivity grows faster than capital per worker. This is possible if new, particularly productive equipment, is introduced and if labour productivity rises thanks to the better organisation of the work, advance in the skill of the worker, i.e., owing to the use of factors which are not directly connected with the equipment itself.

Additional factors can influence a change of capital intensity, both on an industry and a nationwide scale. These are mainly such factors as the improvement or deterioration of the natural conditions of production, higher cost of labour, structural changes in the economy (an increase or decrease in the share of industries with a higher capital intensity).

Consequently, in conditions of the scientific and technological revolution, particularly when there is a comparatively

swift growth in production, a decrease of capital intensity of the social product is a probable but not the only possible tendency.

Let us examine an instance when, owing to a favourable set of circumstances, in particular thanks to the introduction of new, highly efficient technology, capital intensity generally decreases. Does this mean that the relative size of investment has to decline? If this question is examined statically, the positive answer seems obvious, but in dynamic terms, an entirely different picture emerges. The possible decrease in the capital intensity of the social product (if it is not caused by a decline in the growth rate of the economy) is a result of the systematic introduction of new, improved equipment. In recent decades, the service span of fixed capital has decreased in developed capitalist countries, and the frequency of the renovation of technology increased. The acceleration of technological progress has increased the physical possibilities of utilising equipment but shortened the period of its obsolescence.

The tendency to reduce capital intensity is opposed by the tendency towards the more frequent renovation of fixed capital. The relative demand for fixed capital is measured by the share of gross capital investment in the final social product. Let us name this magnitude the velocity of accumulation, in contrast to the accumulation rate, which is measured by the ratio of net capital investment to the national income. The velocity of accumulation of fixed capital depends directly on the index of capital intensity, the growth rates of output and the rate of replacement of fixed capital. With unchanging average growth rates of output, a reduction in capital intensity leads to a decrease in the velocity of accumulation only if the rate of replacement of fixed capital does not grow (or does not'grow fast enough)^^1^^.

Table 5-2 shows that the accumulation velocity in the principal capitalist countries in the postwar period increased; moreover, in the United States on the average it was considerably above that at the highest point of the interwar advance (in 1929). While in the 1950s in Western Europe and Japan accumulation velocity was almost the same as in

~^^1^^ See Section^?.7.

Table 5-2

Structure of Investment in Fixed Capital in Principal

Capitalist Countries (per cent of GNP, in current prices)^^1^^

U

3A

Britai

a

France

FRG

Japar

i

1929 1950 1957 1968 1950 1957 1968 1950 1957 1968 1950 1957 1968 1952 1957 1967

Total investment in fixed capital

14.1

18.7

17.8

16.6

1? 8

15.3

18.2

1^^1^^) 9

19.1

24.9

18.5

91 ^

23.1

?0 4

26.6

32.3

of which: Total, exclusive of housing construction

10.3

11.8

13.1

13.0

10.3

12.5

14.5

13.6

14.4

18-. 2

14.1

16.7

18.1

17.5

22.9

25.8

Machinery and equipment

5.4

6 5

6.3

6.8

fi 8

8 1

8.8

7 4

8.8

10.2

9.5

11 0

11.0

Buildings and installations

4.9

5.3

6.8

6.2

3.5

4.4

5.7

6.2

5.6

8.0

4.6

5.7

7.1

Depreciation

7.6

7.3

9.4

9.6

7.2

7.6

7.9

9.5

8.8

10.9

10.5

8.5

11.2

6.9

9.4

12.8

Net investment in fixed assets

6.5

11.4

8.4

7.0

5.6

7.7

10.3

6.4

10.3

14.0

8.0

13.0

11.9

13.5

17.2

19.5

i Sources: Calculations based on data from OECD, Natiom.1 Accounts. 1950-1069; The Nation-it Income and Product Accounts of the United States. 19H9-19SS.

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

203

the USA, in the 1960s it substantially exceeded the US level in the FRG, France and Japan. Accumulation velocity increased in these countries, both as a consequence of a higher depreciation rate (especially in Japan) and of a growth in the accumulation rate. In the USA, the tendency to decrease the share of net capital investment was resisted by an increase in depreciation rates.

Thus, on the whole, the high intensity of modernising equipment in postwar years prevented a decrease in the velocity of capital accumulation.

The increase in the depreciation rate does not, of course, proceed uninterruptedly; it can be halted for more or less prolonged periods. It is in these periods that a decrease of capital intensity may lead to a decline of accumulation velocity and slow down the general growth rates of the economy.

Let us assume that capital intensity of new types of equipment declines. A certain time passes between the moment when they appear on the market and the moment when a new, higher velocity of renovating old equipment arrives. Periods are possible when capital intensity declines under the old rates of equipment replacement. This results in a decrease in the velocity of capital accumulation.

Section 7.7 shows that the reciprocal influence of changes in capital intensity and the rates of capital replacement can cause periodic fluctuations in the velocity of capital accumulation. The period of these fluctuations, however, considerably exceeds the time bounds of the economic cycle in our understanding (see Chapter 2).

Summing up everything that has been said, let us note that changes of capital intensity are of a long-term nature and that their impact on the economic cycle is displayed only by establishing the general average velocity of capital accumulation. During the first 25 years after the Second World War, conditions prevailed which caused an accelerated accumulation of capital. In future, it is possible that different conditions will prevail, specifically those which could slow down the accumulation of capital. This, for example, could be a result of a prolonged decrease or stabilisation of the intensity of equipment replacement.

204

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

205

S. MENSHIKOV

The intensity of equipment renovation, as we have seen, has risen considerably in the last quarter of a century. If in previous cycles, all types of equipment had always changed at least once during the cycle, an acceleration of replacement could have caused a general decrease of the cycle. In the past, however, neither every time nor every type of equipment was immediately replaced after each crisis. This process could develop only to the extent of the financial possibilities of entrepreneurs, and those of nonmonopolised capitalists were significantly smaller- than those of present-day corporations.

Consequently, greater intensity of equipment renovation during contemporary cycles is, displayed particularly in that a bigger part of the equipment is now replaced within the course of one economic cycle.

Such a conclusion is based on the assumption that the average service span of equipment in the economy still exceeds the duration of the cycle. This assumption is confirmed by the fact that, after every regular cyclical crisis, a more or less prolonged period sets in, during which corporations wait until the cost of previously installed equipment is finally recouped. Apparently, the bigger the part of the equipment renovated in the course of the given cycle, the more important it is that it be fully recouped before a new round of renovating fixed capital becomes possible. In the past this waiting period was not obligatory for the nonmonopolised entrepreneur, who replaced only a small part of his equipment in every cycle.

The duration of the cycle depends not only on the depreciation rate, which expresses the velocity of renovation of fixed capital, but also on a number of other structural relationships in the economy. A change in the depreciation rate exerts its influence in the main not on the duration of the cycle, but on its amplitude. With an increase in the depreciation rate, the negative dependence of gross capital investment on the overaccumulation of capital is reduced. In some cases, if the intensity of equipment renovation is particularly high, an increase in restorative investment may fully outweigh the adverse effect of accumulated capital on net investment. In all these cases, the amplitude of cyclical fluctuations tends to decrease (see Section 7.7).

R & D expenditure represents capital investment of a special type. In contrast to ordinary investment, which goes for the purchase of equipment or buildings, resources are spent on the creation and improvement of a product or technology, and not for the buying of plant.

In cases of success, R&D investments can bring a high profit and a swift recoupment of the expenditure. Scientists in the United States point out that, in most cases, companies expect from their research projects (if they are successful) a profit of more than 100 per cent on the invested resources. A project is designed to take not more than four years, including the introduction of the results into production. Most approved projects are not connected with any big technical risk and the probability of success usually exceeds 80 per cent. Although the implementation of projects introduces adjustments in these calculations, approximately half of them, on being completed within the planned period, produce the desired results. More than 30 per cent are successful but the period exceeds the estimate, and only onesixth of the projects is not realised, owing to unforeseen difficulties of a technical nature. In any case, the profit on research projects is higher than on usual investments. In research-intensive sectors it is so high that corporations make big investments in longer-term and risky projects.^^1^^

Owing to its special profitability, R&D investment is less subject to cyclical fluctuations than is ordinary investment. Since successful research leads to an increase of the ``usual'' investment, this distinction of the movement of investment in science is also reflected on the total sum of capital investment.

Investment in research is more stable not only because of higher profitability. During periods of crisis it is maintained at a comparatively high level because even a temporary halt in research could inflict irreparable damage on corporations. A company may fall behind in the development of new products or lose very competent personnel whose return or replacement is at times simply impossible.

If financial possibilities allow, corporations utilise a period of comparatively low economic activity for experimen-

~^^1^^ B. Mansfield, Industrial Research and Technological Innovation. An Econometric Analysis, New York, 1968, pp. 16, 31, 57-59.

206

S. MENSHIKOV

tal work with new equipment and new products. During boom periods, the swift rise of demand makes it possible to sell existing types of goods profitably and to work with the ordinary types of equipment available on the market. During these periods it is unprofitable to experiment with new goods. Moreover, there is a shortage of free capacity.

Such a countercyclical movement of investment in research has its limits. If the crisis is sufficiently acute and prolonged, it may prove to be disadvantageous to put the results of research projects into production. The most striking example is research expenditure in the United States in 1929-1933. At first, R&D expenditure of companies continued to grow: from $ 106 million in 1929 to $ 116 million in 1930 and to $ 131 million in 1931. Then, however, the big deterioration in the financial position of corporations became decisive. In 1932 this expenditure decreased to $ 120 million and in 1933 to $ 110 million^^1^^.

In postwar US crises company R&D investment, as a rule, continued to grow, although ordinary investment declined. In 1953-1954 it grew by 5.8 per cent, in 1957-1958 by 6.5 per cent and in 1960-1961 by 4.3 per cent^^2^^.

During the prolonged 1969-1971 crisis, the R&D expenditure of corporations financed by the government decreased. At the same time, expenditure from] their own resources increased by 9.5 per cent in 1970 and by 8 per cent in 1971 (in constant prices by 3.9 and 3.4 per cent respectively)^^3^^.

While R&D expenditure often acts countercyclically the rate of technological progress, on the contrary, depends greatly on the fluctuations of general economic activity under the impact of the cycle. Thus, statistics of the number of patents registered in the USA show strikingly pronounced fluctuations which somewhat belatedly follow the economic cycle. An American researcher also compared the course of the economic cycle with a list of major discoveries in a num-

Table 5-3

Number of Semiconductor Patents Issued

to Private Companies in Principal Capitalist

Countries (years of local maximums are italicised)

USA

Britain*

France*

FRG*

Japan**

1952 1953 1954

60 92 79

'l6

'•41

'SO

...

1955 1956 1957

73

186 184

24 29 33

46 40 36

31 29

20

...

1958 1959 1960

307 346 322

53 97 79

73 84 71

47 89 109

"\ 3

1961 1952 1963

341

440 328

79 106 101

87 106 104

111 120 121

7 6

1964 1965 1966

325 621 583

64 71 100

93 97 149

107 132 200

9 13

17

1967 1968

479 372

66 138

99 194

106 172

13 14

~^^1^^ Y. Brozen, "The Role of Technological Change in Regularizing Private Investment" (Regularization of Business Investment, NBER, Princeton, 1954, pp. 303-09).

~^^2^^ R. R. Nelson, M. Peck, E. D. Kalachek, op. cit., p. 46.

3 Statistical Abstract of the United States. 1971, p. 509. The GNP deflator was used for transferring the research expenditure into constant prices.

* Number of patents issued in France to firms of the indicated country. ** Number of patents issued in i,he United States to Japanese firms.

her of sectors^^1^^. After processing the times series by the moving average method, he obtained an average duration of

~^^1^^ See Jacob Schmookler, Invention and Economic Growth, Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1966, pp. 76-79, 82-83.

206

S. MENSHIKOV

tal work with new equipment and new products. During boom periods, the swift rise of demand makes it possible to sell existing types of goods profitably and to work with the ordinary types of equipment available on the market. During these periods it is unprofitable to experiment with new goods. Moreover, there is a shortage of free capacity.

Such a countercyclical movement of investment in research has its limits. If the crisis is sufficiently acute and prolonged, it may prove to be disadvantageous to put the results of research projects into production. The most striking example is research expenditure in the United States in 1929-1933. At first, R&D expenditure of companies continued to grow: from $ 106 million in 1929 to $ 116 million in 1930 and to $ 131 million in 1931. Then, however, the big deterioration in the financial position of corporations became decisive. In 1932 this expenditure decreased to $ 120 million and in 1933 to $ 110 million^^1^^.

In postwar US crises company R&D investment, as a rule, continued to grow, although ordinary investment declined. In 1953-1954 it grew by 5.8 per cent, in 1957-1958 by 6.5 per cent and in 1960-1961 by 4.3 per cent^^2^^.

During the prolonged 1969-1971 crisis, the R&D expenditure of corporations financed by the government decreased. At the same time, expenditure from] their own resources increased by 9.5 per cent in 1970 and by 8 per cent in 1971 (in constant prices by 3.9 and 3.4 per cent respectively)^^3^^.

While R&D expenditure often acts countercyclically the rate of technological progress, on the contrary, depends greatly on the fluctuations of general economic activity under the impact of the cycle. Thus, statistics of the number of patents registered in the USA show strikingly pronounced fluctuations which somewhat belatedly follow the economic cycle. An American researcher also compared the course of the economic cycle with a list of major discoveries in a num-

Table 5-3

Number of Semiconductor Patents Issued

to Private Companies in Principal Capitalist

Countries (years of local maximums are italicised)

USA

Britain*

France *

FRG*

Japan**

1952 1953 1954

60 92 79

'l6

'•41

'SO

...

1955 1956 1957

73 186 184

24 29 33

46 40 36

31 29 20

...

1958 1959 1960

307 346 322

53

97 79

73 84 71

47 89 109

"i 3

1961 1952 1963

341 440 328

79 106 101

87 106 104

111 120 121

7 6

1964 1965 1966

325 621 583

64 71 100

93 97 149

107 132 200

9 13

17

1967 1968

479 372

66 138

99 194

106 172 13 14

~^^1^^ Y. Brozen, "The Role of Technological Change in Regularizing Private Investment" (Regularlzation of Business Investment, NBER, Princeton, 1954, pp. 303-09).

~^^2^^ R. R. Nelson, M. Peck, E. D. Kalachek, op. cit., p. 46.

~^^3^^ Statistical Abstract of the United States. 1971, p. 509. The GNP deflator was used for transferring the research expenditure into constant prices.

* Number of patents issued in France to firms of the indicated country. ** Number of patents issued in the United States to Japanese firms.

her of sectors^^1^^. After processing the times series by the moving average method, he obtained an average duration of

~^^1^^ See Jacob Schmookler, Invention and Economic Growth, Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1966, pp. 76-79, 82-83.

208

S. MENSHIKOV

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

209

the cyclical movement for the number of patents and discoveries of 16-17 years in railroading, 20-21 years in agriculture, 17-20 years in petroleum refining and 31-32 years in paper making. If no smoothing over of the primary statistical series is made, the cycles of inventions and discoveries are much shorter and more or less precisely follow the economic cycles.

Even such a research-intensive industry as the production of semiconductors, which appeared only in the 1950s, reveals a strikingly pronounced fluctuating movement. Table 5-3 shows that the "patent waves" in this sector have an average duration of 3-4 years. It is indicative that the local maximum waves correspond well to each other in different countries and, as a rule,'occur in years preceding general economic crises. The brevity of the technological cycle in the production of semiconductors reflects the particularly high intensity of technological progress in this most modern industry.

The most diverse opinions are expressed in the literature about the existence of more prolonged fluctuations in the rate of technological progress. In the opinion of some scientists, the rate of technological progress in sectors weakens as they mature. This tendency gives rise to ebbs and flows of technological progress. Other researchers deny the existence of such a tendency, pointing out that this rate is determined not by the resources (i.e., the possibilities of science) but by such factors as profitability and market demand.^^1^^

These positions do not differ so greatly. If the rate of technological progress is a function of demand, it is obvious that as a new sector draws close to the initial saturation point of market demand, its growth rates slow down and, consequently, the pace of technological progress in it declines.

It is difficult to establish the existence or absence of such fluctuations owing to a lack of the necessary statistics. Theoretically, the possibility of their existence cannot be precluded. Since the rate of technological progress is intricately interconnected with general economic conditions, this problem, in our opinion, should be solved by consider-

ing the long-term fluctuations in economic growth rates. The existence of such fluctuations is confirmed by the latest studies which utilise the method of spectral analysis.1 It was pointed out earlier (in this section) that the possibility of prolonged periodic fluctuations in the rate of fixed capital renovation follows from an analysis of the schema of the interconnections of capital intensity, the profit rate, depreciation rate and research investment. This question is also examined on a formal model in Section 7.7.

5.3. TECHNOLOGICAL PROGRESS AND PRIVATE CONSUMPTION

There are different direct and indirect channels through which scientific and technological progress influences private consumption. Among the major trends of such influence are:

1. Changes in the social and other structures of the population.

2. Expansion of the sphere of private consumption by the manufacture of new consumer goods.

3. An increase of the share of consumer durables in private consumption.

In all the principal capitalist countries, the growth of production in the postwar decades has been accompanied by a steady increase in the share of the urban population. Growing urbanisation of capitalist society brings about a systematic change in the composition of personal consumption.

These changes affect all groups of consumer goods and services---food, clothing, expenditure for housing, transport, recreation and entertainment, and so on.

The most striking changes occur in countries where the share of the rural population was high in the recent past (for example, Japan and Italy), but even after the prevail-

~^^1^^ See, in particular, L. A. Klimenko, "Study of Periodic Fluctuations in the Capitalist Economy with the Help of Spectral Methods of Analysis of Times Series", Matematicheskiye metody v ekonomike i mezhdunarodnykh otnosheniyakh. Problemy ekonometricheskogo modelirovaniya (Mathematical Methods in the Economy and International Relations. Problems of Econometric Modelling), Moscow, 1972.

~^^1^^ See Jacob Schmookler, op. cit., p. 93 and subsequent pages.

14-0593

210

S. MENSHIKOV

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

211

ing part of the population moves to the cities, urbanisation of consumption continues. Families become smaller in size, i.e., the number of consuming units increases; part of the more well-to-do strata move to the suburbs; the distance between places of residence and employment increases and retail trade and service establishments are more concentrated.

The scientific and technological revolution causes an increased need for specialists and highly skilled workers. Mass education becomes the norm. The number of social groups which consider a higher education a vital necessity increases steeply. All this promotes a growth in the consumption of articles that satisfy cultural needs and causes a change in the composition of demand for personal consumer goods. What happens, to put it briefly, is what Lenin called an "enhancement of needs". The enhancement of needs is a process of the gradual expansion and change in the minimum range ^of goods and services necessary for the normal functioning and reproduction of contemporary labour power. If we allow that the value of these commodities remains unchanged, it is a question of the process of raising the value of labour power as such---of its material and sociohistorical elements. Under conditions of capitalist society, the law of enhancing needs is realised in the course of the class struggle.^^1^^

In the long-term aspect, the enhancement of needs implies a tendency towards a systematic growth of per capita consumption expenditure. This increase, all other conditions being equal, is the faster, the swifter the examined structural shifts caused by scientific and technological progress, industrialisation and urbanisation take place. Apparently, the process of enhancing needs exerts a fundamental influence on the course of reproduction, because more than half of the final product of the principal capitalist countries goes for personal consumption.

The enhancement of needs can be realised only to the extent to which a corresponding growth rate of production is possible, but the consumption sphere plays an active role,

by changing its structure and making possible the growth of production in new directions determined by technological progress.

The qualitative shifts in consumption to a certain degree take place independently of the growth in personal incomes. If consumption were merely a passive result of an increase in income, it could be expected that, as incomes increase and the degree of satisfaction of personal needs rises, the share of incomes going for current consumption should be reduced. In reality, if we examine consumption of the overwhelming part of the population, the share of the spent income is usually not reduced as incomes rise. This means that, with the satisfaction of some needs, other needs requiring satisfaction come to the fore.

It is not difficult to show that, if in an aggregated model a certain growth rate of capital investment and government consumption is given, the growth rate of the economy depends on the consumed part of the income. If this magnitude decreases, the growth rate of production drops. Thus, an enhancement of needs, resisting a reduction of the consumed part of the current income, actively promotes the maintenance of the pace of production at the level set by the given rate of accumulation and government consumption.

The direct influence of the scientific and technological revolution on personal consumption is also displayed in the systematic introduction of new consumer goods. The appearance on the market of new goods in principle differs essentially from the constant replacement of old models of consumer goods by somewhat modified ones.

A qualitatively new article can either replace an old commodity, satisfying the same personal requirement, or satisfy a new, formerly non-existent need. In both cases, the new commodity can have properties which make it possible to expand the scale of consumption.

For example, a part of personal consumption expenditure is always spent for entertainment. With the appearance of the cinema, expenditure for theatrical performances was relatively reduced and in some countries and regions also cut in absolute terms, but total spending on entertainment rose steeply, because the output of the "entertainment industry" became accessible to the broad masses. The develop-

14*

~^^1^^ Related questions and the influence of the class struggle on reproduction are examined in Chapter 6.

212

S. MENSHIKOV

TBCHNOLOGIGAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

213

ment of television unfavourably affected the cinema industry and traditional entertainment establishments, but the accessibility of all types of entertainment and total spending on them again rose.

The massive spread of motorcars in a number of countries resulted in a decline of passenger traffic on railways and urban transport, but the total transport expenditure of the population rose notably. Many other such examples can be cited.

The effect of introducing new goods in the sphere of final and intermediate use is not the same. If a new product designated for final use is introduced (private consumption, accumulation, government consumption), the direct result is not only an increase of final use, but also a consequent growth in the consumption of old and new commodities of intermediate consumption (raw and other materials and power). If, however, a new product designated for intermediate use is introduced, it initially only ousts old products of similar designation. Moreover, the sphere of final and, consequently, also intermediate consumption, is extended only to the degree to which this causes fundamental changes in final consumption.

Electric power, oil, light metals, and man-made fibres, let us recall, have exerted a revolutionising influence on the development of production. Their triumphant march was ensured, however, only when the means of production and consumer goods, making possible their extensive use, were developed and became widespread.

We pointed out already that, notwithstanding the tremendous changes in the equipment and technology of production, the ratio between the intermediate and final product over long periods of time hardly changes. A similar stability marks the ratio of current production costs and value added in most sectors of the principal capitalist countries. These statistical observations confirm the point that the chief source for the growth of aggregate demand is the systematic development of new types of final product, including new consumer goods.

Within the bounds of a static analysis, it is difficult to understand how the introduction of new consumer goods can lead to expansion of the market. If a certain level of in-

come is given, the demand for new consumer goods can grow only on account of old-type goods or on account of a reduction of the savings rate, i.e., ultimately, of investment.

However, going over to a dynamic analysis, we at once find that the level of income cannot be set in advance: it is itself a function of production and demand. It is possible to demonstrate (see Chapter 7) that the appearance of new consumer goods facilitates a growth of consumption, moreover, one which is relatively independent from the increase in income. The growth of independent consumption, stimulated by technological progress, represents an important factor which determines an expansion in production, income and aggregate demand.

A systematic replacement of old models of consumer goods by new leads to similar changes in aggregate effective demand. In this case, new models can be bought before old ones are fully consumed. The demand for consumer goods, in effect, becomes a function of the higher rate at which they are consumed per unit of time, but a growth of this rate proceeds slowly; it may not exert a fundamental influence within the course of one economic cycle. Moreover, in the phase of crisis, the purchase of new models can be deferred, because consumers have a stock of goods suitable for consumption. Consequently, replacement of models may prove to be a factor which increases rather than decreases the amplitude of cyclical fluctuations.

This pattern is most clearly displayed in the case of consumer durables. Statistics usually place in this category goods whose period of consumption exceeds three years. These are motorcars, household appliances, radio and TV sets, furniture, and so on. Except for furniture, the bulk of durables have become objects of mass consumption only comparatively recently. The replacement of models of durables, as a rule, takes place frequently, in many cases annually. The intensity of the appearance of principally new goods is also very high in this group. '

Owing to this, purchases of durable goods in recent decades have, on the whole, been growing fast and their share in total purchases of consumer goods and services has risen substantially almost everywhere.

214

S. MENSHIKOV

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

215

Table 5-4

First, since many of them appeared not long ago, they have the same dynamics as other fundamentally new goods. In'other words, during the period of their introduction and up" to the moment of the initial saturation of the market, the movement of demand for them can be pictured by a' logical curve, i.e., at first at accelerating growth rates and then at an increasingly slower pace.

Thus, in West European countries and Japan, where the spread of motorcars on a mass scale began only in the 1950s and the 1960s, the demand for them grew at priority rates for a long time, even in the phase of economic crises. For the first time a spontaneous crisis in the marketing of motorcars could be observed in these countries only at the end of the 1960s.

Consequently, like any fundamentally new goods in the period of their appearance and mass distribution, consumer durables can exert a countercyclical influence on reproduction.

Second, after the point of initial saturation is passed, consumer durables turn into a factor which tends to increase cyclical fluctuations.

This property of durable goods stems from the specific nature of their consumption. They are consumed gradually, preserving their use properties for a long time. Here we can draw a certain analogy with fixed capital in production. This analogy, naturally, is limited and applies only in general'outline to the nature of the use of these goods. In both cases, gradual consumption creates only the possibility of a periodic mass renovation. In other words, like fixed capital in production, consumer durables contain the possibility of cyclical movement. For the same reason we consider it possible to regard the movement of consumer durables as an additional material foundation of the economic cycle.

By using simple econometric models, it is possible to demonstrate that the existence of a developed sphere for the purchase of consumer durables is sufficient to impart a cyclical nature to the movement of the economy, even in the complete absence of a cyclical movement of capital investment (see Section 7.7).

In reality, however,rthe renovation of fixed capital remains the chief material basis of the economic cycle, more important than the sphere of consumer durables.

Share of Durables in Total Purchases of Consumer Goods (per cent)^^1^^

1929 1950 1957 1968

United States

11.9

13.4

11.9

12.4

Britain

• • •

6.2

8.0

9.1

France

4.9

7.8 '

9.3

Japan

...

...

4.0^^2^^

8.0^^3^^

1 Sources: OECD. National Income Accounts. 1950-1969; The National Income and Product Accounts of the United States. 1929-1965.

2 1959. 8 1970.

Table 5-4 shows that the share of durable goods is the highest in the United States, where it is approximately stabilised at the level already attained in 1929. But within the group of durables, essential changes have taken place. The proportion of automobiles and household appliances has risen greatly, while the share of furniture and other ``traditional'' goods in this group has declined.

In West European countries, in contrast to the United States, the share of durables has risen swiftly, but at the end of theT1960s it still lagged behind the American level. The consumption of motorcars and household electrical appliances has grown most swiftly.

Japanese statistics singled out consumer durables as a separate category only in 1959. In the 1950s, the share of these goods in Japan lagged considerably behind the West European level, but at the end of the 1960s drew very close to it. It must be borne in mind that the share of furniture in Japanese personal consumption, as before, remains small, while the share of the most ``progressive'' group, i.e., motorcars and electrical household appliances, was, probably, already at the end of the 1960s, no smaller in Japan than in West European countries.

The movement of the demand for consumer durables is marked by a number of specific features.

216

S. MENSHIKOV

TECHNOLOGICAL SHIFTS AND SHIFTS IN REPRODUCTION

217

Table 5-5

Table 5-6

Change in Production and Purchases of Durables as Compared with Other Goods in Postwar Economic Crises in the USA (decrease (---) or increase (+) in per cent of the precrisis peak year J)

Comparative Share of Capital Investment and Purchases of Durable Goods (per cent of GNP)^^1^^

United States

Britain

France

1929 1957 1968 1957 1968 1957 1968

Capital investment exclusive of housing construction

10.3

13.1

13.0

12.5

14.5

14.4

18.2

Purchases of durable goods

8.9

7.5

7.6

5.3

5.7

5.2

5.7

Years

1948-1949

1953-1954

1957-1958

1969-1970

Purchases of consumer du-

rables

+8.0

+0.3

---12.3

-4.0

Purchases of consumer goods

for current consumption

+1.7

+0.9

+1.1

+2.3

Purchases of consumer ser-

vices

+2.4

+4.1

+3.7

+3.5

Production of consumer goods

by industry

-0.6

-0.7

-0.6

---0.7

Production of motorcars

-0.8

---7.0

---17.6

-14.9

Production of furniture

-7.5

...

-7.6

---2.5

1 Sources: Same as in Table 5-4.

Table 5-5 shows that the share of investment in fixed capital substantially exceeds the share of purchases of consumer durables, notwithstanding the swift growth of the latter.

Alongside this purely quantitative prevalence, the movement of fixed capital qualitatively, too, represents a more vital cyclical factor. In contrast to consumer durables, the consumption of fixed capital is an organic component part of the creation of new output. The mass renovation of both fixed capital and consumer durables, increasing the demand, generates the industrial advance. But the renewed fixed capital must produce a certain mass of output before it will again be renovated. After the latest renovation is completed in the main, a conflict develops between the reduced demand for investment and the increased need for the sale of the goods produced. This contradiction serves as one of the direct causes for the development of crises.

In contrast to this, the consumption of durables is not linked with the production of other goods. Renovated durables do not have to be realised in the form of some new goods. The need for their renovation arises only because of a full exhaustion (or sharp decrease) of their use properties. The reduction of the demand for durables after their latest renovation promotes the rise of crises, but does not directly create additional sources of overproduction.

This essential difference can be traced even on simple models of the cycle (see Section 7.1).

1 Calculated from Economic Report of the President of the United States, Washington, 1973, pp. 194, 233-34.

Let us examine the postwar movement of the production of durable goods in the USA, where its distinctions stand out most clearly.

^

The production of motorcars was marked by the biggest amplitude of cyclical fluctuations. Only in the initial postwar years did demand for them regularly outstrip supply. Since 1953-1954, a drop in automobile production not only accompanied each crisis but, as a rule, opened the period of general decline in production.

Table 5-7 shows that the production of motorcars is noted for its instability, sensitively reacting to both cyclical and intermediate crises. The production and purchase of other consumer durables are more stable but even they, in contrast to purchases of goods for current consumption and consumer services, are subjected to considerable fluctuations.

The existence of an additional material basis of cyclical fluctuations in principle creates the general possibility for reducing the amplitude of the economic cycle, if the fluctuations in purchases of durables and investment in fixed capi-

218

S. MENSHIKOV

Table 5-7

Years of Maximum Rise and Biggest Decline in Motorcar Production in the USA (production index, 1967 =100)'

Maximum

Minimum

1948

50.0

1949

49.6

1950

62.4

1952

49.7

1953

62.8

1954

58.4

1955

77.7

1958

53.2

1960

76.4

1961

69.8

1965

112.3

1967

100.0

1968

117.9 '

1970

99.9

CHAPTER 6

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

Capitalist reproduction has always been the arena of a grim class struggle. This stems from the very nature of the reproduction process under capitalism, the constant resumption of the process of producing and realising surplus value, the exploitation of labour, the creation, distribution and redistribution of the national income between the basic classes of capitalist society.

>" Reproduction exerts a serious influence on the conditions, acuteness and results of the class struggle. Let us recall that by its nature capitalist accumulation leads to the formation of an industrial reserve army. The cyclical nature of capitalist reproduction is felt very painfully by the working class because it means recurring cuts in employment, including an increase in stagnant and chronic unemployment and a growth of pauperism. Crises are periods when, according to Lenin, the economic situation of the working class deteriorates not only relatively, but also absolutely. The existence of unemployment is an indispensable condition for ``normal'' capitalist reproduction, because this ensures additional reserves of unemployed manpower for the subsequent upswing in production.

The course of the economic cycle also determines fluctuations in the price of labour. In the phase of advance, the price of labour rises, along with employment." However, at some stage of the cyclical advance, the increase of the wage fund may outstrip the growth of production, which results in" a certain decrease of the profit rate,

1 Calculated after Economic Report of the President, Washington, 1972, p. 236.

tal do not coincide in phase or, to be more exact, are in opposite phase. Actually this possibility, as a rule, does not turn into reality, because the movement of purchases of durable goods depends, above all, on the movement of personal incomes and unemployment. For this reason, fluctuations of the demand for durables, as a rule, coincide with fluctuations of the general economic cycle and consequently intensify these fluctuations.

In future, probably, a certain increase in the amplitude of the economic cycle may be expected in West European countries and in Japan, in which the period of the initial saturation of the market with consumer durables has come to an end.

220

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

221

The correlation between the movement of production and wages is one of the major elements of the cyclical mechanism.

It was already pointed out by Marx that economic crises set in not as a result of an absolute decrease in the incomes of the working class but after these incomes reach their temporary maximum.^^1^^ Crises are the spontaneous means for reducing the remuneration of the working class to a level at which a rise in the profit rate again stimulates the continuation of extended capitalist reproduction.

Such a mechanism of cyclical reproduction can operate in its "pure form" only provided there is no organised resistance by the working class to the omnipotence of capital. But, since the mid-19th century, the working-class movement has become an increasingly important factor which has a fundamental influence on reproduction. Thus, the struggle of the working class played a tremendous part in limiting the length of the working day and then reducing it to 8-9 hours. This was possible thanks to the massive spread of the methods of production of relative surplus value and inten« sification of labour but it was considerably accelerated by the hard struggle of the working class.

Table 6-1 Unemployment in the Principal Capitalist Countries in 1940-1970^^1^^

USA

Britain

France

FRG

Japan

tH

cti <D

>>

SS 8.S

<B (U

OJCUH o noil

thousands

t-,

rt 0} ^>

thousands

s*

thousands

tH

rt o ^.

thousands

t*

es £

thousands

minimum maximum minimum maximum minimum

1948 1949 1953 1954 1956

3.8 5.9 2.9 5.5 4.1

2,276 3,637 1,834 3,532 2,750

1948 1950 1958 1955 1962

242

436 450 680 400

1951 1952 1955

281 462 264

1951 1954 1957

120 183 80

1957 733

maximum

1958

6.8

4,602

1958 453 1959 151 1958

720^^2^^

1963 400

minimum

1960

5.5

3,852

1961 377 1963 97 1962 155 1964 370

maximum

1961

6.7

4,714

1963 612 1965 142 1963 186 1967 630

minimum

1969

3.5

2,831

1965 360 1966 148 1965 147 1969 570

maximum

1971

5.9

4,993

1971 783 1968 254 1967 460 1971 640

6.1. THE CLASS STRUGGLE AND REPRODUCTION

Thus, the class struggle can serve as an active factor influencing the conditions of reproduction. The results of this struggle and the degree of its effect on reproduction are determined by the relationship between the forces of the contending classes and this, in turn, depends on a number of economic and political factors, particularly important among which are the state of the labour market and the comparative organisation of the working-class movement. k~ The state of the labour market means, above all, the urrent or long-term correlation between the demand for labour power "and its supply. It can be measured approximately by the degree of utilisation of manpower resources or the degree to which they are under-employed, i.e., the rate of unemployment.

1 Calculated after Economic Re-port of the President of the United States, Washington, 1972; OECD. Historical Statistics. 1959-1969; Economic. Trends. London, April 1972.

~^^2^^ A rise in unemployment occurred in the first half of 1958.

Let us begin with examining data on the cyclical movement of unemployment.

In the 1940s-1970s unemployment in the principal capitalist countries was, on the whole, somewhat smaller than in the 1930s. In most cases, however, it continued to remain a serious economic problem.

In the United States, the relative number of unemployed, i.e., their proportion in the total labour force in the phase of advance, as a rule, did not drop below the level of 1929 (3.2 per cent) and in the phase of crisis reached 5.5-6.8 per cent. This is much smaller than in 1933 (24.9 per cent) or in 1938 (19.0 per cent) but this is fully comparable with the respective rate in 1930, the first year of the most acute crisis (8.7 per cent), and in earlier crises.

In West European countries and Japan the relative number of unemployed was smaller than in the United States.

K. Marx, Capital, Vol, II, pp. 414-15.

222

s. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFlATION

223

This difference is only in part explained by the distinctions between official statistics which minimises the scale of unemployment in these countries even to a greater extent than in the United States; it is also explained by the smaller depth of the crises and a number of other factors. But in these countries, too, particularly in Britain and the Federal Republic of Germany, the number of unemployed rises sharply, even in relatively weak crises.

A certain reduction of the relative scale of general unemployment, as compared with the interwar period, is naturally a result of a decrease in the amplitude of cyclical fluctuations in recent decades

<

It would be wrong, however, to consider that in presentday conditions the mechanism of ousting manpower into the industrial reserve army, inherent in capitalist accumulation, has grown weaker. In fact, the operation of this mechanism has rather intensified.

Indeed, in 1929-1933, a reduction of the gross national product in the USA by 30.5 per cent led to an increase of unemployment from 3.2 to 24.9 per cent or by 21.7 per cent. Consequently, a decrease in production by about 1.5 per cent corresponded to an increase of unemployment by one point. In 1937-1938 the national product declined by 5.2 per cent, while the rate of unemployment rose by 5.3 points.

In postwar crises, however, the significant growth of unemployment has been caused by a much smaller decline in production. In 1948-1949, the national product rose by 0.1 per cent, while the unemployment rate increased by 2.1 points. In 1953-1954 the decrease in production was 1.4 per cent and the unemployment rate grew by 2.6 points; in 1957-1958, respectively, 1.2 per cent and 2.5 points; in 1969-1970, 0.7 per cent and 1.4 points; in 1960-1961 output went up by 1.9 per cent and unemployment by 1.2 points.^^1^^

Consequently, the mechanism of ousting manpower from production in recent decades has become more intensive. This is explained by the acceleration of scientific and technological progress and the rise of productivity and labour intensity. Anymore or less significant decrease in production

may, in presenl-day conditions, lead to a catastrophically swift rise of unemployment. Capitalist society is threatened by this danger to a greater extent than ever before in its history.

The operation of this mechanism is displayed most clearly in sectors of material production. Thus, the absolute decrease in the number of persons engaged in US agriculture has been observed for a long time, but in the last two decades it has been unusually intensified in view of the spreading industrialisation of this sector. In the extractive industry, maximum employment was already reached at the end of the 1920s. In the postwar period, notwithstanding the general increase in production and cyclical fluctuations, the absolute number of employed in this sector dropped sharply, from 994,000 in 1948 to 751,000 in 1957 and 622,000 in 1970. There has been an absolute decrease in the number of employees of the transport system, in spite of the swift rise in motor and air traffic.

The average growth rate of output in the US manufacturing industry in the postwar period was 4.5-4.8 per cent, in other words, was considerably higher than in the interwar period. Labour productivity (output per man-hour) rose in postwar years at an average rate of 2.5-2.9 per cent, which also exceeds the interwar pace. Although labour productivity on the whole rose slower than the volume of production, total employment in this sector increased even more slowly. Over long periods, production grew less than labour productivity and the absolute number of employed in the manufacturing industry declined.

Thus, between 1953 and 1957 output grew by 4.7 per cent and labour productivity, by 7.4 per cent. The first postwar maximum of employment in manufacturing was reached in 1953 (17.5 million people). This level was again reached and exceeded only in 1965, i.e., 12 years later. In other words, several years of industrial recovery and advance were required only to bring back employment in manufacturing to the level of 12 years earlier.

Throughout this period, unemployment was substantial and became particularly acute at the end of the 1950s and early 1960s. From 1958 to 1964 inclusive, i.e., during seven years, the unemployment rate exceeded 5 per cent, although

~^^1^^ Economic Report of the President of the United States, Washington, 1972.

224

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

225

these years were not marked by any deep and prolonged crisis. In 1969, employment in the US manufacturing industry attained a new maximum (20.2 million); this level was not exceeded up to 1973, in spite of the fact that the volume of production was more than 10 per cent above the maximum precrisis level. We have here phenomena of longterm, stagnant, chronic unemployment which recur periodically under the conditions of contemporary capitalism.

A similar tendency in the sphere of material production was seen in Western Europe in the 1960s, after the .period of the fastest economic growth of these countries had been completed.

In Britain, the number of,employed in the manufacturing industry reached a maximum in 1961 and it was exceeded only four years later. The new peak (in 1966) was only 2.1 per cent above the preceding one, after which stagnation lasted up to 1972-1973, i.e., for six-seven years. In 1969 employment in this industry was smaller than in 1961, although its output rose by 29.5 per cent during this period.

In the Federal Republic of Germany, where the expansion of production was more rapid, similar phenomena were observed. After 1961 employment in the manufacturing industry did not grow for three years and then again, from 1966 to 1969, for another four years, although in both cases the volume of output rose substantially.

In France, the increase of employment in the manufacturing industry stopped completely in 1963-1969, although industrial output during this period climbed by 42 per cent^^1^^.

In all cases, periods of prolonged stagnation were initiated by regular, even comparatively small economic crises, i.e., were directly linked with the cyclical nature of reproduction.

Only in Japan did employment in material production continue to rise swiftly, with only slight hitches in crisis years, up to the beginning of the 1970s.

If the more intensive mechanism of ousting manpower from the sphere of material production did not, in the last two

Table 6-2

Share of Value Added by the Non-Productive Sphere

in the GNP of the Principal Capitalist Countries

(per cent)^^1^^

1929 1950 1957 1968

USA

30.8

28.9

33.0

38.5

Britain

...

24.0

23.0

27.7

France

...

20.5

24.2

29.5

FRG

...

20.2

20.4

28.6

Japan

16.2

19.3

21.0

1 Calculated after OECD. National Accounts Statistics. 19SO-196S, Paris, 1970; The National Income and Product Accounts of the United States. 1929- 1965, Washington, 1966. We included in the non-productive sphere the services, finance, insurance, real estate operations and the activity of government institutions.

decades, have graver consequences, this is largely explained by the outflow of manpower into the so-called non-productive sphere or the service industries. In statistics of capitalist countries, the value added in this sphere is included in the gross national product, which makes it possible to evaluate the change of its relative magnitude in total economic activity.

As seen from Table 6-2, the non-productive sphere has been growing at a faster pace in the principal capitalist countries. It has reached its greatest development in the USA (almost 40 per cent) and somewhat smaller in West European countries (about 30 per cent) and in Japan (20 per cent). The reasons for the swift expansion of the non-- productive sphere are examined in other works.^^1^^ Here we shall merely discuss the impact of this process on the employment problem.

One of the specific features of the non-productive sphere is that both the absolute level of labour productivity and

~^^1^^ Data on West European countries are based on OECD. Historical Statistics. 1959-1969, Paris, 1971.

~^^1^^ See, for example, SSHA: Sfera uslug v ekonomike (The USA: The Service Sphere in the Economy), ed. by Y. A. Gromov, Moscow, 1971; V. Fuchs, The Service Economy, New York, 1968.

15-0593

226

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

227

its rate of growth are smaller than in the sphere of material production. This is why the relative number of employed in this sphere as a whole shows a tendency to grow faster than its share in the national product.

The non-productive sphere reacts weakly to economic crises and with a considerable delay. Thus, in 1953-1954, the gross national product of the United States declined by 1.4 per cent, while the value added by the non-productive sphere rose by 1.6 per cent. Such a countercyclical movement was repeated in 1957-1958 (respectively---0.8 per cent and +2.8 per cent) and in 1969-1970 (---0.7 per cent and -f-0.2 per cent).

Table 6-3

Changes of Employment in the USA during Economic Crises and Periods of Prolonged Stagnation (thousands of people)^^1^^

industry, construction and transportation was to a certain extent compensated for by a rise of employment in the nonproductive sphere. During the 1969-1971 crisis, for the first time there was also a growth of employment in trade. The general result was an increase in the number of employed instead of a decrease, as was the case in earlier crises.

We noted before that in 1953-1964 the absolute growth of employment in the US manufacturing industry came to a halt. This is also true with regard to industry, construction and transportation as a whole. At the same time, employment in trade and especially in the non-productive sphere increased considerably. During the 1929-33 and 1937-38 crises, countercyclical changes of employment in the non-productive sphere did not occur (except employment in government institutions). Had employment in this sphere not changed in postwar crises, the unemployment rate would have risen, on account of the direct influence of this factor alone, to 6.3 per cent in 1949; 6.0 per cent in 1954; 8.3 per cent in 1958 and 8.4 per cent in 1971.

The opposite influences of the stronger mechanism of ousting the employed from the sphere of material production and the new mechanism by which they are enlisted to a greater extent in the non-productive sphere on the whole changed the general situation on the labour market somewhat for the better for the working class as compared with the interwar period.

At the same time, there was a general increase in the organisation and unity of the working-class movement. In principal capitalist countries, the share of persons working for hire who joined trade unions increased. The position of workingclass political parties, above all communist parties, was consolidated in Western Europe and Japan. The efficacy of economic and political action by the working class rose. The consolidation and growth of the socialist world and the world communist and working-class movement has changed the correlation between class forces in the world in favour of democracy and socialism. Under the influence of these changes, the ruling circles of the principal capitalist countries had to make certain concessions to the working class, to introduce reforms which, to some extent, considered the demands of the working people.

15*

1948 1949

1953 1954

1956 1958

1969 1971

1953 1964

Manufacturing,

contract const-

ruction and tran-

sportation

---1,397

-1,527

---1,858

---1,700

-418

Wholesale and re-

tail trade

---8

---12

---108

+536

+1,913

Non-productive sphere

+292

+329

+921

+1,569

+6,604

Total employment

in non-agricul-

tural establish-

ments

---1,113

---1,210

---1,045

+405

+8,099

Increase of emp-

loyment in the

non-productive

sphere, per cent

of total labour

force

0.4

0.5

1.5

2.3

8.9

1 Source: Economic Report of the President of the United States, 1972, p. 226.

Table 6-3 shows that during every postwar crisis in the United States the substantial reduction of employment in

228

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

229

S. MENSHIKOV

The achievements of the working-class movement in capitalist countries have been analysed in detail in other works. Let us just mention some questions which play an essential part in understanding the mechanism of the contemporary capitalist cycle.

One of the achievements of the working-class movement in the last 20 years has been the conclusion of long-term (3-5 years) collective bargaining agreements, which provide for higher money wage rates in accordance with the growth in the productivity and intensity of labour arid taking into account the rise in the cost of living.

Naturally, such agreements do not affect the essence of the relations of capitalist exploitation, nor could they eliminate cyclical fluctuations in the share of wages in the national income.

The direct result of these gains of the working class has been a change in the general movement of nominal wages, not only of union members but also of wider categories of working people. In the last quarter of a century cases of the absolute reduction of average hourly wage rates---even in the phase of an economic crisis---are the exception. In the United States the average nominal hourly wage in the manufacturing industry rose by 3.8 per cent in the 1948-1949 crisis, 2.3 per cent in the 1953-1954 crisis, 2.9 per cent in 1957-1958, 2.7 per cent in 1960-1961 and by 5.3 per cent in 1969-1970. The situation was similar in the extractive industry, trade, in the sphere of finance and the services. Average hourly wage rates were reduced only in agriculture in the first postwar decade (1948-1949 and 1953-1954).

Let us recall that in prewar crises a reduction of hourly wage rates was more the rule than the exception. Thus, in 1930, the hourly wage in the US manufacturing industry decreased by 2.5 per cent, in 1931 by 6.8 per cent, in 1932 by 13.4 per cent and in 1933 by 0.9 per cent^^1^^.

Similar features have characterised the movement of nominal wage rates in West European countries and Japan. A systematic growth of wage rates did not eliminate its fluctuations linked with the movement of the economic cycle.

In all capitalist countries the rise of wage rates, as a rule, slowed down during crises and immediately after them.

These fluctuations are seen quite clearly in the United States, especially in the initial postwar period. Fluctuations in the growth rates of hourly wages in the US manufacturing industry were: from 13.2 per cent in 1947 (9.1 per cent in 1948) to 3.8 per cent in 1949; from 8.3 per cent in 1951 (5.5 per cent in 1953) to 2.3 per cent in 1954; from 5.1 per cent in 1955 to 2.9 per cent in 1958; from 3.8 per cent in 1959 to 2.7 per cent in 1961; from 6.3 per cent in 1968 to

5.3 per cent in 1970. The range of these fluctuations in the 1960s was considerably smaller than in the 1940s and 1950s.

In West European countries fluctuations in the wage growth rates were smaller than in the USA. In the FRG there were differences from 10.7 per cent in 1962 to 6.5 per cent in 1963; from 7.4 in 1966 to 5.3 in 1967 and to 4.4 per cent in 1968. In Britain wage growth rates declined from 5.5 per cent in 1961 to 3.3 per cent in 1962 and 2.9 per cent in 1963 and then again from 6 per cent in 1966 to 4.3 per cent in 1967.

In France a similar slowing down occurred after 1963 and continued up to 1968. These fluctuations were the least pronounced in Japan.

It goes without saying that a growth in hourly wage rates is by no means equivalent to the movement of real incomes of the working people. During the crisis phase the duration of the working week is reduced, owing to which the increase in the average weekly nominal wage is smaller than the growth of the hourly rate. Thus, in the US manufacturing industry the average weekly pay in 1948-1949 rose only by

1.4 per cent; in 1953-1954 it remained unchanged; in 1957- 1958 it increased by 1.4 per cent and in 1969-1970 by 3.3 per cent.^^1^^

During contemporary economic crises the greatest harm is inflicted on the working people not so much by a decrease in the growth of nominal wage rates as by the rise in the cost of living, which can intensify the amplitude of cyclical fluctuations of incomes. The causes and specific features

~^^1^^ Economic Report of the President of the United States, Washington, 1972, p. 229.

~^^1^^ Economic Report of the President of the United States, Washington, 1972, p. 230.

230

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

231

of present-day inflation will be examined in Section 6.2. Here it is sufficient to note that, in contrast to economic crises of the past, present-day crises, as a rule, do not cause a decrease of retail prices, and in some cases their growth is even accelerated.

In the United States, the cost of living during postwar crises declined only once---in 1948-1949. In all other cases it continued to rise. As a result the real weekly wage of workers in the manufacturing industry declined by 0.4 per cent in 1954, 0.6 and 1.5 per cent respectively in 1957 and 1958 and by 1.8 per cent in 1970^^1^^. Consequently, in the United States economic crises, as hitherto, were periods when the material condition of the working class deteriorated. Its overall real incomes, of course, were reduced by the crises to an even greater extent, owing to a decline in the number of employed and rise of unemployment.

In Britain the real hourly rate decreased in the 1962- 1963 crisis and rose only by 2 per cent during the 1966- 1967 crisis. At the same time, both the number of employed and the duration of the working week declined and total real incomes of the working class again dropped.

In the FRG an absolute reduction of the real incomes of the working class was registered during the 1966-1967 crisis. In Japan real incomes continued to rise but much slower than in the phase of cyclical advance.

A steady rise in the cost of living is one of the direct causes for the mounting strike struggle. In cases when a sliding scale for the rise in the cost of living is not provided in a collective bargaining agreement, a strike often becomes the only means for preventing a drop in real incomes.

In the past, workers often could not venture to strike during a crisis. Present crises have become less acute and the working-class movement more organised and stronger. The need for collective bargaining agreements for a number of years compels the workers to strike during crises too, notwithstanding the less favourable situation on the labour market.

The most vivid recent example is the strike of US automobile workers in the autumn of 1970, at the very height of

~^^1^^ Ibid., p. 233.

the economic crisis. As a result of this and other strikes, in spite of the crisis situation, a general increase in wage rates was achieved.

In many cases, the victories of the working class as a result of such strikes are sufficient only to resist a more serious decrease of their real incomes. Nevertheless, the very fact of the systematic growth in nominal wages is naturally exerting a tremendous influence on the reproduction process.

The growth of nominal wages during crises helps to reduce fluctuations of the incomes of the working people and thereby reduce the overall amplitude of cyclical fluctuations. Apparently, this is one of the major factors which have caused changes in the mechanism of the contemporary cycle, because the incomes of the working people make up from 50 to 70 per cent of the national income of capitalist countries. Section 7.2 shows that a systematic growth of the wage fund, irrespective of the economic situation, can serve as an important factor which reduces the scale of contemporary economic crises.

6.2. CAUSES OF PRESENT-DAY INFLATION

Before starting to discuss the correlation between inflation and the contemporary cycle, it is useful to examine the actual movement of prices in the course of postwar cyclical development. Let us begin with the dynamics of wholesale prices (see Table 6-4).

In the United States, the general tendency towards a rise of wholesale prices in the postwar period is sufficiently clearly pronounced. Between 1945 and 1971 the price index of all goods, industrial and agricultural, rose by 108.6 per cent (average annual rate of 4.7 per cent). In contrast to this, in the interwar period, wholesale prices in the United States had a general downward trend. Between 1920 and 1939 they dropped by exactly half. The biggest part of this reduction was during the interwar crises, but even prior to the 1929-1933 crisis the overall trend of wholesale prices continued to remain downward.

232

S. MENSHIKOV

Thus, first of all, the general movement of wholesale prices in the postwar period is in exactly the opposite direction.

The growth of wholesale prices in the postwar period, however, has not been continuous. Prices rose in 1945-1948, 1949-1951, 1953-1960 and 1964-1971, but they declined in 1948-1949, 1951-1953 and 1960-1964. The biggest increase in prices was during the period when war price controls were abolished in 1946, at the beginning of the Korean war and during the escalation of the war in Vietnam. Prices also rose during the second half of the 1950s and during the 1964-1965 industrial boom. Periods of price drops coincided with the crisis of 1948-1949, the final stage of the Korean war, the 1960-1961 crisis and the initial stage of the subsequent industrial advance.

Thus we see that the downward movement of prices in individual periods (but far from always) coincides with the phase of crisis.

In contrast to this, in all preceding crises prices dropped. Thus, wholesale prices in the United States declined in 1920-1921 by 47 per cent, in 1929-1932 by 32 per cent and in 1937-1939 by 10.7 per cent. In the intermediate crises in 1924 and 1927 prices dropped by 2.4 and 4.6 per cent respectively.^^1^^

Let us examine the movement of wholesale prices during postwar crises for large commodity groups (see Table 6-4).

During the 1948-1949 crisis, prices fell for all goods except consumer durables and finished producer goods.

The 1953-1954 crisis began at the time when the ebb of the inflation wave caused by the escalation of the war in Korea was almost completed. The general movement of wholesale prices during this crisis was upward.

Let us note some exceptions. The price reduction which began after 1951 also continued during the 1953-1954 crisis for the entire group of raw materials, including fuel, and also food.

The 1957-1958 crisis on the whole proceeded during the period of a new price rise which began as early as 1953. The exception was non-food materials (except fuel) and nonfood consumer nondurable goods.

~^^1^^ Historical Statistics of the United States, Washington, 1961, p. 117.

Table 6-4

Fluctuations of Wholesale Prices in the USA in the 1940s-1960s. Increase (+) or decrease (---) in per cent of preceding turning point^^1^^

All commodities

45-48 (+51.6)

48-49 (-5.0)

49-51

(+15.8)

51-53 (-4.1)

53-60 (+8.6)

60-64 (-0.2)

64-69

(+12.5)

69-71

(+3.2)

Raw materials

...

48-49 (-13.4)

49-51 (+25.1)

51-55 (-19.2)

55-58 (+5.0)

58-64 (-7.4)

64-66 (+11.9)

66-67 (-5.4)

67-71 (+15.0)

of which

Processed foods and feeds

...

48-49 (-17.0)

49-51 (+24.1)

51-56 (-5.2)

56-58 (+10.6)

58-64 (-11.8)

64-66

(+16.6)

66-67 (-5.6)

67-71 (+14.2)

Non-food materials, except fuel

...

48-49 (-9.0)

49-51 (+31.8)

51-54 (-18.6)

54-56 (+9.6)

56-58 (-5.0)

59-63 (-4.8)

63-66 (+6.0)

66-67 (-6.3)

67-71 (+10.5)

Fuel

...

48-50 (-1.0)

50-53 (+6.2)

53-55

(-4.7)

55-60 (+17.8)

60-62 (-0.8)

62-67 (+8.6)

67-71 (+38.5)

Intermediate materials

...

48-49 (-4.0)

49-51 (+17.2)

51-52 (-3.0)

52-59 (+11.8)

59-62 (-1.0)

62-67 (+5.4)

67-71 (+14.0)

Continuation

Finished goods

...

48-49 (-2.9)

49-51

(+11.5)

51-53 (-1.6)

53-58 (+9.5)

58-59 (-0.2)

59-64 (+1.2)

64-67 (+6.3)

67-71 (+13.5)

of which Consumer finished goods

...

48-49 (-4.6)

49-51 (+11.3)

51-55 (-3.6)

55-58 (+6.7)

58-59 (-0.8)

59-60 (+1.0)

60-64 (-0.2)

64-67 (+6.0)

67-71

(+12.7)

Food

48-49 (-8.1)

49-51

(+14.6)

51-56 (-9.3)

56-58 (+9.5)

58-59 (-4.7)

59-64

(+2.0)

64-66 (+10.6)

66-67 (-1.6)

67-71 (+15.2)

Other nondurable goods

48-49 (-4.1)

49-51 (+9.4)

51-52 (-2.4)

52-57 (+3.6)

57-58 (-0.6)

58-60 (+2.3)

60-67 (+5.6)

67-71 (+11.3)

Durable goods

...

48-49 (+15.7)

49-51

(+8.6)

51-53 (+1.6)

53-54 (+0.8)

54-57 (+10.3)

59-63 (-1.8)

63-67

(+2.2)

67-71 (+10.9)

Finished producer goods

...

48-49 (+5.0)

49-53 (+16.1)

53-54 (+1.2)

54-57 (+17.4)

57-58 (+2.6)

58-67 (+11.6)

67-71 (+16.6)

1 Source: Economic Report of the President of the United States, Washington, 1972, pp. 250-53. Figures without brackets denote periods (45-48=1945-1948, etc.). Figures in brackets denote change in per cent.

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

235

During the 1960-1961 crisis, the price decline was small but it covered a wide range of goods. This decrease signified the beginning of a longer tendency towards a decrease and stabilisation of prices during 1960-1964. In the 1966-1967 crisis years, prices dropped only for food and non-food materials. Prices of all other goods continued to rise. During the 1969-1971 crisis the price increase, far from stopping, was even intensified.

Thus, in the postwar US crises the movement of wholesale prices changed essentially. A decrease of prices during crises was more often the exception than the rule, which sets them radically apart from prewar crises. The biggest range of price fluctuations was registered, as before, in raw materials and food. As for finished manufactured goods for production purposes, their prices, as a rule, rose continuously, while those of consumer durables---almost without interruption.

What was the situation in other industrially developed capitalist countries?

In Britain, raw material prices on the whole fluctuated in keeping with the economic cycle. With the general tendency towards price increases throughout the entire period, during crises, prices of raw materials declined (in 1962 by 1.5 per cent as compared with 1960 and in 1967 by 1.6 per cent as against 1966). As for the price index of manufactured goods, it grew steadily, but in the phase of crisis the pace slowed down somewhat (for example, in 1963, from 3.8 to 0.7 per cent and in 1967 from 2.7 to 0.9 per cent).

In Japan, the level of raw material prices dropped during the 1962 crisis and in 1965 their growth practically stopped. Prices of investment goods throughout the 1960s were stable, although in 1960-1965 there was a certain decrease. Prices of consumer goods continued to rise almost uninterruptedly.

In the FRG the growth of wholesale prices was comparatively slow. Prices of raw materials and semi-manufactures decreased in 1961-1963 and in 1967. As for prices of finished goods, during the crisis years they just grew slower.

Thus, the cyclical movement of wholesale prices in developed capitalist countries on the whole approximately conformed to the tendencies in the United States.

236

S. MENSHIKOM

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

237

Table 6-5

of the retail price index as a whole or separately for food and manufactured goods. During 1959-1969 retail prices went up by 41 per cent in Britain, 46 per cent in France, 28 per cent in the FRG and 68 per cent in Japan.

Thus, it is beyond doubt that there has been a general change of the cyclical mechanism in the movement of wholesale and retail prices in the postwar period.

The annual price indices examined here are, of course, an insufficiently precise analytical instrument. They are completely suitable only in cases when price fluctuations are considerable. Alongside this, in the postwar period, a study of the monthly, quarterly or semi-annual indices and particularly their rate of change is of special interest.

Thus, the change of retail prices in the United States in semi-annual periods reveals fluctuations which more or less correspond to the economic cycles: decreases occurred in 1948-1949, 1950-1952, 1953-1954, 1956-1958, 1959-1961, 1966-1967 and 1970-1971. Of these price declines only the period of 1950-1952 did not coincide with a phase of an overproduction crisis. The relative change of other price indices during semi-annual or quarterly periods, namely, the general wholesale price index, wholesale price of manufactured goods and the GNP deflator, closely followed this periodisation.^^1^^

These data also reveal other interesting features: specifically, there is a gradual lessening of the amplitude of fluctuations in the rates of price changes and a rise of the lower boundary of these fluctuations. Thus, the decrease in the rate of change of retail prices from the maximum to the minimum during the indicated periods, (except the last) was as follows in percentages: 18.1; 14.9; 3.3; 4.5; 2.3; 2.5. The absolute scale of the price reductions and their rates of decline also decreased as time went on.

Thus, the tendency towards reducing the cyclical fluctuations of prices in the postwar period progressed: price fluctuations in the 1960s were smaller not only as compared with earlier periods but even with the 1940s and the early 1950s.

Fluctuations of Retail Prices in the USA

in the 1940s-19(iOs. Increase (+ ) or decrease (---)

in per cent of preceding turning pointl

All goods

45-48

48-49

49-54

54-55

55-60

60-65

65-71

and ser-

(+33.7)

(-1.0)

(+12.7)

(-0.4)

(+10.2)

(+6.5)

(+28.4)

vices

Food

45-48

48-49

49-52

52-55

55-58

58-59

59-71

(+51.1)

(-4.0)

(+14.7)

(-3.2)

(+8.5)

(-1.6)

(+35.9)

Housing

45-48

48-49

49-54

54-55

55-60

60-65

65-71

(+18.1)

(+1.6)

(+15.2)

(+0-7)

(+1.8)

(+5.2)

(+32.0)

Apparel

45-48

48-50

50-51

51-55

55-60

60-65

65-71

and up-

(+35.4)

(-5.2)

(+9.d)

(-2.3)

(+6.5)

(+4.6)

(+27.9)

keep

Transpor-

45-53

53-55

55-59

59-60

60-65

65-71

tation

(+66.3)

(-2.6)

(+15.8)

(0.0)

(+7.0)

(+23.7)

Medical

45-48

48-49

49-54

54-55

55-60

60-65

65-71

care

(+21.4)

(+3.1)

(+20.3)

(+2.2)

(+22.1)

(+13.1)

(+43.5)

1 Source: Economic Report of the President of the United States, Washington, 1972, p. 247. Figures without brackets denote periods (45-48=1945-1948, etc.). Figures in brackets denote change in per cent.

Let us now turn to the movement of retail prices.

In postwar years retail prices in the United States rose to a somewhat greater extent than wholesale prices, but their movement was more even. Only in one of the crises (1948- 1949) did they decline, but during all others continued to grow. More or less regular fluctuations were observed only in the prices of food and clothing---and only up to the 1960s. Since 1960 there has been a stable general upward trend.

In contrast to this, in earlier economic crises, as a rule, there was a general drop in retail prices. Thus, in 1920- 1921 they decreased by 11 per cent; in 1929-1933 by 35 per cent and in 1937-1939 by 2.2 per cent. The long-term trend of retail prices in the 1920s and 1930s was downward.

In other developed capitalist countries the rise of retail prices was more pronounced than in the United States. Since 1959 and up to the present in Britain, France, the FRG and Japan there has not been a single annual decrease

~^^1^^ Geoffrey H. Moore, "The Cyclical Behavior of Prices", in The Business Cycle Today (ed. V. Zarnowitz), New York, 1972, pp. 142-45.

238

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

239

In this connection it is necessary to examine at least two questions:

1) What caused the weaker reaction of wholesale prices to postwar economic crises?

2) What was the reason for the prevailing tendency towards a rise of retail prices during the periods of postwar overproduction crises?

The most serious cause for the change in the cyclical movement of prices was apparently the steadily developing monopolisation of the economies of the principal capitalist countries. Free competition capitalism was marked by fluctuations of market prices, which were determined by the constantly changing balance between demand and supply. Moreover, the number of buyers and sellers of every commodity at every given period was sufficiently high to exclude the influence of changes in the volume of individual sales and purchases on the general balance between demand and supply, i.e., on a change of prices. Being independent of every individual supply and demand and subordinated only to their aggregate magnitudes, prices acted on the market as an external regulating force.

From this also followed a corresponding type of mass behaviour by entrepreneurs: unable directly to influence market prices, the capitalists saw the only way in the individual adaptation of their economic operations to the current market conditions. Thus, an excess of supply over demand resulted most frequently in a massive drop in prices, while a lag of supply behind demand led to big price rises.

The drop of many commodity prices---through the mechanism of profit and other incomes---led to a general reduction of output, i.e., ultimately eliminated the disproportion between demand and supply; a large-scale rise of commodity prices caused a chain reaction in the opposite direction. Price fluctuations were a direct expression of the cyclical fluctuations of production; in turn, they helped increase the scope of production fluctuations. It is important, however, to emphasise that, being a blind regulator of reproduction, prices by themselves were not the object of regulation either by individual or groups of capitalists or by the state.

With the transition to monopoly capitalism the priceformation mechanism has been changing constantly. It is a distinctive feature of monopoly (individual or group, i.e., oligopoly) that a considerable part of the production and sale of any item is concentrated under single-handed control. Under these conditions private monopoly regulation of market prices is possible because now, to change the size of supply, it is sufficient to change the volume of production of monopolised goods. This possibility is widely utilised by monopolies because it conforms with their interests which consist in controlling the market and ensuring a stable high profit. If a monopoly reduces supply, planning production in quantities which are deliberately lower than the expected demand, the result is a decrease in the amplitude of the fluctuation of market prices. Production decreases but not only and not so much owing to the already reduced demand as in anticipation of such a decline (owing to the increase of the price) in the coming period.

The transition from the old price-formation mechanism, which corresponded to the conditions of free competition, to a new mechanism adequate to monopoly capitalism took place gradually. The very process of monopolisation has proceeded unevenly. First monopolies arose in heavy industries. Only as time went on did they become prevalent also in most light industries, in trade and in the services. Originally, monopolies resembled islands in the ocean of free competition; gradually they pushed back the non-- monopolised sector from the chief, key spheres of economic life to secondary positions which play the part of an appendage to the monopolised sectors. For a long time considerable economic spheres, such as agriculture, remained little monopolised.

The period of the emergence of monopoly domination caused substantial changes in the price-formation mechanism. But in practice such regulation of prices had not yet acquired general significance and could not lead to their relative stabilisation. In a number of cases the result was rather the opposite.

In an effort to win domination over the markets monopolies frequently resorted to dumping in order to oust their competitors. The first cartels were not all-embracing. Re-

240

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

241

striding production and raising prices, they thereby promoted the growth of production by outsiders. Such practices increased the overproduction of goods, led to a general lowering of prices, the disintegration of cartels, the exacerbation of crises and greater price fluctuations. Another widespread practice among monopolies was the introduction of low purchase prices for the output of non-monopolised enterprises. The latter reacted by increasing the volume of production, trying to make up for the low prices by bigger sales. This also tended to aggravate the overproduction of commodities and led to bigger fluctuations of

prices.

Only as time went on and individual or group monopolies were able to establish more effective control over most of the key industries did monopoly regulation begin to exert a certain stabilising influence on the overall price-formation tendencies. Squeezing the outsiders, monopolies more frequently began to refrain from open price war as a method of fighting competitors. Under conditions when several monopolies predominate in industry, a reduction by one of them almost automatically leads to retaliatory measures and easily threatens to turn into a general price war. When the forces are approximately evenly matched such a price war was obviously futile from the point of view of the competing monopolies. From this followed the gradual general practice of co-ordinating prices at a sufficiently high level and refraining from sharp upward or downward fluctuations of the generally agreed level.

Large corporations also discovered that under conditions of the monopolisation of most of the key sectors, a reduction of market prices for their goods does not necessarily cause a subsequent increase in demand. If, say, the buying companies take advantage of the lower price to somewhat increase their purchases out of speculative considerations, in the absence of a desire for additional increases in their own production, such a temporary growth in demand (for setting up inventories) will subsequently give way to a decline.

Thus, as the degree of monopolisation in the economy of developed capitalist countries increased, the tendency towards monopoly regulation of prices and their relative stability was further developed.

In Section 7.6 formal models are presented which illustrate the influence which the degree of monopolisation exerts directly on fluctuations of the cycle of production and commodity prices. The higher the monopolisation of the given industry, the bigger the amplitude of fluctuations of output as compared with that of prices, and vice versa.

An attempt to determine the relative proportions of the movement of prices and production both on individual commodity markets and in the US economy as a whole was made in a study of Frederick C. Mills, an American economist^^1^^, which deals with the period prior to the Second World War. One of the methods employed by Mills consisted of the following. He established the absolute size of the average change in the value and physical volume of output and also the prices in the cycles of a certain period. Then he analysed the comparative changes in volume in value terms per unit of change in the physical volume of output and prices. The results he obtained for the US economy as a whole are shown in Table 6-6.

The annual data and the cycles examined by Mills in accordance with the classification of the National Bureau of Economic Research and, naturally, the results of his studies, require a number of reservations and specifications. Nevertheless these results are undoubtedly of considerable interest. In the interwar period the average decline of production and prices during crises was approximately equal and the drop in prices even somewhat exceeded the decrease in output. In the phases of the advance, the average rise of prices was small and the main part of the growth in volume in terms of value was due to the physical increase in production. And now let us turn to the respective data for the postwar crises. (See Table 6-7.)

Already in the 1948-1949 crisis the decrease in production was bigger than that of prices. In the subsequent three crises (1953-1954, 1957-1958 and 1960-1961) there was a bigger reduction of the physical volume of production than of its value; moreover, prices rose. Lastly, during the 1969-1970 crisis the growth of prices was so considerable that even

~^^1^^ Frederick C. Mills, Price-Quantity Interactions in Business Cycles, New York, 1946.

16-0593

242

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

243

Table 6-6

Table 6-7

Comparative Fluctuations of Production and Prices

in 1919-1938 Cycles in the USA (change of aggregate value, annual data)^^1^^

Comparative Fluctuations of Production and Prices

during Crises in 1947-1970 in the USA (average aggregate change, quarterly data)^^1^^

Expansion

Contraction

GNP in current prices, million dollars (Aggregate value)

+19,100

---18,600

GNP in constant prices, million dollars (Aggregate physical volume)

+15,200

---9,100

GNP deflator (Average unit price)

+3.4

-10.5

1948 1953 1957 1960 1969

Average for

1949 1954 1958 1961 1970 1948 1948 1961 1970

GNP in current

prices, million

dollars

-8,900

-7,100

-8,000

-1,100

+ 45,800

-6,300

+ 4,100

GNP in constant

1958 prices, mil-

lion dollars

-6,200

-14,300

-15,700

-7,600

---15,000

-11,000

-11,800

Effect of change

in prices (diffe-

rence between

the two lines)

-2,700

+ 7,200

+ 7,700

+ 6,500

+ 60,800

+ 4,800

+ 15,900

1 Frederick C. Mills, op. cit., p. 6.

with a considerable drop in the physical volume of production it continued to grow in terms of value.

Now let us get back to the data of F. Mills. Examining the movement of prices and production for different goods in 1919-1938 he discovered the following picture characteristic for the period of comparatively early monopolisation. During the crisis periods in 63 out of 64 cases prices declined. The exception was steel rails, the price of which was fixed by the steel trust (United States Steel). For 23 commodities, the decline in output exceeded the price drop. This category comprised predominantly industrial goods and only three of agricultural origin (including flour). The production of 19 other commodities declined to a lesser extent than prices. Most of the commodities in this group were agricultural. Lastly, in 21 cases the drop in price was accompanied by a rise in production. All these cases were for agricultural commodities.

Grouping the same commodities according to different features, Mills arrived at the conclusion that, in consumer goods, the fall of prices greatly exceeded the decline in

1 Calculated after The National Income and Product Accounts o/ the UnitedStates. 192H-1965; Economic Report of the President of the United States for 1969, 1970, 1971.

production but in producer goods the decrease was about the same. In durables a decrease in production prevailed and in nondurable goods, the fall of prices.

The data presented by Mills also reveal quite a variegated picture: strong tendencies to regulate prices on some markets with the complete absence of regulation on others, chiefly agricultural and partly raw material.

In the postwar period, the decrease in output and the fall of prices was smaller. Moreover, there were more goods the prices of which increased even during the phase of the crisis drop in production.

Several circumstances contributed to intensifying the tendency towards monopoly regulation of markets. These first of all are factors mentioned in Section 4.1, such as the greater degree of monopolisation, the wider spread of operational adaptation of production by corporations to current and forecast demand and a decrease in the size of commodity overproduction. Then there is the introduction of new goods on the market and the increase instate regulation of production and prices, the extension of regulating measures of

16*

244

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

245

large corporations and the state to the non-monopolistic sector of the economy.

The introduction of new goods (and also of new types, variants and models of old goods) which has increased and assumed a massive scale owing to the scientific and technological revolution is done by the monopolies in such a way as to reduce to a minimum the adverse effect of this for the old lines produced by the same companies. The general practice is to plan the launching and marketing of the given goods over a limited time. After the completion.of the planned period, the item (or its model) is withdrawn from production. Unsold surpluses are sent either to the market of second-hand goods, where they are sold at a lower price, or exported to other countries as goods new for the importing countries and are sold at the originally high prices.

Since the need for most types of goods is preserved for a long time, such production and sales planning is possible only with a constant change of models and fashions, the invention of new varieties of the selfsame goods. A customer, unable to find on the market the old, usual model, is compelled to buy the new one even if the old model was fully satisfactory. Gradually, the buyer becomes accustomed to the constant changes, and new fashions and models become a regular element in shaping his needs. This new social need is not only one of the motive forces of technological progress but also the mainstay of monopolistic price formation.

A systematic change of models fits in well with the diversification of production by the monopolies. Goods which satisfy one and the same need but are produced by different firms prove to be not the same and their individual features are deliberately stressed and kept up. Cigarettes, motorcars, many foods, clothing, and so on, are sold under different trade-marks which represent different corporations. The consumer is accustomed not only to the trade-mark, becoming a victim of the monopoly price usually associated with it, but also to the fact that such goods must systematically be ``improved''. The quality of many goods is really improved but there are also quite a few opposite instances.

Owing to this, the consumer goods market, on which a large number of competing companies operate, including small

and middle-size non-monopolised producers and merchants, has also become a sphere for the regulation of prices. From one-half to two-thirds of the final product of developed capitalist countries passes through the market of consumer goods, and its ``conquest'' by the corporations is one of the major reasons for the change in the cyclical mechanism of prices in recent decades.

Another reason was the considerable expansion of state regulation of prices and production. In a number of countries price control is exercised to limit inflationary growth. Alongside this, the governments of some countries have applied and continue to apply regulations designed to minimise price fluctuation.

Thus, in the agriculture of developed capitalist countries (for example, in the United States or France) minimum prices guaranteed by the state were introduced in the postwar period. In the United States, the government ``removes'' from the market surpluses of major farm produce if the market price at which farmers are able to sell their commodities falls below the guaranteed minimum price. This minimum is set by taking into account the level of prices for goods bought by farmers. Since the 1950s, the state has also introduced maximum sown areas for crops the price of which is guaranteed.

This system could not prevent a gradual deterioration for farmers of the ratio between the price of the goods they sell and buy. This ratio (the level of 1910-1914 is taken as 100) reached its maximum in 1947 (115) and then declined to 100 in 1952, 80 in 1960 and 70 in 1971.i However, the downward range of price fluctuations of agricultural commodities, as a result of this regulation, has been substantially reduced as compared with the prewar period.

Government regulation of prices and rates in the United States is also effected in the electric power industry, the production of gas, rail and air transport, telephone and telegraph communications, i.e., covers a considerable part of the material services. Here there are no minimal prices, no restrictions of production but prices are stable, fluctua-

~^^1^^ Economic Report oj t/ie President of the United States, Washington, 1972, p. 293.

246

S. MBNSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

247

Table 6-8

find that from 1929 to 1969 the share of output with a strikingly pronounced monopoly regulation of prices rose from approximately one-third to two-thirds of the final product.

Apparently these figures represent not merely a quantitative but a fundamental qualitative change in the conditions of price formation in the capitalist economy.

The growth of monopoly regulation of markets and prices is a necessary but, naturally, not yet sufficient condition for a new cyclical movement of prices. In the postwar period there were higher average cyclical growth rates of production than earlier. In these conditions a growth of prices could be possible only given a faster rate in the increase of effective demand.

In the postwar period, the chief elements in the accelerated growth of social demand were personal incomes and the government market (and for some countries also exports).

Section 4.2 showed that the government market in this period in most of the developed capitalist countries (except Japan) increased at a faster pace than GNP. It was also demonstrated that the increase in government demand caused a multiplier effect on aggregate demand.

In reality, the demand presented by the government is always an effective demand. An increase of this demand, not backed by a corresponding expansion of deliveries by private companies, results either in the non-use of the appropriated resources or a growth of prices for the goods bought by the government. The higher the government demand, the more probable the rise of prices for the goods and services it buys.

In the United States, the demand of local governments and the non-military demand of the federal government were relatively even. In contrast to this, the movement of military demand was marked by sharp ups and downs (sec Table 6-9).

A high degree of monopolisation is a distinctive feature of the military market. On this market there is only one buyer and a small number of large sellers. With demand swinging upwards in bursts, the scale of the demand by the military establishment (in physical terms) in essence depends little on price.^^1^^ Owing to this, purchases give an impe-

~^^1^^ W. L. Baldwin, The Structure of the Defense Market. 1955-1064, Durham, N. C., 1967, pp. 79-80.

Movement of the Gross National Product of the USA by Types of Production^^1^^

1929 1969

million dollars

per cent of GNP

per cent of goods

million dollars

per cent of GNP

per cent of goods

Goods (mov-

able)

103,900

51.0

100.0

392,200

. 53.9

100.0

Durable goods

33,600

16.5

32.3

170,100

23.4

43.4

Nondurable

goods

70,400

34.6 >

67.8

222,100

30.5

56.6

of which

Agricultural

17,000

8.3

10. 4

23,600

3.2

6.0

Nonagricultural

53,400

26.2

51.4

198,500

27.3

50.6

Services

69,300

34.0

---

268,200

36.9

___

Buildings and

installations

30,300

14.9

---

66,600

9.2

-----

Gross national

product

203,600

100.0

---

727,100

100.0

---

l Value data in 1958 constant prices. The sum total may differ because of the rounding out of the figures (here and in seme tables below).

tions are almost fully ruled out and, owing to the general rise of prices, in these sectors, too, there were increases sanctioned by the government. The movement of prices in this sector is to a lesser extent connected with current changes of demand and supply.

Taking data of Table 6-8 we can group the types of national products for the level of development of monopoly regulation of prices. In 1929 we can only place without doubt in the group of industries with highly developed regulation durables and approximately half of the nonagricultural commodities for current use. In 1969 this group has already come to include, in addition to these two categories, also agricultural commodities and a substantial (up to half) part of the services. (Moreover, the share of the intensively regulated nonagricultural commodities of current use increased to approximately three-fourths.) In summing up, we

248

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

249

Table 6-9

mand are fully satisfied within the bounds of the available production resources, without essential shifts of resources between sectors, there is no basis for an increase in prices. Under such conditions, it is not always possible also to expect a deficit of the national budget because the increase in production and incomes, as a rule, leads to a definite growth of tax receipts of the state (see Section 7.4). In this case there is neither a rise in prices nor a clogging of the channels of circulation, although the state presents an additional demand precisely in paper money.

If, however, demand is not fully satisfied, a tendency emerges to raise prices. Moreover, the multiplier effect on production and incomes is weakened and the sum of tax receipts does not grow sufficiently. Such a situation most often results in the appearance (or increase) of a national budget deficit. An impression is created of an excessive issue of paper money. In reality, however, both the rise in prices and the budget deficit in such cases are linked chiefly with the artificially maintained or real shortage of sup-

piy-

A definite role, of course, is also played by the swiftly growing stock of money in circulation, including bank deposits, but an increase in the quantity of money in circulation is not necessarily linked with additional issues by the state. A surplus of the money stock in circulation helps to increase the demand for goods; but this factor influences prices both under a budget deficit and also in periods when the government budget is balanced.

In recent decades the money incomes of the population, too, have risen almost continuously. Table 6-10 shows that, in the United States, personal money incomes continued to grow in all postwar crises, except in 1948-1949; moreover, the rate of this increase continued to mount. An inertia of an increase in money incomes, which has gradually taken shape, has reduced the direct dependence of their movement on cyclical fluctuations of production.

This change occurred already in the 1950s, i.e., when production decreases still caused an absolute drop in the labour incomes paid in the production sphere. By this time the tendency towards an increase of employment in the nonproductive sphere, mentioned in Section 6.1. had already

Change of Government Purchases in the USA in Various Periods ('000 million, in current prices)

1944 1947

1947 1950

1950 1953

1953 1955

1955 1960

1960 1962

1962 1965

1965 1969

1969 1971

Military purchases

-78.3

+ 5.0

+ 34.6

-10.1

+ 6.3

+ 6.5

-1.5

+ 28.3

---7.0

Other federal purchases

+ 1.9

+ 0.8

+ 4.1

-2.9

+ 3.1

+ 3.2

+ 5.0

+3.9

+ 5.5

Purchases of local governments

+ 5.1

+ 6.9

+ 5.1

+ 5.5

+ 16.1

+ 7.6

+ 16.4

+ 40.5

+ 24.8

Total government purchases

-71.4

+ 12.8

+ 43.7

-7.4

+ 25.4

+ 17.5

+ 19.9

+ 72.7

+ 23.4;1

tus to a swift rise of prices. Since there is a strong alliance between the sellers and buyers (the military-industrial complex) high prices can be preserved in periods not only of a relatively stable, but even decreasing military demand.

It was shown in Section 4.2 that an increase in government demand indirectly creates an additional demand in the private sector. During periods of a steep climb in military contracts this additional demand is particularly big. At times it cannot be satisfied at sufficient speed with the available productive capacities. Even if there are such possibilities, however, the rise in demand can be exploited by the monopolies not only for expanding production but also for raising prices. Thus, alongside causes resulting from government demand, an increase of inflation in periods of intensive militarisation is also explained by the regulation of supply and prices by monopolies. Alongside a real shortage of goods, there also exists a scarcity artificially created by monopolistic ``planning''. The high prices set in such periods are then consolidated owing to the monopolisation of the market and are preserved even after the military boom is over.

It is often held that inflation connected with an increase in military spending is caused by the clogging of circulation channels with paper money in view of the big deficit of the national budget. This is a simplified notion about the mechanism of shaping demand and prices. If an increase in government demand and the consequent additional effective de-

250

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

251

Table 6-10

become distinct. In the 1957-1958 crisis, this tendency proved to be stronger than the trend to reduce employment in the productive sphere, and the total wages and salaries, for the first time in the history of the USA, increased during the phase of crisis.

Subsequently, with the spread of collective bargaining agreements concluded for several years, owing to an increase of wages in crisis years, the decrease in the total wage fund paid in the productive sphere stopped, notwithstanding a cut in the total number of man-hours worked.

Another change was the considerable expansion in transfer payments by the government to the population. In the first postwar crises the main part of this increase was unemployment compensation payments. In subsequent crises, the increment of these payments rose little; the main part was for other forms of social insurance. While in the 1948- 1949 and 1953-1954 crises the growth of transfer payments compensated only in part for the cut in money wages, in subsequent crises it turned into a factor which caused additional increases of the total money incomes of the working people. These two sources accounted for 54.5 per cent of the total increase of the population's money incomes in 1957-1958;*70.3 per cent in 1960-1961 and 85.4 per cent in -1969-1970.

As compared with the movement of labour incomes and transfer payments, the cyclical dynamics of personal incomes of the capitalist class changed little. These incomes in earlier crises, too, were relatively stable and subsequently this stability increased.

The countercyclical influence of taxes was examined in Section 4.2. Table 6-10 shows that tax payments by the population in postwar crises, as a rule, declined. In the 1948-1949 and 1953-1954 crises personal savings, too, decreased. During these years, apparently, the influence of the "deferred demand", accumulated during the Second World War, was felt. Subsequently, the movement of personal savings again began to play a procyclical role; this tendency, however, was not strong enough to change the general movement of consumer expenditure. The latter, including its major component, the purchases of goods and services, invariably rose in all postwar crises.

Changes in Personal Income and Its Disposition

in the USA in Crisis Years ('000 million dollars, current prices)^^1^^

1948-49

1953-54

1957-58

1960-61

1969-70

Personal income

---3.0

+ 1.9

+ 10.1

+.15.8

+53.3

Wage and salary disbursements

-0.8

-1.8

+1.2

+7.2

+31.8

Manufacturing

-3.3

-4.0

-4.1

+0.3

+3.3

Distributive industries

+0.1

+1.4

+0.3

+1.0

+9.1

Service industries

+0.6

+1.3

+2.0

+2.5

+8.6

Government

+1.7

+0.5

+3.1

+3.5

+10.7

Other labour income

+0.3

+0.3

+0.4

+0.7

+2.6

Proprietors' income

---4.9

-0.5

+1.3

+2.2

+0.7

Rental income of persons

+0.5

+0.9

+0.6

+0.1

+0.7

Dividends

+0.2

+0.4

-0.2

+0.3

+0.6

Personal interest income

+0.6

+1.2

+1.3

+1.6

+0.9

Transfer payments

+1.1

+2.0

+4.3

+3.9

+13.7

State unemploy-

ment insurance benefits

+0.9

+1.1

+2.1

+1.3

+1.8

Social insurance tax

+0.1

+0.6

+0.2

+0.3

+1.7

Other tax payments Personal savings

-2.5 -4.0

---2.9 ---1.9

-0.2 +1.6

+1.5 +4.1

-0.3

+16.2

Personal consump-

tion expenditures

+3.4

+6.8

+8.8

+ 10.2

+37.4

of which

Commodity and service purchases

+3.2

+6.5

+8.7

+9.9

+36.2

1 The National Income and Product Accounts of the Vnited States. 19U9-1965, Washington, 1966, pp. 32-33; Economic Report of the President, 1972.

252

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

253

Thus, the better organised struggle of the working people and change of the cyclical movement of their incomes brought to life new features in the movement of consumer demand in postwar crises, and this played a decisive part in introducing the new cyclical movement of prices.

A discrepancy between the continuing (although at a slower pace) growth of demand in money terms on a social scale and a reduction of real demand has emerged in present-day crises.

Section 7.6 shows that under such a situation monopolies are able to raise prices in spite of a decrease in real demand. Adapting themselves to this decline they cut production. Since money demand continues to rise, an artificial `` shortage'' of goods is created during a crisis, which makes it possible to raise prices. They grow even if there is a reduction of money demand provided this decline is smaller than the drop in real demand.

The crux of the matter is the ability of monopolies to carry out their plans for raising prices even in conditions of a decreased demand for goods. Apparently, if it were a case of freely competing non-monopolised entrepreneurs, the same conditions would have led to an entirely different result. If there were a decrease in money demand, in time, production would be cut and prices would be reduced. If money demand continued to rise, production and prices would grow.

Consequently, for the new cyclical price mechanism to function a fusion of two elements is necessary: 1) the subjective, i.e., the practice of the monopolistic regulation of the market and 2) objective, i.e., the definite correlation between the movement of money and real demand.

Some Western authors explain the rise of prices during present-day crises by the point that corporations are compelled to raise prices because their production costs grow, but the question about the motives for raising prices and whether it is possible to raise them are two different things. Whatever the motives for raising prices (and monopolies will always have more than enough of them), these intentions will not be realised if supply, expressed in higher prices, does not find an adequate demand.

At the same time, the question of motives for raising prices by corporations during crises is, of course, of interest by

itself, but here it is a matter not of the causes for raising prices (they have already been established) but of certain concrete aspects of the price-formation mechanism. So far we assumed that an expansion of money demand takes place independently of the price-formation process. In reality, however, it is not only the influence of money demand on prices that exists, but also the reverse influence of prices on the movement of incomes and demand.

The costs of producing commodities which enter the capitalist market consist of outlays of constant and variable capital. The unit labour cost of variable capital depends on wage rates and labour productivity (output per man-hour); the unit cost of the working part of constant capital depends on the technological rates of consumption of raw and other materials, fuel, and so on, and on the movement of the prices of these commodities. The unit cost of the main part of constant capital depends on the capital intensity of the goods and depreciation rates.

In most sectors of material production, the inputs of working capital make up a substantial part of the total production costs. According to data of input-output tables, they account for about 50 per cent of the prices of agricultural commodities in the United States, 50-70 per cent of the prices of the output of the manufacturing industry. However, the share of such costs is much smaller in the extractive industry (30 per cent), building (15-20 percent), electric power industry (20 per cent), transport (30 per cent), communications (10-15 per cent), in trade, finances and the services (30 per cent).^^1^^ Similar proportions are characteristic of Britain2 and Japan.

It was shown in Section 5.1 that in most sectors technical coefficients changed slowly. Relative stability of the total share of current material costs in the value of gross output is preserved over long periods. Consequently, the chief factor which influences the short-term change of the unit cost of working capital is the movement of the prices of raw and other materials, fuel, and other means of production used in

~^^1^^ Our calculations are based on input-output tables of the USA for 1958 and 1963.

~^^2^^ National Income and Expenditure. 1971, HMSO, London, 1971, pp. 24-25.

254

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

255

intermediate and inter-industry circulation. It is clear that prices in the overwhelming part of the elements of the social product are interconnected and interdependent.

^

When the price of some element of intermediate circulation rises, unit material costs increase in all sectors consuming this commodity. If, total money demand rises, an increase in the cost of one product may bring about a chain reaction of rising prices for other goods. If, however, money demand is stable or declines, the result may be a general decline in the share of profit.

ra 'The unit cost of variable capital also makes up a substantial part of the total production costs. Depending on the general structure of costs it accounts for 10 to 60 per cent of the market price of goods. Owing to a systematic increase in labour productivity, the labour intensity of goods declines. If wage rates rise slower than output per employed person, the unit cost of variable capital decreases; if the growth of wages is faster, it rises. These movements may lead to fluctuations of the share of profit in the value of the output.

The unit cost of fixed capital is comparatively small: it ranges from 5 to 15 per cent of the gross value of output. In the long-term aspect, capital intensity and the depreciation rate change slowly; consequently, the chief factor influencing this element of costs is the price of equipment, buildings and installations. In the short-term aspect, capital intensity fluctuates quite strongly owing to the cyclical fluctuations of production. Every decline in production increases the unit cost of fixed capital, and vice versa.

Entrepreneurs are interested in using equipment which makes it possible to raise substantially the output of workers and reduce labour intensity. Replacement of old equipment by new does not, as a rule, raise (or raises only to a small extent) the unit cost of fixed capital, but this creates the possibility of reducing the unit cost of variable capital.

An analysis of the elements of production costs made in works of a number of Western authors usually ignores the current material inputs and is reduced chiefly to examining one element---the movement of the inputs of variable capital. In other words, the value of the final product or the

value added is examined. It is easy to see that such a presentation of the question is an oversimplification.

V Leaving the cycle out of consideration for a moment, let us see what can send up the elements of production costs if, for a certain time, general stability of prices is achieved. A higher cost of the elements of material inputs may be caused by an increase in the prices of imported raw materials or a reduction in the productivity of natural resources in the extractive industry or agriculture. An increase in unit inputs of variable capital may be connected with a slowing down in the growth of labour productivity or faster rise of wage rates. A higher cost of fixed capital under these circumstances is improbable.

If the price of imported raw material rose, with an unchanging volume of money demand, there is no reason for a general price increase. The matter may be limited to a reduction of the share of profit in sectors which utilise such raw material or to a decline in its use.

In reality, making use of monopolistic regulation of the market, a corporation which uses imported raw material will try to impose a higher price for its goods on buyers. If the clients are companies they, in turn, will resort to a similar operation on their market. After a certain time, the wave of higher prices will reach goods of final consumption, i.e., consumer and investment goods. This will reduce growth rates (or the absolute level) of real wages and send up the cost of the elements of fixed capital. If such a chain of events occurs, the physical volume of final demand should be reduced and, consequently, also the demand for goods for intermediate consumption. Owing to this, the mechanism of shifting higher costs onto prices will operate with increasing difficulty.

If the higher cost of raw materials is a result of depleted productivity of natural factors, the direct reason for raising the price of raw materials is the lower labour productivity of workers in the primary sectors, i.e., an increase in unit inputs of variable capital in these sectors. Moreover, wage rates may remain unchanged. The results of this higher cost will be the same as in the first case.

Let us assume that an increase in production costs has been determined by a more substantial rise of wage rates

256

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

257

than of labour productivity. Here two results are possible: 1) money incomes rise faster than production and 2) the unit inputs of variable capital rise. If this happens in sectors which produce consumer goods, the increase of the money demand for consumer goods will at once be utilised by the monopolies in these industries to raise prices and restore the former share of profit in the price.

If the faster growth of wages occurs in sectors which put out producer goods, in conditions of the monopolistic regulation of markets the immediate result will be an increase in the price of consumer goods which will only gradually spread to producer goods.

The effect of the growth in unit inputs of variable capital also depends on the general structure of production costs. All other conditions being equal, it will be the greater, the higher the share of wages in costs.

Clarification of the mechanism of inter-sectoral interaction of prices enables us to understand better the specific features of contemporary price formation in the cycle. The examined earlier specific movement of money demand for consumer goods largely explains why retail prices in present-day crises grow systematically, while wholesale prices may at times be reduced. This difference cannot be explained only by the fact that retail prices in general grow faster than wholesale. This is the case in far from all countries. For example, in the United States both wholesale and retail prices of goods between 1945 and 1971 rose by 109 per cent, but in crisis years their dynamics differed essentially.

In West European countries and Japan, the growth in retail prices on the whole outstripped the increase in wholesale prices. This was a display of the intensive monopolisation of the sphere of circulation (which happened later than in the United States), a lag of the rise in labour productivity in the sphere of circulation and services as compared with the sphere of production and also the operation of a number of other factors. During economic crises these differences in the movement of wholesale and retail prices were particularly pronounced.

In the United States, during the 1969-1971 crisis and the preceding ``Vietnamese'' inflation, retail prices grew by 17 per cent (from 1967 to 1971) and wholesale prices by 13.9

per cent. In the given case, the lag of wholesale prices was systematic, reflecting above all the sluggish growth in the demand for producer goods as compared with the swift increase in money consumer demand.

The situation was different during the Korean war when, originally, wholesale prices climbed more steeply, reflecting the speculative increase in the demand for raw materials and other producer goods. Retail prices then increased more slowly, but their growth continued even after the speculative boom ended and wholesale prices began to drop. During this period, the peak of the war advance was already passed and the growth of the economy was based chiefly on the expansion of consumer demand.

This comparison shows that differences in the movement of wholesale and retail prices cannot be reduced to only production cost factors. It is more difficult and at times impossible to trace these differences if the mechanism of the inter-sectoral interaction of prices is ignored. It is for this reason that we asserted somewhat earlier that reducing the analysis of production costs to labour inputs is an unjustified simplification of the price-formation problem.^^1^^

Such a growth of prices is obviously by no means inevitable. If an increase in money demand corresponds to a growth in supply, the result can be a reduction of unit labour costs owing to the swifter rise of labour productivity. Such a reaction to the initial relative increase in labour costs is, however, by no means typical of capitalist corporations. Faced with the alternative---to accelerate supply or raise prices---corporations, as a rule, choose the latter.

It often happens that prices rise immediately after a corresponding increase in wage rates, i.e., even before it has caused a growth in money demand. Corporations are confident of their ability to impose higher prices on the market. By the time when the increase in wage rates affects demand, the enhanced purchasing power faces already established higher prices.

Statements of big corporations that they are unable to exist without raising prices only reflect their confidence

~^^1^^ The mechanism of raising prices during an increase of the unit labour cost in conditions of monopolistic regulation of the market, is described in Chapter 7.

17-0593

258

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

259

that the market will unconditionally accept their prices. As this confidence spreads and becomes general, corporations resort to higher prices even in cases when there is no growth in wages. From a defensive tactic, price rises become an offensive tactic. Such a price-formation policy is spearheaded against the final consumer, above all the working masses.

Since the 1950s, the terms of collective bargaining agreements in the United States have provided increasingly for a rise in wage rates, corresponding either to.the growth in labour productivity or to the rise in the cost of living, or to both combined. Translated into the terms of theory, the former demand reflects the striving of the working class to prevent a reduction of its share in the national income. Consequently, it is above all a matter of struggle against the relative deterioration in the conditions of the working people.

The second demand reflects the striving of the working class to prevent a decrease in its real wages, i.e., it is a matter, above all, of its struggle against the absolute deterioration of its material conditions.

Practically, however, it is difficult to draw a precise line of demarcation between different aspects in the conditions of the working class. Let us denote, for example, the demand for preserving its share in the national income by the following formula:

by the rate of the rise in the cost of living (P2) and the

growth rate of the national income in money terms (Y) as the multiplication of the growth rate of the real national

income (X) by the growth rate of the general price index (Pt) and we arrive at expressions

and

(3)

Pi-prod

PI-prod

where prod =---is the rate of growth of labour productivity.

Li

Consequently, to preserve the former share in the national income, it is necessary that money wage rates should grow at a pace not smaller than the multiplication of labour productivity and the general price level

'i-prod.

(4)

It is not enough that wages increase apace with labour productivity, because if prices rise, the share of the workers in the national income will necessarily decline.

The relative deterioration in the conditions of the working class can be prevented only by an increase of real wages which will correspond to the growth of labour productivity and the movement of prices:

(1)

(5)

- z

If the cost of living rises apace with the general price index, real wages must grow at a rate not smaller than labour productivity.

By transforming formula (3) we obtain:

where W--- growth rate of money wage fund (in per cent);

Y---growth rate of national income (in per cent). By expressing the growth rate of the wage fund by multiplying the wage growth rate (iv) by the quantity of the applied labour (L) we obtain

prod

wL

W

~T~ X

(6)

wL

(2)

The W/X ratio reflects the change in the unit labour cost. From the point of view of entrepreneurs, every increase of

this cost (i.e., W/X > 1) leads to a decrease in the share of profit and ``compels'' them to raise prices. From the position of the working class, however, an increase in the unit labour

17*

Further, let us express the wage growth rate in the form

of a multiplication of the rate of change of real wages (WR)

260

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

261

cost is necessary if prices rise, because otherwise a reduction of its share in the national income is inevitable.

Consequently, the constant conflict over prices and wages, characteristic of contemporary capitalism, is a major component of the struggle between the basic classes which is connected with the production and distribution of the national income.

Many Western authors write about the ``vicious'' circle of wages and prices and the inflation ``spiral''. Some authors try to find the "starting point" of such a circle or spiral: is inflation caused by the cost push or the demand push? It is easy to notice that these concepts examine the process from the point of view of the monopolies for which both cost push and demand push are only pretexts for raising prices.

From the position of the working class, any inflation is a scourge imposed by the present-day capitalist economy, the monopolistic regulation of prices which is fraught with the threat of both relative and absolute deterioration of its material conditions.

In an attempt to preserve and increase their profits, corporations may choose between a rise of prices and investment, which accelerates the rise in labour productivity. As for the worker, he has no way out except to struggle for higher wages.

Thus, the movement of the unit labour cost is the hub of the most acute social conflicts. Let us now turn to an analysis of its movement in contemporary cycles. In this particular case (Table 6-11), we assume unit labour costs as the ratio of the total wage and salary fund (in current prices) to the gross national product (in constant prices).

Data in Table 6-11 show that, throughout the prewar cycles, the unit labour cost, as a rule, rose during periods of recovery and advance and dropped during crisis phases. The decline at times lagged somewhat (for example, in 1930), but it continued for several years, even after the lowest point in production had been passed.

Consequently, the relative cheapening of labour was an important function of economic crises in the past.

In postwar crises, this function has also been displayed, though not so distinctly. In 1949 the unit labour cost de-

Table 6-11

Unit Labour Cost in the USA.

Increase (+) or decrease (---) in per cent of preceding year^^1^^

Year

1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938

Change

+1.6

---7.8

-7.1

-3.7

+6.7

---0.9

+0.9

+6.3

-1.3

Year

1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947

Change

---1.3

---0.4

+7.4

+16.3

+13.6

+3.1

+3.6

+8.6

+10.3

Year

1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956

Change

+4.8

---0.2

0.0

+8.2

+5.1

+2.4

+0.9

+0.4

+6.1

Year

1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965

Change

+3.8

+1.5

+2.1

+3.0

+0.7

+0.5

+1.2

+1.8

+1.4

Year

1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971

Change

+3.7

+4.6

+4.9

+5.3

+7.0

+3.2

~^^1^^ Source: Economic Report of the President of the United States Washington, 1972, p. 214.

creased and in 1950 remained at the former (reduced) level. Subsequently, not once has it been reduced in absolute terms, but in 1954-1955, 1958-1959 and 1961-1962 its growth invariably slowed down and in some cases almost completely stopped. In the 1966-1967 crisis, instead of a slowing down of its growth, it accelerated, mainly due to the escalation of military spending on the war in Vietnam. In 1970, the growth in the unit labour cost again stepped up, notwithstanding the crisis, but in 1971 it slowed down sharply.

Thus, the tendency to cheapen labour during crises operates in present-day conditions, too, although it is displayed less distinctly.

This mechanism has also been modified in other developed capitalist countries. According to Table 6-12 the absolute decrease of the unit labour cost in postwar years was quite a rare phenomenon. Just as in the United States, the general rule has been a sharp slowing down in the growth rate, but in most cases, in contrast to the USA, with a lag (of about one year) after the lowest crisis point. In the USA,

262

S. MENSHIKOV

INGOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

263

a similar lag was registered only in the 1969-1971 crisis.

The reasons for the delayed reaction are connected with the changes in the labour market discussed in Section 6.1. Under conditions of relatively low organisation of the working-class movement, the price of labour fluctuated in the cycle under the strong direct influence of the demand for, and supply of, labour. The growth of unemployment, as a rule, caused an absolute cut of wage rates and cheapening of labour.

In present-day conditions, with the growth- in the organisation and strength of the working-class movement, the dynamics of money wages is directly determined to a smaller extent by the situation on the labour market and to a greater degree by the terms of collective bargaining agreements, including those concluded in the preceding period. A decline in production and rise of unemployment, as hitherto, adversely affect the movement of wages, but much time is required for this influence to overcome the ``momentum'' of the earlier gains of the working class. A crisis affects the terms of collective agreements concluded in conditions of higher unemployment which might affect only the future labour cost.

The lag in the impact exerted by crises on the labour cost, of course, also affects the cyclical movement of prices. During crises demand is maintained thanks to the momentum of the growth in the incomes of the working class. On the other hand, the slowing down in the growth of the unit labour cost in the postcrisis period brings nearer the recovery of investment activity. On the whole, this lag mechanism tends to reduce cyclical fluctuations of prices.

In present-day conditions, trade unions demand and quite often achieve an increase in wage rates during crisis periods, too. These demands are designed to compensate for the rise in the cost of living during the precrisis period. Corporations would have never agreed to satisfy these demands if they were not confident of being able to shift the higher cost onto the consumer. Consequently, the very growth of money wages during crises, dictated by the momentum of the preceding rise of prices, is a consequence of the existing system of the monopolistic regulation of markets. P Historically,* the'extension of the monopolistic regulation of markets and prices preceded the introduction of col-

Table 6-12

Unit Labour Cost in West European Countries and Japan.: Increase (+) or decrease (---) in per cent of preceding year^^1^^

Years

Britain

France

FRG

Japan

1951

+8.5

+20.3

+9.0

1952

+7.5

+16.4

+2.4

1953

+1.0

+1.5

+2.3

+16.9

1954

+2.9

+3.4

+2.0

+4.1

1955

+6.0

+2.5

+2.0

---0.7

1956

+7.0

+7.1

+4.7

+5.3

1957

+3.5

+5.6

+3.6

+6.0

1958

+3.0

+12.2

+5.1

+3.3

1959

+1.0'

+5.0

+0.2

+1.4

1960

+2.7

+1.6

+3.6

+2.0

1961

+4.5

+6.0

+6.7

+2.8

1962

+4.1

+5.9

+6.3

+11.7

1963

+0.9

+7.9

+3.8

+6.3

1964

+2.9

+4.3

+2.8

+1.8

1965

+5.3

+3.1

+4.5

+ 11.2

1966

+4.8

+2.4

-4-5.1

+4.2

1967

+1.8

+2.4

0.0

+2.5

1968

+4.1

+7.1

+0.4

+1.7

1 Calculated after OECD. National Accounts Statistics. 1950-196U, Paris, 1970; italicised figures relate to crisis years. ;

lective bargaining agreements which provided for an increase of money wage rates for several years in advance. A dual interconnection exists here. On the one hand, corporations have begun to recognise the trade unions, conclude agreements with them and consent to a regular increase of wage rates after they had become convinced of their ability to regulate the markets. On the^^1^^! other, the acute need for a systematic growth of wage rates came to exist after price increases resulting from monopoly regulation had repeatedly sent up the cost of living.

In summing up this section, let us enumerate the main specific features of present-day inflation.

264

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

265

According to the classical definition, inflation is the rise of prices caused by the clogging of circulation channels with paper money issued to cover the deficit of the national budget. This definition, true for conditions of the circulation of metallic money, when the issue of fiat paper money was more often the exception than the rule, does not encompass all the reasons for present-day inflation. The systematic growth of prices in the postwar period has been caused not only by the growth of military spending in bursts and the steady rise of government demand in general, but also by the regular increase of the money incomes of the population, which corporations utilise for raising prices. Monopolistic regulation of markets and state measures for stabilising prices and control over production are necessary elements of this process.

In our opinion, it is correct to call such a rise of prices inflation, even if there is no state budget deficit and a consequent excessive issue of paper money. The point is that the continuous rise of prices, not linked with an increase in the value of goods or decline in the value of gold, cannot be effected otherwise than under the conditions of the absolute dominance in circulation of paper money, which is not exchangeable for gold.

A rise of prices and incomes with an unchanged velocity of money circulation demands a corresponding increase in the stock of money in circulation (including in this amount both cash and checking accounts in banks). Under conditions of gold money circulation this need, all other conditions being equal (a country has no gold production of its own, the balance of payment is equalised), can be satisfied only from existing gold reserves, i.e., in a number of cases this can be done only to the detriment of the function of gold as a means of international settlements, a medium of payment, and so on.

Under conditions of the circulation of bank notes and paper money exchanged for gold, the same need can be satisfied by these money tokens. But gradually, their issue will exceed the possibilities of backing them by gold and their free?exchange|forrgold will be upset.

If circulation is served by paper money not exchangeable for gold, these limitations are absent. If the money system

were unable to expand on a scale commensurate with the rise of prices and incomes, the latter could not grow. The contemporary money system is so organised, however, that the growth of the money stock proceeds more or less automatically if higher prices and incomes are realised.

Consequently, the issue of paper and credit money is an integral element of the rise of prices in present-day conditions, and although the mechanism of such price rises differs greatly from ``classical'' inflation, it stems from the specific features of the contemporary money system and can be regarded as inflationary.

6.3. HOW THE STATE PROMOTES THE RISE OF CRISES

In the preceding sections we have already examined most of the new developments in the capitalist economic system which cause crises of state-monopoly regulation. Let us now offer a general appraisal.

We have demonstrated that the change of the cyclical mechanism in recent decades has been displayed above all in a reduction of the amplitude of fluctuations in the volume of production, incomes and prices. What has happened, however, is not a weakening of the contradictions of capitalist reproduction, but merely a shift of the centre of their display.

The decline in production now is not so sharp and deep, but the overaccumulation of capital has become much more serious and systematic.

The working class of developed capitalist countries suffers somewhat less from the increase of unemployment during crises; on the other hand, a no less serious threat hangs over it---the rising cost of living.

Monopolies have captured control over the markets and by raising prices can maintain their profits at a sufficiently high level, but they are encountering the mounting struggle of the working class, which demands a systematic increase of wages.

The government tries to maintain aggregate demand, which helps to ease the usual displays of crises of overproduction, but state stimulation of the economy promotes inflation,

266

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

267

undermines the competitiveness of the goods of a given country on the world market and creates an unstable, at times critical, balance of payments.

Formerly, the contradiction between the growth of wages in periods of recovery and advance and the tendency towards a decline of the profit rate was automatically resolved by crises accompanied by a big drop of prices and sharp cuts of wages. Now this contradiction is not fully resolved during periods of crises and its spread shifts the further development of crisis phenomena into the sphere of money circulation, finance, foreign exchange and international settlements and creates conditions for the further exacerbation of the class struggle. .

Even if the regular advance of the economy coincides with internal cyclical factors and is not caused by excessive government measures for stimulating demand, a specific complex of contradictions of reproduction arises, which are displayed primarily in the indicated sphere. In expectation of a systematic growth of money incomes, corporations raise prices even before production runs up against a shortage of resources. At a later stage of the advance, when the loading up of productive capacities is close to ``optimal'' and unemployment is relatively small, the increase of prices is stepped up.

The expansion of production leads to steadily increasing imports of raw and other materials and other producer goods. An increase in money demand and especially the growth of internal prices create a stimulus for the import of goods which compete with local output. Moreover, exports grow comparatively slowly because, first, the home market presents an unusually big demand for national goods which compete with their usual buyers abroad and, second, the higher prices lessen the competitiveness of the country's goods on foreign markets.

Thus, the contemporary cycle is invariably accompanied by an increase of inflation and worsening of the balance of payments. Sooner or later these contradictions lead to an explosion.

At some stage, the profits of monopolies stop growing and foreign competition becomes especially dangerous. Then the state comes to the rescue. Instead of the traditional task

of countercyclical regulation of the economy and struggle against recessions, it sets the aim of putting an end to the advance and tries to speed up the maturing of the crisis before the situation becomes uncontrollable.

Acceleration by the government of the maturing of the crisis is a typical phenomenon in conditions of the contemporary capitalist economy. Let us examine some concrete examples from the practice of some capitalist countries.

Britain. Here measures for slowing down growth and speeding up periodic stagnations and recessions were employed repeatedly and, as a rule, were directly designed to remedy the unfavourable state of the balance of payments.

For the first time, the government resorted to these measures between the autumn of 1951 and the spring of 1952 when the discount rate of the Bank of England was raised from 2.5 to 4 per cent and restrictions were introduced on the hire-purchase sales of consumer goods. At the same time, corporate profit tax rates were raised and the preferential depreciation rules introduced in 1948 were annulled.

These measures accelerated the advent of the economic crisis in 1951-1952. The credit and tax restrictions were lifted only in 1953-1954 after the balance of payments had been led out of the critical zone.

The next prolonged period of deflationary policy lasted for three years (1955-1958). In addition to the measures taken the first time, government capital investment was reduced. This period coincided with a prolonged stagnation and crisis of the British economy. Restrictions were relaxed only in the spring of 1958 when the crisis of overproduction began to assume menacing proportions.

Within the next two years, in the autumn of 1960, the government had to resume deflationary measures. Since they did not at once produce the expected results, indirect taxes were raised by 10 per cent in mid-1961. As a result, production began to decline and the growth of imports was slowed down.

The credit and tax restrictions were annulled in the autumn of 1962, but at the end of 1964 they were reintroduced. Since the efficacy of the usual credit and tax instruments was insufficient, the government resorted, in 1966- 1967, to direct control of incomes, specifically to a wage-

268

S. MENSHIKOV

INCOMES, PRICES, INFLATION

269

freeze. The sum total of the deflationary measures helped Britain slide down into the next economic crisis but it could not save the country from devaluing the pound at the end of 1967.

The regular recurrence of deflationary measures in Britain came to be known as the ``stop-go'' policy. This gave rise to the concept which explains the postwar cyclical development of the British economy (fully or chiefly) by measures of economic policy. This, of course, is an exaggeration. The point is that the deflationary measures have been every time dictated by mounting difficulties in the country's balance of payments, owing to the contradictions of reproduction which developed on the basis <of the latest industrial advance. Objectively, these governmental measures accelerated the onset of the economic crisis whose prerequisites had already matured during the latest cyclical advance.

The ``stop-go'' policy has always been marked by a definite class trend. It was spearheaded against the working classes. The direct consequence of the deflationary policy was a restriction of personal consumption and growth of unemployment. In some cases, the authorities directly restricted an increase in wages.

Many Western authors hold that as an instrument for restraining the growth of wages this policy was little effective because it ran up against the determined resistance of the working class. It was even less effective as a means of improving Britain's balance of payments because it restricted investment and consequently impeded the technological progress so needed for raising the competitiveness of British goods on foreign markets.^^1^^

The shaping of the ``stop-go'' policy was apparently greatly facilitated by the prevailing influence of the group in Britain's ruling circles interested above all in preserving London's position as an international banking, monetary and financial centre. For' this powerful group, long-term measures designed to improve the competitive position of British goods were not of paramount interest; for them the main thing was to maintain the position of the pound.

~^^1^^ L. Ulman and R. J. Flanagan, Wage Restraint. A Study of Incomes Policies in Western Europe, Berkeley-Los Angeles-London, 1971, pp. 11-14.

Other West European countries applied deflationary measures more rarely. In a number of cases, they were also connected with attempts to prevent a monetary crisis, but usually their direct purpose was to curb inflation. Speciically, these measures facilitated the advent of economic crises in Italy and France in 1964-1965.

In Japan, deflationary measures were linked primarily with monetary difficulties. In 1953, 1957, 1961 they apparently were able to accelerate the oncoming economic crises. Under Japanese conditions, where the dependence of industry on outside financing, chiefly bank credits, is much bigger than in Western Europe or the United States, credit policy measures very swiftly and strongly affect the general economic situation. Owing to this, the authorities had to make sharp turns from deflationary to stimulatory measures in order to prevent the excessive spread of a crisis.

During most of the postwar period, Japan's capitalist class has succeeded in resisting the tendency towards a rise in the unit labour cost thanks to the unusually swift increase in labour productivity. As a result, the competitive positions of Japanese companies on foreign markets were sufficiently strong. In these conditions, the chief purpose of deflationary measures was to adjust economic activity. If economic growth rates in Japan are slowed down, the anti-labour nature of deflationary measures will inevitably grow stronger.

The fact that the contemporary capitalist state at times speeds up an economic crisis by no means rules out the objective nature of the maturing of crises in the course of cyclical reproduction. Now, too, crises which begin completely spontaneously are not only possible but also inevitable. Even the crises whose start was directly facilitated by the government are deeply rooted in the contradictions of reproduction. We have demonstrated that the bourgeois state is incapable of crisis-free guidance of the economy.

The participation of governments in accelerating the maturing of crises represents a completely natural result of the development of state-monopoly capitalism. At the same time, it attests to the profound contradictoriness of the entire system of regulating the economy which places in the foreground the interests not of society as a whole but of the small capitalist minority.

ECONOMKTBIG MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

271

CHAPTER 7

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES *

In Marxist literature relatively little attention is paid to mathematical economic analysis of the mechanism of the capitalist cycle. Marxist economists concentrated on economic growth models, in which the main emphasis is on analysis of the mechanism of extended socialist reproduction. Such models have a direct practical connection with improving socialist planning methods, but they cannot, of course, reflect the specific features of capitalist reproduction. This is not even their aim.

Cycle models, in contrast to growth models, pay particular attention to problems of the relationship between production and demand. This is in keeping with the nature of the cycle, in which overproduction crises are an inherent feature. Theoretical models of the cycle should concentrate on explaining the periodic expansion and contraction of demand.

The works of Marx and Lenin provide a reliable theoretical basis for constructing realistic models of the cycle, for the conditions of both free competition and modern statemonopoly capitalism. Let us go over the most important parts of classical theory which must form the basis of such models.^^1^^

It is, first and foremost, the theory of accumulation in the first volume of Capital, which sets out the main motive forces in the capital investment process. Factors determining the private consumption of the working and capitalist

* Chapter 7 was translated by Jane Sayer. ~^^1^^ See also Chapter 1.

classes are also found here. An explanation of cycles which is related to movements in capital investment, wages and unemployment is given.^^1^^ This analysis is continued and completed in the theory of profit (3rd volume of Capital), including the mechanism of overproduction of goods and capital connected with a decrease in profit rates.^^2^^

Macroeconomic analysis of reproduction in a series of economic sectors is included in the theory of the sale of the social product (2nd volume of Capital).^^3^^ Marx's are the first scientific two- and three-sector models of the reproduction process in the history of economic thought. These models fully anticipated the direction of contemporary economic analysis with the aid of input-output dynamic models. A detailed development of the two-sector model under conditions of technical progress and growth of labour productivity is contained in the works of Lenin.^^4^^ Special attention is paid to factors influencing the formation and development of the capitalist market, which is of particular importance for the theory of the cycle.

Marx makes a detailed cross-sectoral analysis of reproduction, as related to the nature of the price of production and average profit. He also studied in detail both the mechanism of the flow of capital, under the impact of fluctuating profit rates, and the process of the formation of sectoral and overall average rates of profit, as influenced by interindustry competition.^^5^^ A combined analysis of the problem of sale of the social product and inter-industry competition may serve as a theoretical basis for multi-sector cycle models.

When constructing cycle models, as all other theoretical models, one must make certain simplifications and abstract from many phenomena which have a place in reality. This is in order to spotlight the interrelations and laws important in the process being studied. A requirement of some importance is that the model should be relatively simple mathematically. Even with minor complications, a model often becomes unsuitable for theoretical analysis.

~^^1^^ K. Marx, Capital, Vol. I, Moscow, 1972, pp. 543-666.

~^^2^^ K. Marx, Capital, Vol. Ill, Moscow, 1966, pp. 211-66.

~^^3^^ K. Marx, Capital, Vol. II, Moscow, 1967, pp. 396-526.

~^^4^^ See, for example, V. I. Lenin, Collected Works, Vol. -I, p. 87.

~^^5^^ K. Marx, Capital, Vol. Ill, Chapters VIII-VII.

272

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

27 3

It is also necessary to determine the correct relationship between major and secondary factors and to try to allow for the possible influence of processes, which we are compelled to ignore for the time being. The development of mathematical methods now makes it possible to take a significantly larger number of factors into consideration in models than previously.

7.1. THEORETICAL MODELS OF THE CYCLE

7.1.a. The Single-Product Model

Let us consider the simplest single-product model, abstracting from division of the social product by sector. In the course of the analysis, we shall try to ascertain the basic features of the cycle mechanism, which shall be used later in multi-sector competition models.

Let us also make certain other simplifying assumptions:

1) We shall assume that goods are sold at their value or the price of production. In other words, we abstract from fluctuations of market prices around value. Since the economy is being considered as a whole, such an assumption should not result in any significant deviation from actual conditions.^^1^^

2) We shall assume that technical progress takes place sufficiently slowly not to cause any essential changes in the course of one cycle. Consequently, there are no corresponding changes in value. Along with the first condition, this means that we can operate with the physical volume of production, temporarily ignoring price movements.

3) We shall not take into account the process of reimbursement of the means of production used. This means that, under all circumstances, by social product we shall understand only net final product or national income. In exactly the same way, we shall consider only net capital investment, assuming that wear and tear on fixed capital is equal to depreciation.

We write the following identity:

Yt = Wt + Pt,

(1.1)

which defines the social product, or national income (Y), as the sum of its elements in terms of value: value of the labour force (wage fund)---W and surplus value (profit)---P. Other forms of surplus value are not considered in the model

~y__/""* i T !_ /~r

iA O\

Identity (1.2) defines the social product from the point of view of how it is used: it is made up of goods intended for private consumption (C), accumulation (/), and government consumption (G). Aggregate demand can be broken down in the same way: demand for consumer goods; demand by capitalists for the additional fixed capital necessary for extended reproduction; government demand for means of production and consumption, military output and so on. In the models of Marx and Lenin government demand is not usually taken into consideration and by including it, we shall try to draw attention to the recent expansion of the role of the state.

jit is assumed that all demand is fully satisfied in the given period. Thus we shall make one more simplifying assumption:

4) within the given period, there is no limit on productive resources (means of production and the labour force). This assumption seems natural, as under capitalist conditions there is, as a rule, always surplus productive capacity and labour.

Identities (1.1-1.2) form, as it were, the framework of the model. Formulation of their components is determined by other equations, showing how each variable changes under the influence of the others.

The wage fund (variable capital) is in a specific ratio to the amount of fixed capital used. In Marxist economic theory this relationship is called the organic structure of capital.

In turn, the greater the volume of production, the greater is the amount of constant capital (disregarding depreciation). WTe express this functional dependence in the following way:

W--=W[Kc(Y)]=f(Y),

(1.3)

where Kc is the amount of constant capital used.

~^^1^^ This also applies to labour, which we assume is also sold at its 1st value.

18-0593

274

S. MENSHIKOV

EGONOMETIRG MODELS OP ECONOMIC CYCLES

275

Since only short periods of time are being considered, this function may be approximated by the linear equation

Wt = eYt.

(1.4)

This function links the wage fund in the given period to output in the same period. Is this an oversimplification? If we take sufficiently short periods, a month for example, then it is obvious that additional considerations may arise. Wages are usually paid out of the sales proceeds of the previous period. Entrepreneurs try to keep the wage rate at its past level. Output in the given period is still unknown at the beginning of the period and it is easier to base the wage fund on the previous level of output.

In this case, would not current wages as a function of only the previous level of output be more correct? For example, we write this relationship in the following way:

Wt = cYt^.

(1.5)

However, it is possible to argue the opposite way. Even in short periods (a month, for example) the wage fund in the second half of the period reflects the current level of production. This is even more true for quarters, years and longer periods. The initial assumptions of entrepreneurs do not conform to reality and are adjusted in accordance with the course of the market situation. Workers demand and obtain wage rate increases.

All this impels us to accept the following form of the functional relationship between wages and production:

(1-6)

From this comes the corresponding functional relationship

Ct =

-j- a2

(1.8)

When considering this problem, in many cases Marx disregarded the current savings of workers. At the present time, although they have grown, these savings still represent a relatively small sum, as previously, and rarely exceed 5% of current income. However, under present-day conditions, a noticeable share of wages goes on personal income tax and other taxes. Thus, the coefficient ax can represent the approximate fraction of wages consumed.

How large is the share of surplus value consumed? At present in the USA about half of profits is paid out in taxes, approximately one-quarter is invested and another quarter is distributed in the form of dividends. Thus, the share of total profits consumed does not usually exceed one-quarter.

Purchases by the bulk of consumers depend not only on current, but also on past incomes. This is particularly true as regards the purchase of expensive consumer durables. Decisions on such purchases are not taken on the spot and are based on the movement of wages over previous periods. Consumer durables may also be bought on hire purchase. When supplying credit, trade and financial companies determine the credit rating of a purchaser, depending on the level and degree of stability of his past incomes. At the same time, the private consumption of the capitalist class is scarcely affected by fluctuations in profits.

Thus, we get the final form of the private demand function:

Ct = diWt-{-a2Wt-i +a3Pt.

(1.9)

The process of capitalist accumulation, i.e. turning surplus value into capital, is subordinate to changes in profit rates and total profit.

Generally speaking, net investment is a direct function of profits and an inverse function of accumulated capital. Overaccumulation of capital can lead to cuts in investment, even if the long-term prospects for profit are, as previously, quite favourable:

In contrast to the wage fund, profit does not require a special equation. If the volume of output and variable capital for the current period are known, then profits can be obtained from the national income formula

t = Yt-Wt.

(1.7)

Now let us turn to equations describing the formation of social demand. Purchases of goods for private consumption are made by workers and capitalists. The incomes of these classes, i.e. wages and profits, serve as the source of demand.

(1.10)

18*

276

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

277

In this formula, accumulated capital is taken at the end of the previous (or the beginning of the current) period.^^1^^

Formula (1.10) can be deduced in various ways. The simplest is as follows. Let us assume that investment is a linear function of the rate of profit

If we subtract from expression (1.16) the analogous equation relating to the previous period, multiplied by the denominator of the progression, we get

Kt---KKt-l = b(i-K)Pt,

(1-17)

It = v-

(1.13)

where v is the coefficient of proportionality. Using logs we get

Inlf---Vi-^ InPt---lnKt_i,

(1.14)

where v{--=lnv. So, for short fperiods of time, approximation (1.10) is appropriate. '

We can get the same formula in another way. Fixed capital at any given moment represents the sum of previous investments. Each of these investments can be considered as that part of surplus value accumulated in the given period. Thus, all accumulated capital is a function of present and past profits

In the course of time, the influence of former investments progressively decreases. Let us assume that this decrease takes the form of a geometric progression

where b is the coefficient showing the fraction of surplus value going to accumulation (rate of accumulation) and K is the denominator of the geometric progression, showing the rate of decrease of the share of old investment in accumulated capital.

~^^1^^ Let us assume that we define investment as a function of the current rather than the lagged volume of capital

In this case, we must pay attention to the identity describing the formation of capital

Kt = Kt-i + It.

(1.12)

Substituting this identity into equation (1.11), we can proceed to function (1.10) (given slightly different values for coefficients b1 and 62).

Now we can move on to a definition of net investment:

The coefficient for profit is the resulting rate of accumulation of surplus value (taking into account the rate of investment). The coefficient for capital shows the relative influence of previous accumulation. Since the denominator of the progression is always less than unity, the value of the capital coefficient must be negative.^^1^^ We note that the fact that the coefficient is negative is one of the most important conditions of the cycle mechanism.

Investment in the given period is divided into two parts: capital expenditure on investment programmes begun in the current period and expenditure on the completion of programmes initiated in the previous periods. Correspondingly, the investment function must define current investment as being dependent on both current and lagged profits (or on lagged investment).

Let us take the following investment equation in our model:

Thus, Model No. 1 comprises 6 equations and 7 variables. The formation of six variables is determined by the respective equations. These are the internal, or endogenous, variables:

Y, C, I, W, P, K.

One variable (G) is external, or exogenous. Its behaviour is not determined within the framework of the model under consideration. Strictly speaking, this is, of course, a sim-

~^^1^^ An analogous result was obtained earlier with a linear approximation to the rate of profit.

278

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

279

plification, as government consumption is somewhat influenced by reproduction. Thus, with growth of production, employment and incomes, tax revenues also increase and an expansion of government expenditure is made possible. However, in many cases, budget revenue and expenditure are far from strictly proportional to each other. Decisions on government expenditure are often taken irrespective of the current state of the economy. Thus, for simplicity, we assume, for the time being, that this expenditure is an autonomous variable.

Solution of the system of linear equations presents no complications. It is more difficult to interpret, in economic terms, the process expressed in mathematical form. Perhaps the closest approximation to reality can be offered by iteration, i.e. solution by means of successive approximations. This method corresponds somewhat to the general conditions of capitalist reproduction, for which market anarchy and fluctuations, under conditions of uncertainty, are characteristic.

Under capitalism, the volume of social production in any given period is determined by the sum of the decisions and plans of many independent enterprises, operating autonomously, not linked by a single national economic plan. In the absence of a developed forecasting system, these decisions are, more often than not, based on the level of production already achieved. In any case, plans for each new period, for example, for a month, differ only slightly from the actual results of the previous period.

Let us assume that these production plans are implemented. Then the general level of the economy can be described by the equation

Yv.t^Y^,

(1.20)

where Y0; t is the sum of the initial individual production levels.

Such a volume of production is matchedfby a corresponding size of the wage fund, paid outTafter a short period, such as a week. Its formation is shown by the equation

Surplus value produced during this time is denned by the equation

Po.t = Y0.t-W0.t.

(1.22)

In this way, the sum total of the initial production plans of capitalists and the early stages of plan implementation predetermine the character of national income distribution and, similarly, the components of demand. Demand for consumer goods is equal to

C0, t = «i W0. * + azWt_t + a3P0, t,

(1.23)

and the volume of net investment to

/o. t - WV t +Wi+ M^-i-

(1.24)

Along with the independently determined government demand, which, as a rule, is known in advance, this forms the overall level of demand

Y1.t = C0lt + I0.t + Gt.

(1.25)

Let us compare production (Y0> t) with sales of output (Yi,i)- They are rarely the same. As a rule, either output (at a given price) falls short or, on the contrary, supply exceeds demand. This discrepancy serves as a basis for revision of production plans, with a view to increases or decreases. The following subperiod begins with a new planned volume of production. At the end of this subperiod, output is again compared with sales and adjustments are made. Thus, over a certain period of time, production is adapted to the new level of demand, which, although predetermined by the sum total of the individual acts of capitalists, is not known by them in advance. It can only be known exactly at the end of the whole period.

Let us illustrate this process with the help of a numerical example. Assume the initial values of the variables to be as follows:

y = 100, W = QO, P = 40, # = 212.

Let us also assume that the equations describing the movement of the economy have the following coefficients:

Ct = OAWt + QAWt-i + 0.25Pt,

(1.26)

/t = 0.5P, + 0.3P,_1-0.1/i:t_1,

(1.27)

Wt = 0.4Yt + Q.2Yt-i.

(1.28)

(1.21)

280

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

281

Government consumption G in period (1) = 30. Let us assume that the goal of the entrepreneur is to achieve the same level of production as in the previous period. Then Y0 (planned production) =100; W0==60; P0 = 40; C0 = 58; 70 = 10.8; YI (i.e., actual sales) = 98.8.

Thus, demand turns out to be less than planned production. If entrepreneurs adjust their plans for the next period on the basis of the previous period (Y = 98.8), then, at the end of the second period they will find that supply again exceeds demand. After several subperiods it becomes clear that the equilibrium value of Y is 96.9. It will be recalled that according to our definitions, equilibrium of demand and supply is achieved in each period.

Now let us consider the simplified version of the singleproduct cycle model. In this, dependences on lagged endogenous variables are assumed. In other words, investment and private consumption decisions are taken on the basis of the actual income levels of the previous period alone.

Model No. 2

Yt = Ct + It + Gt,

(1.29)

C = a W -\-aP-\-C

(1 30)

Wt = dYt,

(1.32)

Let us make one more simplification---investment is a function of the change (fluctuations) in profits. C and / are that part of consumption and investment which does not depend on the level of incomes.

Adjustment of supply to demand is here achieved more quickly than in the first model (using the same values of the coefficients), since the solution of the system requires only two iterations.

Let us take the following as the numerical values of the coefficients for model! No. 2: % = 0.9; aa = 0.4; 6j = 2 (this coefficient defines the rate at which investment adjusts to changes in profits). Coefficient d is the conventionally

fixed share of wages in the national income; with the value of d in the model taken to be 0.5, the rate of surplus value

( m'----;----1J equals 100%. Let us also assume that C = 50,

7 = 20 and G = 120.

Then the model shows the following pattern of movement: Yt = 500. 515, 540, 566, 584, 588, 576, 552, 525, 504, 497, 506, 528, 555, 578, 589, 583 and so on. In other words, the model describes undamped periodic fluctuations, the duration of one cycle being about 10 periods.

In the single-product model, yet other assumptions can be made about how production adapts to demand. For example, in model No. 1, let us include inventory changes AIN as a separate term

We shall take A7W as being equal to the difference between supply (output) and demand. We shall also assume that the variable K includes both accumulated fixed capital and inventories and that the variable A IN, along with investment in fixed capital, adjusts to changes in profits and in the volume of accumulated fixed and circulating capital. Then, in each period, model No. 1 will show a discrepancy between demand and supply, which adjustments to output plans within the period only partially succeed in eliminating.

Another possible mechanism is based on the assumption that at each moment investments are adjusted with respect to the discrepancy between demand and supply in the previous period.

Model No. 3

t---Ct -\- It -j-

(1.35) (1.36) (1.37) (1.38) (1.39)

282

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OP ECONOMIC CYCLES

283

= Yt-Wt.

(1.40) (1.41)

the model in order to express Y in terms of its lagged values (i.e. in terms of YI^, y(_2 and so on) and of the exogenous variables. To do this, we exclude all variables apart from Y and G. Let us begin with models No. 2 and No. 3, as the most simple.

For model No. 2 the following sequence of operations is needed:

1. In the equations for Ct and It we replace Wt_t and Pj_i by their expressions in terms of Yt---i and Yt---z-

2. We substitute the values of Ct and It obtained in the identity defining Yt. We get the equation

Yt - fad + (aa + &0 (1 - d)] y,_, + &!(!- d) Yt-t =

^Gt + C + I.

(2.1)

This is the result we are after---the reduced equation of model No. 2.

For model No. 3 the sequence of operations is somewhat more complicated:

1. In the equations defining Ct and It we express the variables Wt-i and Pt-i in terms of YJ_I.

2. We substitute the value of Ct obtained into the identity for Yt.

3. Using the transformed identity for Yt, we get an expression for It in terms of Yt and Yt_i.

4. We substitute the equation defining into the equation for It and, using the expression obtained, we find an expression for Ypt in Yt-i, Yt and It+i-

5. We substitute YPt in terms of Yt+i, Yt and It+i into

equation for Yp.

6. We substitute into the same equation It expressed in terms of Yt and Yt---i-

As a result we get a finite difference equation in the following form:

Yt + {1 + M + a2 (1 - d)] + bi (1 - d) + 62 + kbzc} X

X Yt-i + {[aid + o2 (1 - d)] + bt (1---d) + kb2c x

X [oid + «2 (1---d)} Yt_a =

(2.2)

In model No. 3, Yp represents maximum possible supply, or productive capacity; Y° is the volume of output (supply), comprising some part of productive capacity; b4 is the marginal coefficient of the dependence of investment on the volume of profits; &2 is the coefficient of the rate (intensity) at which investment adapts to the difference between supply and demand; c of the average desirable workload for productive capacity; k of the increase in returns on capital.

Let us take the following values for the coefficients being closeto those calculated from' 'actual data:

= 0.4; ^ =

= 0.8; &=

Let us also assume that total autonomous demand is equal to 80.

Then the movement of Y (t) will be as follows: 150, 167, 192, 215, 226, 221, 204, 182, 165, 161, 170, 187, 204, 214, 213, 203, 188, 175, 170, and the difference between demand and supply (Y _ yo)f. o, +13, +19, +13, +1, -13, -23, -25, -26, -5, +6, +11, +10, +1, -8, -16, -19, -14. Consequently, with the given values of the coefficients and independent variables, model No. 3 describes a system of slightly damped periodic fluctuations, with a duration of about 9 periods.

These calculations require some time and effort. Is there no way of determining the dynamic properties of models without resorting to such calculations? This is of particular importance if we are dealing not with individual numerical examples, but with models set [in general terms.

7.1. b. The Dynamic Properties of the Single-Product Model

For analysis of the general dynamic properties of models of this type we shall avail ourselves of methods using the solution of finite difference linear equations.

The first step is to transform the model into its so-called reduced form. In our model, the quantity that appears in the most equations is national income. Let us transform

284

S. MBNSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

285

The process for reducing model No. 1 is even more complex. 1. Transforming equation (1.19), we express capital in terms of investment and profits

(az---b2 -f- a2b3)

---a3b3);

---

---

---

(2.3)

P=-(l-r-6s).

(2.9)

2. Substituting the resulting expression into equation (1.12), we eliminate capital

Expressions (2.1) and (2.2) are linear finite difference equations of the second order, while expressions (2.8) and (2.9) are linear finite difference equations of the third order. They completely determine such properties of the model under consideration as the presence or absence of cyclical fluctuations, and the frequency and character of those present.

In this it is possible to draw an analogy between finite difference equations and linear differential equations. Differential equations are a mathematical expression of continuous movement. A differential equation defines the law according to which a particular variable moves, so that, at any given moment, its position in some given system of coordinates is defined by its speed at that instant, its acceleration (in 2nd order equations), the change in its acceleration (in 3rd order equations) and, finally, by certain external conditions.

With certain reservations, it is also possible to interpret economic dynamics as continuous movement. In particular, a cycle model may also be presented in the form of a system of differential equations. In this case, we would come across two difficulties. The fact is, that algebraic finite difference equations are simpler and this is of some importance for economic interpretation of the laws under study. Besides, writing the model in terms of differential equations would create definite complications for testing this cycle model on statistical material. After all, macroeconomic statistics deal with discrete movements and, while the units of time used are long enough (month, quarter, year), the duration of the time series available is, as a rule, short. For research into cycles and market fluctuations, it is usual to make use of finite difference equations rather than differential^ systems, although the models can certainly be expressed theoretically in the language of differential equations.

3. With the help of equations (1.1), (1.2), (1.6) and (1.9), investment may be expressed in terms of national income

It = Yt (1---aiCi---a3 +

i--- a3)---a2c2rf_2---Gt .

(2.5)

4. From equations (1.1) and (1.6) we find an expression for profit in terms of national income

PV l\ /. \ /. V

/9 fi\

t = ' t (i---Cl)---C%X t-i-

\^-"/

5. Substituting formulae (2.5) and (2.6) in expression (2.4) and collecting terms, we get the following result:

``v r•i rt ?» i ^» in /~t i v\ \~\ _j

-f- Yt-i [---1 -(- fl3 -(- bj---b2---&3-(- a363-)- Cj (ai---a2---a3 + ajbs---

---a3b3---b4 -f- b2) -f- c2 (---ai + fl3 -(- bj)] -)-

+ Yt-z [b2 -+- Cj (a2---&2 -f- a2b3) +

+ Yt-3 [ -c2 (b2- at---azb3)]=Gt---(l + b3)Gt-i, (2.7)

or

t-i, (2.8)

a0Yt

where

I (o3---az + bt); ---bz---bs ---a3b3---

---a2---

286

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

287

Let us return, however, to our analogy. Equations (2.7) and (2.8) also show national income movement laws, though its magnitude is denned, not for each infinitely small unit of time, but for some sufficiently long finite period. The relationship between the size of national income in the current and first lag periods defines the rate of change of Y from one finite period to another, inherent in the model. The relationship between the size of national income in the current and second lag periods (Yt---z) shows the acceleration of Y peculiar to the model, and so on.

Thus, for economic research, the finite difference equation is a convenient mathematical expression of the law according to which the corre'sponding variables move.

In order to define this law, the finite difference equation of the reduced form must be solved. Solution of the finite difference equation is the second step in analysis of the dynamic properties of the cycle model. We shall proceed further with the calculations, firstly for the simplest model, No. 2 (2.1).

The movement described by this equation has two component parts. One of these satisfies the following equation:

richest and poorest population groups), autonomous investment / (for example, restoration of capital due to wear and tear), and also exports, population growth, the influence of climatic conditions and so on.

The general solution of the finite difference equation also divides into two parts, showing the separate influences of internal and external conditions on the movement of national income. First we get a solution describing the internal flow conditions. For this, we temporarily put aside external conditions and show the movement of national income under the influence of internal economic variables only. This is possible if, for example, we take Gt to be a constant, not changing over time, i.e. if we set G = Gt = G*_I. In this case, the right side of equation (2.1) will take the following form:

G + C+7.

(2.12)

Thus, let us assume that this expression is a constant. In this case, under what conditions will there be no movement throughout the system? In other words, we shall try to pinpoint the equilibrium level in keeping with the given invariant external conditions.

The system will be at rest if Yt = Yt-i = Yt-z- Taking Y as a constant, we get

where

(2.10)

---d)];

---«!---a2

(2.13)

This is the generalised form of the result of the interaction between the endogenous variables of the model, i.e. of national income, wages and profits, private consumption and accumulation. The right-hand side of equation (2.1) contains the expression

/-i \_"r< i ~f

/o <M\

UTJ -|- O -j- / ,

\£,Li)

which describes the influence of exogenous variables on the economy. There is no need to confine this to the influence of government consumption alone. Here we are also concerned with other economic and non-economic variables, such as autonomous consumption, independent of changes in the level of incomes, C (for example, consumption by the

where at and a2 are described by the relationships (2.10) and Y is the equilibrium level of national income. From equation (2.13) it is clear that equilibrium level Y is fully determined by G + / -+- C and the relationships between the coefficients of the model.

Now let us assume that Yt is not in equilibrium, but for some reason diverges from it (analysis of reasons for disequilibrium we shall leave for the future.) Then in each time period

Yt = Y-yt,

(2.14)

where yt is the^^1^^ deviation from the equilibrium level. Substituting this expression into equation (2.1) and making use

288 JL.

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

289

of equations (2.10) and (2.13), we get the following relationship, describing the movement of deviations from the equilibrium situation:

The expression we get is a homogeneous finite difference equation. Its order and coefficients are the same as those of the original non-homogeneous equation (2.1). (The difference between them lies in the presence or absence of external conditions of movement.) The presence and .character of cyclical fluctuations depends mainly on the properties of the corresponding homogeneous equation.

Solution of the homogeneous'equation is usually carried out in two steps. First, a partial solution is sought in the form

yt = K*.

(2.16)

Substituting this into equation (2.15) and dividing by A,*-^^2^^, we get the characteristic equation

12 I ™ 1 I ™

A

/9 \ 7\

A -p OS^A -f- G&2 =^ U.

^.1'j

Solving the characteristic equation, we get the number of roots corresponding to the order of the given polynomial and the power of the finite difference equation. In model No. 2 we are dealing with a quadratic equation, while in model No. 1, it is cubic. The quadratic equation has two roots, which may be either real numbers or a pair of complex conjugate numbers. If the roots are real, then the system moves without internal fluctuations and the corresponding variables change mouotonically, i.e. either increase or decrease constantly. If there are complex conjugate roots, then the system is characterised by internal cyclical fluctuations. Since the roots of equation (2.17) can be obtained from the formula

A1>2 =----------^-------,

(2.18)

Consequently, the internal laws of movement of an economic system are predetermined by the structure of the functional relationships analysed and their numerical values. The structure of the partial dependences in the original equations determines the order of the finite difference equation expressing the overall pattern of movement. In this way, the possibility of internal fluctuations is either established or excluded, since first order difference equations cannot have solutions giving fluctuations. In the final analysis, the numerical values of the particular laws determine whether the possible fluctuations inherent in the structure of the model become inevitable.

The same conditions govern the frequency of fluctuations and the character of movement. If the real roots or the moduli of the complex roots have an absolute value less than unity, then the fluctuations will be damped. In this case, the divergence of yt from the equilibrium level will decrease with time and yt will approach closer and closer to the equilibrium level. Then, even if the system includes fluctuations, they will gradually disappear.^^1^^

If the real root of the characteristic equation is greater than unity, then the movement will be explosive. In this case, the difference between y and the equilibrium level will increase and the value of y will diverge further and further from the equilibrium situation, determined by external factors. If the system contains internal fluctuations, with the modulus of the complex roots greater than unity (in a quadratic equation a2]>l), then the fluctuations will be antidamped, explosive. The frequency of the fluctuations is determined by the formulae

-^-a''.

(2.19)

t = -^,

(2.20)

where T is the period of the fluctuations. Consequently, the period and frequency of fluctuations is fully determined by the relationships between the structural coefficients of the model.

it is clear that whether fluctuations exist within the system is decided completely by the relationship between at and a2, i.e. by the combinations of initial structural parameters available from the very beginning in the equations of model No. 2.

~^^1^^ In a quadratic characteristic equation, the relationship | «i | < 1 may also be an indication of damped fluctuations.

19---0593

290

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

291

Having the roots of the characteristic equation, it is possible to get a general solution for the homogeneous finite difference equation in the following form:

A <\ t i A 1 *

/OO»4\

yt=AiK1 + Azt.z,

(2.21)

where Aj_ and Az are constants determined by the initial conditions.

Initial conditions are certain coordinates, describing the take-off point of the movement being studied. Economic movement is, in practice, continuous, but research must take some point of departure. Since in econometric models the structural parameters change with time and from country to country, it is always wise to first apply the model to the time and place for which its coefficients are characteristic.

In order to find the initial conditions, we shall solve the subsidiary system of equations

determined by the external conditions

t-Y.

(2.23)

Up to now we have worked on the assumption that G is a constant. In reality, external conditions are constantly changing. The simplest case is when they change at a constant rate, for example,

Gt = G0(l+r)',

(2.24)

where r is the given constant rate of growth. Under these conditions, will the equilibrium level of national income remain unchanged? Let us test this possibility, substituting expression (2.23) and the conditions of invariability for Y into the right-hand side of equation (2.10):

^ = M^'

(^^2^^-25)

This shows that the right-hand element of (2.24) will change over time. Thus, a stable equilibrium level turns out to be impossible in this case.

Let us look for a dynamic equilibrium Y~t, assuming a movement path of the following form:

Yt = Y0(t + q)t.

(2.26)

Let us assume that a dynamic equilibrium is presented by a growth of Y0 at rates differing from those of the growth of internal factors, i.e. we propose that q =£ r. Then, substituting expression (2.26) into formula (2.25) and dividing by (1 + q)f, we get

,.

(2.22)

In this way, the initial conditions are fully determined by the original levels of national income and by the roots of the characteristic equation. All ensuing movement follows the law, defined by the structural coefficients (shown in the roots of the characteristic equation) and by the initial conditions.

The structural coefficients determine the character of the movement and the frequency of possible fluctuations, but not their amplitude. The latter is of great significance for analysis of the cycle. The amplitude of fluctuations is fully determined by the initial. conditions, which establish the proportions between the elements of the internal dynamics of the model.

Formula (2.21) describes the behaviour of the model, governed by internal factors. However, as noted earlier, there is another component of this movement, depending on external conditions. In the particular case under consideration external conditions are assumed constant and movement under the impact of internal factors assumed to take as its point of departure the level of stable equilibrium

y _

j. n---

(2.27)

It is clear that here Y0 cannot be a constant. Let us try to overcome this difficulty by taking the rate of change of Y as equal to that of the external factors. Then, making analogous substitutions and dividing by the overall rate (1 + r)(, it is possible to get the following equilibrium path:

oo.

'28)

19*

292

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

293

Now, modifying equation (2.21), we can get the general formula for the movement inherent in the cycle model under consideration:

Here let us make note of two conclusions, which we shall need later:

1. The equilibrium level or path of the cycle model depends entirely on how the external factors working on the model change.

2. With a change in external conditions, a stable equilibrium cannot exist. Reaching a temporary equilibrium in period t, the system departs from it in period t + 1 and must find a new equilibrium level.

As shown above, the roots of the characteristic equation may be complex conjugate numbers:

h>i.z = k±in.

(2.30)

These numbers can be presented in the form of an harmonic function. Let us make the necessary transformations:

Now the movement path of the system can be presented by the following expression:

y( = 4m'cos(8f---e)+T(l+r)'.

(2.32)

However, fluctuations may also result from external conditions. Let us assume that external influences fluctuate regularly

Yo)

(2.33)

TT

with a period of---. Then it is obvious that the level of the dynamic equilibrium will be determined by the path

yt = y0cos(Y*-7o)

(2.34)

with the same harmonic fluctuations that are inherent in the external conditions. The movement of the system can be shown by the expression

t = Amlcos(Qt--- e) + F0cos (7^---

(2.35)

i.e. by addition of two harmonic functions.

In practice, as has been shown, external conditions can represent the combined effect of different external variables, each moving independently. Thus, the path of the economic cycle will be determined by the combined influence of various external forces and internal laws of movement of the economy.

The result of adding different harmonics is determined by specific features: the initial conditions, amplitude, phase, frequency. In consequence, it is possible to obtain smoothed fluctuations if the harmonics are not in phase, or a complex path with smoothed fluctuations in some parts and antidamped in others, or, finally, explosive fluctuations if the harmonics coincide in both frequency and phase.

where

k±in = m(cosQ ± z sin 6),

k

n -,/ --

m = - rr = -: - rr = \ (Xo,

cos0 sin 9 '~^^2^^' tg6 is determined by formula (2.19)

iK\ + Aztfz = mi [Ai (cos Qt + i sin Qt) + (cosQt---isinQt)]---m^^1^^ (A\ cos 0*4- AzsinQt),

and

where

and A'2 = i(Al---

Introducing A =

sm e

cos e

7.I.C. Internal Fluctuations of the Cycle Model

Let us use the methods described in the previous paragraph, applicable to models containing numerical values of the coefficients. Let us begin from the simplified model No. 2 described in section 7.1.a.

we get the final form of the harmonic function, linking both complex conjugate roots:

yt~Aml cos (Of---e).

(2.31)

294

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

295

Substituting the numerical values of the coefficients taken in this model into the reduced equation, we get

Y,-1.65y(_1-f-y»_, = G + C + 7.

(3.1)

Now we can find the roots of the characteristic equation

Inherent in the model are internal fluctuations with a duration of 22 units of time. The modulus of the complex roots is less than unity. The real root is close to zero. Consequently, the internal movement of the system will be characterised by damped fluctuations around the equilibrium path determined by the external conditions. The level of static equilibrium of the system is equal to

They represent a pair of complex conjugate numbers: 0.825 ± 0.565i.

We determine the frequency of fluctuations according to formulae (2.19) and (2.20):

tg 0 = 0.675; 6=^=34.5°; t = 9.6.

The model contains regular (non-damped and non-explosive) fluctuations, with a duration of 9.6 units of time, around the equilibrium path determined by external conditions. The level of static equilibrium (with constants G = 120, C = 50, 7 = 20) equals:

120+50+20

We note that the results of analysis of the dynamic properties of the cycle model are in complete accord with the conclusions made at the end of section 7.1. a.

Using the sinusoidal form of the path of movement, let us construct the subsidiary equations and determine the initial conditions. Let us assume that, originally, national income remained at the same level for three periods and was above the equilibrium level:

cos 16.4° = 0.95927; sin 16.4° = 0.282387, cos 32.8° = 0.841; sin 32.8° = 0.542, m = 0.813326; m^^2^^ = 0.661499, 44 + 42 + 69.2,

~ 1-1.65 + 1

Constructing a graph for movement of Y (t), starting from YQ = 500, we get a picture of regular fluctuations around the equilibrium level.

Let us operate similarly with the equations of model No. 1.

We set the values of the coefficients of the li-near finite difference equation and its corresponding characteristic equation as in formula (2.7) and divide by the coefficient of the first term. We get

W - i .5154X^^2^^ + 0.5923X+ 0.0308 = 0.

(3.2)

Solving this cubic equation, we find its roots:

AI =---0.045, A,,, 3 = 0.7802 ±0.23z.

Thus, there are one real and two complex conjugate roots. Let us determine the frequency of the fluctuations

tg 0 = 0.294, 0=16.4°,

100 = - 0.0454J + 0.7801994; + 0.2296724; + 69.2, 100 =---0.0020254i + 0.556324; + 0.3585324; + 69.2. Solving, this system, we get:

41 = 3.3; 4;-=27.45; 4; = 44.75,

j = -4i- = 0.614; e = 31.4°; sin e = 0.521; cose = 0.862;

A:,

52.45.

sine cose

Thus, finally, the model moves along a path described by the following formula:

Yt == 3.3 (-0.045)' +52.4-0.813' x

xcos(16.4ni---31.4°)+ 69.2.

(3.3)

296

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

297

We have before us a picture of damped fluctuations around the equilibrium level. Let us consider one more curve, with a starting point higher than in the basic example. It is clear that, in this case, the amplitude of fluctuations, as measured by the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the function in the given cycle, turns out to be greater. If we take as our initial conditions an equilibrium level of 69.2, then A1 = A'2---A's = 0, and consequently there are not only no fluctuations, but no movement in general.

From this becomes clear the meaning of our assumption that the amplitude of fluctuations in a cycle model is determined by the initial conditions. The economic initial conditions give the degree to which the model deviates from the equilibrium situation. The greater this deviation, the greater the amplitude of the fluctuations.

Which real processes forming the economic cycle does our model simulate? First, let us look at each of its equations.

In model No. 2, the wage function assumes a fixed relationship between its growth and the increase in national income and, consequently, an invariant rate of surplus value. We shall show below that this is a simplifying assumption which is not necessary in more complex models. The private consumption function sets the change in consumption as dependent on the wage fund and profits. Since in the given model the ratio of wages to profits is invariant, consumption depends decisively on fluctuations of national income as a whole.

The investment function serves as the epicentre of the cycle movement described by this model. This sets investments as a function of profit fluctuations and, with the assumption of an unchanging rate of surplus value, also of national income fluctuations.

Let us assume that, in the initial period, the model is in a state of rest. Then, some external impulse, such as an increase in government purchases, leads to a growth in national income. Under the influence of this, private consumption and accumulation begin to grow, with accumulation growth outstripping that of consumption. Given particular relationships between the structural parameters

(coefficients) of the model, this will lead to an inevitable decrease in the rate of growth of national income. The growth of investment slows down and then becomes negative. For a time, the growth of national income is supported by that of private consumption, but then they both start to decrease. A crisis phase begins, in which national income and its components decrease. Since investment falls faster than private consumption, the rate of national income decrease falls and the moment comes when the crisis phase exhausts itself. Then a new growth of investment begins and then private consumption follows.

The properties of fluctuations within the model are determined by the relationship between its structural parameters. In order to analyse the effect of changes in these coefficients on the dynamic properties of the model, changes of only certain specific coefficients must be considered separately, taking all others to be fixed at economically realistic levels.

The most stable coefficients are those of the dependence of private consumption on wages and profits. Let us assume that the coefficient of consumption as a function of wages is 0.9 and of profits, 0.4. Then the dynamic properties of the model are determined by the rate of surplus value and the sensitivity of the adjustment of investment to profit fluctuations. Substituting the values of the fixed coefficients into the reduced equation of the model, we find:

(

1. With a rate of surplus value of 100%, cyclical fluctuations are inevitable if the coefficient for adjustment of investment lies between 0.35 and 5.05. Thus, the limits for fluctuations are quite broad. For the cycle to become impossible, a very significant decrease in the strength of investment's reaction to profit fluctuations is necessary. Under present-day conditions, investment'is tending to show a decreased reaction to profit fluctuations, which partially explains the modification of the cycle.

2. Taking the initial coefficient of investment reaction equal to 2, cyclical fluctuations are inevitable if the rate of surplus value exceeds 18%, and with a reaction intensity coefficient of 1---over 33%. Usually, the actual rate of surplus value significantly exceeds these critical values.

3. The boundaries for cyclical fluctuations and their amplitude increase with a growth in the rate of surplus value

298

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

299

and in the sensitivity of investment to profit fluctuations.

Fixing the latter two, we can investigate the effect of the other coefficients on the cyclical pattern of the economy. In particular, one of the most important conclusions is that the fluctuation boundaries expand if the share of accumulation in the national income increases and that of consumption decreases.

In model No. 1, wages are established as a function of past and present production levels. If production expands, the number of employed rises, workers achieve wage rate increases and, as a result, the wage fund grows. If production falls, workers are dismissed, wage increases slow down or wages actually fall, and the general wage fund decreases.

In contrast to the wage function of model No. 2, the given equation, where wages are a function of both current and past production, reproduces the fluctuations in the share of wages in the national income in the course of the cycle.

In fact, let us take Yt equal to aYt^, where the coefficient a may be less or more than or equal to unity. Then the equation looks like this:

(3.4)

where A is a constant. If production is invariant, then the share of wages in the national income is approximately equal to (cj + c2). If production increases, the share of wages is less than (cl + c2) and vice versa. Differentiating expression (3.4) we get

dW . c2

,Q rx

-TTF = <?lH--------.

(3-d)

In other words, the share of wages is an inverse function of the rate of growth of production.

In the first stage of the cyclical advance, the share of wages falls, while that of profits increases, which allows investment to grow and the cycle to continue to climb. In its last stage, when the rate of growth of production is decreasing, the share of wages increases and that of profits falls. This allows investment to fall and leads to a crisis phase.

Table 7-1

The Share of the Wage and Salary Fund in the National Income of the USA (maximum and minimum cyclical values)^^1^^

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Prewar Cycles

Postwar Cycles

0.709

0.654

0.621

---

(1949.4)

(1948.2)

(1920)

0.699

0.637

0.677

0.656

(1953.4)

(1950.4)

(1927)

(1925)

0.708

0.674

0.831

0.670

(1958.1)

(1955.1)

(1932)

(1928)

0.715

0.692

0.750

0.715

(1961.1)

(1959.2)

(1938)

(1936)

0.723

0.701

0.715

(1967.3)

(1966.1)

---

0.753

0.719

(1940)

(1970.4)

(1968.1)

~^^1^^ For postwar cycles, quarter years are shown; for prewar cyclesyears.

As can be seen from the data in Table 7-1, the maximum relative value of wages occurs at the lowest crisis point, the minimum---when production is growing fastest. This usually turns out to be the opposite of the movement of the absolute value of wages, which is at its highest at the end of the advance phase and at its lowest during the crisis. Profits, on the contrary, grow faster than wages during advance and fall faster during a crisis.

The private consumption function sets this consumption as dependent on current and past wage levels and the current level of profits. As in the wage function, this means a decrease in the growth of private consumption in periods of advance and an increase in the share of consumption during crises. This corresponds to the actual cyclical movements of both pre- and postwar years.

300

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

301

The investment process is the centre of the cyclical mechanism. In the equations of the model, investment is denned as a function of current and past profit levels and of the level of accumulated capital. When production starts to grow, an acceleration in the growth of profits stimulates the investment process. Along with the increase in capital investment, the volume of accumulated capital grows even faster, but so does its negative effect on investment. For a time, the positive effect of the growth of profits exceeds the negative influence of capital growth. However, gradually the growth of profits slows down and the influence of the overaccumulation of capital becomes decisive.

Investment only decreases when there is a clear change in profit flows. This is facilitated by the dependence of investment on lagged profits. However, when investment begins to fall, producing a fall in social demand, profit contraction turns out to be an additional factor aggravating the crisis.

The presence or absence of fluctuations in the model under consideration is determined, to a decisive degree, by this very investment function and its coefficients. To be sure of this, let us assume that private consumption is independent of income fluctuations (setting the corresponding coefficients at zero). The coefficients of the other equations we leave in their original form. By making the corresponding calculations we can make sure that the order of the finite difference equation does not change. One of its roots is real, the other two are complex conjugate numbers. The duration of the cycle is 9 units of time. The coefficient of damping in the sinusoidal function m = 0.557. Thus, the ``amputation'' of the private consumption function cannot eliminate fluctuations, but only changes their character.

Let us continue the experiment and set the coefficients of the wage function at zero, making wages independent of production fluctuations. Modifying correspondingly the coefficients of the finite difference equation, we find that its order has decreased. The new, quadratic equation has complex conjugate roots. The fluctuation period is 14.2 time units and the coefficient of damping is 0.775.

Now let us make the opposite operation. We shall take investment as autonomous and independent of income and

capital movements, while leaving all other equations in their original form. Let us carry out the reduction of the model once more (the previous reduction was based on a transformation of the investment function).

Now we get a second order finite difference equation:

Yt(i--- ffliCt---

-i (---diC2---a2Ci -f a3c3)

(3.6)

Let us substitute the values of the coefficients 0.69F,---0.19yt_i---0.08yt_, = 0.

The coefficient of the last term in this equation is always negative (since az and c2 are positive). Consequently, the solution of the given equation cannot be fluctuating.

We have assured ourselves that it is the investment function which constitutes the cycle in the model under consideration. However, other functions play an important role in determining the character of the cyclical fluctuations and the duration of the cycle.

Thus, with current and lagged income in the consumption function, the relationship between the coefficients plays a significant role in determining the duration of the cycle. If we set consumption as a function of only lagged wages (which is correct only for very short periods), then the duration of the cycle extends to 31 units of time. If we include only current wages (which is correct for long periods), then the cycle is reduced to 8.7 units of time.

In exactly the same way, a decrease in the coefficient for current profits and an increase in that for lagged profits in the capital investment function leads to lengthened fluctuations. This is also true for models where lagged investment is used rather than lagged profits.

Fluctuations in the model disappear if the negative coefficient for capital is less than 0.02 (and all the more for positive values). The greater the absolute value of the negative coefficient b3, the wider the range of solutions giving fluctuations. The cycle is shorter, the greater the negative reaction of investment to the overaccumulation of capital. Investment in circulating capital (growth of inventories) is particularly sensitive to the absolute level of accumulated stocks. This causes sharp and more frequent fluctuations in

302

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

303

inventories, which increases the instability of the economy as a whole. Investment in fixed capital is less sensitive to the absolute value of this accumulated capital. This results in longer cycles for the renewal of fixed capital.

jln an economy where investment does not have a negative relationship to accumulated capital, overaccumulation of capital cannot be the cause of the cycle. If there are fluctuations in such an economy, then they must be explained in other ways.

Finally, a greater dependence of wages on the level of national income leads to a contraction of the range of unstable solutions, which disappear when cx > 0.8. In essence, we are dealing with the influence of the rate of surplus value on the cycle. Its increase broadens the range of cyclical fluctuations. Other conditions being equal, the struggle of the working class to limit capitalist exploitation reduces the possibility of cyclical fluctuations or, in any case, prevents it from increasing.

Let us carry out a partial reduction of model No. 1, i.e. express some variable in terms of its own lagged values, the lagged values of the other internal variables and also the external variables. We get

Yt(l---aiCi---a3ci---biCi---a3---&t) = Yt^cz fa---az---bj + + a2Wt_l + biPt.i + b3Kt.i + Gt.

(4.1)

Substituting in our coefficients of the equations of the model, we get

QA/dYt=---035Yt-i + QAWt-i+Q.3Pt-i---QAKt_i + Gt. (4.2)

We note that the coefficient for the left-hand element of the partially reduced equation is equal to the analogous coefficient for the fully reduced equation. This peculiarity may be used when the value of this coefficient is needed without full calculations (in calculating the impulse multiplier, for example).

(The new equilibrium level for demand and supply in each period is predetermined by the change in the magnitudes on the right side of equations (4.1) and (4.2), or, in other words,

Yt = [ct fa ~a3- ty Yt-i

7.1.d. The Correlation of Internal Fluctuations

and External Conditions. The Determinate and Stochastic Parts of the Cycle Mechanism

Up to now we have considered fluctuations caused by internal factors---fluctuations around a static equilibrium level or a dynamic equilibrium path determined by external conditions. The process by which the model seeks equilibrium within a single time period has also teen looked at. It is obvious that these imply different conceptions of equilibrium. Let us call one of these the external equilibrium, and the other the internal.

The search for an equilibrium level within the given period (taken as one unit of time in the model) takes place under unchanging external conditions. At the basis of this process lies the internal play of macroeconomic variables.

In each period, the model reaches an equilibrium (of demand and supply), which is lost at the beginning of the next period. The displacement of the equilibrium level springs in particular from its changing absolute level and the correlation between the lagged variables, i.e. from the internal momentum of the model.

.

(4.3)

Collecting terms on the right-hand side in accordance with the equations in which lagged values appear, we get

Yt=f[&T(c) + *T(I)+(ai-as-bi)bT(W) + &Gt],(4A)

where T (c) is the lagged part of the equation for C, i.e. (cjAW^);

T(I)---the same for the / equation, i. e. (62APi_1-f feg T(W)--- the same for W equation, i.e. (cz&Yt-i).

This formula determines the change in the internal level of equilibrium in the model from one period to another. The growth or fall of production in the current period is a result of the change in the correlation between certain key variables.

The lagged part of the Investment function. This consists of lagged profits and capital. Since b3 is always negative,

304

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

305

lagged capital always pushes the system ``downwards''. The greater the previous accumulation, the stronger the "force of gravity" acting on the economy. Lagged profits work in the opposite direction. Provided they are growing sufficiently rapidly, the negative effect of prior accumulation is cancelled out. Once they begin to grow more slowly, T (I) becomes negative overall. If profits begin to fall, this aggravates the crisis.

The lagged part of the consumption function. Here there is only the question of lagged wages. In periods of expansion, wages grow and their momentum works in the opposite direction to the negative influence of T (I). Only in an extreme crisis will A T (C) take'on a negative value. As mentioned above, on the whole, this factor works countercyclically. If the momentum of the growth of consumption is sufficiently high, it can act as a strong brake on the development of the crisis.

The lagged part of the wage function. This also has only one element---lagged production. Its overall effect is determined by the correlation between the coefficients of consumption from current wages (ax) and the sum of the coefficients of consumption and accumulation from current profits (a3 + bj). If the dependence of consumption on current wages is not very great, then the overall effect of T (W) will turn out to be an additional negative (procyclical) factor. When 6X = 0, T (W) will, as a rule, act countercyclically and sometimes sufficiently strongly to counteract the negative effect of the lagged part of investment.

A change in the internal level of equilibrium will also result from changes in external conditions. This will happen as a consequence either of deliberate government policy measures or of an unforeseen and uncontrolled change in external conditions.

The internal mechanism of the cycle, described by the homogeneous part of the reduced finite difference equation, we shall call the determinate cycle mechanism, i.e. the mechanism which, in each period of time, is predetermined by the internal macroeconomic structure.

The net effect of external conditions which depend on government policy, we shall call the controlling effect.

The net effect of such external factors as exports, population, the weather and so on, we shall call the uncontrolled external effect. From the point of view of the internal mechanism of the cycle this effect amounts to a combination of random events, but, generally speaking, it is simply exogenous information introduced into the model from outside.

There is also another type of external influence which we have not mentioned so far. This is the results of random deviations from the internal movement pattern. We shall call this the stochastic part of the cycle mechanism. Let us investigate its nature in more detail.

In composing the model of the economic cycle we made use of two types of equation. One of these shows axiomatic links and dependences: the equalities describing the composition of the social product, national income and the growth of capital.

tln the other equations, individual variables may be present or absent, individual coefficients change empirically over time and space. Even when the structure and quantitative characteristics of these equations are determined, they can only claim to be an approximate explanation of the phenomena being investigated.

Let us turn, for example, to the private consumption function. The dependence of consumption on incomes, which lies at the basis of this function, is, on the whole, correct, but this takes no account of other factors influencing consumption. In particular, it does not include fluctuations in the share of income saved, the effect of changes in the rate of interest for consumer credit or the role of the accumulation of consumer durables. Nor is the effect on consumption of price changes and other factors taken into account.

Similar considerations are also justified in relation to the investment and wage functions. In other words, many spheres of economics, playing some, albeit secondary, role in the reproduction process, are left out of the model, while they have an effect on the cycle and their joint influence may turn out to be considerable. It is sufficient to point to the example of fluctuations in prices, interest rates, movements of exchange rates on the stock exchange and their influence on the functioning of the capitalist economy, for the significance of these factors which we have ignored to become clear.

20-0593

30B

S. MENSHIKOV

KCONOMKTK1C MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

307

It would be possible to include these factors in a cycle model, hut this would make it more complex. A large model is more difficult to study by simple methods. Even if we included these factors, we would not eliminate the causes that led us to do so, for new equations would appear, in which there would also turn out to he factors remaining outside the model.

Let us assume, however, that we would be able to cope with this problem on the level of the economy as a whole and even for a Breakdown of the model by industry. All the same, the equations we would get would only be approximate reflections of the actual behaviour norms of individual enterprises, classes and social groups, different consumer categories and so on. The economic laws of capitalism act mainly as a trend running through constant deviations. In the atomistic structure of a capitalist economy, each macroeconomic varianle is only the sum of a number of other variables, whose values are established independently of central control and are constantly adjusted to the market and to the interaction of autonomous units. There are deviations from every economic law, partly as a result of other laws.

On the basis of the above, we shall add to each equation a variaDle for the result of the effect of all factors not included in the model and all random deviations from the established laws. By these variables we can cover, in part, the internal play of such important factors as prices, exchange rates, credit, rentals, the speculatory activities of the capitalist class, competition and so on. The effect of these factors is partly taken into account directly in the macroeconomic variables of the model and partly through the random variables.

Then the equations of the model will look like this:

they are defined in the following way:

&(C)t^Ct---Ct,

(4.8)

e,(l)t = It---It,

(4.9)

s (W)t = Wt---Wt.

(4.10)

Thus, these variables represent, respectively, the difference between the actual level of consumption, investment and the wage fund and that part of them which is determined by the economic laws expressed in the given equation. With the addition of the random variable (error factor), each of the equations becomes an identity.

Let us introduce the corresponding changes into the finite difference equation obtained from full reduction of the model. Now, along with the elements already considered, it will contain the following combination of random variables:

a0Yt (e) = e (C)t - (1 - 68) e (C)t_t + e(/),-

---a3b3) e (W)t_i + (62---a3--- a2&3) e (W)t_2. (4.11)

Formally, variables describing the stochastic mechanism of the cycle are on the right of the non-homogeneous finite difference equation and so can be considered as a component part of external activity. However, in economic terms, these elements enter into the internal mechanism of the cycle in exactly the same way as its determinate part. Therefore, we shall include both the determinate and stochastic mechanisms in the internal mechanism of the cycle.

Let us introduce the same changes into the equations of the partial reduction. By T (ec), T (e/), T (ew) we mean, respectively, the sum of the random influences of the respective equations. Then the formula for change in the internal equilibrium level of the cycle will look like this:

Ct = It =

a3Pt

e (C)t, - e (/)*,

(4.5) (4.6) (4.7)

+ b2Pt.i + b.

(4.12)

The behaviour of the stochastic cycle mechanism can be both analysed empirically and investigated from a theoretical point of view. To start with, we shall take the example

20*

where e (C), e (/), e (W) are the random variables for consumption, investment and wages. In each given period,

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

309 390-1.jpg

- + 10

of how this mechanism worked in the USA between the two world wars. In Fig. 7-1, changes in the values of random deviations in an econometric model of the American economy are shown by solid lines. The first three diagrams show the pattern of movement of such deviations in each of the consumption, investment and wage functions. Changes in their actual absolute values are shown by broken lines.

A certain interdependence between the broken and solid lines is noticeable. This is most clear in the investment function and least obvious in the wage function. The greatest correspondence is seen at the beginning of crises, while in periods of advance, as a rule, they take different paths.

Diagram IV shows the result of adding these deviations according to the correlations in the finite difference equation for national income. The summed influence of deviations can be compared with the actual movement of national income. This time a significantly closer coincidence of the two curves is noted. There is not a single case in the twenty inter waryears when the summed effect of the stochastic mechanism did not follow the trend of changes in the actual level of national income, although the absolute movements were not always identical.

Thus, adding the random deviations from the basic elements of the determinate mechanism of the cycle can produce a result which, to a considerable degree, describes and explains the cycle mechanism. The effect of the stochastic mechanism is comparable to that of the determinate mechanism of the cycle.

Fig. 7-1 The influence of random variables of national income fluctuations in the USA from 1921 to 1941 (thous. million dollars at 1934

prices).

I. Change of the consumption function (C) II. Change of the investment function (I)

III. Change of wage function (W)

IV. The summed effect of the stochastic mechanism (Y)

Broken lines show the actual absolute change in the respective variables; solid lines show the change in random deviations; the dotted curve shows the change in the national income resulting from the effect of the determinate mechanism and external influence?.

- -10

-10-

22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40

i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i > i i i

1921 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 1941.

310

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

31!

It is very important to note that this result is not achieved simply because there is a correlation between the respective variables and deviations. A simple sum of errors will not give such a result. The fact is that random deviations enter the model in a specific way, established by the finite difference equation for national income. This order of sequence is determined by the structure and the quantitative relationships of the determinate cycle mechanism.

When the organised addition of random quantities takes place in a specific way, processes resulting, from this are called, in science, stationary stochastic processes. They are widespread both in nature and society. Their joint effect in an economy is to produce cyclical or pseudo-cyclical fluctuations, which form part of the overall economic cycle.

The discovery of this result is due to the Soviet statistician and mathematician Ye. Slutsky. In 1927 the now famous article "The Addition of Random Causes as the Source of Cyclical Processes" was published.^^1^^ In this article Slutsky asks the question: what lies at the basis of cyclical waves in the economy---chance or strict laws? Answering this question, he showed how "laws arise from a series of chaotic random elements". Slutsky considered that he succeeded in illuminating by deduction only certain aspects of the question and that "the theory of random waves is almost all in the future''.

The difference between unconnected and connected ( stationary) random time series, describing the course of some process, lies in the fact that in the latter a correlating link, depending on the distance between the connected elements, can be noticed. Connected series are formed from disconnected by summing the latter; for example

their correlation decreases. With distances greater than n, the correlation becomes zero.

In experiments with random series, Slutsky showed that the result of such summation may be a tendency for the processes to change from spasmodic and chaotic into gradual and waveform. In the course of several waves, these series simulate, almost duplicate, harmonic series. The patterns of such fluctuations tend to change sharply and suddenly over time, turning into new pseudo-harmonic patterns.

Slutsky carried out his experiments on a series of random numbers taken from monev lottery tables. By summing series of such numbers, he found curves to a certain extent similar to those for actual price movements in England and also to certain other exponents of the economic cycle. He did not have such data as random deviations from econometric models, which only appeared later.

Slutskv also investigated the behaviour of random series from a theoretical point of view. For a periodic function such as a sinusoidal, the following dependence is characteristic:

A^^2^^jy,=---ay,+t,

(4.14)

where Azyf = (z/f+2 - yt+i)---(yM---yt].

In other words, the acceleration of the process is here inversely proportional to~its magnitude: the greater the latter, the lower the rate of growth. Giving relationship (4.14) the general form of a finite difference equation, we can write

i /

fy\

i

f\

f* M p\

Here, harmonic fluctuations are inevitable when

where xt is an unconnected random series of certain phenomena-causes, and yt is a connected series of phenomenaresults. The adjacent terms of the series xt are unconnected. Those of series yt have n---1 common causes and one unique cause. With an increase in the distance between the terms,

0<a<4.

(4.16)

A link, similar to that expressed in this equation, was found by Slutskv in all the stationary series he considered. A stationary series will more nearly approach the sinusoid, the closer t^e correlation between its adjacent terms.

At the end of the article, Slutsky looks at a auestion having particular significance for the theory of the cycle. Let us suppose, he says, that a certain mechanism is subject

^^1^^ Ye. Ye. Slutsky, Selected Works:' The Theory of Probability, Mathematical Statistics, Moscow, 1960, pp. 99-132 (in Russian).

312

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

313

to both periodic damped fluctuations and stochastic disturbances, which maintain sufficient energy to prevent it from dying down completely. This mechanism has two components. When the influence of the first of these dies down, the fluctuations are maintained by the second, i.e. by the accumulation of random causes.

Slutsky draws an analogy with planetary and star systems. Over millions of years, their trajectories are random functions; on the scale of thousands of years, they appear as non-random, determinate. With this transition from the non-random to the random and back, the article finishes.

By suggesting his hypothesis at the dawn of the development of the science of econometrics, Slutsky anticipated the most important trend of research into cyclical processes in an economy. As can be seen from the article, Slutsky did not contrast non-stochastic and stochastic cycle mechanisms, but considered them as components of one general mechanism inherent in the capitalist economy.

Current research supports Slutsky's hypothesis. We have already noted the importance of stochastic variables in the formation of cycles in the 1920s and 1930s. Below, additional data will be presented, making possible a comparison of this mechanism under pre- and postwar~conditions.

Recently, an interesting experiment was carried out'by Prof. Lawrence Klein and other econometricians. By introducing random numbers, with the same distribution as random deviations from individual equations, into quarterly models, they found that models with inherent damped fluctuations reproduced the cycle in the course of a long period (20 years), with a period close to the actual one.

The main significance of the stochastic cycle mechanism is not, however, that it creates fluctuations, but that it maintains the effect of the determinate mechanism, which i=! characterised by damped fluctuations.

The internal fluctuations considered above are not, by their nature, explosive. If the internal fluctuations of an economic cycle had even a mildly explosive coefficient, the capitalist economic system would have been completely wrecked several decades ago. As with any fluctuating mechanism, an economy which is led out of an equilibrium

situation tries to find a new equilibrium by the temporary solution of its opposing directions of movement. However, again and again it is led out of equilibrium by the chaotic, unplanned market mechanism. Proportionality in these conditions is only found through destructive cyclical movement.

Random deviations in each successive period contribute to the formation of new initial conditions, a new non-- equilibrium position and new equilibrium conditions. If there were no such random stimuli, the capitalist cycle might die down.

Let us return to the general formula for movement of the model, which now also includes a stochastic element:

Yt = Atf + A*m cos (8* - e) + Yt (G) + Yt (e). (4.17)

This movement may be interpreted in two ways. If ^ < 1 and m < 1, then, after a certain time, the first two terms of the right side become extremely small and cease to contribute to the formation of the path of movement, which represents only the sum of random (apparently waveform) fluctuations around the equilibrium path, as set by the external conditions.

However, the initial conditions were chosen at an arbitrary point in time. Consequently, they can be defined as the result of previous movement. Thus, we get a picture of determined movement, being constantly restored to life by random stimuli and constantly supplemented by them.

The fact that random fluctuations show a tendency to turn into harmonic fluctuations contains a certain danger. If the frequency and phase of the random fluctuations coincides with that of the internal fluctuations, the effect of resonance may strike the system and fluctuations become temporarily explosive.

7.1.e. Comments on Other Authors' Models

Mathematical models explaining the nature and mechanism of ""economic cycles first appeared in the 1930s. The Dutch economist Jan Tinbergen (now holder of the Nobel Prize for Economics) and the Polish economist M. Kalecki mustTbe singled out from among the early authors of such models.

314

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OP ECONOMIC CYCLES

315

The theoretical models proposed by Tinbergen were distinguished by their simplicity and only indicated the direction in which later more fundamental research was undertaken. Tinbergen's main contribution was to construct cycle models for the USA (for the period 1919-1932) and for Britain (for the period up to the First World War) on the basis of actual statistical material. This empirical research and the resulting theoretical conclusions were attacked by J. M. Keynes, who denied the possibility of using mathematical methods for cycle analysis.

The early works of Kalecki (1935) were not widely recognised, although they anticipated the development of theoretical cycle models in .the next 10 to 15 years. Kalecki's works distinguish him from other economists of the day by his consideration of class divisions within capitalist society and the corresponding distribution of the national income between wages and profits. In his works in the late 1960s, Kalecki explains the laws governing present-day cycles and growth on the basis of Marx's schema of reproduction.^^1^^

Let us look at Kalecki's cycle model as it was set out in one of his relatively late works Theory of Economic Dynamics.^^2^^ In this book, his model includes, along with a series of other equations, the following formulation for investment:

/f = a/t_, + 6APf,

(5.1)

i.e. investment is defined as a function of its own lagged values and the current increase inp rofits.

By reduction of his model, Kalecki gets a homogeneous difference-differential equation

a

dlt-<s>

it+e= A,, tt + u.---------,

(5.2)

1---j---(j

Hit

where it is the deviation of /; from the equilibrium path, 9 and co are the corresponding lag values, and a, c and u. are the coefficients of the equations of the model or combinations of them.

Kalecki shows that more often than not, the condition a/(l + c) < 1 is observed, i.e. savings are not fully invested. As a result of this, regular fluctuations arise within the system and their character is determined by the coefficient u..

Considering real values of the coefficients taken from statistics, he comes to the conclusion that actual fluctuations are, by nature, damped and are maintained by stochastic disturbances. A special chapter of his book is devoted to studying the effect of such disturbances. In this, results of statistical calculations are presented which provide empirical confirmation of Slutsky's hypothesis.

Kalecki's model is similar to those set out above in this chapter. The difference lies in the fact that he assumes the ratio P/Y as constant throughout, i.e. excludes from the cycle mechanism that important part of it related to the effect of the struggle over national income distribution and its results.

The breakdown of Y into W and P and a direct study of the effect of the fluctuating relationship between them was carried out by the American economist and econometrician L. Klein in one of his early works. Klein wrote that this assumption can also be justified from a Marxist standpoint. Later on, however, in contrast to Kalecki, Klein moved on from a Marxist to a Keynesian position.

Although Kalecki's work obviously came first, most Western economists attribute the first theoretical cycle model to the well-known American economist P. Samuelson (1939) with its consequent modifications by the English economist J. Hicks (Samuelson and Hicks are now holders of the~Nobel Prize for Economics). The Samuelson-Hicks model is based on a combination of the idea of the multiplier, which appeared in the 1930s, with the older idea of the accelerator (see sections 7.4 and 7.7 below). This model is described by the equations

Yt = Ct + It + At,

(5.3)

Ct^cFt-i + CiYt^

(5.4)

f.---v (Yt __Yt )

(5 5)

~^^1^^ M. Kalecki, "The Marxian Equations of Reproduction and Modern Economics", Social Science Information, 7 (6), pp. 73-79.

~^^2^^ M. Kalecki, Theory of Economic Dynamics, New York-London, 1965.

316

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

317

where A is autonomous expenditure. In this model, the equilibrium path is determined by changes in At. Divergence from equilibrium is described by the homogeneous difference equation

explosive growth in the model under consideration. As a result of this, after a certain time, it reaches a ``ceiling'', i.e. the limit of the given production possibilities. For some time after this, the rate of growth depends entirely on the increase in productive capacity (and until this time, also on the level of capacity utilisation).

As a result of this, growth rates fall. Investment begins to drop and, in its wake, the total social product. With a fall in the scale of production, the explosive accelerator pushes the volume of output right down. Surplus capacity appears, the need for investment for growth disappears and the accelerator "switches off". Output falls to its lower limit---the ``floor'', at which point gross investment is so small that fixed capital begins to be eroded. The decrease in fixed capital reaches a stage when the accelerator switches on again and output begins to grow once more.

Attempts to improve the Samuelson-Hicks model made it too cumbersome, as cycle regulation involved too many different switchings on and off.

Once it was shown empirically that the interpretation of v was incorrect and that the actual value of the "naive accelerator" is well below 1, the reverse difficulty arose---to explain how fluctuations remain in reality when they disappear in the model. The only explanation for a long time remained fluctuations introduced from outside by autonomous expenditure, i.e. by ``imperfect'' government policy. The idea of an organic} combination of determinate and stochastic movements for a long time did not receive recognition in Western literature, in spite of Slutsky, Tinbergen and Kalecki.

where

C = Ci -f C2, W = V---C2.

Fluctuations set in under the conditions

where s = 1---c.

This model is quite simple. Within the limits of real values for the structural coefficients, it does, as a rule, generate a cycle.

An obvious shortcoming of the model is that it ignores the effect of class struggle and distribution of the national income. Within the framework of the model, investment is determined by capital intensity and not by profits. This simplification impairs the model.

Further research by Western economists showed that the idea of the naive accelerator (v) set out in the SamuelsonHicks model does not stand up to empirical examination.

The application of the "naive accelerator" gave birth to a series of erroneous conclusions. From capital intensity statistics it was known that v (and even w = v---c2) > 1. The value v determines the character of fluctuations in the Samuelson-Hicks model. If w > 1, then fluctuations will be explosive.

A model that gives birth to internal explosive fluctuations is not sufficiently realistic, which is the reason for further work by Hicks and other economists to improve it. This took the direction of attempts to find non-linear accelerators (A. W. Phillips and others) and ``ratchet'' accelerators, which behave differently according to how the economy functions (J. Duesenberry).

Hicks himself introduced the idea oFboundaries (``ceiling'' and ``floor'') as'follows. Certain initial disturbances produce

T.l.f. The Behaviour of Cycle Models with the Example of the USA

The analysis carried out in this section is based on data from calculations on two simple models of the American economy. One of these relates to the period 1921-1941 and was constructed by L. Klein.x It has the following struc-

~^^1^^ L. R. Klein, Economic Fluctuations in the US 1921-1941, New York-London, 1950, p. 75.

318

S. MENSHIKOY

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

ture:

by a special equation. In order to simplify the analysis, we shall assume this variable to be external.

Apart from this, in both models there is an external time variable (t), which shows the behaviour of trend factors, i.e. those which grow uniformly over time. The external variable G is the sum of government purchases and the net foreign trade balance.

Our task is to show how the basic elements of the cycle mechanism changed from year to year and to compare the character of these changes in the inter- and postwar periods. Let us use the most obvious breakdown of these elements; we shall use the equations of the partial reduction where the determinate cycle does not ``dissolve'' in cumulative stochastic deviations.

In order to ensure the comparability of the two periods, we shall take, for the postwar^ period, the annual values of the indicators. The changes in the components of the cycle analysed below^represent the difference in annual values. To be complete, we extrapolated the postwar model, taking, from both ends of the statistical base period, years which are not included: 1946-52 and 1968-70. This resulted in an increase, for these periods, in the values of the stochastic elements. These conditions will be kept in mind during the following analysis.

The partial reduction gave the following equations, describingj movements in the elements of the cycle from period to period:

Interwar Years:

6't = 16.43 + 0.25/>4 + 0.8 (Vt'

e(/)i, (6.2) ---Wa)t-i +

+ 0.13 (*- 1931)

(6.3)

(6.4)

y, = -P« + WM + JVM>

(6.5)

Kt = Kt-i + rt.

'

(6.6)

The model moves at yearly intervals.

The second model, based on quarterly statistics, was constructed by Y. A. Chizhov^^1^^ for the period 1953-67. It includes the following equations:

Ct = 37.94 + 0.404C«_i + 0.325Ft + 0.687* + z (C)t, (6.7) It = - 8.63 + 0.335/i_i + 0.616P, - O.OSltf ,_! + e (/)«, (6.8)

0.703^,-! + 0.056* + e(VF)(,

(6.9)

(6.10)

(6.11) (6.12)

On the whole, the same notation is used as before. In the prewar model, the wage fund is divided into two parts. Wi stands for the wages of employees in private enterprises, Wz for the salaries of government employees. The first part (WJ is endogenously determined, while the second (WJ) is introduced from outside. In the second model, no such distinction is made.

The variable T represents the sum of indirect taxes and statistical discrepancy. In American statistics, national income and net national product differ by this amount. In calculations on the second model, T is endogenous and defined

AF = 0.07AT (W) + AZ^^1^^ (/) + 0.07Ae (W) + e (/) +

(6.13)

Postwar Years:

= AT (/) + Af (C) - 0.616A7^^1^^ (W) + e (/) + e (C) -

---0.616Ae(W)---AT + AG.

(6.14)

In the prewar model, the consumption function has no lagged elements. Their presence in the postwar model exerts a stabilising influence on the cycle, but, in return, the negative effect of the lagged elements of the wage function is greater in this model. Since this difference is caused by

~^^1^^ Problems of the Construction and Application of Macroeconomic Models. Models of the US Economy, Novosibirsk, 1971, p. 200 (in Russian).

390-2.jpg

7-2-1

, 1948,1950,1952,1954,1956,1958,1960,1962,1964,1966,1968,1970. 1947' 1949' 1951' 1953' 1955' 1957' 1959' 1961' 1963' 1965' 1967' 1969' 1971

7-2-2

7-2-3

390-3.jpg

xA /v

7-2-4

\s

7-2-5

390-4.jpg

7-2-6

7-2-7

/\,

sy

-Ay

7-2-8

AT(C)

390-5.jpg

,-^-^vf AT(c)-0,616AT(w)

AT(I)

,1923,1925 ,1927,1929,1931 ,1933,1935,1937,1939,1941, 1922 ' 1924'1926' 1928'1930'1932'1934' 1936'1938'1940'1942

Fig. 7-2-A. The change in the lagged and determinate components

of the cycle model for the USA between 1921 and 1941 (as a % of the

national income of the previous period)

Fig. 7-2-B. The change in the lagged and determinate components

of the cycle model for the USA between 1947 and 1970 (as a % of

the national income of the previous period)

21-0593

TI22

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OP ECONOMIC CYCLES

323

the special features of the structure of the models, from now on we shall take into joint consideration elements of the cycle having an effect on consumption.

To make the comparison of different periods justifiable, we shall compare changes in equilibrium not in absolute terms but as a percentage of the national income of the previous period. The results of these calculations are presented in Fig. 7-2.

Diagram 7-2-1 shows the annual change in equilibrium resulting only from the determinate cycle mechanism. If the years 1930-34 are excluded, then the movements in both periods take approximately the same course.

The most interesting case is when the sum of all changes brought about by the determinate cycle has a negative value. It is this kind of movement which causes a fall in national income, i.e. transition to crisis. It turns out that during the 1920s, and in any case beginning in 1924, this indicator was either close to zero or negative. So, in spite of the relatively small fluctuations of the curve in this period, the economy was constantly on the brink of crisis. The crisis was prevented from setting in by factors unrelated to the determinate cycle.

In the postwar period, the curve of the determinate cycle, while fluctuating not less than during much of the prewar period, was situated, as a rule, above the zero axis and only occasionally dropped below it. In all cases ( excluding the special conditions of 1952) these negative movements differed little in size from those in 1924, 1927 and 1938. Even in 1930, the first year of serious crisis, the downward movement brought about by the determinate cycle was not large.

Turning to Diagram 7-2-8 we can find the reason for these similarities and differences in the behaviour of the determinate cycle. This curve is the sum of those for investment and private consumption. Considering only shifts brought about by the lagged parts of the investment function, as a rule, in both pre- and postwar periods, they turn out to be below the zero axis. In other words, the effect of overaccumulation of capital is just as clear in the second period as in the first. In the 1949 and 1958 crises, it was greater than in any of the prewar crises, with the exception of 1931-33.

However, in the prewar period, the effect of overaccumulation of capital was not counteracted by opposing factors. The influence of the private consumption mechanism [+0.07 A7T (W)] was not great. In the postwar years, in spite of the increasing negative effect of lagged production [---0.616 AJ (W)], a powerful controlling influence appeared in the form of lagged, autonomous consumption: [+0.404 ACV_! + 0.687]. In this period the combined effect of the investment and private consumption mechanisms kept the summed curve of the determinate cycle, as a rule, above zero.

We carried out the following experiment. The equations of the postwar model were applied for analysis of the prewar situation. Their structural constants were changed but the coefficients of the variables were not. The time trend was extracted from the consumption function. With these changes and postwar coefficients of the equations (!), the model reproduced the 1929-1933 crisis well. However, it was sufficient to introduce the time trend of private consumption for the crisis to become noticeably less severe.

The growth trend of consumption in the postwar period apparently reflects a significant increase in the relative importance of the non-production sphere and of the social security. Consumption today depends not only on current and past wages of production workers, but also on the more stable movement of incomes in the non-production sphere and on the growth of pension and allowance payments. This changed significantly the results of the functioning of the determinate cycle, the other elements of which underwent smaller changes.

The countercyclical effect of the postwar consumption mechanism becomes considerably weaker at times, as a result of factors which are not given separate consideration in the model. Thus, there were two cases when the overall movement of the consumption mechanism was zero or even negative (see Diagram 7-2-8). Both fell in periods of sharply increasing inflation.

The fact is, that in the models under consideration, price movements are not taken into account in a clear way. However, they exert an indirect influence through the physical volumes of the variables present in the model. In

21*

324

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

325

a severely inflationary situation, the normal relationships between the elements of reproduction are upset. In particular, in both of the cases mentioned (the periods of the Korean and Vietnamese wars), price increases nullified a growth in real incomes and real consumption. The countercyclical influence of the consumption mechanism was "turned off", the investment mechanism came into its own and turned the overall movement of the cycle towards crisis.

Diagram 7-2-2 illustrates the curve of movements brought about by the stochastic elements of the model. Excluding the special period of the Korean war, in the postwar years, this curve is distinguished by its stability from the interwar period, when its jumps were'significant. The standard error of the consumption function in the prewar model, taken in relation to the national income, is four times greater than in the postwar model; that of the investment function, three times greater, and that of the wage function, five and a half times.

The large deviations of the interwar equations are not a feature inherent only in the given model but are also characteristic of other models. This general phenomenon cannot be completely explained away by the imperfect statistics and methods employed for evaluating the coefficients of the equations. To a significant extent, the cause is intensive fluctuations of economic processes not considered in the given model.

Here we are talking mainly about fluctuations of prices and exchange rates and the panic reaction of the credit and money world to overproduction crises. Deviations (on the positive side) of purchases by capitalist firms and consumers from the average statistical pattern inherent in the conditions of the time were relatively large, particularly in the period of expansion in the 1920s. Excessive accumulation, in spite of signals of overaccumulation, and swelled credit arrangements which had given rise to overconsumption (too many hire-purchase sales), made overaccumulation possible. Throughout most of the 1920s, the advance in the country continued, although the determinate cycle mechanism was consistently inclined towards crisis. In the 1930s, downward deviations compensated for these upward ones.

In contrast, the "cycle periphery" (the worlds of distribution, credit, the stock market, etc.) behaved in a comparatively stable manner in the postwar years. The curve of the stochastic cycle mechanism on the whole followed the same pattern and to some extent intensified the movement of the determinate cycle but could not force the latter to move likewise.

This is evident from Diagram 7-2-3, which shows the combined movement of the determinate and stochastic cycles. In the postwar years, the curve of the latter has effectively duplicated the behaviour of the determinate cycle curve. Between the wars, sometimes the determinate cycle commanded the overall behaviour of the curve, sometimes stochastic fluctuations predominated.

This is evidence of the significance for postwar cycles of changes in the realms of circulation, prices, credit and monetary circulation, resulting from increased monopolisation and growth of the economic role of state.

Fluctuations of stochastic elements depend, of course, to a certain degree, on the inaccuracy of statistics---an important factor in the interwar period. Diagram 7-2-4 gives movements in the path of the variable T. Since the main component of this variable---indirect taxes---grows fairly regularly, fluctuations in T are apparently brought about by changes in the magnitude of statistical discrepancy from year to year. This did not play a serious role after the war, but was quite significant in the prewar years.

In the overwhelming majority of cases, these changes took place in the opposite direction from changes in the stochastic elements and had a noticeable stabilising effect on fluctuations of the latter. However, on three occasions, the direction of these changes coincided. All three were crisis years---1927, 1930 and 1938.

Since an increase in statistical error signifies an inexplicable increase in the difference between the level of output and the sum total of incomes, in these occasions an unexpected and inexplicable fall or decrease in the growth of incomes took place. It is hardly coincidental that this phenomenon took place in crisis years. We are inclined towards the explanation of insufficient consideration of actual price falls in these periods.

326

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

327

Diagram 7-2-5 shows the overall movement of the determinate and stochastic cycles, taking statistical discrepancy into account. The movement of the economy is presented, as it would be if there were no changes in government purchases and the balance of foreign operations. Since, in the postwar years, the role of the government in the economy has grown, analysis of this curve is of particular interest.

The movement of the economy in this case bears witness in particular to the fact that the potentially most serious postwar crises were in 1949 and 1967. Equilibrium at the end of 1948 was disturbed only somewhat less than by 1930. The disequilibrium in 1967 took second place only to the interwar cyclical crises and was noticeably more acute than the prewar intermediate crises. The crisis of 1957-58 is seen as being potentially less acute; in this period, however, a negative deviation is observed in two consecutive years---the only case in the postwar period. The internal disequilibria in 1954 and 1970, on the contrary, turn out to be insignificant. For the prewar period, the 1937-38 crisis is confirmed as having a large potential. The shape of the path shown in Diagram 7-2-5 provides additional foundation for distinguishing between cyclical and intermediate crises.

Diagram 7-2-6 depicts change in the main control variable. In the prewar years, such changes were not, as a rule, the result of discretionary countercyclical behaviour. However, if we compare the change in G in this period with the course of the internal cycle, it is clear that these curves were invariably out of phase. Fluctuations of the control variable were comparatively small and could not exert any significant effect on the course of the cycle.

The late 1930s were an exception. The growth of government purchases in this period had a significant countercrisis effect on the disequilibrium at the root of the 1937-38 crisis. This result is obvious when comparing diagrams 7-2-5, 7-2-6 and 7-2-7.x

The amplitude of fluctuations of the control variable in the postwar years exceeded the 1920s and 1930s level only at the time of the Korean war. Although, after the

Second World War, a systematic application of countercyclical control methods began, the effect of changes in government purchases was far from always countercyclical. Thus, the cut-back on purchases in 1954 and 1970 encouraged the development of economic crises. On other occasions, a growth of government purchases hindered considerably the development of imminent crises. This was the case both in 1949 and 1967. At the time of the 1957-58 crisis, this factor was of little importance.

If we now compare diagrams 7-2-7 and 7-2-1, we find that the overall trend of changes of the national income, both up to the war and in postwar years, was mainly determined by the course of the determinate cycle. However, the combined effect of other factors is an upward displacement of this basic curve above the zero axis. This was also true in the earlier period, but this effect proved to be particularly strong in the postwar years. The determinate cycle still continues to determine the direction and to a significant extent the scale of displacements, but on a level at which the changes in equilibrium are rarely negative.

The reasons for the changes in the character of cyclical movement over the last decades, coming out of analysis of the model, are as follows:

1) The countercyclical effect of government consumption.

2) The increase in the role of autonomous private consumption, independent of the incomes of workers in the production, industries.

3) A decrease in the scale of fluctuations brought about by disequilibrium in the sphere of circulation.

7.1.g. Two-Sector and Multi-Branch Models

Up to now we have been dealing exclusively with oneproduct cycle models, ignoring totally all mutual dependence between branches, particularly problems of the sale of means of production in the sector producing consumer goods. At the same time, as will become clear later, the principles for the construction of a one-product model can also be applied, in full, to models containing a sectoral breakdown.

~^^1^^ A growth of government purchases was also observed in 1930-31, but on a scale which deviated far less from equilibrium.

328

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

329

labour (cu and c12) and on wear on fixed capital, or depreciation (c21 and c22). The total output of the branch is given by Xj and X2.

The movement of output in physical units is shown by lines 1 and 2. Apart from sales of objects of labour in the course of intersectoral flows, output is sold for private consumption (S), goes for gross capital investment (/) and is supplied to the government (G). £ stands for the external trade balance. Capital investment consists of and /2, i.e. investment carried out in each subsector. Government purchases include output from both subsectors (G1 and G2). Each sector has an external trade balance (El and E2). F! and F2 stand for the final use of the output of the sectors (F=S + I-\-G-{- + E).

The main condition for the sale of the social product under extended reproduction was considered by Marx to be the following relationship:

y _L m ~> c

(7-1)

Using Table 7-3, we can write this in the form of an equality

vi + mi = c2 + NI + E1 + G1,

(7.2)

where c2 = c12 + c22;

Let us consider, for a start, a two-sector model, in which the first subsector of social production produces exclusively means of production and the second, consumer goods. The value structure of output of both sectors is given in Marx's schema for reproduction. Analysis is carried out by Marx and Lenin in two aspects: by value and by use value (i.e., in physical units).

For analysis, we shall use a two-dimensional matrix, which allows us to look at product flows in physical units and, at the same time, a breakdown of production by value. In other words, we apply a schema of intersectoral ( inputoutput) balances.

Gradual wear on fixed capital, the external market and deliveries of output to the government can also be introduced into such a model.

Table 7-3

E

X

C)2

x,

C21

C22

``2

In other words, the net product (national income) created in the first subsector must be sufficient to ensure replacement of worn means of production in the second and accumulation (net capital investment) in both. It must also cover purchases of means of production by the government and surplus means of production sold abroad, minus imports of the same.

Let us express this in another way. Demand for the output of the first subsector is determined by the sum of demand for means of production used up in both sectors, demand for net growth of capital in both sectors, government demand for means of production and foreign demand for means of production minus domestic demand for foreign means of production. This formulation of the main condition for sales is used directly in models of the cycle.

The breakdown of output of each branch (subsector) according to value is presented in the table in columns 1 and 2. The usual Marxian notation for constant capital (c), variable capital (v) and surplus value (m) are used. Constant capital used in sectors I and II is divided into outlays on objects of

330

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

331

Let us substitute the symbols in Table 7-3, using, first, the usual notation for the elements of intersectoral balance and, secondly, the notation used previously in the one-sector models. Let D stand for depreciation and V for value added. Let us also fill in the zero elements of the table, setting the coefficients of direct costs a21 and «22 equal to zero. Capital investment from the output of the second sector can either be taken as zero or considered as the increase in inventories of consumer goods.

Table 7-4

shall consider demand for gross investment to be formed in the same way as that for net investment. As before, we shall assume government demand and the foreign trade balance to be exogenous quantities. Then we get the following two-sector cycle model:

flii*i, i + 012*2, i + In. i + 1 n, t + £1, t + Gi,t = Xi,t, (7-3) Cz, t + ^2, t + G2> t = X2< t,

(7.4)

C^t^aiWt + atWt.i + aaPt,

(7.5)

Wt = Wiit + WSil,

(7.6)

Pt = Pi,t + P,,t,

(7.7)

1

E

G

X

hi. t = &i/>i, t + b*Pi, /-i +

i, t-i,

(7.8)

> (_!,

(7.9)

la, t =

, t

``22^2

• 21

+^22

,

(7.10)

«,

(7.11)

(7.12) (7.13)

j

(7.14)

.

(7.15)

If, instead of two sectors, a more general situation, with any number of sectors, were considered, then the following multi-sector cycle model would emerge:

D

In lines 1 and 2 of Table 7-4 is shown the full demand for the output of each subsector. A significant part of this demand (the intersectoral demand for means of production) is directly determined by the coefficients of direct costs and is proportional to the output of both sectors. The other part of demand requires further definition. Let us apply the same considerations in the formation of demand for private consumption goods and for capital investment goods as in the construction of the one-product model. For simplicity, we

Ct=ciC, = f(W,P),

= X,,

(7.16)

(7.17) (7.18) (7.19) (7-20) (7.21) (7.22) (7.23) (7.24)

(7.25)

6;)

332

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OP ECONOMIC CYCLES

333

The dynamic properties of inter-sectoral models can rarely be analysed by reduction of the original system of equations to the reduced equation. Even in the simplest case, when, in a two-sector model, only total investment and not a sectoral breakdown of investment is considered, full reduction results in a fifth order finite difference equation. With a large number of sectors and sectoral breakdown of investment, full reduction becomes too complex.

Let us turn to the following method. The initial system of equations is reduced to a vector equation, -in which each variable of the current period is a function of its own values and the values of the other variables of the model in the previous period. In order to get rid of lags of a higher order, additional variables are introduced. The resulting homogeneous vector equation has the following form:

were removed) system of initial equations was transformed into a vector equation with 29 variables. Among the 29 roots of the characteristic equation, there was one real root with a positive value and several pairs of complex conjugate roots. The internal movement of the model was characterised by a combination of a monotonic growth path, at a rate of 1.0084 a quarter, and of five different sets of fluctuations, with cycle durations of 4.7; 6.6; 9.9; 18 and 61.5 units of time.

The advantage of a multi-sectoral model of the cycle is that, thanks to its large size, it includes a broad spectrum of the different and often opposing trends in a capitalist economy.

7.2. THE EFFECT OF THE STATE MARKET

The simplest way of studying the effect of the government on an economy in models of the cycle is to set government expenditure of various types as exogenous variables or as simple functions of time, i.e. as quantities in principle independent of the internal functioning of the cycle mechanism. Such a simplified approach is a necessary first step in looking at the given problem. In more complex models, attempts are made to take account of the dependence of the movement of government expenditure on the dynamics of the economy in general.

In the cycle models reviewed above, government purchases (G) figured as exogenous quantities. Along with other components, they were a term in the basic equality for the gross national product. On reducing the one-product model No. 1, the finite difference equation giving the solution to the system relative to the final product variable (Y) contains on its right-hand side the variable Gt with the coefficient l/a0. This coefficient shows by how many units Y changes if G increases by one unit. Since, in real life, 0 < a0 < < 1, the coefficient l/a0 >> 1. This means that an increase of government purchases by one unit leads to a larger increase in final demand. If, in this case, the economy does not exceed the limits of its own productive capacity, then, corresponding to the growth of final demand, the social product may also grow. Here, we are talking about the

1> t = mai t_i -- m)2A2i t-1 -

• • • + mlnXni t-i + mi, n+jZi, t-i+ • • • + mi, n+h^h, t-i, (7-26) XZi t = M2iXit t-i -f- mzzX2 ;_!+...+ m2nXn: t-i -f-

+ m,2, n+iZi, t-i+ • • •+ m2i n+h'Zk, t-i,

(7.27)

i t = mn+i, 1X1 t_i -j- mn+i 2X2_ t-i

t-t, (7.28)

, t =

, 1X1, t-1

+hZfc,/-!,

(7.29)

Tftn+fc, 2X2, t-1 4- • • • + fftn+fe, n-X'n, <-l + l, (-1 + . . • + Wn+ft: n+kZk, t-1 •

(7.30)

For each first order vector equation, there is a corresponding characteristic equation, the order of which is equal to the number of variables in the vector equation. For this model, the order of the corresponding characteristic equation is equal to n + k, i.e. it has the form:

*•"** + Chft~J + • • • + 9W-ik + 9n+u - 0. (7.31) Calculations on a high power characteristic polynomial

and the search for its roots is carried out by computer. For analysis of the dynamic properties of the intersectoral

model of the USA, a somewhat simplified (non-linearities

334

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

335

multiplication process considered in previous chapters and the coefficient l/a0 represents the multiplier.

The multiplier reflects actual interconnections existing within the economy. For example, let us look at the simple model:

Yt = Ct + Gt,

(8.1)

Ct = cYt,

(8.2)

Yt<YmtiI,

(8.3)

where Y is the net national product;

ymax is the potentially possible scale of production; C is private consumption and accumulation; G is government purchases;

c is the coefficient for the dependence of private consumption and accumulation on the national income (0 < c < 1).

Let us assume that, at the moment in time t, both equalities are fulfilled and the model is in equilibrium. Then let us assume that a growth of government purchases takes place, as a result of which G1 = G0 -f AG where AG > 0. Then the following chain reaction may occur.

The direct result of the growth in G is an increase in the social product by the same amount.

social product is required:

4) C2 = c [c (C0 -i- G£) -H G,] = c^^2^^C0 + 5) y3 = C^^2^^6'0 + c^^2^^G1 + c

+ cGt,

6) yn+1 = cBCo + Ci(cn+C"+1+...-M).

The coefficient for G is a diminishing geometric progression (with c < 1). Consequently, this coefficient is equal to

1---c"

where n is the number of consecutive approximations to the full effect of the growth of government purchases. As n increases (with re---> -(- oo)

Thus, the initial relationship can be written in the following

way:

8) Fn = ^,

where

1 ^TTF-

Since 0<c<l, n>l.

Further transforming expression 8), we get 9) Yn=\iG0

However, the matter does not stop here. The increased output can only be produced by using larger quantities of labour and capital. Consequently, both investment and private consumption (as a result of a growth of the wage fund) grow.

2) C4 =<:(£„+£,).

The secondary effect of the growth of government demand turns out to be

3) y^ctCo + GO-fG,.

It is obvious that Y2 > Yt. Consequently, a further mutual adjustment of private consumption, investment and the

where fx is the multiplier.

We can also get this result by transforming the initial system into the reduced equation:

10) Yt=^-c

and differentiating it:

... dYt 1 11) -^r- = -. - = u. ' dGt i---c r

The type of multiplier we are looking at is called an impulse multiplier, i.e. it shows the full effect of an increase

336

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OP ECONOMIC CYCLES

337

in government purchases on the increase in output for the same time. However, in real life, as a consequence of the existence in an economy of lagged effects, the full effect of a change in government demand is not felt immediately. Thus, in the model

•\r n i n

/« /. \

yi = L/i-(-G(,

(°-4)

Ct = cYi_l

(8.5)

in the first time period, the growth of G leads only to an initial growth of Y by AG. In the second period, the secondary effect (see formula 3 above) is also in evidence and so on. In the final analysis, the full effect is again measured by the same diminishing geometric progression, i.e.

AY*

1

Let us look, for example, at the effect of transfer payments. The model now looks like this:

Yt = Ct+Gt,

(8.10)

Ct = cYt+bTRt,

(8.11)

where TRt are transfer payments;

b is the coefficient for the dependence of consumption and accumulation on transfer payments (0<6-^1).

Then the reduced equation looks like this:

* \

/

* I

f

\ " /

and the multiplier of transfer payments is equal to:

AY

b

(8.13)

&TR i---c'

i---c '

where: AY* is the full effect of the initial change in G. In the case of distributed lags, i.e. in models of the form

Since 0 < b ^ 1, as a rule, the influence of transfer payments on the change in output is weaker than that of government purchases of goods and services.

In the official statistics of capitalist countries, government purchases, as a rule, include the salaries of government employees. In this case, a growth of government expenditure on salaries creates an initial demand for the labour of employees, but not for normal goods and services and, consequently, is reflected directly in the total social income, i.e. its effect is analogous to that of an increase in transfer payments to the population.

For an increase in government expenditure, an increase in tax revenue is required. It is sometimes suggested that, if these changes are mutually compensatory, the overall effect on the size of demand (the market) will be zero. Such suggestions can be dispelled by considering the model:

= Ct+Gt,

(8.6) (8.7)

(8.8)

Ct =

this particular full effect is again equal to: AY* _

1

1

where c---

c2 -j- . . •

The full effect, if it stretches over time, is called the dynamic multiplier: it is obvious that the dynamic multiplier in the given case is greater than the impulse multiplier, which is

4^ = 7-^-

(8-9)

, = Ct+Gt, c(Yt-Tt),

(8.14) (8.15)

What has been said refers only to government purchases of goods and services produced by private enterprises. The effect of other forms of government expenditure, for example, salaries paid to government employees or transfer payments by the government to people, works differently.

where T stands for taxes. In the second equation, the sum of consumption and accumulation depends on the sum of incomes after taxes have been deducted. The reduced equation is

Yt(l-c) = Gt---cTt.

(8.16)

22-0593

338

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

Consequently, the multiplier of taxes is negative:

AY---c

(8.17)

The multiplier of government purchases is now smaller. The second expression shows the negative effect of the increase in the sum of tax revenues resulting from a growth of the tax rate.

In the works of some authors,^^1^^ the combined effect of a growth in purchases and taxes is measured in similar models by the sum of the two multipliers represented:

AT^^1^^

l---c

For absolute values the tax multiplier is smaller than the government purchases multiplier.

If we set the strict condition Gt = Tt, i.e. government expenditure is always equal to incomes and a change in the former can only be by the same amount as a change in the latter, then the reduced equation takes the- following form:

Ay

AG

Ay

l---c 1---C + CT '

(8.24)

The resulting expression is somewhat less than unity.

However, in the case in question, adding the two multipliers may not be justified. If we assume that the growth in government purchases is fully compensated for by an equal growth in tax revenues, then the condition

i.e.

AY AG

---1 •

(8.18)

The "Balanced Budget ``Theorem'' says that, with equal growth of government purchases and taxes, the social product increases only by the same amount as the growth in purchases. The reason for the decrease in the multiplier to unity is, of course, that the growth of taxes absorbs the potential growth of consumption and accumulation. However, in this case, too, the overall effect is an increase in demand.

However, the model we have been looking at is not sufficiently realistic. In reality, taxes, in any case direct income taxes, grow automatically with an increase in incomes. Let us look at the following model:

Yt = Ct + Gt,

(8.19)

Ct = e(Yt-Tt),

(8.20)

Tt = iYt,

(8.21)

where T is the income tax rate. Then

is excessive.

As a consequence of the growth of G, both Y and then rF increase. It can be shown that A (rY) is always less than AG with a constant T.^^2^^ In other words, with unchanging tax rates, a growth in government purchases cannot, in general, be compensated for by an automatic growth of tax revenues. Consequently, for a balanced budget, the following condition must be observed:

AG = T4Y t - T0 YO = T0AY

(8.25)

where TO is the initial tax rate; T4 its new rate. It is not difficult to confirm that

if Y > Y0, that is AY > 0, and it is this particular case that we are considering. In other words, for a balanced budget, tax rates must grow less than envisaged in formula (8.24).

~^^1^^ See, for example, M. Evans, Macroeconomic Activity, NewYorkEvanson-London, 1969, pp. 544-45.

In this new model, the multipliers change in the following way:

A -\r

A

~^^2^^ In fact, Ay = --------;---; TAy = -

1---C + CT

. Now let us assume

AG Ay

1---

(8.22)

1---C + CT' that AG = TAy = , TAG---. Then

T

= Land with 0< c< 1,

-.-----

---c

(8.23)

1---C + CT

1---C + CT

T = 1, which is not possible, since the tax rate T < 1.

1---C + CT

22*

340

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

341

If AG >> 0, then, with old tax rates maintained, an automatic growth of tax revenues takes place:

where Y is final demand;

G is government expenditure;

E is exports;

t is the time trend.

Such an equation can describe the dynamic properties of any economy (we are abstracting from all stochastic factors). The long-term rate of growth of such an economy can be broken down into the following factors:

a) growth of government expenditure;

b) growth of the external market;

c) trend factors (such as, for example, the role of technical progress and the influence of structural changes);

d) internal growth factors, i.e. the structure of the model within the given period, describing the relationship between the dependent (endogenous) variables. The internal rate of growth in the given economy is determined by the real positive root of the characteristic equation, the magnitude of which exceeds unity.

This breakdown of the growth of demand by factors was carried out on the basis of large-scale intersectoral dynamic models of the economies of capitalist countries. For the USA, the results of the calculations show that between 1948 and 1969, the average rate of development of the economy was determined by the following factors:^^1^^ the average annual rate of growth of the gross national product of the USA was +3.7%. This figure includes +1.25% growth of the government market, +0.40% of exports, +0.30% of trend factors and +1.75% of the internal structure of the economy. Consequently, the growth of the US economy was only onethird determined by the growth of the state market. In contrast to growth of the state market, an increase in the social product, called forth by internal economic factors, trends and the foreign market, does not have to be paid for by increased tax revenues.

The growth of the social product which does not depend on the government market leads, however, to an ``automatic'' increase in tax revenues, which can pay for the increase in government expenditure. Let us assume that the growth

,

1---C + CT

(8.26)

v '

With a unit increase in G, the increase in tax rates need only be sufficient to cover the deficit

1---C + CT

The decrease in Y brought about by the -increase in tax rates is only

AY 1-

1---C+CT

---VA--------------------------3-------:-------------. (8.27)

YAT

1---C+CT

V

'

Summing the value of the multiplier G and expression (8.27), we get the overall effect of an increase in government purchases and taxes:

.„ AY

^---, - 1---C + CT

-.----, -

1---C + CT

YAT

This expression is greater than unity, since 1---c + CT > 1. For example, with the real values c = 0.8; T = 0.2 the combined effect of a growth of purchases and taxes is equal to 1.8.

Consequently, under present-day conditions, the overall multiplier effect of a mutually compensatory 'growth of government purchases and tax revenues on the change in the social product must be greater than unity.

For a balanced state budget, it is necessary for a growth of government purchases to be accompanied by an increase in tax rates. This requirement is fulfilled in a system of progressive tax rates. Let us recall that all these conclusions are only valid for an economy with surplus productive capacity.

Of course, a growth in the state market is not the only source of an increase in demand. Let us look at the reduced equation:

i=0

t=0

t.t + S CiEt_i + dt,

(8.29)

~^^1^^ Problems of the Construction and Application oj Macroeconomic Models. Models of the US Economy, Novosibirsk, 1971, pp. 95-99.

i=0

342

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

343

of the social product resulting from this is Ay^ (units). Then the corresponding increase in tax revenues will be rAy^-. On this basis, an additional growth of government expenditure, satisfying the requirements of a balanced budget, is made possible on the scale of

AG = TAyw + TAYc,

(8.30)

where AyG is the increase in output caused by an expansion of the state market.

The additional growth of tax revenues • resulting from the internal development of the economy can prove to be sufficient for financing the growth of government expenditure without an increase in tax rates. The higher the internal rate of growth, the greater the possibility for expansion of the government market. The lower the internal growth, the more difficult it is to prevent government purchases from running at a deficit.

Up to now, we have been looking at static models, in which taxes are paid from current incomes, and revenues received by the government are used to finance government purchases. To analyse the effect of taxes on the cycle, it is more interesting to use dynamic models, in which taxes are paid at different moments (in relation to the time when they are used for government purchases). To this end, we shall look at simple cycle models, combining the multiplier and accelerator mechanisms. We shall use the following model:

(8.31) (8.32) (8.33)

Cyclical fluctuations arise if

collected. Then we get these equations:

Tpt = iiYt,

(8.34)

Ct = c(Y~ 7»«-i = e (1 -ti) Yt-i,

(8.35)

Tct = t,Yt,

(8.36)

/( = i;(AY-7'c)(_i = i;(l-TS)y,_1-i;y(_af

(8.37)

Gt = g (Tc + Tp)^ = g (Tl + T2) y(_j,

(8.38)

where TX and T2 are the respective personal income and profit

tax rates;

g is the coefficient of proportionality of government pur-

chases and taxes.

Let us write the reduced equation of the model:

y«-[c + i; + T1(g-c) + Ta(g-i;)]y<_1 + i;y,_8 = 0. (8.39)

Fluctuations are inevitable if

[c + v + Ti(g~c) + Ta(g-i;)]^^2^^<4y.

(8.40)

With g = 1 (that is, with assumption that the state budget is balanced) any decrease in tax rates will help to increase the chance of fluctuations, since 0 < c, v ^ 1. In the case when g > 1, that is, government purchases exceed the sum of tax revenues, a decrease in tax rates exerts an analogous procyclical influence.

Now let us assume that taxes are collected in the same way but spent differently:

G, = g (Tc + Tp)t_i = g (t, + T2) y<_2,

(8.41)

that is, proportionality is established between expenditure in the current period and taxes collected two periods previously. Then the reduced equation of the model looks like this:

Let us introduce into this model personal income taxes (Tp) and profit taxes (Tc). These taxes are paid as a specific proportion of the social product (national income) of the corresponding period. Let us also assume that taxes are fully spent in the periods following that in which they are

(8.42) The conditions for fluctuations arising in the system are:

[c(l-T1) + ^(l-T2)]^^2^^<4[i;-g(T1 + T2)]. (8.43)

The character of the fluctuations now depends not only

on v, but also on g (TJ + T2). An increase in the coefficients

344

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

345

g, TJ and T2 brings about a decrease of fluctuations in the model, i.e. accelerates their damping.

A balanced budget policy might be dangerous during economic crises, when tax revenues decrease automatically as a result of a fall in production and incomes. In these periods, as shown in Chapter 4, the government, as a rule, goes for an increase in the budget deficit. Such a policy is combined with the assumed countercrisis effect of automatic stabilisers.

The working of automatic regulators can easily be traced in cycle models. In the model:

the marginal coefficient of the dependence of investment on gross profits. If we assume that ap is also constant, then the character of fluctuations depends on T.

Thus, ceteris paribus, the higher the rate of taxes on profits (T) and, consequently, the lower the marginal coefficient of the dependence of investment on profits, the quicker the cyclical fluctuations are extinguished.

The coefficient for the dependence of private consumption on incomes (c) also includes the tax rate

= cy(l---TC).

(8.51)

From expression (8.50) it follows that an increase in T also accelerates the damping of fluctuations.

Consequently, tax regulators linked to incomes can help to decrease the amplitude of cyclical fluctuations.

Countercrisis policy has its own specific dangers. By helping to close the gap between production and effective demand, it leads to an increase in other contradictions in production. In particular, an increase in government purchases causes a consequent aggravation of balance of payments difficulties.

The after-effects of countercrisis regulation for the foreign trade balance are seen from the following model:

Et---Imt,

(8.52)

(8.53)

It = vYt,

(8.54)

Imt = kYt,

(8.55)

where G and E are exogenous variables and Im is imports, depending on the volume of the social product. Consequently,

(8.44) (8.45)

It = aPt-\-bKt_i,

. (8.46)

Pt = dYt,

(8.47)

Kt = Kt^ + It,

(8.48)

where Tu stands for unemployment benefits. An increase in Tu has a multiplier effect analogous to that of transfer payments of any other type.

The marginal coefficient of the dependence of investment on gross profits, (a), now includes a correction for the level of profit tax rates:

where ap is the coefficient of dependence on net. profits;

T is the rate of tax on profits.

It is obvious that the higher the profit tax rate, the lower the coefficient a. The reduced homogeneous equation of the model has the following form:

Yt ~[c(2 + b) + ad] y,_j + [c (l + b) + ad] F,_2 = 0. (8.49)

The character of the fluctuations is fully determined by the value of the expression

c(i + b) + ad,

(8.50)

where l>c, a, d>0; and 0>&>---1.

AG i---c-v + If AG• = 1, then AF =

(8.56) (8.57)

(8.58)

1---c---v+k ' In this case, an increase in imports takes place:

With c, b and d held constant, the character of cyclical fluctuations is regulated by the coefficient a, that is, by

-,

i---c---v-\-k

since (0<c-f-p< 1).

346

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

347

If the magnitude of E remains unchanged, then it is obvious that (E---Im)~kIm<(E---Im).

Ceteris paribus, the degree of deterioration of the foreign trade halance depends directly on the marginal coefficient k which characterises the growth of imports relative to the social product.

The two-fold effect of an increase in h must be noted. On the one side, the sensitivity of the balance of trade to countercrisis measures increases, while on the other, the multiplier effect of such measures on the domestic economy is weakened.

As a rule, the coefficient k exceeds the share of imports in the social product, reflecting an increasing dependence on imports as the social product grows. Consequently, measures for stimulating domestic demand prove to he the least effective and the most dangerous for the balance of payments in countries which depend strongly on foreign trade. (This explains, in particular, why the governments in West European countries resort to fiscal measures for stimulating demand in periods of crisis far more rarely than in the USA.)

The limited efficiency of countercrisis policies, as shown in Chapter 4, is linked to the fact that they always take effect with a lag, since the time when the crisis sets in is not correctly predicted and the process for making decisions on countercrisis measures is complex and contradictory.

Because of this, some Western authors propose models with ``automatic'' control of the economy. This question was worked out on a theoretical level in the middle of the 1950s by the English economist A. W. Phillips.^^1^^ In all the cases studied by him, government measures for smoothing out cycles are carried out gradually, with corrections at each step. Phillips introduced the concepts of " proportional stabilisation policy", ``integral'' and ``derivative'' stabilisers into his study.

With ``proportional'' stabilisation, increases in demand are systematically introduced into the economy, equal to

PS = fp(Yf-Y),

(8.59)

where PS stands for additional demand;

Y for the actual gross national product;

YF for the desired, ``optimal'' product. In this case the gap between the optimal and actual product cannot be completely eliminated, since with

Y-+YF

the amount of exogenous demand ``forced'' into the economy also decreases. It has been shown in economic literature, that proportional stabilisation can itself bring about cyclical fluctuations, the amplitude of which increases with the growth of the multiplier and with the lag between the application of any stabilisation measure and the time when its full effect is felt (the so-called "response lag").

With ``integral'' stabilisation, the exogenous increase in demand is set inversely proportional to the difference between the desired and actual product, accumulated over time:

T=0

-y),_t. (8.60)

In this case also, additional fluctuations may appear; the actual product only slowly approaches the desired level. With ``derivative'' stabilisation, the additional exogenous demand must be inversely proportional to the rate of increase of output

According to Phillips, the greatest effect can be achieved by using a combination of all three stabilisers considered.

The American econometrician Howard Pack attempted to verify Phillips's ideas experimentally, using US statistical material. Noting that stabilisation measures must be taken in good time, Pack makes use of indicators which give warning of turning points in the cycle: these are the average length of the working week, indicators concerning hiring and dismissal of the labour force in the manufacturing

~^^1^^ See R.G.D. Allen, Mathematical Economies', A. W. Phillips, "Stabilisation Policy in a Closed Economy", The Economic Journal, June 1954; "Stabilisation Policy and the Time-Forms of Lagged Responses", The Economic Journal, June 1957.

348

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

349

industries and the number of new orders for consumer durables. If three of these four indicate a turn, then this must serve as a command to initiate stabilisation measures.

Looking at the actual behaviour of these indicators in the postwar period, Pack showed that in the majority of cases they indicate the onset of a crisis sufficiently well. However, because of the delay in compiling statistics, these signals were only available two months after the turning point in the cycle actually set in.

Examination of various types of stabilisation was based on a model which simulates sufficiently accurately the actual course of the cycle in the USA. The best results were achieved with a combination of the three types of stabilisation and a specific correlation between the coefficients/;, fp and /(j. In this case, the maximum deviation of the actual from the desired product was: in 1953-54, a decrease from 20,100 million to 8,800 million dollars, in 1957-58, from 27,200 to 20,600 million dollars and in 1960-61, from 33,400 to 30,200 million dollars.^^1^^

As can be seen, in two cases out of three, the effect of the stabilisation programme was not particularly important though in all three cases the duration of the crises was shortened. Pack shows also that the crises were made somewhat less acute by an increase in the federal budget deficit (by 10,000; 20,000 and 30,000 million dollars, respectively) and by an acceleration of price increases (from 1.8 to 2.9%; from 3.5 to 6.6% and from 3.7 to 7.6% in these crises).

A combination of various types of ``flexible'' stabilisation was somewhat, though not considerably, more effective than a policy of one-off stabilisation, when additional demand was introduced immediately for the whole period of the crisis. In this case, there was a larger decrease in the product but the budget deficit and price increase were smaller.

In practice, however, the government does not act at all in the way suggested by Phillips and Pack and cycle regulation is often not a decisive issue.

In Chapter 4, the question of limits to the growth of the share of government purchases in the final product of capi-

~^^1^^ The experiment is described in Studies in Economic Stabilization, ed. A. Ando, E. C. Brown, Washington, 1968, pp. 9-35.

talist countries was considered. The conclusions made then are given further support by calculations on theoretical cycle models. In the model

Yt = Ct + It+Gt,

(8.62)

Ct = cYt,

(8.63)

It = vYt

(8.64)

the multiplier of government purchases is defined by the expression

(i.

(8.65)

r

v '

Let us assume, that the share of government purchases in the social product is g = G/Y, i.e. Y = Gig. Then the relative increase in the product must satisfy the condition

AY

AG

/o nn*

---= &V>-G--

(^^8^^-^^66^^)

(If government purchases grow at the same rate as output, then gu. = 1, i.e. g = 1/u., i.e. the share of these purchases in the product is the inverse of the multiplier. If government purchases grow faster, g < 1/u. and vice versa.

Let us assume that there is a maximum possible average rate of growth of the economy, determined by its production potential:

max •££- = MX.

In the same way, the limit for effective growth of government purchases is

gV^j-^MX.

(8.67)

Beyond these limits, a decrease in the multiplier of the real product is inevitable. AG/G can only exceed the maximum rate of growth of the economy if gu. < 1 and g < 1/u.. Making the conventional assumption of u. = 2.5 for developed capitalist countries, we get the results set out in Table 7-5.

Expressions (1---g\i) and (i/g---u.) give the possible scales of increases in government demand allowing the muJ-

350

S. MENSHIKOV

KOONOMF.TIilC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

Table 7-5

In this model, NE exerts an influence on the cycle in the same way as G. The movement of the sum oiNE and G determines the main path of the movement of Y, around which endogenous cyclical fluctuations occur. A systematic growth of NE makes possible an acceleration of the overall rate of growth of Y over time. Possible fluctuations of NE become an independent source of disturbances capable of strengthening or weakening cycles caused by other components.

As seen from Table 7-6, the growth of net exports was a factor in the accelerated growth of West Germany, Japan (after 1957) and the USA (up to 1957). A decrease in net exports slowed down the growth of England, France, Japan (up to 1957) and the USA (after 1957).

Table 7-6

Balance of Exports and Imports of Goods

and Services in the Main Capitalist Countries

(in % of GNP)

Limits to the Effective Growth of the Relative Share of Government Purchases

Country

MX

2(1968)

£|A(1968)

Maximum -6 efficiency y.i

l/g-M.

USA

4

0.33

0.825

3.00

0.50

Britain

3

0.39

0.975

2.56

0.06

France

6

0.38

0.950

2.63

0.13

FRG

6

0.37

0.925

2.70

0.20

Japan

10

0/21

0.525

4.76

2.26

l Maximum efficiency of the multiplier is measured by the expression l/g, when the rate AG/G cannot exceed MX.

tiplier to have full effect. As can be seen, for the USA and especially for the countries of Western Europe, the possibil-' ities for further faster growth of government purchases, when they have maximum stimulatory effect on demand, are not at all great, while in Japan, these possibilities are still considerable.

1950 1957 1968

USA

0.6

1.2

0.2

Britain

2.3

1.5

0.3

Japan

1.1

---1.9

0.8

EEC countries

---0.9

0.8

1.8

FRG

-0.7

4.2

3.5

France

0.7

---1.2

-0.2

7.3. THE INFLUENCE OF FOREIGN TRADE

In the simplest one-product cycle model, the influence of the foreign market is reflected in the dynamics of the foreign trade balance (exports of goods and services minus imports of the same). In a one-country model, this is an exogenous variable which enters into the basic national product equality:

(9.1)

The one-product model can be developed by the addition of a special equation for imports. In the previous paragraph, it was shown how, in such a model, a growth of government purchases can cause disequilibrium of the balance of payments and lead to a currency crisis.

In this modified model, E is the only exogenous quantity. Consequently, a significant part of what was said above about the variable NE can be applied to it: the multiplier effect of G and E are the same and additional fluctuating movement is also possible.

However, there are also important differences. Imports (Im) are now determined within the model and change under

where Y is the national product; 7 is capital investment; C is private consumption; G is government purchases and NE is the net foreign trade balance.

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

353 352

S. MENSHIKOV

the influence of changes in Y. It follows from this that the greater the marginal coefficient of the dependence of Im on Y, the lower the overall multiplier of AF relative to AE^^1^^.

Any increase in Y causes a growth of Im. However, in contrast to the case of a growth in G, far from any growth of E disturbs balance of payments equilibrium and leads to a deficit. This occurs only in those cases when the change in E is less than that in Im.

Let us assume that in the model:

Yt = Ct + It + Gt + Et-Imt,

(9.2)

Imt~aYt

(9.3)

Table 7-7 Imports of Goods and Services (in % of GNF)

1950 1957 1968

USA

4.2

4.7

5.5

Japan

11.5

14.0

10.0

Britain

24.6_

23.4

22.9

FRG

12.9

20.1

20.3

France

>11.4

13.1

16.1

exports grow uniformly over time, for example

Et = bt,

(9.4)

in itself. Absence of the first condition did not help France even though currency reserves were relatively large. In Britain, both conditions were absent and necessitated a ``stop-go'' policy. Even for countries depending relatively slightly on imports and with large currency reserves (such as the USA), a decrease in competitiveness can turn out to be disastrous (as shown by the currency crisis of the 1960s and early 1970s). Since exports exert a multiplier effect on the economy and imports grow with the growth of the social product, any increase in exports leads to a growth of imports.

and that the assumed limit of deviation of imports from exports is determined by the inequality

(9.5)

Then it is obvious that:

---b, or

(9.6)

Expression (9.7) is always less than 1, if c < I. Consequently, an increase in imports can never exceed the increase of exports which brought it about. It follows from this, however, that,, to^ eliminate a trade balance deficit, an increase in exports is needed that exceeds the amount of the deficit by expression (9.7).

In models of individual countries, exports are, as a rule, an exogenous variable. However, the exports of country A are always a part of the imports of countries B, C,---- Consequently, their movements depend on the dynamics of the national product of these countries.

In simple cycle models, this results in the following modifications:

Im,

(9.8)

(9.9)

23-0593

In other words, the assumed maximum rate of growth of the national product is determined by the rate of growth of exports, by the marginal coefficient of the change in imports and the coefficient q, depending on the size of liquid currency reserves within the country.

The greater the dependence of the economy on imports and the lower the rate of growth of its exports and the size of its liquid currency reserves, the tighter the assumed limits on the growth of the national product.

For countries greatly dependent on imports (Britain, the FRG, France, Japan), the most important conditions for maintaining a high rate of growth of production are competitiveness on the foreign market and currency reserves. In the 1960s, only West Germany fulfilled both these conditions, while for Japan, the first turned out to be sufficient

354

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OP ECONOMIC CYCLES

355

Imt = Im + aYt-\,

(9.10)

Let us look at the case when there are fluctuations in one country, but not in the other.

(9.17) t-i.

(9.18)

(9.11)

(9.12)

where X represents the income of other countries; b is the coefficient of the dependence of exports on the income of other countries.

Reduction of the system gives the following equation:

The general reduced equation: Yt---(ai + a2) Yt-i- (Mi«2 + eiCi)

t-i = 0. (9.19)

To analyse the equation, let us turn to a numerical example. Let us assume that in country X, there are regular fluctuations with a period of 11.3 units of time, that is, a2 = 1.7; 62 =---I- In country y there is monotonic growth with ax = 1.1. The countries are connected by economic relations, so that el = ez = 0.2. Then we get the reduced equation:

(9.13)

Fluctuations determined by the internal structure of the model are maintained. However, the possibility arises of the transmission of additional fluctuations inherent in the variable X.

Let us look at the interconnected models of the economies of two countries. Ignoring autonomous demand, we write their homogeneous reduced equations:

Yt = aiYt-1 + eiXt_i,

(9.14)

Xt = a2Xt_i + e2Yt-i.

(9.15)

Let us begin with the case when, in each economy taken separately, there are no fluctuations. The combined reduced equation of the two models takes the following form:

Yt-fa + aj Yt.i+(aia2-e1e,) Yt_2 = 0. (9.16)

The combination of two equations of the first order gives a second order difference equation, in which the coefficient of Yt-z is positive, since a* > et. Fluctuations are not in principle excluded from such equations but, with the given relationship between the initial coefficients, they are not possible. In fact, for fluctuations to occur, it is necessary, and sufficient that ,

Yt -2.8yi_1 + 2.83y(_2 - l.iYt-a = 0.

Then, fluctuations with approximately the same duration as initially in country X are inevitable.

Consequently, the existence of fluctuations in one country leads to the appearance of analogous fluctuations in the other country, which does not have a cycle of its own.

Finally, let us turn to the case when there are fluctuations in both countries:

Yt = a1Yt-i + biYt-a + eiXt-l,

(9.20)

Xt = a2X,_4 + 62Xi_2 + ejft-i.

(9.21)

The reduced equation has the following form:

Yt--- (ffli + aa) y^-i---(bi -f &2---«i«a + e^a) Yt-2 +

+ (&iOa + bjftt) y*-3 + &i&sF«-4 = 0.

For simplicity, let us assume that the respective coefficients in the two countries are the same, that is, &x = 62 =---1- Then we have a fourth order reciprocal equation convenient for analysis.

yi-2ayt_1 + (2 + a^^2^^-e^^2^^)yt_2-2ay<_3 + yi_4 = 0. (9.22)

The roots of the corresponding characteristic equation are equal to:

23*

It is obvious that, in the given model, this condition is not fulfilled, since and e2 are positive. With interaction of, economies in which there are no fluctuations, new negative reverse connections, necessary for cyclical movements to arise, are not created.

356

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

357

v*

a---g± V(a-e)^^2^^-4

r3,4 =----------2----------'

The roots of the characteristic equations of the models of

each country taken individually were-----*v" ~ .

z

Consequently, the roots of these characteristic equations differ by a quantity depending on the degree of mutual influence between the two economies. Table '7-8 gives the results of calculations on the given model: they show how the dynamic properties of the interconnected models change with different assumptions about the cycle in the individual countries andj with the degree of their dependence on each other.

/

There are cases when only one harmonic function remains in the overall model but, as a rule, the combination of two models results in their cyclical movements becoming more

Table 7-8

Modification of the Cycle under Mutual Interaction

between the Economies of Two Countries

(the periods of fluctuations in the overall model;

the symbol ``N'' indicates that no fluctuations are present;

the symbol ``T'', the initial period of fluctuations

in the individual models)

complex, as a consequence of the appearance of two harmonics. In this case, the harmonics produced by the combined model do not coincide with the original harmonics of the individual country models. The greater the initial period of the fluctuations and the greater the mutual dependence between the two economies, the greater also the difference between the periods of the harmonics produced.

In models, combining mutually interconnected cycles not in two, but in many countries, cyclical movement in each country becomes extremely complex.

Cyclical movement in one country within a system of mutually interconnected countries also depends on the initial conditions, which may include (as in the given case) a difference in phase between the separate cycles and also a relationship between the absolute sizes of the individual countries. The latter is particularly important in determining the character of the mutual influence between the cycles in the individual countries.

To analyse the interdependence of economic cycles and different gross national products, let us use the following model. Let us consider two countries with balanced trade relations. The output of one of the countries is greater (for example, twice as great) than that of the other country. Consequently, the economy of the second country is twice as dependent on foreign trade (i.e. the ratio of exports and imports to its output) as the first.

For a numerical example of output flous see the following table:

Table 7-9

T

0.

1

0.2

0

3 | 0

4 20

N

14

N

11.3

N

9.5

N

8.6

14 20

11.3

N

9.5

N

8.6

N

8

11.3

14

9.5

20

8.6

N

8

N

7.2

9.5

11.3

8.6

14 8 20

7.2

N

6.8

8.6

9.5

8

11.3

7.2

14

6.8

20

6.3

8

8.6

7.2

9.5

6.8

11.3

6.3

14 6

7.2

8

6.8

8.6

6.3

9.5

6

11.3

5.7

6.8

7.2

6.3

8 6

8.6

5.7

9.5

5.5

6.3

6.8

6

7.2

5.7

8

5.5

8.6

5.3

6

6.3

5.7

6.8

5.5

7.2

5.3

8

5.1

5.7

6

5.5

6.3

5.3

6.8

5.1

7.2

4.9

5.5

5.7

5.3

6

5.1

6.3

4.9

6.8

4.1

Exports from the country

fmports Into the country

Volume1 of ex- " ports "

Final product

Gross Domestic Product

1 2 1

_

10 10 90 100 2 10

---

10 40 50

Total imports Gross National

10 10

Product

90 40

Gross Domestic

Product

100 50 358

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

359

In this model, intermediate turnover of output within each of the countries is not taken into account. Final product is understood to be the sum of private consumption, capital investment, government purchases of domestic production and exports to third countries. For simplicity, imports from third countries are not subtracted from gross national product.

Introducing the coefficients of the dependence of imports on the domestic product (an), we get the basic equation for balancing foreign trade between the countries:

ZdijGDPj + FP^GDPi,

(9.23)

where GDPi is the gross domestic product of the y'-th country;

FPt is the final product in the i-th country. In matrix form

(E-A)GDP = FP or

GDP = (E-A)-iFP,

(9.24)

where E is the unit matrix;

A is the matrix || atj ||;

GDP and FP are the vectors containing the elements GDPt and FPii respectively.

Now let us turn to the example illustrated in Table 7-9. Matrix A will look like this:

AGDP2 = 4.08; A (GD^ + GDP2) = 4.91 and = 0.0083. In other words, the 10% change in domestic demand in country 1 brought about a change in the output of country 2 by 1.84%, while the 10% change in the domestic demand of country 2 caused only a 0.83% change in the output of country 1.

From what has been said, certain conclusions can be made:

1) a relative change in the domestic demand of a large country depending comparatively little on foreign trade brings about a relatively greater change in the output of a smaller country, depending more on foreign trade, than the same relative change in the domestic demand of the smaller country produces in the output of the larger country;

2) multipliers, i.e. the coefficients of the full change in the scale of production depending on a change in domestic demand, are greater for countries with a relatively strong dependence on foreign trade.

In sections 3-1 and 3-2 it was noted that the fall of production in the USA postwar economic crises was, as a rule, more significant than in Western Europe and Japan. Since the absolute scale of production in the USA is significantly greater than in these other countries, while the dependence on foreign trade is less, the effect of American crises on other countries was much greater than that of the crises that developed in Western Europe and Japan on the USA.

More complex models, including sectoral output flows, do not change the effect described above. The basic relationships within such a model can be most simply represented in the form of two groups of interconnected balance equations:

n = GDP,-, (9.25) j + Z ahmGDPm + Z FPkn = GDPh, (9.26)

i

m

n

where i is the index of the exporting sector of country 1;

/ is the index of the importing sector of country 1; k is the index of the exporting sector of country 2; m is the index of the importing sector of country 2; n is the index of the country.

fO 0.21 [0.1 0 J,

and the inverse matrix (E---A)~l: 1.020 0.204 0.102 1.02

Adding the coefficients of the inverse matrix by columns, we can get the coefficients of the dependence of the sum of the gross products of the countries on the change in its final use in each.

Let us assume that a 10% change takes place in the final product of the output of each country separately, i.e. /^FPi = 10 and AFP2 = 4. In the first case AGDP^ = = 9.18; AGZ>P2 = 0.92; ^(GDP^ + GZ)P2) = 10.1; AG/)P2 = 0.0184. In the second case AGZ>Pt = 0.83;

360

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

361

Schematically, the flows in such a model are a combination of intersectoral and interregional models and look like this:

Table 7-10

The models considered are static and do not take into account the additional multiplier effect resulting from a change in incomes. Therefore, they usually underestimate the true degree of dependence of the output of a country on the level of demand in other countries.

Final

Importing Sectors

Domestic

Exporting

Demand

Gross

Countries and Sectors

country 1

country 2

Domestic Product

sectors 1, 2 ... p

sectors 1, 2 ... p

country 1

country 2

Country

1

•"•12 ••• ^Ip

V V V

^^1^^ H-* 12 • " •* Ip

``11

``12

*11

1 2

A. 21 ""•"" ••• -A2p

y?.lK22->

``21

``22

*"

P

WP2...-xPP

yv v pi-* p2-* pp

``31

``32

xpl

Country

1

``11»12 - "lp

-Zl2 ... ^1

911 912

Xn

2 2

»UV»...Vip

P

Wpp

ZpiV----ZPP

*P<

?p2

xp,

7.4. PRICE-FORMATION MODELS

The role of the price mechanism as a factor encouraging economic cycles and influencing the character of fluctuations within an economy can be illustrated by the example of the following model:

(10.1)

a<0,

(10.2)

(10.3) (10.4)

Here, the variable p stands for the overall price level in the economy. Coefficients a and b express the negative dependence of consumption and accumulation on the price level, coefficient A;---the positive dependence of prices on fluctuations of the national income Y around those levels of Y* at which demand and supply are equal. Coefficient g shows the predominant long-run trend of price changes. If g > 1, then there is an inflationary force working within the economy. In this model, other factors causing cycles are not taken into consideration, only the influence of prices.

The model can be reduced to a finite difference equation of the second order, the homogeneous part of which looks like this:

Yt-(g + c + v)Yt.i + [g(e + v)-k(a + b)]Yt^ = 0. (10.5)

When analysing the dynamic properties of the model, we shall start from realistic numerical data: c = 0.65 and v = 0.15. The absolute^^1^^ size of the coefficients a, 6~and k depends on the units of measurement of p. It is simpler to deal with corresponding elasticities. For example, assuming

where Xt =

"In -

Calculations produced by the Canadian econometrician R. J. Wonnacott from an analogous model showed that in 1949, a 10% change in total final demand in the USA brought about a change in the scale of output in Canada by 0.6% while the same change in demand in Canada produced only a 0.05% decrease in US production. Thus, the relative influence of the US economic cycle on the Canadian economy was approximately 12 times greater than that of the Canadian cycle on the economy of the USA.^^1^^

~^^1^^ R. J. Wonnacott, Canadian-American Dependence. Amsterdam. 1961.

362

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

363

average values C = 0.65, Y and 7 = 0.15 Y,

of prices with respect to changes in market conditions falls particularly sharply. Consequently, conditions arise in which the price mechanism may not cause cyclical fluctuations. In some cases, as shown in Section 6.2, prices have a tendency to grow faster in times of crisis, i.e. a negative dependence of prices on production arises. In this case, as we can see, the negative inverse relationship between production and prices, which is the basis of the cycle mechanism, is upset.

Now let us assume that there is a long-run inflationary trend, i.e. that g > 1. How intensive must inflation be to prevent cyclical fluctuations? With the numerical values of the elasticities we have taken, fluctuations are not possible if g> 1.79. However, if the value of the elasticities falls considerably, fluctuations disappear even with less inflation. Under present-day conditions, the increasing long-run trend of price rises runs parallel with a decrease in the elasticity of prices with respect to the market situation.

However, sudden increases in the rate of inflation may, in fact, increase the magnitude of a crisis.

Theoretical analysis of the comparative influence of the process of monopolisation in its simplest form can be traced on the demand and supply curves.

elC

p

AC

p ~C

0.657

bp_ 0.15?

ell __ dl p __ r,__ bp __

~~P~~~dp"T---------j---

elp _ dp Y _ o n _ fer v---j-v *------O.U------•

Y dY p

p

In such a case, the product k (a + b] depends on the elasticities, but not on the absolute values of these coefficients.

Let us first study the dynrfmic properties of the model, abstracting from long-run price trends, i.e. assuming g = 1. In our example, the model produces slightly explosive fluctuations with a duration of 11.4 periods. Consequently, assuming a lagged negative dependence of consumption and accumulation on prices and a positive dependence of prices on the movement of national income, the possibility arises of cyclical fluctuations, not depending on the dynamics of fixed capital, profits and so on.

If in some initial period the model is in a state of rest, then an external impulse, an increase in autonomous demand, for example, gives birth to fluctuations within the model. The mechanism of these fluctuations is as follows. The growth of demand leads to an increase in the national income and a rise in prices. With a specific relationship of the coefficients, the negative influence of the price rise on consumption and accumulation begins, sooner or later, to predominate over the positive effect of the growth of national income. Then, the increase in demand is replaced by a decrease. In the crisis phase, on the contrary, the positive effect of falling prices counteracts the negative influence of the fall in income.

The amplitude and limits of fluctuations increase as these elasticities increase and decrease as they decrease. In the limiting case, for example, k = 0 and fluctuations become impossible. The condition k > 0 is essential for fluctuations to arise.

Under present-day conditions, the elasticities of demand with respect to price are somewhat lower, but the elasticity

Q

390-6.jpg

Q

Q

(3)

Fig. 7-3-1. Supply Curve: the Elasticity of Production with Respect

to Prices

In Fig. 7-3-1, the first graph illustrates the extreme situation when the supply of goods is practically independent

364

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OP ECONOMIC CYCLES

365

of prices. The absence of a trend towards short-term adjustment of individual supply to price changes is typical of nonmonopolistic entrepreneurs, industries and sectors of the economy directly dependent on the natural conditions of production (mining, agriculture).

The second graph describes the other extreme situation: supply changes independently of prices and is obviously determined only by the production plans of the absolute monopolist who establishes the price. In this'case, the monopolist changes supply at his own discretion, choosing that volume of output that is necessary to maintain prices at the given level.

The third graph gives the' intermediate situation, met most frequently in real life. The volume of supply reacts to the price level. The steeper the curve, the less producers are in a position to change supply in response to price changes; the flatter it is, the more easily demand adjusts to changes in price. The elasticity of supply relative to prices reflects both natural conditions of production and the degree of monopolisation of the given market. The higher the latter, the higher this elasticity and the less the slope of the curve SS.

Let us add demand curves (D0 D0) to these graphs.

a cyclical fluctuation of demand taking shape in the form of successive changes from a phase of decrease (from D0D0 to DiDi) to a phase of increase (from DvDi to D0D0). In this case, we shall assume the supply curve remains unchanged.

Then the greatest amplitude of price fluctuations will be observed in the first graph of Fig. 7-3-2, reflecting the conditions of absolutely free competition (the volume of production being unchanged). In an absolute monopoly situation (the second graph) fluctuations of prices will not occur and cyclical movements will only appear in fluctuations of the volume of production. Finally, on the third graph, representing the intermediate situation, simultaneous price and production fluctuations take place.

It is obvious that the relationship between the amplitudes of both fluctuations, given the elasticity of demand with respect to income and prices, is completely dependent on the slope of the supply curve, i.e. specifically, on the degree of monopolistic control of the market. The greater the monopolisation, the less prices fluctuate, both in absolute and relative terms (i.e. in comparison with production fluctuations) and vice versa.

In the work by F. Mills, mentioned in Section 6-2, diagrams are presented, showing actual movements of price and production for 64 different commodities in the USA from 1904 to 1938. It turns out that the movement and trend of fluctuations of these quantities approximately correspond to the different variants presented in Fig. 7-3-2. Thus, for example, the movement of prices for agricultural products and also for crude oil from nonmonopolistic wells in certain regions of the USA was close to the vertical curve in the first graph of Fig. 7-3-1. The prices of foodstuffs and other consumer goods, as well as of cast iron and a series of other types of output performed, as it were, an elliptical movement around the axis, the slope of which corresponds to that of the demand curve in the third graph. The movement of prices of steel rails was reminiscent of the horizontal movement of the second graph. These last prices were, for a long time, fixed by the United States Steel Corporation.^^1^^

390-7.jpg

Fig. 7-3-2. Price Changes with Movements of Demand and Different Elasticities of Supply with Respect to Prices

Let us look at changes in demand (displacements of the demand curve). Let us assume that this displacement reflects

~^^1^^ Frederick C. Mills, Price-Quantity Interactions in Business Cycles, NBER, New York, 1946, pp. 12-13.

366

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

367

Of course, the proportions characteristic of the relative movement^of prices and output do not depend on the specific nature of supply on the given market. The elasticity of demand with respect to prices and incomes can also be counted among the factors determining the character of this interrelationship. The closer the elasticity of demand to incomes, the greater---all other conditions being equal--- the amplitude of fluctuations of both prices and the volume of production. It should be noted, however, that it is those goods, such as means of production, with highly monopolised markets, which are distinguished by the greatest degree of cyclical fluctuation.

The influence of the elasticity of demand with respect to prices also depends on the dynamics of supply. On highly monopolised markets, a low elasticity of demand to prices facilitates monopolistic regulation.

In contemporary crises, a contrary movement of monetary demand and demand in real terms (i.e. its physical volume) is observed. Monetary demand continues to grow when real demand is on the wane. Consequently, on demand and supply graphs, the demand curve, reflecting its dependence on incomes, must move to the right (if we are looking at monetary demand) or to the left (if real demand).

A similar situation is illustrated in graphs 1 and 2 of Fig. 7-3-3.

First, let us look at graph 2. The real demand curve has shifted, real supply has dropped from Q0 to Q^ and prices on the given (highly monopolised) market must fall somewhat

Now let us turn to graph 1, which illustrates a shift to the right of monetary demand. Under these conditions, supply expressed in monetary terms would have to grow to (>2 with some price increase from AP0 to APZ. Real demand (at the given price), however, not only did not grow, but even decreased, since real demand fell. The new equilibrium supply is . This corresponds to the new, considerably higher price APi.

Consequently, the opposite movement of monetary and real demand explains why prices can grow even if real demand falls.

On graph 1, let us draw line D3D3, parallel to D0D0 through the intersection of straight lines AP0T and <?j/?. It is obvious, that the curve D3 shows the minimum monetary demand which, with a real supply of Qlt is necessary to maintain the old price AP0. Any greater monetary demand will be linked to a price increase. Let us note that a price increase is possible with a displacement of monetary demand to the left, if only this displacement is less than that of real demand.)

Now let us look at the following example as an illustration. Let us assume, that the output of passenger cars in period t is a units and that this quantity is sold out on the market. Let us also assume, that in period t + 1. demand falls to b-a units, where 0 < b •< 1. So production in period t + 1 is also planned as b-a units. Therefore, automobile corporations decide to increase prices in order to avert, as far as possible, a fall in profits. In period t, the price was p dollars, while in period t + 1, it is set at the level cp dollars, where c > 1.

In period t, the monetary demand for cars was p. a. In period t + 1, it must be not less than (c-p-b-a), in order to guarantee the sale of the smaller number of cars. Provided the money incomes of car purchasers grow sufficiently, operation with a simultaneous decrease in output and increase in prices is quite possible.

It must be emphasised that, with monopolistic market

390-8.jpg 390-9.jpg

Fig. 7-3-3. Price Changes with Opposite Movement of Monetary and

Real Demand

368

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

369

regulation, production plans and sale prices are set well in advance. Monopolists set a deliberate maximum supply and a price reflecting a planned artificial deficit. It is all a question of whether the monopolists will be able to realise these plans. If the money incomes of consumers were to decrease proportionally with the assumed fall in production, then it would be impossible, at the higher price, to sell out. However, if money incomes fall to a lesser degree than output (or even increase), then it will be possible to sell all of the planned output of vehicles, even at the higher price.

The examples considered above are only true when the cost of production changes in strict proportion with price and, consequently, the share of profits in the price remains unchanged. In reality, the relationship between these components of price changes systematically, which affects supply and, under specific circumstances, is also reflected in prices.

This influence is again different according to the degree of monopolisation of the market. Under free competition, over short periods, the market price will be insensitive to changes in the cost of production. Consequently, under

price cuts, specifically due to economies from increased production.

Under monopolistic regulation, monopolists have the possibility of actively influencing market prices. Under such conditions, a fall in the share of profits in price prompts corporations to increase prices and to regulate correspondingly both the volume of production and supply.

Fig. 7-4 shows the mechanism of monopolistic price formation. Monopolists are able to actively influence prices by varying supply. The line p0 gives production cost per unit of output. The rectangle (p---p0) X on this straight line gives the profit levels of monopolies. The given model assumes the following equations:

where P is net profits. Consequently,

= a---bX, = (P-Po)X,

(10.6) (10.7)

390-10.jpg

The necessary condition for profit maximisation is

dp-

= 0,

i.e.

n»_

p

(10.8)

From this it can be seen, that the monopoly price depends on the cost of production p0 and the displacement of the demand curve (via changes in the coefficient a). Given constant production costs, the monopoly price will grow with an increase in demand, i.e. with a displacement of the demand curve to the right. If production costs also grow, this facilitates a growth of monopoly prices.

We are particularly interested in the case when demand falls but production costs, for example, unit labour costs, increase. It is obvious that in this case prices will b& raised if the cost increase has more effect than the fall in demand, i.e. Ap0 >---(Aa). This takes place in contemporary

1/2 24-0593

Fig. 7-4. Monopolistic price formation

these circumstances, a decrease in the share of profits may cause^entrepreneurs to attempt to cut profits by increasing the volume of production. Generally speaking, this leads to

»70

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

371

crises, i.e. the momentum of the growth of costs is stronger than the incipient fall in demand.

How does the movement of monopoly prices in a crisis affect the volume of production? It follows from equations (10.6-10.7) that the volume of supply corresponding to maximum profits is equal to

and is the output of one sector, while induced investment and private consumption depend on the incomes of the previous period and are the output of the second sector.

(11.1)

2)

3) 7 =

4) C, =

(H.2) a, (11.3) (H.4)

a---Po 26

(10.9)

Since the slope of the demand curve (i.e. the coefficient b) is assumed constant, the levels of production depend on the difference between the parameters a and p0. It is easy to see that an increase in prices with a decrease in demand will take place with a cut in the volume of production, if the influence of the growth in costs exceeds that of the fall in demand.

If we look at unit labour costs only, then pa = W/X. The volume of demand depends partially on the wage fund (i.e. a = cA + eW, where A is demand not dependent on the volume of wages, c and e are the coefficients of linear dependence). Then

(10.10)

From this it can be seen that, other conditions being equal, the cut in production in a crisis contributes to the growth of unit labour costs and, consequently, to a further fall in market supply. This may take immediate effect when the direct influence of a growth of wages on the growth of demand

(e) is less than on the fall in supply (---]f) •

where:Z1>2 is the gross output of the sectors;

aij are the technical coefficients;

/

is autonomous capital investment;

C

is induced investment and consumption;

V

is value added;

Y

is the final social product.

Solving the system for 7 and assuming a monotonic growth of autonomous investment, we come to the following conclusion: the change in the rate of growth of the final product depends on the expression

(11.5)

where

__ ,1

~~

---alla22---

In other words, no change in the matrix of technical coefficients exerts any influence on the rate of growth of the final product, no matter how the rate of increase of gross output may change.

This paradox is not engendered by the exclusive features of this particular model. In a general form, a dynamic model of the type under consideration may be set down as follows:

7.5. THE EFFECT OF SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNOLOGICAL PROGRESS AND STRUCTURAL CHANGES

As shown in Chapter 5, technological progress is expressed, in particular, in a constant change in intersectoral proportions.

Let us look at the two-sector model, in which autonomous investment is set in the form of a simple function of time

2) Yt =

3) Cf =

4) C =

(11.5-a) (11.6) (11.7)

(11.8)

24*

372

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

373

where A is the matrix || a,-; ||,

X is the vector of gross output; Y is the vector of the final product; C is the vector of induced investment and private

consumption;

7 is the vector of autonomous investment; C* is the sum of the components of vector C; V* is the sum of the components of the value-added

vector;

Y* is the sum of the components of vector Y; a is the vector of the coefficients for the distribution

of C* by components of C. a, is assumed to be constant.

It is easy to see that in this model, no change in the matrix A exerts any influence on the rate of growth of Y. In fact

Ct = acY*-i,

(11-9)

AXt + acYf- i+It = Xt,

(11.10)

X=(E-A)~lYi,

(11.12)

Yt = acYj-i + It.

(11.13)

This result does not depend on the structure of lags within the model. If, for example, the sum of the components of C can be written thus

C^^1^^ = c y*4- c F* = c Y 4-c Yt

(11.14)

then, in the final analysis, it is a matter of solving the equation

In this case, final demand grows fastest for the output of those sectors in which gross output grows particularly intensively. (A change in the structure of final demand is also possible independently of intersectoral production relations.) However, in all cases, a change in a has no effect on the rate of growth of Y*, since only the structure of vectors V and Y changes.

This conclusion is true only for models in which total endogenous final demand is functionally dependent on the sum of value added of the sectors in the previous period.

Sl^i,t = /(S^(-i).

(11.19)

i

In reality, this is an extreme simplification. More complex and, perhaps, more realistic, is a series of functions of the form

Yn,t = fj(Vjit-i),

(11.20)

in which the value added of each sector determines some nth part of final demand, so that

y«=Syn.«=:

j, *-0 = 2 cjVj, ,_,. (ii.2i)

If

where 0 < d3 < 1 and * = (S cj, dj, t_i) V?_, = (

= 1, then

jt dit ,_,)

(11.22)

Now, the overall rate of growth is determined by the result of adding the coefficients c,-, weighted according to the (changing) relative weight of the corresponding sectors. Since the rate of growth of value added of a sector more or less corresponds to the rate of increase of gross output of the corresponding sector, the overall rate of change of the final product draws closer and closer over time to Cj of the stated sectors.

The comparative magnitude of c,-, in its turn, is determined by the coefficients of the dependence of the elements of the final product on wages and profits and also on the share of the latter in the national income:

(11.23)

/•

\

-V T

^9.

-\7-3t

I

i

-It. then

(11.15)

If

Ct = ci7f_ i + c2F?_2 + - . ., then

(11.16)

yf = oe117_i+aeay?_2+...+/«•

(11.17)

For simplicity, we shall set Y = 0. Let us assume the possibility of a change in the structure of final demand a. This is possible as a result of the functional dependence of the structure of final demand on changes in the structure of gross output:

(11.18)

374

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

375

where q is the marginal coefficient of the expenditure from wages;

r is the marginal coefficient of the expenditure from profits;

m is the share of the wage fund in value added. With equality of sectoral rates of surplus value, the coefficients c} are directly dependent on the marginal coefficients of the expenditure of (or accumulation of) profits, since sectoral coefficients of the expenditure of wages are more or less the same.

If the most rapidly growing sectors also have the highest c^ then the overall result of a change in the matrix A will be an acceleration of the growth of the final product. Experimental calculations for the USA from 1948 to 1969 show that this particular relationship actually took place but that the acceleration was insignificant. Apparently, in this case, the difference between Cj is very small.

Whatever the concrete effect of technological progress on the growth rate of the final product, it always represents the result of either the indirect influence of changes in the sectoral structure of value added or the direct influence of changes in the structure of final demand, i.e. the direct influence of technological progress on investment and private consumption.

When looking at the effect of technological changes on investment, the concept of the accelerator is often used in one form or another. The idea of the accelerator in its simplest form was used at the beginning of the twentieth century by several French, English and American economists (in particular, A. Aftalion, C. F. Bickerdike, R. G. Hawtrey, and J. M. Clark). According to this idea, demand for investment goods does not depend on the volume of output, as was assumed previously, but on changes in the volume of output, i.e. on the speed at which production expands.

At the basis of this concept, which is now applied widely by economists with different orientations, lies the known relationship between capital intensity and the final product,

a = 4L,

(11-24)

and the accelerator can be deduced directly from it. In fact where a represents the coefficient of capital intensity;

K is fixed capital;

Y is the final product. Resorting to the simplest transformation, we get:

(11.25)

where net investment 7 is determined by the magnitude of changes in output for the same period.

As a rule, this simple (``naive'') accelerator is only used in theoretical models, as in calculations using actual statistical material it often gives unsatisfactory results. Under the conditions of the capitalist economy, productive capacity is nearly always not fully employed and, consequently, the direct need for an increase in fixed capital is less than stated in the formula of the ``naive'' accelerator. Often, the increase in capital is determined not so much by the requirements of the current or the previous increase in production, as by the momentum of past growth rates:

It = akYt-i.

(11.26)

In this case, delays in the delivery of investment goods also tell, determined by the time taken to fulfil orders for plant, construction contracts and so on.

The American economist S. Kuznets showed that in calculations of the dependence of I on AF, the regression coefficient a is consistently considerably less than the average capital intensity of production (the first, as a rule, turned out to be less than 1 and was sometimes equal to 0.1, while the second usually reached 2-2.5).

In connection with the inadequacies of the conception of the ``naive'' accelerator, in the 1950s, improved models were proposed. One of these sets net investment as a function of the difference between desired (planned) capital at the end of the period and actual capital at the beginning of the period:

/, = (*(£*-#,_!),

(11.27)

or

(11.28)

376

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

377

The coefficient u. characterises the speed with .which demand for investment goods is satisfied. Identity of the regression coefficient (j, a with capital intensity a can only be achieved if fi = 1, i.e. if there is ``instant'' satisfaction of demand for investments. In practice, for short periods of time, u. is considerably less than 1, i.e. adjustment of investment to the demand for capital takes place only gradually. Somewhat different results are received using the distributed accelerator. In this case, accumulated capital is considered as a function of a series of previous production levels, their influence decreasing to a geometric progression:

of capital investment on the profit rate. Assuming P = ^ where fi is the average share of profits in the national income we get:

, a(l-X)

Investment functions based on the profit take fuller account of the specific features of the cycle mechanism, but for analysis of the influence of technological progress it is preferable to use functions with an accelerator.

On the basis of the equations of the distributed accelerator, let us try to determine the influence exerted by the growth of the efficiency of fixed capital on the mechanism of the contemporary cycle. An increase in the efficiency of fixed capital, reflecting technological progress, is seen in a drop in the average capital intensity of production (all other conditions remaining the same---branch structure, level of industrial development and so on). In this case, however, a decrease in capital intensity is achieved by an increase in the speed at which equipment is replaced, i.e. an acceleration of obsolescence and, consequently, an increase in the depreciation rate.

If the first tendency, i.e. the fall in capital intensity, leads to a decrease in the demand for investment goods (relative to the growth of production), then the second leads, in contrast, to an increase in this demand (relative to the growth of capital).

Let us look at the opposite influence of these indicators in the example of the following cycle model:

0<A<1,

(11.29)

where (1---A,) characterises the influence of the current level of production on the volume of capital used in the period under consideration. Expanding this expression, we get:

Kt = (a - cd) Yt + (cd - cd^^2^^) Y(_2 -f (cd^^2^^ - cd^^3^^) Y,_3 + ----

It is easy to see that the sum of the coefficients for all Yt-c is equal to a (1---fa). With i -+• oo, a (1---XT) ->- cc, i.e. expresses the overall capital intensity of production.

Transforming the original expression, we can get an equation for the demand for investment goods:

It^Kt---Kt-i = a (1---A) Yt - (1 - A) ff|_j. (11 .30)

This equation is analogous to (11.28), as both u. and (1---A,) show the speed at which net investment adjusts to the current change in production. For gross investment, the following adjustment must be introduced:

t = a(i---X)Yt---(l---*.-8)Kt-i, (11.31)

(11.32)

2) It^aYt + bKn,

(11.33)

3) Ct = cYt-i,

(11.34)

4) Kt = dKt_i + It.

(11.35)

Reducing the system, we get a homogeneous equation:

where 8 is the depreciation rate.

Investment equations using a distributed accelerator are similar to investment functions based on the dependence

yt----

I---a

t-* = 0. (H.36)

25-0593

378

S. MENSHIKOy

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

379

Fluctuations are inevitable under the following condition:

/Lt_t is fixed capital at the end of the period, diverging

from t by T units,

6 is the rate of capital obsolescence from the beginning to the end of the period.

Dividing both parts by the non-negative quantity Yt, we get

T7=^-%-(^^1^^-^^6^^)'

(11-38)

/ c+fc+dv

\ I---a )

Let us recall that, according to the formula of the distributed accelerator, b < 0 and | b \---1---K--- 6. In our model, however, the depreciation rate is represented by the quantity b and by the difference (1---a).

Setting d and c at a realistic level (d = 0.9; c = 0.7), we satisfy ourselves that with b <C 0, fluctuations take place independently of the quantity a, and that fluctuations disappear with b >• 0. Consequently, an increase in the depreciation rate through a change in the coefficient b can lead to non-fluctuating solutions.

If, for real values of b (---0.05;---0.1), the depreciation rate (1---d) increases, then, even for certain negative values of fe, fluctuating solutions become impossible. Consequently, a change in both the coefficients representing the growth of the depreciation rate can lead to a contraction in the field of fluctuating solutions.

The marginal capital intensity is represented in the given model by the coefficient a. We noted above that changes in a have little effect on the conditions for the beginning of fluctuations for real values of b, c and d. However, an increase or decrease in a is reflected significantly in the character of fluctuations (if they exist). A decrease in a reduces the coefficient for Ft-2 in tne homogeneous finite difference equation and, consequently, encourages fluctuations to die out more quickly. For the values we have taken c = 0.7; b------ 0.1; d = 0.9, explosive fluctuations only arise when a > 0.44.

Let us look at another model. Abstracting from cycles of short or average duration, let us assume that the speed of capital accumulation, i.e. the share of gross investment in the final social product, is regulated by the equation:

-Kt_v (1---5),

(11.37)

Now let us set the rate of growth of production:

TT7==1+r-

In this case

(11.39) Let us note the ratio -^~---kt-r, i.e. equal to the initial

JL l---f

capital intensity. Consequently,

-^ = fe<-fc'-^76)-

(11-40)

Let us put kt in the following form:

where 1 + a is the speed of the change in capital intensity. We get

B< = ^(a+{±i).

(11.41)

With low annual growth, rates of production, we can take conditionally 1 + r « 1; in this case

nt(*(kt-*(a + r+&).

(11.42)

Consequently, the speed of accumulation depends on the change in capital intensity (a), the rate of growth of production (r) and the rate of replacement of fixed capital (6). If we assume that capital intensity does not change (a = 0), then the speed of accumulation is determined in the following way:

nt=k(r + 8).

(11.43)

25*

where It is gross investment in period t,

kt is the coefficient of capital intensity, Yt is the final product in period t,

380

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

381

With a decrease in capital intensity (a < 0), the speed of accumulation of fixed capital decreases (if, of course, no significant increase in the replacement rate takes place). Consequently, in order that, with production expanding at a constant rate, the speed of accumulation should not decrease, the systematic fall in k must be counteracted by a constant increase in 8, never smaller in value.

Let us proceed from the static to the dynamic model. The rate of growth of production is usually a lagged function of the speed of accumulation while the intensity of renewal of capital changes with an even greater lag (as compared with the change in capital intensity). Thus, using the linear function, we can write:

0.

(11-44)

(11.45)

A change in capital intensity influences, with some, relatively small lag, the profitability of introducing new types of equipment. The new level of profitability means a change, with an additional lag, in the speed at which equipment is replaced and a change in the rate of research and development (due to the working of the competition mechanism). Finally, the scale of research and development has a negative, effect on capital intensity and a positive effect on profitability.

This mechanism, written in the form of linear equations, looks as follows:

at=-bRDt.1,

(11.48)

RDt=---cdt,

(11.49)

Pt=-gat-i + hRDt-!,

(11-50)

6* = fcp(-i,

(11-51)

where RD is the rate of research and development,

p is the profitability of using new types of equipment.

Reducing the system, we get:

nt---nt-i (bkt-i) = kt-i (a,t + 8t).

(11.46)

The general solution of this finite difference equation can be written in the following way:

CAPITAL INTENSITY

C~} LAG ^

PROFITABILITY OF NEW TYPES OF EQUIPMENT

^

«t =

(11-47)

where nt represents the equilibrium value of »,|? A a is the initial condition

The dynamics of the velocity of accumulation are determined by the value of bkt^. If this magnitude is less than unity, the velocity of accumulation will constantly tend towards its equilibrium value, determined by the second term of (11.47).

If £>&(-! > 1, then the velocity of accumulation will increase, diverging from the equilibrium level. Since b is a constant, everything depends on the sizes of kt-i, i.e., in the final analysis, on at. These magnitudes, along with 8;, determine changes in the equilibrium level of the velocity of capital accumulation.

The combined influence of the series of factors determining capital intensity and the speed at which equipment is replaced is illustrated in Fig. 7-5.

390-11.jpg 390-12.jpg 390-13.jpg

RATE OF RESEARCH

AND DEVELOPMENT

SPEED

OF RENEWAL OF EQUIPMENT

Fig. 7-5. Factors determining capital intensity and speed of equipment renewal (arrows show the direction of the influence of factors; sign on the arrow indicates whether the influence is positive or negative)

382

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

383

Solving the system for a, we get:

The lower the marginal rate of consumption (c), the lower the value of the multiplier and, under the given conditions, the lower the rate of growth of the economy. In the simple consumption function

C = a + cY

(11.58)

the marginal coefficient of consumption does not coincide with the average coefficient of consumption

c= £,

(11.59)

as there is a constant part of consumption (a), which does not depend on the level of incomes. If the marginal coefficient of consumption is less than the original ratio ^ j

a growth of incomes leads to a decrease in the average coefficient of consumption. With another form of the consumption function:

Ct = a + cYt+bt,

(11.60)

consumption, along with the income level, is also determined by the time trend, which shows changes in consumption, independent of incomes but under the influence of structural changes and, in particular, of new consumer goods. The introduction of new goods always calls forth an increase in demand, even if the level of incomes remains unchanged. This factor reduces the fall in consumption due to drops in income (during crises, for example).

The influence of other structural changes, apart from the introduction of new goods, can be both positive and negative. For example, long-run trends are observed in a decrease in the consumption of certain foodstuffs and a growth in the consumption of other commodities.

Let us assume that the model takes into account private consumption as a whole and that the marginal coefficient of consumption is equal to the original ratio of consumption to income. Then, the introduction of new goods will increase the average coefficient of consumption.

In this case, the aggregate demand function will have the following form:

i . hk

T---ccj + -=---i be ' 6

•t-z+gka,t_3=Q.

(11.52)

For simplicity, let us assume that the coefficients of the interconnection between all the factors are equal to unity. Since we are talking of relative values, this means that a change in the rate of increase of one factor means an analogous change in the rate of growth of another factor. Then the equation of the system takes the following form:

a< + a/-2 + a*_s = 0.

'

(11.53)

The characteristic equation has roots:

Periodic fluctuations are inherent in the system.

Combining the model for the movement of capital intensity with the equations regulating the velocity of accumulation, we can get a general model, in which periodic changes in the velocity of capital accumulation are very likely and, consequently, also of the average rate of growth of the economy.

If such fluctuations also exist in reality, then their period must significantly exceed the usual duration of the economic cycle, since, in this case, lags are of at least a few years, and in some cases even exceed 10 years.

Let us proceed to the effect of technical changes in the sphere of private consumption.

Let us look at the simple model of the multiplier.

Y = C+I + A,

(11.54)

I + A = (I + A)(t),

(11.55)

C = cF,

(11.56)

Y=(I+A){t}TLr.

(11.57)

It follows from this model that, with a given increase in investment and government purchases, the rate of growth of the economy will be determined by the marginal rate of consumption, or, more exactly, by the following multiplier

M,---------*

r 1---c

v

J----

(11.61)

1---c

i---c

384

S. MENSHIKOV

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

385

Then a steady increase of social demand will take place, which per unit of time is equal to b/(i---c). The higher the autonomous growth of consumption, the greater the additional growth of social demand. This has no effect on the rate of either savings or investment if, of course, the economy is functioning within the limits of its production potential. The increase of social demand per unit of time is determined by the formula

Un is the unemployment rate. Calculations with this function help us to understand why the motor industry is subject to particularly sharp fluctuations connected to the economic cycle. In particular, it follows from this that, even if we abstract from the influence of consumer-held stocks of cars, demand in times of crises must fall to a greater degree than incomes, as a result of the negative effect of the growth of unemployment.

All other conditions being equal, the fluctuation of demand for consumer durables is greater than for other consumer goods, the fluctuation of demand for cars being particularly large. This is confirmed by data on postwar cycles and especially by the picture of the actual development of cycles in the USA.

It is not difficult to notice a certain resemblance between the demand function for consumer durables and the investment function.

Let us consider the following model:

``'

i-c

'', .

(H.62)

and the growth of private consumption by

(11.63)

1

The demand function for consumer durables can be written in the following form:

Cn^a + cYt + bt-dKp^,

(11.64)

where CD is the consumption of consumer durables and KD is the consumers' accumulated stock of commodities.

As a rule, KD grows steadily (although some worn and obsolete goods are discarded every year). As KD grows, so must its negative influence on current purchases of these goods. Abstracting from the time trend (reflecting, for example, the effect of the introduction of new commodities), CD will decrease in all cases when cYt < dK^^. In other words, overproduction of consumer durables is possible even with a slowing down of the growth of Y and not only with an absolute decrease in its magnitude. The beginning of a crisis in this sphere might outstrip the general decrease of production and incomes. This, in fact, has taken place in a number of capitalist countries, and particularly in the USA, since the last war.

The demand function for passenger cars is often written in empirical studies in the following form:

(11.65)

Ct =

(11.66) (11.67)

(11.68) (11.69)

(11.70) (11.71)

= A{t},

where KD is the stock of consumer durables held by the population; CND is purchases of nondurable consumer goods. In this model, government consumption and investment are taken to be autonomous (their sum is equal to A). In other words, we are abstracting from induced ( dependent) investment which determines the fluctuating movement in ordinary cycle models. Let us write the reduced equation of this model:

where CA is purchases of cars,

KA is the consumers' stock of cars,

where c = c1-f-c2.

(11.72)

386

S. MENSHIKOV '

ECONOMETRIC MODELS OF ECONOMIC CYCLES

387

Fluctuations are unavoidable if (i -\- c---d)z < <C 4 (c---Cjd). This condition is satisfied with sufficiently high values of d and relatively small values of c^. In other words, fluctuations arise if consumer durables play a sufficiently important role. However, this condition is, in fact, not all that strict. For example, if c---cl + c2 = 0.8, fluctuations arise for any values of cl > 0.7, when d is considerably above zero.

Fluctuations produced by the given model are always damped since, in the expression

c---Cid,

which determines the character of fluctuations, all the elements are positive and less than unity. Since c < 1, then also the difference c---cx < 1.

Having looked at theoretical models of the economic cycle, we come to the following conclusions:

1. There is in existence a wide range of one-product and multi-sector models, constructed on the basis of a Marxist theoretical analysis of cycles and crises. The advantage of these models, using the propositions of Marxist political economy, lies, above all, in the fact that they take into account the class antagonisms within capitalist society, the stochastic character of its economic lawsj and the contradictions of capitalist reproduction.

2. Theoretical models of the cycle allow a clear exposition of the interrelationships between the elements of the cycle mechanism and also of actual changes in this mechanism in the last few decades.

On the basis of our analysis, of most significance are:

---the growth of government purchases and government investment, the volume of which is not directly connected with cyclical fluctuations;

---the growth of government transfer payments and their influence on the dynamics of the private incomes of the population;

---the increase in autonomous private investment and autonomous private consumption as a result of the scientific and technological revolution and structural changes caused by it;

---countercyclical changes in the mechanism of price formation under the influence of inflationary processes.

3. Study of theoretical models shows the relatively narrow limits and the contradictions of government countercyclical regulation. It is proved mathematically that a growth of government demand leads to an increase of the entire social demand. However, under certain conditions, the same measure entails a strengthening of inflationary processes and promotes balance of payments disequilibrium, i.e. aggravation of contradictions in the monetary sphere.

4. Theoretical analysis of the cycle with the help of econometric methods is still at an early stage of development, its possibilities are far from fully exploited. Among the most promising directions of research are: econometric analysis of the mechanism of monopolistic regulation of the market and of competition between large corporations; analysis of ways in which cyclical fluctuations are transferred from country to country and of the world cycle as a result of the cumulation and mutual influence of cycles in separate countries; analysis of the interconnections between reproduction, balance of payments, money-credit and monetaryfinancial spheres. Contemporary progress in econometrics and the use of computers allows hope for a speedy solution of these and other problems of cycle analysis.

CONCLUSION

389

CONCLUSION

has been relatively small. The economic, socio-class and international-political contradictions of capitalism render such attempts at regulation rather ineffective. The greatest influence on the cycle was exerted by the almost uninterrupted absolute growth of government expenditures, particularly government purchases (military and civil), and the signiiicant increase in their share of the final social product.

3. The organic union of science and production and the acceleration of technical progress brought about considerable changes in the process of investment, thereby affecting the main material basis of the economic cycle---the movement of fixed capital. The acceleration of the obsolescence of equipment and the quick renewal of the assortment of commodities, both for production and consumption, promoted a more systematic growth of social demand on account of autonomous private purchases, which play an important role in the formation of the final demand of society.

4. The direct influence of the class struggle on reproduction grew in strength. A particularly important role was played by such achievements of the working class as the conclusion of collective agreements envisaging a systematic growth of money wages and extension of the system of social insurance payments. These achievements also facilitated a more stable growth of aggregate monetary demand.

5. Along with a certain decrease in the amplitude of the cycle and the increase in its international asynchronism, a transference of the centre of gravity of contradictions within the capitalist system took place into the realm of chronic stagnant phenomena, confusion of money circulation (inflation), aggravation of the monetary-financial crises and an increase in interimperialist rivalry. This was brought about by a strengthening of monopolistic control of markets and the practice of monopolistic price formation; by a growth of militarisation of the economy and its fatal consequences; by the negative social and economic consequences of the monopolisation of the fruits of scientific and technical progress by big business; by the failure of the gold standard and a general transition to paper money circulation; by increasing unevenness of the economic development of capitalist countries and regions. In an attempt to escape these contradictions, the bourgeois state often resorts to special

We have been looking at the basic problems of the contemporary cycle of the capitalist economy.

It has been established that in all major capitalist countries (the USA, West European countries, Japan) the cyclical character of reproduction is still extant. Overproduction crises recur more or less strictly periodically (every 8 to 10 years, sometimes even 4 to 5 years) and are seen in a cut-back or stagnation of material (above all, industrial) production. The world cycle still exists, with interlacing of the cycles of individual countries.

In the last few decades, beginning with the 1940s, a certain decrease in the amplitude of the cycle is observed, particularly in the size of falls in production during crisis phases. There has also been some increase in the asynchronism of the world cycle.

Changes in the picture of the flow of the cycle and crises were the result of long-term shifts in the capitalist economy:

\. Monopolisation of the economy as a whole was strengthened and also of individual branches, commodity markets and loan capital. As a result of this, deep changes in the mechanism of overproduction of goods and of productive and money capital took place, with a direct influence on the character of the cycle.

2. The economic role of the state increased. There was a transition from sporadic acts of intervention in the economy to systematic, deliberate attempts at countercyclical and long-term structural regulation. However, the effectiveness of countercyclical measures taken up to the present day

390

S. MENSHIKOV

measures to accelerate the outbreak of crises, to reduce the consumption demand of the population, to control the growth of production and to cut-back on employment.

In this way, a change in the mechanism of the economic cycle not only does not mean a weakening of the contradictions of capitalist reproduction and reflects a change in the way they manifest themselves under the conditions of developed state-monopoly capitalism, but also facilitates a sharp aggravation of the economic, social-class and international contradictions of the capitalist system, including those which were previously in a comparatively undeveloped condition. All this allows one to look anew at the role of the sphere of reproduction in the historic competition between the two contemporary socio-political systems, spotlighting the advantages of socialism over capitalism.

REQUEST TO READERS

Progress Publishers would be glad to have your opinion of this book, its translation and design and any suggestions you may have for future publications.

Please send all your comments to 21, Zubovsky Boulevard, Moscow, USSR.

Professor S. Menshikov, Dr. Sc. (Economics), well known for his studies of problems of the capitalist economy, examines in the present monograph the main changes in crises and the cycle under contemporary state-monopoly capitalism. He analyses the constant causes of these changes: the growth of the world socialist system; disintegration of imperialism's colonial system; deepening inter-imperialist rivalry; greater monopolisation of the capitalist economy; bigger role of the bourgeois state and militarisation; the scientific and technological revolution; the class struggle in capitalist society. Considerable space is devoted to a critique of the latest bourgeois economic theories, and a special chapter deals with econometric models of the cycle.

m

n

390-14.jpg

o

ft"

•• ^J

tfl

I

ft

3

M

390-15.jpg

S. MENSHIKOV

The Economic Cy Postwar Develop

390-16.jpg

gOWMtOMo

Ptam 312-787-9017